JP7344184B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that has a variable display and can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player.

In a pachinko game machine as a gaming machine, for example, after a normal jackpot occurs, the game is controlled to a normal gaming state, and the probability of a jackpot being determined is set to about 1/300, and a special drawing is executed. When a jackpot does not occur even when the number of games reaches 1000, the game state is controlled to a ceiling probability variable state, and the probability of determining a jackpot is increased to about 1/100. Furthermore, it is disclosed that when a 1000 game jackpot does not occur in the normal gaming state, a time saving state may be generated instead of the ceiling probability variable state (for example, see Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2005-95449

As with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room to improve interest in a gaming machine that can control the gaming state to a special state (time-saving state) based on the number of executions of variable display.

The present invention has been made with attention to such problems, and an object of the present invention is to improve the interest of a gaming machine that can control the gaming state to a special state based on the number of times variable display is executed.

The gaming machine according to claim 1,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
Including a specific variable display pattern in which a specific reach effect is executed after the variable display mode becomes a reach mode,
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled when the variable display of
The effect execution means is configured to perform a first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determination means, and to control the effect to be more advantageous than when the first suggestion effect is executed. A plurality of types of the above-mentioned suggestion effects including a second suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high rate of occurrence can be executed before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode,
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B") The execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss) and lower than the execution rate of "movable object notice" per variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). Figure 11 -50 reference),
The effect executing means is configured to perform a specific effect to notify that the variable display will be controlled to the advantageous state when it has been determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a specific effect that is executed after the specific effect. It is possible to perform a post-production that notifies gaming value information (for example, the expected number of balls to be played) that can specify the magnitude of the gaming value to be given in an advantageous state,
The presentation mode of the post-previous effect is common between the case where the post-previous effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-previous effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP Regarding the production mode of "post-production" that notifies the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state where it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled in the reach production, as shown in Figure 11-60, "time saving state"B","Probable variable state", and "Time saving state A" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times it is suggested that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state is taken into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the second special state is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.
Other gaming machines are
A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
determining means capable of determining control to the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means;
a specific performance that notifies that control will be performed in the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means; and a specific performance that is executed after the specific performance and is given in the advantageous state. A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a post-performance that notifies gaming value information that can specify the magnitude of the gaming value;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled on the condition that variable display has been performed a predetermined number of times. and a third special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined and smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state,
The presentation mode of the post-previous effect is when the post-previous effect is executed in the first special state, when the post-previous effect is executed in the second special state, and when the post-previous effect is executed in the third special state. This is common to cases where post-article production is executed.
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that has been controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, which increases the speed at which the variable display is digested. Since the third special state can be enlivened with a common performance, a suitable second special state can be provided.

Note that the present invention may have only the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention, or may have configurations other than the matters specifying the invention together with the matters specifying the invention described in the claims of the present invention. It may be something.

It is a front view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine in this embodiment. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of timer interrupt processing for game control. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. It is a diagram showing the numerical range of the jackpot and the numerical range of the loss with the time saving in the variable display of the first special figure in the normal state or the time saving state. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a front view showing the pachinko game machine in characteristic part 069SG. It is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in the pachinko gaming machine in the characteristic part 069SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table, (C1) and (C2) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table, and (D) is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot type determination table. is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining the number of time reductions for each transition opportunity. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table. It is a diagram illustrating a production control command. It is a flowchart showing an example of game control main processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol stop processing. FIG. 3 is a state transition diagram for explaining state transition. It is an explanatory diagram for explaining play time (relief time reduction). It is an explanatory view for explaining play time (relief time saving) similarly. It is an explanatory view for explaining play time (relief time saving) similarly. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to battle rush, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a presentation mode related to play time. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode related to Extreme/Battle Rush. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a variable display number display and a special display number display. It is a time chart showing the execution timing of the effect regarding the case where the relief time is shortened after the RAM is cleared. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of an effect mode regarding a case where relief time is shortened after RAM is cleared. (A) is a time chart showing the execution timing of the performance in the case where the relief time is shortened by 900 variable displays after hitting the jackpot, and (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time-saving rush performance B. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a performance mode regarding a case where relief time is shortened by variable display 900 times after hitting a jackpot. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance operation when the number of pending memories is 0 when the rescue time shortening is reached. It is an explanatory diagram showing an example of performance operation when the number of pending memories is 1 or more when the rescue time shortening is reached. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a production mode regarding a customer waiting screen. It is a figure which shows the example of a production|presentation operation regarding transition to a customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG modification 1. It is a figure which shows the modification of the example of performance operation regarding a transition to a customer waiting screen as the characteristic part 069SG modification 1. It is a flowchart showing game control timer interrupt processing as a second modification of the characteristic part 069SG. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modification example 2. It is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop processing as the characteristic part 069SG modification example 2. 12 is a flowchart illustrating display processing as a second modification of the characteristic section 069SG. It is a figure which shows the characteristic part 069SG modification example 3. It is a diagram for explaining the contents of various performances. It is a figure which shows the example of performance operation of a countdown notice. Similarly, it is a diagram showing an example of a performance operation of a countdown notice. It is a figure which shows the example of performance operation of a pending change notice. It is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of symbol chance eye preview. It is a figure which shows the example of production operation of an effect display notice. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing advance preview performance pattern determination tables. 3 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production processing during variable display. (A) is a diagram showing a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) are diagrams showing button preview performance pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character preview pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body motion pattern determination tables. (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body notice pattern determination tables. (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining various operation examples for each game state. (A) is a timing chart showing the variable display mode of symbols in the probability variable state, the shortening shortening non-reach variation pattern in time saving state A, and (B) in the shortening shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern in time saving state B. This is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach in the probability variable state and time saving state A, and the deviation variation pattern. This is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach in the probability variable state and time saving state A, and the deviation variation pattern. The shortened non-reach in the time saving state B is an example of the performance operation of the deviation variation pattern. This is an example of the performance operation of SP reach E and SP reach D. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of a non-reach variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the production operation example of a non-reach variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the performance operation example of a super reach variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the performance operation example of a super reach variation pattern. It is a figure which compares the performance operation example of a super reach variation pattern. (A) to (C) are timing charts showing examples of control operations in SP reaches E, C, and D. It is a diagram comparing super reach and non-reach. (A) to (C) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the rush introduction performance, and (D) is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the time-saving rush performance A. (A1) to (A4) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the variable entry performance, and (B1) to (B4) are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the time saving entry performance B. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a part of variable display start setting processing as the second embodiment in the characteristic section 069SG. It is a figure which shows the variable display performance pattern determination table. This is an example of the performance operation of SP reach D. It is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each game state. In the feature section 099SG, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing each random number, (B1) and (B2) are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table, and (C) is an explanatory diagram of jackpot types. (A) and (B) are explanatory diagrams showing the normal symbol hit determination table, (C) is an explanatory diagram of the variable display time of the normal symbol, and (D) is the second starting winning opening when the normal symbol is hit. It is an explanatory diagram of opening time. It is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern according to a variable display result. It is an explanatory diagram of a data holding area for game control. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a normal state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a variable probability state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a variable probability state. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving state A. FIG. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving state A. FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving state B; FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of a fluctuation pattern determination table in time saving state B; It is an explanatory diagram of the winning probability to the starting winning hole and the winning interval. It is an explanatory diagram of period values α, β, and γ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values α', β', and γ'. It is an explanatory diagram of period values δ, ε, and ζ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values δ', ε', and ζ'. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values η, θ, and ι. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values η', θ', and ι'. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ, λ, and μ. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values κ', λ', and μ'. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν, ξ, and π. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of period values ν', ξ', and π'. It is an explanatory diagram of each period value. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the actual firing value for 10 hours of the pachinko gaming machine, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the design value of the pachinko gaming machine. It is an explanatory diagram of calculation of average fluctuation time in a normal state. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of average fluctuation time in time saving state A. FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram of calculation of average fluctuation time in time saving state B; It is an explanatory diagram of calculation of average fluctuation time in a probability variable state. It is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state. It is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state with the number of second special symbols held in memory being 3. B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, with the number of second special symbols being held and stored being 3. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state with the number of second special symbols held in memory being 2, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state with the number of second special symbols being held and stored as two. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol being 1, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state, with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol being 1. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 110 times in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol being 0, B) is an explanatory diagram of the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display is executed 1100 times in the time-saving state A, the time-saving state B, and the variable probability state, with the number of reserved memories of the second special symbol being 0. It is an explanatory diagram of each period value. It is an explanatory diagram of each period value. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 018SG. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. It is a diagram showing the execution period of various performances in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. It is a figure which shows the execution period of various performances in the outlier fluctuation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various performances, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types. (A) is a diagram showing how characters are displayed in SP reach effects A to E, (B) is a diagram showing LED lighting patterns in SP reach effects A to E, and (C) is BGM in SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an output pattern of sounds and sound effects. (A) is a diagram showing an example of each light emission pattern, and (B) is a diagram showing an example of each sound pattern. It is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach performances A to E. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance operation from the start of variable display of SP reach α, β, and γ until it develops into SP reach performance. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation of SP reach performance A. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation of SP reach performance B and C. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation of SP reach performance D and E. It is a figure which shows the example of performance operation of a win/fail button performance. It is a figure showing an example of performance operation of a movable body performance. It is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of jackpot notification of SP reach performances A to E. It is a diagram illustrating an example of performance operation for notification of a loss of SP reach performances A to E. It is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of post-performance performance A. It is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of post-performance B. It is a diagram showing an example of performance operation of post-performance B. (A) is a diagram showing an SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table A, (B) is a diagram showing an SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table B, and (C) is a diagram showing an SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table C. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting frame LEDs in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. FIG. 6 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting a frame LED in a flash rainbow lighting pattern;

DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS A mode for implementing a gaming machine according to the present invention will be explained below based on the drawings.

(Characteristic part 069SG form)
(SG2020-069) The gaming machine of form 1-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is determined in the first special state. The number of possible variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" (e.g. 2) is smaller than the number of possible variable display patterns (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the number of losing variation patterns (for example, 2) is a portion smaller than the number of variable display patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in “state A” and smaller than the number (e.g., 4) of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in “probable variable state”),
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is determined by the first shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the variable display period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in "time saving state B" by the CPU 103 is The average time (e.g., about 2.2 seconds) is shorter than the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) of the variable display time of the outlier variation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and the average time (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) is A portion shorter than the average time (for example, about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern to be determined (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that has been controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the speed of digesting the variable display is higher than in other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns displayed in decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C),
The start order of the variable display of the decoration identification information in each column is such that the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information is in a specific manner in the variable display in which control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display where control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the second special state, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common when non-specific display results are displayed, but
The time it takes for the variable display speed of the decoration identification information of each column that started variable display to reach the maximum speed is the time required for the variable display speed of the decorative identification information of each column to reach the maximum speed. Decorative identification when the mode of variable display of identification information is not a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed, and when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state. The mode of variable display of information is different from the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without a specific mode (for example, the start order of the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is variable). The state is common to the case where the non-reach variable pattern is in the time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach variable pattern is the non-reach variable pattern in the time-saving state B, but the decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are the highest. The time required to reach the speed is shorter in time-saving state B than in variable variable state and time-saving state A (tb1 to tb2 < ta1 to ta3; see Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the first special state and the second special state have the same variable display start order of the decoration identification information in each column, the time required to reach the maximum speed is different, so that the state You can increase interest by giving a different impression each time.

The gaming machine of Form 1-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 1-1 or Form 1-2,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
The order in which the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is stopped is such that the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is in a specific manner in the variable display for which control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display where control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the second special state, the variable display mode of the decoration identification information does not become the specific mode. (For example, the order of stopping the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is different in the case where a non-specific display result is displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. If there is, the parts are stopped and displayed in the order of left → right → middle, and if the non-reach is a fluctuation pattern in time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same time (see Figure 11-51).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display stop order of the decoration identification information in each column is different between the first special state and the second special state, it is possible to give a different impression for each state and increase interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-3,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
The order in which the variable display of the decorative identification information in each column is stopped is such that the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information is in a specific manner in the variable display for which control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state. In the case where a non-specific display result is displayed without any change, and in the variable display where control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the second special state, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. This is common when non-specific display results are displayed.
Control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state for a period of time from when one decorative identification information is stopped and displayed in the plurality of columns until the next decoration identification information is stopped and displayed. In variable display, the mode of variable display of decoration identification information is not a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state. There is a difference between the case where the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode and a non-specific display result is displayed, and the case where a non-specific display result is displayed (for example, stopping the variable display of decorative patterns in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C) The order is the same for the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and time saving state A, and the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the time saving state B, but among the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C. The time from when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the first decorative pattern display area to when the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is different from when the non-reach variable pattern is in the variable probability state and time-saving state A, and when it is in the time-saving state B. Non-reach may be different depending on the case where it is a deviation fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the time from when one decoration identification information is stopped and displayed until the next decoration identification information is stopped and displayed is different between the first special state and the second special state, so that It can give a different impression and increase interest.

The gaming machine of Form 1-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-4,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
Equipped with an output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decorative identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
The number of outputs of the stop sound in the first variable display is such that the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information does not become a specific mode in the variable display in which control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state. when a non-specific display result is displayed, and when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. (For example, the number of outputs of the symbol stop sound in the variable display of 1 is different from the case where the non-specific display result is displayed. If the non-reach is a variable pattern in the variable probability state and time saving state A, The right side is stopped and displayed at different timings, so it is displayed three times, and if the non-reach is a variable pattern in time saving state B, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is displayed once. 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and the number of outputs of the stop sound is different between the first special state and the second special state, giving a different impression for each state. You can increase your interest.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-5,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
Equipped with an output means capable of outputting a stop sound when the decorative identification information of each column is stopped and displayed,
The number of outputs of the stop sound in the first variable display is such that the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information does not become a specific mode in the variable display in which control to the advantageous state is not determined by the determining means in the first special state. when a non-specific display result is displayed, and when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state, the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information does not become the specific mode. (For example, the number of outputs of the symbol stop sound in variable display 1 is the same when a non-specific display result is displayed and when the non-reach is a variable pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and in the time-saving state. In B, the non-reach may be the same as the case where the non-reach is a fluctuation pattern),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the stop sound can draw attention to the stop of the decoration identification information, and the number of outputs of the stop sound can be made common between the first special state and the second special state, thereby reducing development costs. be able to.

The gaming machine of Form 1-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-6,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
Stopping the decorative identification information when the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state and the variable display mode of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode but a variable display that displays a non-specific display result. comprising a display means capable of displaying a specific action that causes the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when displayed;
When the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state, the specific action display is executed, and when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state, the specific action display is not executed (for example, In the probability change state and time saving state A, if the non-reach is a variation pattern, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed, whereas in the time saving state B, if the non-reach is a variation pattern, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed. (see Figures 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while the presentation effect is enhanced by displaying a specific action in the first special state, smooth variable display can be realized by not performing the display of a specific action in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-7,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
When the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state and the mode of variable display of the decorative identification information is not a specific mode but a variable display that displays a non-specific display result, the decorative identification information is stopped. comprising display means capable of displaying a specific action that causes the decoration identification information to perform a specific action when displayed;
The display mode of the specific action display is common between the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the first special state and the case where the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the second special state (for example, The specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the time-saving state B. A part that enhances the production effect while making the specific action display mode common between variable probability state, time-saving state A and time-saving state B (see Figures 11-51 to 11-54),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, while enhancing the production effect by displaying the specific action, it is possible to reduce the development cost by making the mode of displaying the specific action common between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-8,
It is possible to synchronize and variably display decorative identification information (for example, a decorative pattern) and predetermined identification information (for example, a small pattern) different from the decorative identification information,
The period from when the identification information is stopped and displayed until the predetermined identification information is stopped and displayed is the period during which the decorative identification information is variablely displayed when the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. In the case where the mode is not a specific mode and is a variable display in which a non-specific display result is displayed, the decoration identification information is used when the determining means does not decide to control to the advantageous state in the first special state. It is shorter than when the variable display mode is a variable display in which a non-specific display result is displayed without changing to a specific mode (for example, the period from when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed until when a small pattern is stopped and displayed is , the case where the non-reach is an out-of-reach variation pattern in the time-saving state B is shorter than the case where the non-reach is an out-of-reach variation pattern in the definite variable state and the time-saving state A {t1 (ta6 to ta7)>t2 (tb3 to tb4)} (see Figure 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, smooth variable display can be realized in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-9,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
the minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 in the first special state until the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the next variable display, and the variable of 1 in the second special state. The minimum period from when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed until the variable display of the decoration identification information starts in the next variable display is the same (for example, when the variable display of 1 in the variable probability state and time saving state A The pattern confirmation period (ta7 to ta8) is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed until the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the next variable display, and when the decorative pattern is displayed in the variable display of 1 in time saving state B. The pattern confirmation period (tb4 to tb5), which is the minimum period from when is stopped and displayed until the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the next variable display, is a common part (see Figure 11-51),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by standardizing control that takes into account drawing processing until the decoration identification information is completely stopped and displayed.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-10,
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controllable to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the first special state when the variable display is not determined to be the same (for example, when the variable display result is "miss" The CPU 103 determines an error variation pattern that can be determined in "time saving state B" (for example, "non-reach A") and an error variation pattern that can be determined in "time saving state A" and "probable variable state" (for example, "non-reach A"). ) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-070) The gaming machine of form 2-1 is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is determined in the first special state. It is smaller than the number of possible variable display patterns and smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is "miss", the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" The number of determinable deviation variation patterns (e.g., 2) is smaller than the number of determinable variable display patterns (e.g., 3) in the "time saving state A", and the number of determinable deviation fluctuation patterns in the "probable variation state" less than the number of variation patterns (for example, 4),
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is determined by the first It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state and also shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, if the variable display result is "off") In this case, the average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the outlier variation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in "time saving state B" is the same as the variable display time of the outlier variation pattern determined in "time saving state A". (e.g., about 5.58 seconds) and also less than the average time (e.g., about 4.83 seconds) of the variable display time of the outlier variation pattern determined in the "probability variation state." -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display for which it is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state is Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, the speed of digesting the variable display is higher than in other states, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1,
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controllable to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display patterns that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state are common (for example, The CPU 103 selects an error variable display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in the time-saving state B and a variable error display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. Reach D) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 2-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 2-1 or Form 2-2,
A variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; and a variable display pattern that is controllable to the advantageous state by the determining means. The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in both the first special state and the third special state is common (for example, when the CPU 103 is in the time saving state). The deviation variation pattern that can be determined in B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) and the deviation variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability change state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) are common. some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 2-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-3,
The average period of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state; It is preferable that the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the average period of the control period is shorter in the second special state than in the third special state, the digestion speed of the variable display is increased, and a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Form 2-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-4,
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is determined in the first special state. The number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state is smaller than the number of possible variable display patterns, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the CPU 103 The number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in state B (e.g., 2) is smaller than the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (e.g., 3), and the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A The number of patterns (e.g., 3) is smaller than the number of outlier fluctuation patterns (e.g., 4) that can be determined in the variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of variable display patterns that can be determined is reduced and priority is given to digesting the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of variable display patterns that can be determined is increased. You can increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-071) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-11,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of variable jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time saving state B" (for example, 1) is " a portion smaller than the number of variable display patterns (for example, 2) that can be determined in the ``time saving state A'' and smaller than the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the ``probable variable state'' (for example, 3);
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is 1 shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot") The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is shorter than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and the average time determined in the "probable variable state" The part shorter than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the control is performed to an advantageous state without being provoked by mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-12,
The variable display that has been determined to be controlled to be in the advantageous state by the determining means includes a variable display part that performs variable display of identification information, and the magnitude of the gaming value that will be given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. a post performance part that notifies gaming value information that can be identified;
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the preceding article post-production part in the first special state and the execution period of the preceding article post-production part in the second special state are common (for example, the execution period of the preceding article post-production part in the time saving state A and the variable probability state While the variable display time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part in time saving state B, the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post production part in time saving state A and variable probability state is different. ) and the symbol confirmation time (15 seconds) of the post production part of time saving state B are common (see Figure 11-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the execution period of the post effect in the variable display determined to be controlled in an advantageous state common between the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-13,
It is possible to display identification information variably,
The variable display that has been determined to be controlled to be in the advantageous state by the determining means includes a variable display part that performs variable display of identification information, and the magnitude of the gaming value that will be given in the advantageous state after the end of the variable display part. a post performance part that notifies gaming value information that can be identified;
Display means capable of executing a specific action display that causes the identification information to perform a specific action when the identification information is stopped and displayed during the execution period of the variable display part in the variable display that has been determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means. Equipped with
The execution period of the variable display part in the first special state is different from the execution period of the variable display part in the second special state,
The execution period of the specific action display in the first special state and the execution period of the specific action display in the second special state are common (for example, the variable display of the variable display part of the time saving state A and the variable probability state While the time (50 seconds, 40 seconds) is different from the variable display time (25 seconds) of the variable display part of time saving state B, the display time of the jackpot specific operation display of time saving state A and probability variable state (ta3 to ta4) and the display time (ta3 to ta4) of the jackpot specific action display in time saving state B are common (see Figure 11-61),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the execution period of the specific action display in the variable display determined to be controlled in an advantageous state common between the first special state and the second special state. can.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-14,
a variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the first special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled is common (for example, the variable display result is a "jackpot"). In this case, a losing variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in the "time saving state B" (for example, "SP reach D") and a losing variation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in the "probable variable state" (for example, "SP reach D") are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-072) The gaming machine of Form 2-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-5,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is smaller (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 enters "time saving state B"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined (e.g. 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (e.g. 2), and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "probability variable state" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (e.g. 2) Less than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (for example, 3),
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state, and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, if the variable display result is "Jackpot") ”, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in “time saving state B” is the same as the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in “time saving state A”. The part that is shorter than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and also shorter than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability variation state". 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the number of types of variable display patterns is small, the development cost can be suppressed, and since the control is performed to an advantageous state without being provoked by mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-6,
a variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; The variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled is common ( For example, the CPU 103 can determine a jackpot variable display pattern (for example, SP reach D) that can be determined in time saving state B, and a jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, probability variable state). , SP reach D) and the common part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 2-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-7,
a variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; At least a portion of the variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in both the first special state and the third special state when the variable display is determined to be controlled is common ( For example, the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, not via SP) are common. some part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-9 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-8,
The average period of the control period controlled to the second special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the third special state, and the average period of the control period controlled to the third special state is shorter than the average period of the control period controlled to the first special state (for example, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state; (Part where the average time of the control period controlled by the state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled by the time saving state A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the average period of the control period is shorter in the second special state than in the third special state, the digestion speed of the variable display is increased, and a suitable second special state can be provided. In the first special state, the average period of the control period becomes longer, thereby increasing the interest of the game.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-9,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the first special state, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state. The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (for example, 2), and the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A. The number of fluctuation patterns (e.g., 2) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (e.g., 3) that can be determined in a variable probability state);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of variable display patterns that can be determined is reduced and priority is given to digesting the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of variable display patterns that can be determined is increased. You can increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-073) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-15,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed;
The variable display pattern determining means determines that when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the manner of the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific manner (for example, a reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E is off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a missed display result) and a variable display of the decorative identification information. It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being in a specific mode;
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means (for example, in the "time saving state B"). The percentage (for example, 97%) at which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach variation pattern" when the variable display result is "miss" is the same as when the variable display result is "miss" in "time saving state A". If the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach variation pattern" is higher than the percentage (for example, 95%) and the variable display result is "miss" in the "probability change state", the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach variation pattern". is determined (for example, 95%) (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not determined to control to an advantageous state. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be provoked by mischief, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 1-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-16,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
The period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information to the stop display of the decoration identification information in the second non-specific variable display pattern is longer than the period from the start of the variable display of the decoration identification information in the first non-specific variable display pattern. (For example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach variable pattern is shorter than the period from when the variable display mode becomes the specific mode (for example, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach variable pattern is A portion shorter than the period (tb0 to tb3) from the start until the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see Figure 11-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display ends in a shorter period than the period until the variable display mode changes to the specific mode, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-17,
It is possible to variably display multiple columns of decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
In the second non-specific variable display pattern, the period from when variable display of the decorative identification information in a predetermined column of the plurality of columns is started until the decorative identification information is stopped is longer than in the first non-specific variable display pattern. It is shorter than the period from when the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column starts until it is stopped and displayed (for example, in the non-reach variation pattern, when the variable display of the decorative symbol in the left decorative symbol display area 5L is started) The period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L starts to when they are stopped and displayed (tb0 to tb1) is longer than the period from when the variable display of decorative symbols in the left ornamental symbol display area 5L starts until the display is stopped in the super reach variation pattern. ~tb2) (see Figure 11-62),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the variable display of the decorative identification information in the predetermined column is completed in a short period of time, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-18,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common ( For example, a non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in time-saving state B, and a non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of time-saving state A and probability variable state. and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-074) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 1-10,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The variable display pattern determining means determines that when the variable display of the special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the manner of the variable display of the decorative identification information is a specific manner (for example, a reach mode). A first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to E is off") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information (for example, a missed display result) and a variable display of the decorative identification information. It is possible to determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach out") that displays the display result of the variable display of the special identification information without the display mode being in a specific mode;
The rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of special identification information is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined is higher than the rate at which the determination is made in the third special state. This is higher than the rate at which the second non-specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of variable display of special identification information that is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by means (for example, the variable display result in "time saving state B" The percentage (for example, 97%) at which the CPU 103 determines the "non-reach deviation variation pattern" when the variable display result is "off" in the "time saving state A" is " The CPU 103 determines the "non-reaching deviation variation pattern" when the variable display result is "missing" in the "probable variable state" and is higher than the percentage (for example, 95%) in which the "non-reaching deviation variation pattern" is determined. (e.g., 95%) (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the fact that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time, in the variable display in which it is not determined to control to an advantageous state. By setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is less likely to be provoked by mischief, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-12 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-11,
The variable display pattern determining means determines the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the second special state, and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The specific variable display pattern is common (for example, a non-reach variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B, and a non-reach variable pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state). non-reach is common with deviation fluctuation patterns (e.g., non-reach),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-13 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-12,
The second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state, and the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state. are common (for example, a non-reach deviation variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in time saving state B and a non-reach deviation variation pattern (e.g., non-reach) that can be determined in both time saving state A and probability variable state). Non-reach) and common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second non-specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-075) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-19,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed;
The variable display pattern determining means is configured to perform variable display of the special identification information that has been determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means, to display the special identification information after the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot") and the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information are not specific and are special. A second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information can be determined,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means (for example, the reach mode in the time saving state B). The percentage (for example, 90%) of the "SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode is determined by the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode" in time-saving state A. '' is higher than the percentage (for example, 5%) that is determined, and is also higher than the percentage (for example, 5%) that is determined for the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the variable probability state. (see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, the control is performed to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-20,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
A first specific operation display that causes the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the variable display mode becomes a specific mode, and a second specific operation display that causes the decoration identification information to perform a specific operation when the decoration identification information is stopped and displayed (for example, Equipped with a display means that can execute (symbol stop action display),
In the first specific variable display pattern, the display means executes the first specific action display and the second specific action display, but in the second specific variable display pattern, the display means executes the first specific action display. The action display is not executed and the second specific action display is executed (for example, in the variation pattern of SP reach E via reach, the reach specific action display and the jackpot specific action display are executed, but the reach In the variation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through, the reach specific action display is not executed and the jackpot specific action display is executed (see Figure 11-55),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the first specific action display is performed in the second special state, it is less likely to be provoked by mischief, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-21,
The second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in the first special state are common (for example, A non-reach deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B; a non-reach deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state; is the common part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-076) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-14 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-13,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed; and the advantageous state that is controlled from the first special state or the second special state. a third special state (for example, a definite variable state) that is controlled when the
The variable display pattern determining means is configured to perform variable display of the special identification information that has been determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means, to display the special identification information after the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information becomes a specific mode. The first specific variable display pattern that displays the display result of the variable display of the identification information (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot") and the mode of the variable display of the decorative identification information are not specific and are special. A second specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via A", etc.) for displaying the display result of the variable display of the identification information can be determined,
The rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the case of variable display of the special identification information determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the second special state is determined by the first special state. is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display of the special identification information is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, and the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined in the third special state. This is higher than the rate at which the second specific variable display pattern is determined when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the means (for example, in the time saving state B, "SP reach D" which does not go through the reach mode The percentage (for example, 90%) in which the jackpot fluctuation pattern (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance) is determined is the percentage (for example, 90%) in which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through reach mode in time saving state A is determined ( (For example, 5%) and higher than the percentage (for example, 5%) in which the "SP non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern" that does not go through the reach mode in the variable probability state is determined (see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that has been controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, by setting the variable display mode to a specific mode, it is controlled to an advantageous state without being unnecessarily provoked, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-14,
the second specific variable display pattern that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state; and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The display patterns are common (for example, a non-reach jackpot variation pattern (for example, non-SP) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B, and a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability-variable state. Reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, not via SP),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 2-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-15,
the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state; and the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined in both the first special state and the third special state; are common (for example, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in time-saving state B (e.g., non-SP) and a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability-variable state (for example, SP non-via) and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-077) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-22,
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the first starting condition being met (for example, the game ball enters the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is being met. The second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) is displayed variably based on what the player has done (e.g., the game ball enters the second starting prize opening), and the advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the CPU 103 controls the fluctuation efficiency of the normal state and special symbols (especially the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory;
a second holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as a holding memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the control is in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The variable display pattern determining means is configured such that in the first special state and the second special state, no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means, and the determining means is capable of controlling to the advantageous state. In the case of a variable display that is not determined, it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that allows the second reservation storage means to store the reservation memory,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state, and is capable of executing the suggestive effect in the variable display when the variable display is performed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state; When a variable display is executed in a pattern, the above-mentioned suggestion effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, the variable display is executed in a deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "time saving state A") and when a variable display is executed in the error variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "probability variation state", "movable object notice", "character notice", etc. are displayed in the variable display. While executing the suggestion effect, when the variable display is executed in the error variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", the "movable object notice" or The part that does not carry out suggestive effects such as "character preview" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in consideration of the fact that in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which the control was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestive effect is used. Since the second special state is not provoked unnecessarily, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-23,
In the second special state, if the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the decision means, the suggestive effect is not executed by the effect execution means, and the control is controlled to the advantageous state by the decision means. If it is a variable display that has been determined, the suggestive effect is executed by the effect execution means (for example, in time saving state B, if the variable pattern is off, a "movable object notice" or a "character notice" is executed. If the jackpot fluctuation pattern does not occur, a "movable body notice" or "character notice" may be executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-24,
It is possible to variably display decorative identification information (for example, decorative patterns),
The variable display pattern determining means includes a variable display pattern that displays the display result of the variable display after the mode of variable display of the decoration identification information becomes a specific mode,
The suggestion effect includes an incitement effect that incites whether or not the variable display mode will be a specific mode (for example, the suggestion effect that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state is such that the variable display mode is a reach mode). (May include "reach notice" or "button notice" as an inciting effect to incite whether reach will be achieved or not),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-25,
The performance execution means, based on the determination result of the determination means, a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestion performance is executed. (For example, based on the variable display result, it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion effects including the first suggestion effect (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and Also, the second suggestion performance that has a high rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state (for example, the part where it is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion performances including dialogue B and vibration (large)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the suggestive effect is executed.

(SG2020-078) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-16,
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the first starting condition being met (for example, the game ball enters the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is being met. The second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) is displayed variably based on what the player has done (e.g., the game ball enters the second starting prize opening), and the advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the CPU 103 controls the fluctuation efficiency of the normal state and special symbols (especially the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory;
a second holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as a holding memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "movable body notice" or a "character notice") capable of executing a production including a suggestive production suggesting that the control is in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The variable display pattern determining means is arranged such that in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state, no reservation memory is stored in the second reservation storage means, and the determining means determines that the advantageous Determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period in which a pending memory can be stored in the second pending storage means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled in a state. It is possible and
The effect execution means executes the variable display when the variable display is executed with the predetermined variable display pattern in the first special state and when the variable display is executed with the predetermined variable display pattern in the third special state. The suggestive effect can be executed in the display, and when the variable display is executed in the predetermined variable display pattern in the second special state, the suggestive effect is not executed in the variable display (for example, "time saving state A"). When a variable display is executed with a losing variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in , and when a variable display is executed with a losing variation pattern determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in a "probable variable state". When executed, a suggestive effect such as "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while a deviation variation pattern is determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "time saving state B". When a variable display is executed in the variable display, the portion of the variable display in which suggestive effects such as "movable body notice" and "character notice" are not executed (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in consideration of the fact that in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which the control was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the variable display of the predetermined variable display pattern, the suggestive effect is used. Since the second special state is not provoked unnecessarily, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-079) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-26,
Variable display of identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A suspension storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start-up winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information regarding the variable display of identification information as a reservation memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Information transmitting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information regarding games (for example, production control commands);
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, effect execution means (e.g. , a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-read preview performance),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The performance execution means selects one of the multiple types of advance notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "hold change notice", "symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice"). is decidable;
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the second special state can be determined in the first special state. (For example, the number of types of advance notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" (for example, 0) is smaller than the number of advance notice production patterns (for example, 0 pieces). If the variable display result is a failure in the ``time saving state A'', the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 (for example, 3) is smaller than the number (for example, 3), and the variable display result is a failure in the ``probability change state''. (a portion smaller than the number of types of pre-read notices (for example, 4) that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 in the case),
In the second special state, the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state. lower than the rate at which the prefetched preview effect is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled (for example, the execution rate of the prefetched preview when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" (for example, , 0%) is lower than the execution rate (for example, 30%) of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in the "time saving state A", and when the variable display result is wrong in the "probable variable state". (for example, 40%) (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state. Since the number of pre-read preview performance patterns is small, development costs can be suppressed, and since the pre-read preview performance is less likely to be provoked by mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-27,
As a pre-read notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the production execution means in the first special state and the second special state, a first pre-read notice performance pattern and a case where the first pre-read notice performance pattern is executed. There is also a second look-ahead preview performance pattern in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the first advance notice performance pattern is executed in the second special state is lower than the rate at which the first advance notice performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, in the time saving state A and the time saving state As a look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be executed in common by the performance control CPU 120 in B and definite change state, the first look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", "effect display notice") "blue" pattern), and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "symbol chance Notice", "Red" pattern of "Effect display notice"), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed in time saving state B (for example, 0%, see Figure 11-43 (D)) is , the percentage of execution of the first look-ahead preview performance pattern in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, a portion lower than 10%, see FIG. 11-43(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the second special state is less likely to be mischievously provoked by the first look-ahead preview performance, so it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-28,
As a pre-read notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the production execution means in the first special state and the second special state, a first pre-read notice performance pattern and a case where the first pre-read notice performance pattern is executed. There is also a second look-ahead preview performance pattern in which the rate of control to the advantageous state is high,
The rate at which the second prefetched preview performance pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second prefetched preview performance pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, in the time saving state A and the time saving state As a look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be executed in common by the performance control CPU 120 in B and definite change state, the first look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "holding change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", "effect display notice") "blue" pattern), and a second look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "symbol chance Notice", "Red" pattern of "Effect display notice"), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed in time saving state B (for example, 90%, see Figure 11-43 (D)) is , the percentage of execution of the second look-ahead preview performance pattern in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, a portion higher than 50 to 70%, see FIG. 11-43(C));
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the second pre-read preview effect is likely to be executed in the second special state, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-29,
The prefetched preview performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the first special state and the prefetched preview performance pattern that can be executed by the performance execution means in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A The look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the variable probability state and the look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B are common (for example, "symbol chance notice"). part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a prefetched notice performance pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

(SG2020-080) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 1-17,
Variable display of identification information (e.g., a decorative pattern) is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (e.g., winning of a game ball into a starting prize opening), and an advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game state). A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A suspension storage means (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the start-up winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) that can store information regarding the variable display of identification information as a reservation memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Information transmitting means (for example, CPU 103) capable of transmitting information regarding games (for example, production control commands);
Based on the information received from the information transmitting means, effect execution means (e.g. , a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a pre-read preview performance),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The performance execution means selects one of a plurality of types of advance notice performance patterns (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice"). is decidable;
When the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the second special state can be determined in the first special state. It is smaller than the number of advance notice performance patterns that can be determined in the third special state (for example, when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B", the number of advance notice performance patterns is The number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the CPU 120 (for example, 0) is the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 (for example, 3 2) and less than the number of types of pre-read notices (for example, 4) that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is wrong in the "probable variable state"),
In the second special state, the rate at which the pre-read preview performance is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means in the first special state is determined by the determination means to control the advantageous state in the first special state. The variable display is lower than the rate at which the prefetched notice performance is executed when the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means in the third special state. (For example, when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B", the execution percentage of the prereading notice (e.g. 0%) is lower than the execution rate of the prefetching notice performance in "time saving state A"). is lower than the execution rate (e.g., 30%) of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in the "probable variable state", and the execution rate of the pre-read notice (e.g., 40%) when the variable display result is wrong in the "probable variable state". ) (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, in consideration of the long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state, the variable display is not determined to be controlled to an advantageous state. Since the number of advance notice performance patterns is small, development costs can be suppressed, and since the advance notice performance is less likely to be provoked by mischief, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Form 2-19 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-18,
the prefetched preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance execution means in the second special state; and the prefetched preview performance that can be determined by the performance execution means in at least one of the first special state and the third special state. The patterns are common (for example, a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B, and a pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in at least one of the time-saving state A and the variable probability state). The preview production pattern is common (for example, the "design chance notice" part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting a prefetched preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Form 2-20 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-19,
The prefetched preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance execution means in the second special state, and the prefetched preview performance pattern that can be determined by the performance execution means in both the first special state and the third special state. (For example, the pre-reading notice presentation pattern that can be determined by the presentation control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading notice presentation pattern that can be determined by the presentation control CPU 120 in both the time-saving state A and the variable probability state are common. There is (for example, the "design chance notice" part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by not setting the second specific variable display pattern that can be determined only in the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-20,
The number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the second special state is smaller than the number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the first special state, and The number of prefetched preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the first special state is smaller than the number of prefetched preview performance patterns that can be determined by the performance execution means in the third special state (for example, "time saving"). The number of types of pre-read notices (for example, 0) that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure in "Status B" is the number of types of advance notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 (for example, 0) when the variable display result is a failure in the "Time-saving state A". The number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure in the "probability change state" is smaller than the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the control CPU 120 (for example, 3). (for example, fewer than 4 pieces),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state, the number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined is reduced and priority is given to digesting the variable display, while in the third special state, the number of pre-read preview performance patterns that can be determined is increased. By doing so, you can increase the interest of the game.

(SG2020-081) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-30,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a motion promotion performance that encourages a player's actions (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The execution rate of the movement promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the movement promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, in "time saving state B"). The execution rate of button announcements per variable display in ``Time-saving state A'' (for example, 10% for jackpot, 5% for loss) is the same as the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in ``time saving state A'' (for example, for jackpot and 5%). 80%, 20% for a loss) and lower than the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a loss). Figure 11- 50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is prompted to make an action in the first variable display is taken into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the second special state is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-32 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-31,
In the second special state, when the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the rate at which the action promotion performance is executed by the performance execution means is determined by the determination means to be controlled to the advantageous state. This is higher than the rate at which the action promotion performance is executed by the performance execution means when the variable display is not determined to be controlled according to the state (for example, in the time saving state B, the performance control is performed when the variable display result is a jackpot) The proportion (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the production control CPU 120 is higher than the proportion (for example, 5%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the production control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a failure. high part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase interest by drawing attention to the fact that the movement promotion effect is executed in the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-33 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-32,
The motion promotion performance patterns that can be executed by the performance execution means include a first motion promotion performance pattern and a second motion promotion that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first movement promotion performance pattern is executed. There are performance patterns and
The rate at which the second movement promotion effect pattern is executed in the second special state is higher than the rate at which the second movement promotion effect pattern is executed in the first special state (for example, the rate at which the second movement promotion effect pattern is executed The patterns include a "one hit" pattern, and a "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern that has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state than when the "one hit" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "one hit" pattern is executed (e.g., 10%) is lower than the rate at which the "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern is executed (e.g., 40%) in the time-saving state A or the variable state, but The rate at which the "single hit" pattern is executed in B may be higher than the rate at which the "repeat hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, when the movement promotion performance is executed in the second special state, the second movement promotion performance pattern is often used, so that the interest can be improved.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-34 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-33,
The period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the first special state and the period in which the action promotion effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, in the time saving state A or the probability change state, the "button" The period in which the "notice" is executed is the same as the period in which the "button notice" is executed in time saving state B (for example, the period in which the "reach notice" is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by making the execution period of the movement promotion effect common between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-35 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-34,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a movement promotion preparation performance before executing the movement promotion performance,
The period during which the movement promotion preparation effect is executed in the first special state and the period during which the movement promotion preparation effect is executed in the second special state are common (for example, the effect control CPU 120 Before executing the "button notice", an operation promotion preparation effect (for example, although not particularly shown, before the operation validity period starts, an effect display or a fade-in effect of the push button 31B to be operated is displayed). In the case where a period in which the movement promotion preparation performance is executed in the time-saving state A or the variable probability state, and a period in which the movement promotion preparation performance is executed in the time-saving state B are common. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the motion promotion preparation effect common between the first special state and the second special state, it is possible to reduce development costs, and it is also possible to reduce the execution period of the motion promotion preparation effect. This can be appropriately notified.

(SG2020-082) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-21,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a motion promotion performance that encourages a player's actions (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The execution rate of the movement promotion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the movement promotion effect per one variable display in the first special state, and the execution rate of the movement promotion effect per one variable display in the third special state is lower. Lower than the execution rate of the action promotion effect per 1 variable display (for example, the execution rate of the button preview per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for a jackpot, 5% for a miss) is , is lower than the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 80% for jackpot, 20% for loss), and the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in "probable variable state" is lower. The part lower than the execution rate (for example, 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a loss; see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times the player is prompted to make an action in the first variable display is taken into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the second special state is small, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-083) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-36 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-35,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a "win/fail button performance") capable of executing a performance including a motion promotion performance that encourages the player to perform a motion, and a specific performance that notifies the player that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state. and a part that can perform "movable body production"),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
As a performance execution pattern of the action promotion performance and the specific performance that can be executed in one variable display, the performance execution means may include a first performance execution pattern (for example, " patterns A-2, A-3"), and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") in which the specific performance is executed without executing the movement promotion performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed by the determining means in the first special state higher than the rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control (for example, in the time saving state B, the "Movable body The percentage (for example, 90%) of performing the "immediate win performance" is when the "movable object performance" is executed without executing the "win/fail button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in time saving state A. higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing the "immediate winning effect" and executing the "movable object effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the probability variable state. The portion that is higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing "Immediate hit performance" or "Full rotation performance" (see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is determined to control to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to take action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-084) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-22,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means (for example, the performance control CPU 120 may execute a performance that includes a movement promotion performance that encourages the player to perform a movement and a specific performance that notifies the player that the player will be controlled to be in an advantageous state) (a part where you can execute "true/fail button production"),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
As a performance execution pattern of the action promotion performance and the specific performance that can be executed in one variable display, the performance execution means may include a first performance execution pattern (for example, " patterns A-2, A-3"), and a second performance execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") in which the specific performance is executed without executing the movement promotion performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed by the determining means in the first special state higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is executed. higher than the rate at which the performance execution pattern is executed (for example, in the time-saving state B, the execution of an "immediate hit performance" in which the "movable object performance" is executed without executing the "win/fail button performance" in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern) The proportion (for example, 90%) is higher than the proportion (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable body effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A, and The portion that is higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing the “movable object effect” without executing the “win/fail button effect” in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the probability variable state (see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is determined to control to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to take action when notified, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-085) The gaming machine according to Form 1-37 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-36,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a motion promotion performance that encourages a player's actions (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The types of action promotion performances that can be executed by the performance execution means include a first action promotion performance that prompts the player to make one action (for example, an operation promotion display for a "single blow" operation), and a first action promotion display that prompts the player to perform a predetermined action period. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for "repeat tap" or "long press" operation) that encourages action over a period of time.
The performance execution means is capable of executing both the first movement promotion performance and the second movement promotion performance in the first special state, and is capable of executing the first movement promotion performance in the second special state. On the other hand, the second action promotion performance is not executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 does not perform any of the "single hit pattern", "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "probability variable state" and "time saving state A"). A part where the execution can be determined, and in the “time saving state B”, the “single hit pattern” can be determined, but the execution of the “repeated hit pattern, long press pattern” is not determined (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the troublesome operation of operating for a predetermined operation period takes into consideration that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to do this, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-086) The gaming machine according to Form 2-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-23,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A motion detection means capable of detecting a player's motion (for example, performance control CPU 120, push sensor 35B);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a motion promotion performance that encourages a player's actions (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "button notice");
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The types of action promotion performances that can be executed by the performance execution means include a first action promotion performance that prompts the player to make one action (for example, an operation promotion display for a "single blow" operation), and a first action promotion display that prompts the player to perform a predetermined action period. There is a second action promotion effect (for example, an operation promotion display for "repeat tap" or "long press" operation) that encourages action over a period of time.
The performance execution means is capable of executing both the first movement promotion performance and the second movement promotion performance in the first special state and the third special state, and executes the first movement promotion performance in the second special state. While the promotion performance can be executed, the second action promotion performance is not executed (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can perform a "single hit pattern", "multiple hit pattern", "long press", etc. 11-50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the troublesome operation of operating for a predetermined operation period takes into consideration that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the player is less likely to be prompted to do this, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-087) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-38 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-37,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The effect execution means is configured to perform a first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determination means, and to control the effect to be more advantageous than when the first suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion performances, including a second suggestion production (for example, "vibration (large)") that has a high percentage of
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the "time saving state B" The execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% miss) is the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss) and lower than the execution rate of "movable object notice" per variable display in the "probability change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). Figure 11 -50 reference),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times it is suggested that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state is taken into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since this decreases, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-39 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-38,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. higher than the rate at which the suggestion effect is executed in the first special state when the variable display is a variable display that The percentage (e.g., 0%) is lower than the percentage (e.g., 90%) in which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state A or variable probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot, but if the variable display result is a jackpot, The rate at which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state B when it is a jackpot is higher than the rate at which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state A or variable probability state when the variable display result is a jackpot. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by making the degree of attention to the suggestive effect different between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-40 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-39,
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the second special state is controlled to the advantageous state by the determination means. is the determined variable display, the rate at which the first suggestion effect is executed in the first special state is higher (for example, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the "vibration (small)" ” pattern is executed (for example, 0%) is higher than the rate (for example, 30%) that the “vibration (small)” pattern is executed in time saving state A or probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot. However, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time-saving state B is lower than when the variable display result is a jackpot and the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time-saving state A or the probability variable state. ``small)'' portion that may be higher than the rate at which the pattern is executed (e.g., 30%);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, interest can be improved by making the degree of attention to the suggestive effect different between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-088) The gaming machine of Form 2-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-24,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
A performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can execute a “movable body notice”) that can execute a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the system will be controlled to the advantageous state;
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The effect execution means is configured to perform a first suggestion effect (for example, "vibration (small)") based on the determination result of the determination means, and to control the effect to be more advantageous than when the first suggestion effect is executed. It is possible to execute multiple types of suggestion performances including a second suggestion production (for example, "vibration (large)") with a high percentage of
The execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the first special state, and the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the third special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestion effect per one variable display in the first special state. Lower than the execution rate of the above-mentioned suggestion effect per variable display (for example, the execution rate of "movable object notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, jackpot 0%, miss 0%) is " It is lower than the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% loss), and the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "probable variable state" ” execution rate (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss; see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times it is suggested that the control will be controlled to an advantageous state is taken into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. Since the second special state is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-089) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-41 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-40,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an inciting performance that incites whether or not the mode of variable display of decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character preview" or a "reach notice" part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The execution rate of the inciting effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the inciting effect per one variable display in the first special state (for example, in the "time saving state B" The execution rate of "character preview" per one variable display (for example, jackpot 10%, miss 5%) is the same as the execution ratio of "character preview" per one variable display in "time saving state A" (for example, jackpot 80%). %, 20% loss), and lower than the execution rate of ``character preview'' per variable display in ``probable variable state'' (e.g. 80% jackpot, 30% loss). Also, ``time saving state B The execution rate of ``reach notice'' per variable display in '' (for example, 20%) is higher than the execution rate of ``reach notice'' per variable display in ``time saving state A'' (for example, 40%). In addition to being low, it is also lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "probable variable state" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is changed in consideration of the long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the second special state is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-090) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-25,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including an inciting performance that incites whether or not the mode of variable display of decoration identification information is set to a specific mode (for example, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a "character preview" or a "reach notice" part) and
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The execution rate of the inciting effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the inciting effect per one variable display in the first special state, and the execution rate of the inciting effect per one variable display in the third special state is lower. Lower than the execution rate of the above-mentioned inciting effect per variable display (for example, the execution rate of "character preview" per variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, jackpot 10%, loss 5%) is The execution rate of "character preview" per one variable display in "Status A" is lower (for example, 80% jackpot, 20% miss), and the execution rate of "character preview" per one variable display in "probable variable state" The proportion (e.g., 80% jackpot, 30% loss) is lower than the ratio (e.g., 20%) of "reach notice" per variable display in "time-saving state B" compared to "time-saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "reach notice" per variable display (e.g. 40%) in , and lower than the execution ratio of "reach notice" per variable display in "probable variable state" (e.g. 50%). (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of times whether or not to display the specific display is changed in consideration of the long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. Since the second special state is reduced, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-091) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-42 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-41,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
an operable movable body (for example, movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a movable body performance that causes the movable body to operate, and a specific performance that notifies that the movable body will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a “movable body notice”) (a part that can perform "movable body performance"),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
As a performance execution pattern of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed in one variable display, the performance execution means executes the movable body performance before the execution period of the specific performance, and executes the specific performance. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is also executed during the execution period, and a first effect execution pattern in which the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect; There is a second performance execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of a specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed by the determining means in the first special state higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control (for example, 90%) is higher than the execution rate of "pattern A-1" (for example, 10%) when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state A", and the variable display in "probable variable state" A portion higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of “Pattern A-1” when the result is a failure (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control to an advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period in which it is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time, Since the movable body is rarely moved inadvertently even before the specific performance, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-43 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-42,
control data used for controlling the movable body in the movable body performance when the decision means decides to control the movable body in the advantageous state in the first special state; The control data used to control the movable body in the movable body performance when it is decided to control the movable body in the advantageous state is common (for example, in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, The control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B in the "physical presentation" (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200), and the control data used in the "movable body presentation" in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state B. The control data used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) are common),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by sharing control data used for controlling the movable body in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-44 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-43,
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
control data used for controlling the light emitting means that causes light to emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; , control data used to control the light emitting means that causes the light emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body effect when the determining means determines to control the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the movable body LED 208 slightly frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000), and a movable body that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in time saving state B. control data used to control the LED 208 (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, development costs can be reduced by commonizing the control data used to control the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the movable object performance in the first special state and the second special state. .

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-45 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-44,
comprising display means capable of displaying an effect image for emphasizing the movable body,
an effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determining means determines to control the advantageous state in the first special state; The effect image displayed by the display means in conjunction with the movement of the movable body in the movable body performance when the decision means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is the same. (For example, the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state (the movable body effect image in FIG. 11-59 (D1) 069SG456) and an effect image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a jackpot in time saving state B (see movable body effect image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)). and are common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the effect image displayed in conjunction with the movable body effect common between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-46 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-45,
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
a vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state; The vibration mode executed by the vibration means in conjunction with the operation of the movable body in the movable body performance when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is the same. (For example, in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or variable probability state, the vibration mode is executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance", and in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B. The vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" is the same part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the movable body effect common between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-47 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-46,
The rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state is determined by higher than the rate at which the first performance execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control (for example, if the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the "pattern A-2, A- 3 (first performance execution pattern)" is executed (for example, 80 to 90%), when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state B, "pattern A-2, A-3 (first performance execution pattern)" is executed. execution pattern) is executed at a higher rate (e.g., 10%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the first special state, it is possible to improve interest by drawing attention to whether or not the movable body moves.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-48 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-47,
The execution frequency of the movable body performance in the second special state is lower than the execution frequency of the movable body performance in the first special state (for example, the execution frequency of the “movable body performance” in time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of "movable body production" in time saving state A and variable probability state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the movable body is less likely to be moved unnecessarily in the second special state, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-092) The gaming machine of Form 2-27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-15,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
an operable movable body (for example, movable body 32);
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a movable body performance that causes the movable body to operate, and a specific performance that notifies that the movable body will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, the performance control CPU 120 executes a “movable body notice”) (a part that can perform "movable body performance"),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
As a performance execution pattern of the movable body performance and the specific performance that can be executed in one variable display, the performance execution means executes the movable body performance before the execution period of the specific performance, and executes the specific performance. A first effect execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-2, A-3") in which the movable body effect is also executed during the execution period, and a first effect execution pattern in which the movable body effect is not executed before the execution period of the specific effect; There is a second performance execution pattern (for example, "pattern A-1") in which the movable body performance is executed during the execution period of a specific performance,
The rate at which the second performance execution pattern is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed by the determining means in the first special state higher than the rate at which the second effect execution pattern is executed when it is decided to control, and when it is determined by the determining means to control to the advantageous state in the third special state, the second effect execution pattern is executed. The execution rate of "pattern A-1" (for example, 90%) is higher than the execution rate of the performance execution pattern (for example, when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B"), is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a miss in "Probability Variable State", and is ” (for example, 20%) (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, when it is decided to control to an advantageous state in consideration of the fact that the period in which it is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time, Since the movable body is rarely moved inadvertently even before the specific performance, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-093) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-49 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-48,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
a specific performance that notifies that control will be performed in the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means; and a specific performance that is executed after the specific performance and is given in the advantageous state. A performance execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control is a "movable body performance" and “post-production” (the part that can be executed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of variable jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in "time saving state B" (for example, 1) is " a portion smaller than the number of variable display patterns (for example, 2) that can be determined in the ``time saving state A'' and smaller than the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the ``probable variable state'' (for example, 3);
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is 1 shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the special state (for example, the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in the "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "jackpot") The average time (for example, about 40 seconds) is shorter than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "time saving state A", and the average time determined in the "probable variable state" The part that is shorter than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (see Figure 11-50),
The presentation mode of the post-previous effect is common between the case where the post-previous effect is executed in the first special state and the case where the post-previous effect is executed in the second special state (for example, SP Regarding the production mode of "post-production" that notifies the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state where it is announced that the jackpot game state will be controlled in the reach production, as shown in Figure 11-60, "time saving state"B","Probable variable state", and "Time saving state A" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that has been controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. is common to the first special state after being notified that the variable display pattern is less in type and the average period of the variable display period is shorter, increasing the speed of variable display consumption and controlling to an advantageous state. Since it is possible to enliven the situation with the performance of , it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-50 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-49,
The specific performance is executed when the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the first special state, and the determining means determines to control to the advantageous state in the second special state. (For example, the "movable object effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state A or variable probability state, and the variable display effect in time saving state B) are common. This is the same part as the "movable object effect" that is executed when the display result is a jackpot (see Figure 11-59 (D1)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the specific effect common between the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-51 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-50,
Equipped with a light emitting means capable of emitting light,
Control data used to control the light emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the first special state, and control data used to control the light-emitting means to emit light in conjunction with the post-effect in the second special state. The control data is common (for example, the control data used to control the movable LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the "after effects" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that is linked to the "after effects" in the time saving state B). The control data used to control the movable LED 208 that emits light is common (for example, the light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by commonizing the control data used for controlling the light emitting means that emits light in conjunction with the post effects in the first special state and the second special state.

The gaming machine of Form 1-52 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-51,
Equipped with a vibration means capable of vibrating a predetermined part,
a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-post presentation in the first special state; a vibration mode performed by the vibration means in conjunction with the post-post presentation in the second special state; are common (for example, the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post performance" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the vibration mode performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post performance" in the time saving state B) The vibration mode to be performed is common (for example, the vibration control data part executed based on the extended command S300),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the development cost can be reduced by making the vibration mode executed in conjunction with the post performance common between the first special state and the second special state.

(SG2020-094) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-28 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-27,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
a specific performance that notifies that control will be performed in the advantageous state when the variable display is determined to be controlled in the advantageous state by the determining means; and a specific performance that is executed after the specific performance and is given in the advantageous state. A performance execution means (for example, the CPU 120 for performance control is a "movable body performance" and “post-production” (the part that can be executed),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the number of variable display patterns that the variable display pattern determining means can determine in the second special state is as follows: The number of variable display patterns that can be determined is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined, and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the third special state is smaller (for example, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 enters "time saving state B"). The number of variable display patterns that can be determined (e.g. 1) is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (e.g. 2), and the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "probability variable state" is smaller than the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in the "time saving state A" (e.g. 2) (a portion smaller than the number of deviation fluctuation patterns (for example, 3)),
When the variable display is determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined by the variable display pattern determining means in the second special state is It is shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the first special state, and shorter than the average period of the variable display period of the variable display pattern determined in the third special state (for example, if the variable display result is a "jackpot") ”, the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103 in “time saving state B” is the same as the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in “time saving state A”. The part that is shorter than the average time (for example, about 62.8 seconds) and also shorter than the average time (for example, about 51.1 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability variation state". 50),
The presentation mode of the post-previous effect is when the post-previous effect is executed in the first special state, when the post-previous effect is executed in the second special state, and when the post-previous effect is executed in the third special state. This is common to cases where the post-article effect is executed (for example, the "post-effect" that notifies the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state where it is announced that the SP reach effect will be controlled to the jackpot game state). Regarding the production mode, as shown in Figure 11-60, the parts that are common to "Time saving state B", "Probability variable state", and "Time saving state A" (see Figure 11-50),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state that has been controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is determined to be controlled to an advantageous state in consideration of a long period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state. In this case, the number of types of variable display patterns is small and the average period of the variable display period is shortened, which increases the speed at which the variable display is digested. Since the third special state can be enlivened with a common performance, a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-095) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-53 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-52,
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the first starting condition being met (for example, the game ball enters the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is being met. The second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) is displayed variably based on what the player has done (e.g., the game ball enters the second starting prize opening), and the advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to the state),
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the CPU 103 controls the fluctuation efficiency of the normal state and special symbols (especially the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory;
a second holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as a holding memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
When no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the second pending storage determining a predetermined variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that allows the means to store a pending memory;
In the case where no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a special variable display time shorter than While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). If the number of pending memories is 0, the variable display time is longer than the outlier variation pattern (for example, non-reach variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.). A part where it is possible to determine a short shortening non-reach variation pattern (for example, a super shortening non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or a shortening non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds. See Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digesting speed of the variable display does not decrease, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-096) The gaming machine according to Form 2-29 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 2-1 to 2-28,
The first identification information (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed based on the first starting condition being met (for example, the game ball enters the first starting winning hole), and the second starting condition is being met. The second identification information (e.g., the second special symbol) is displayed variably based on what the player has done (e.g., the game ball enters the second starting prize opening), and the advantageous state advantageous to the player (e.g., jackpot game) is displayed. A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled according to a state),
A state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the second starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state (for example, the CPU 103 controls the fluctuation efficiency of the normal state and special symbols (especially the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that performs time-saving control that improves time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A first holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the first identification information as a holding memory;
a second holding storage means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the starting winning determination process in step S101 in the special symbol process process) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the second identification information as a holding memory;
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The variable display pattern determining means includes:
In the case where no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the first special state or the third special state, and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means; , it is possible to determine a predetermined variable display pattern (for example, "non-reach") for a predetermined variable display period that allows the second reservation storage means to store the reservation memory;
In the case where no pending memory is stored in the second pending storage means in the second special state and the variable display is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state by the determining means, the predetermined variable display period It is possible to determine a special variable display pattern with a special variable display time shorter than While it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.), it is possible to determine a variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, non-reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). If the number of pending memories is 0 in , the variable display time is longer than the outlier variation pattern (for example, non-reach variation with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds, etc.). It is possible to determine a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a short variation time (for example, a super shortened non-reach with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or a shortened non-reach A with a variation time of 3 seconds. See Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the variable display is Since the predetermined variable display pattern having a long period is not determined and the digesting speed of the variable display does not decrease, it is possible to provide a suitable second special state.

(SG2020-097) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-54 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-53,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a performance control means) capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the special state control by displaying a special state start display. A part where the CPU 120 can execute the “rush effect”),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of
The performance execution means is
When control of the first special state is started, displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect;
When control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and a special display that is not displayed when control of the first special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variation image are displayed in the probability variable entry effect. While displaying the entry image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is the same as the entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when entering the time saving state A and the variable probability state in the time saving entry effect B. In addition to displaying the entry image 069SG470, the part that displays play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or time saving state A is started. Figure 11-50, Figure 11-63, (See Figure 11-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in consideration of the fact that in the second special state that was controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the special state start performance, the first special state is Not only the special state start display common to when control is started, but also a special display that is not displayed when control of the first special state is started, so that the start of the second special state can be excited.

The gaming machine of Form 1-55 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1-1 to 1-54,
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs the variable pattern setting in step 069SGS111). (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the processing);
Equipped with
The variable display pattern determining means is capable of determining a special variable display pattern for a variable display period in which the special state start effect can be executed in the variable display in which control of the second special state has started (for example, effect control The CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern that has a variable display time that can execute the "rush effect" in the relief time shortening variation.)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the special state start effect can be suitably executed.

(SG2020-098) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-29,
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) , a pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
When the control of the special state is started, a performance execution means (for example, a performance control means) capable of executing a performance including a special state start performance that notifies the start of the special state control by displaying a special state start display. A part where the CPU 120 can execute the “rush effect”),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) when the second special state (for example, time saving state B) is controlled on the condition that the variable display of ) is executed, and the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends. a third special state (for example, a variable probability state) controlled by the
The performance execution means is
When control of the third special state is started, displaying the special state start display in the special state start effect;
When control of the second special state is started, the special state start display is displayed in the special state start effect, and a special display that is not displayed when control of the third special state is started is displayed. (For example, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect A, and when the control of the probability variable state is started, the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variation image are displayed in the probability variable entry effect. While displaying the entry image 069SG472 consisting of 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, it is the same as the entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when entering the time saving state A and the variable probability state in the time saving entry effect B. In addition to displaying the entry image 069SG470, the part that displays play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B as special displays that are not displayed when control of the variable probability state or time saving state A is started. Figure 11-50, Figure 11-63, (see Figure 11-64),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in consideration of the fact that in the second special state that was controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which it was not controlled to an advantageous state, in the special state start performance, the third special state is Not only the special state start display common to when control is started, but also a special display that is not displayed when control of the third special state is started, so that the start of the second special state can be excited.

(SG2020-119) The gaming machine of Embodiment 1-56 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 1-1 to 1-55,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 performs step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed;
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)), and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C (6R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)),
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, displays a variable display result of the decoration identification information for which the determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state. It is possible to perform a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result is displayed variably for a predetermined period and then stopped.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state. higher than the rate at which the special decorative variable display is executed when control is determined to be in an advantageous state (for example, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state B, the display is The ratio (for example, 100%) at which the control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" is the percentage (for example, 100%) that the performance control CPU 120 executes the "SP reach" when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A. D (full rotation)" is higher than the execution rate (for example, 0% (non-execution)), and when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the production control CPU 120 The percentage of executing “SP reach D (full rotation)” (for example, the portion higher than 0% (not executed); see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the second special state is controlled to the second advantageous state with a high advantageous state, taking into consideration that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. If this is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(SG2020-120) The gaming machine of Embodiment 2-31 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 2-1 to 2-30,
Variable display of special identification information is performed based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, the winning of a game ball in the starting prize opening), and control is possible to create an advantageous state advantageous for the player (for example, a jackpot game state, etc.) A gaming machine (for example, pachinko gaming machine 1),
A state control means (for example, the CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state, improves the efficiency of variation between the normal state and special symbols (particularly the second special symbol). A part that can be controlled into a time-saving state A that executes time-saving control, a definite variable state, and a time-saving state B),
A determining means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the jackpot determination process at step 069SGS62 in the special symbol normal process) capable of determining the control to be in the advantageous state;
Variable display pattern determining means capable of determining one variable display pattern from among a plurality of types of variable display patterns having different variable display periods of special identification information based on the determination result of the determining means (for example, the CPU 103 executes step 069SGS111 (a part in which one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns is determined based on the variable display result in the fluctuation pattern setting process);
Decorative variable display means that variably displays decorative identification information in response to variable display of special identification information (for example, the performance control CPU 120 displays multiple types of decorative identification information in synchronization with the first special symbol and the second special symbol) (a part that executes variable display of decorative designs),
Equipped with
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state (e.g., normal state) ends, and a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). ) a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the variable display of the special identification information is executed; and the advantageous state that is controlled from the first special state or the second special state. a third special state (for example, a definite variable state) that is controlled when the
The advantageous states include a first advantageous state (for example, jackpot A (6R), jackpot B (6R)), and a second advantageous state (for example, jackpot C (6R)) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. 10R)),
The decoration variable display means, when the determination means determines to control to the advantageous state, displays a variable display result of the decoration identification information for which the determination means has determined to control to the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a special decoration variable display (for example, SP reach D (full rotation)) in which the specific display result is displayed variably for a predetermined period and then stopped.
The rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed when the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the second special state is determined by the determining means in the first special state. If the ratio is higher than the rate at which the special decorative variable display is executed when it is determined to control to the advantageous state, and the determining means determines to control to the second advantageous state in the third special state; higher than the rate at which the special decoration variable display is executed (for example, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance") The percentage (for example, 100%) is the percentage (for example, 100%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state A. For example, if the value is higher than 0% (non-execution) and "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the variable probability state, the production control CPU 120 executes "SP reach D (full rotation)" percentage (for example, higher than 0% (not executed); see Figure 11-69),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the second special state controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the control is performed to the second advantageous state with a high degree of advantage, taking into account that the period in which the control is not controlled to an advantageous state continues for a long time. If this is determined, the special variable display is more likely to be executed, so that a suitable second special state can be provided.

(Characteristic part 099SG form)
(SG2020-099) The gaming machine of form 1 of characteristic part 099SG is:
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state. smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled in an advantageous state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B The period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1, by 110 is obtained from the period value χ, which is obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, by 110. (also a small part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-100) Type 2 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the first number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state. One variable not controlled by the advantageous state that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the first number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state and executed in the third special state. smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state B) The period value ψ obtained by multiplying β by 110 is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, by 110, and the period value ψ is (the portion smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in a definite variable state, by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-101) Type 3 gaming machines are:
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state. smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for the variable display of 1 that is not controlled by the advantageous state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the variation of 1 in the time saving state B The period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1, by 1100, is the period value χ, obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, by 1100. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-102) Type 4 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
The period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state by the second number of times is the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state executed in the second special state. One variable not controlled by the advantageous state that is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the second number of times by the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state and executed in the third special state. smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-30, the period value is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state B) The period value ψ' obtained by multiplying β by 1100 is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, by 1100, and ψ' is the part smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of a fluctuation of 1 in a definite variable state, by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-103) Type 5 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
the first number of times in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 0; The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for a variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 0. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure by 110 starts when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that causes the variable display result to be off by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-104) Form 6 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
the first number of times in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 0; The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for a variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 0. The advantageous mode is started when the period value is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times, and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 0. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value ξ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of pending memories is 0 is a failure, is the period value ξ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that starts when the number of pending memories is 0. The variable display result that starts when the number is 0 is smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the result is a failure, and the period value ξ is The portion smaller than the period value π obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 and the variable display results in a failure by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-105) Form 7 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 0. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for a variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 0. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is the period value ξ' obtained when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in the time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-106) Form 8 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 0. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for a variable display of 1 not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 0. The advantageous mode is started when the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times is smaller than the period value and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 0. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of pending memories is 0 is the 2nd special figure pending in time saving state A. The variable display result that starts when the number of memories is 0 is smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the result is a failure, and the period value ξ' is The portion smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in the variable probability state is 1100. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-107) Form 9 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is one. The period value obtained by the multiplication is an average of 1 variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 1. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value λ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is started when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-108) The gaming machine of form 10 is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is one. The period value obtained by the multiplication is an average of 1 variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 1. The advantageous mode is started when the period value is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times, and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 1. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value λ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number of pending memories is 1 is determined by the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A. is smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number is 1 is a failure, and the period value λ is The portion smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-109) The gaming machine of form 11 is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is one. The period value obtained by the multiplication is an average of 1 variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 1. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value λ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is the period value λ' obtained when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-110) Form 12 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is one. The period value obtained by the multiplication is an average of 1 variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 1. The advantageous mode is started when the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times is smaller than the period value and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 1. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value λ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number of pending memories is 1 is the second special figure pending in time saving state A. The variable display result that starts when the number of memories is 1 is smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is a failure by 1100, and the period value λ is a probability variable (The portion smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the state and the variable display results are off by 1100) ,
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-111) Form 13 gaming machines are:
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
the first number of times in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 2; The period value obtained by multiplication is an average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure by 110 is started when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 in time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-112) The gaming machine of form 14 is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
the first number of times in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 2; The period value obtained by multiplication is an average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 2. The advantageous mode is started when the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times is smaller than the period value and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value θ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number of pending memories is 2 is the second special figure pending memory in time saving state A. is smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number is 2, and the period value θ is in the variable state. The portion smaller than the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-113) Form 15 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 2. The period value obtained by multiplication is an average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value θ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is the period value θ' obtained when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-114) Form 16 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state that is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 2. The period value obtained by multiplication is an average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is 2. The advantageous mode is started when the period value is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times, and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 2. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value θ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number of pending memories is 2 is the 2nd special figure pending in time saving state A. The variable display result that starts when the number of memories is 2 is smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is out of order by 1100, and the period value θ' is The portion smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 in the variable probability state is a failure. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-115) Form 17 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 3. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure by 110 is started when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 in time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display where the variable display result is off by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-116) Form 18 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The first number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 3. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is three. The advantageous mode is started when the period value is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the first number of times, and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 3. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the first number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value ε obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number of pending memories is 3 is a failure, is the period value ε obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that starts when the number of pending memories is 3. is smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying by 110 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the number is 3 is an error, and the period value ε is in the variable state. The portion smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 by 110),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-117) Form 19 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
Controllable between a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the variable display is executed more frequently in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than in the non-special state. Equipped with a state control means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the special symbol process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 3. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is three. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. The period value ε' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is the period value ε' obtained when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 in the time saving state A. (the portion smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off by 1100),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

(SG2020-118) Form 20 gaming machine is
A gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state) by displaying a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition (for example, a game ball enters a starting prize opening) A pachinko game machine 1),
A state control means (e.g., CPU 103) capable of controlling a non-special state (e.g., normal state) and a special state (e.g., time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state) in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state; is equipped with a part that executes the special design process shown in FIG. 6),
The special state includes a first special state (e.g., time-saving state A) that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a variable display that is executed a predetermined number of times (e.g., 900 times). a second special state (for example, time-saving state B) that is controlled on the condition that the first special state or the second special state ends; a special state (e.g., a variable state);
The termination condition of the first special state includes that variable display has been performed a first number of times (for example, 110 times) in the first special state,
The termination condition for the second special state includes that variable display has been performed a second number of times (for example, 1100 times) that is greater than the first number of times in the second special state,
The termination condition for the third special state includes that variable display has been performed a third number of times (for example, 110 times) smaller than the second number of times in the third special state,
Further comprising a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display as a reservation memory,
The second number of times is set in the average variable display period for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which is started when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the second special state is 3. The period value obtained by multiplication is the average for one variable display not controlled by the advantageous state, which starts when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is three. The advantageous mode is started when the period value is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the variable display period by the second number of times, and the number of suspension memories stored in the suspension storage means in the third special state is 3. It is smaller than the period value obtained by multiplying the average variable display period for one variable display that is not controlled by the state by the second number of times (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the second special display period in time saving state B The period value ε' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result starts when the number of pending memories is 3 is the 2nd special figure pending in time saving state A. The variable display result that starts when the number of memories is 3 is smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the average variable display period of the variable display that is out of order by 1100, and the period value ε' is The portion smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying by 1100 the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result that starts when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 in the variable probability state is a failure. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the variable display in the second special state, which is controlled by executing the variable display a predetermined number of times in the non-special state, can progress faster than in the first special state. It can improve the state's gaming interest.

The gaming machine of Form 21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 1 to 20,
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1) that fires game media into a gaming area (for example, a right gaming area and a left gaming area) where the gaming medium can flow down,
As the variable display, it is possible to perform variable display of special identification information and variable display of normal identification information (for example, a part where variable display of special symbols and variable display of normal symbols can be executed),
Based on the specific display result being derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information, a first state (for example, an open state) in which the game medium can enter and a state in which the game medium is lower than the first state are determined. A variable means (for example, a variable winning ball device 6B forming a second starting winning opening) that is changed to a second state (closed state) that is difficult to enter;
A reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing information regarding the variable display of the special identification information as a reservation memory;
Equipped with
The gaming area has a special route (for example, a left gaming area) in which the variable means is provided, and a non-special route (for example, a right gaming area) different from the special route,
The upper limit number of reservations that can be stored in the reservation storage means is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, the number of reservations stored in the first special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A) The number of pending memories that can be stored in the storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state),
The probability that the specific display result is derived and displayed as a variable display result of the variable display of the normal identification information is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, in FIG. As shown in B), the probability of hitting a normal symbol is the same regardless of whether the gaming state is time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or variable probability state).
The change pattern in which the variable means changes between the first state and the second state is the same in both the first special state and the second special state (for example, as shown in FIG. 12-2(D) As shown, the part where the opening time of the second starting prize opening is 3 seconds regardless of whether the gaming state is time saving state A, time saving state B, or variable probability state),
In both the first special state and the second special state, the game medium is fired toward the special path (for example, both time-saving state A and time-saving state B are games in which the game ball is launched toward the right game area. (the part that is the state),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the number of parts where the gameplay is common between the first special state and the second special state, and the gameplay is improved between the first special state and the second special state, which are the same special state. It is possible to prevent players from becoming confused due to large differences.

The gaming machine of Form 22 is the gaming machine described in Form 21,
In the case where the period value is obtained by measuring the period required until the variable display not controlled by the advantageous state is executed the first number of times or the second number of times in each special state, the starting point of the measurement is , including the time when the firing of the game media starts (for example, the variable display period in which the variable display result is off, the timing when the game ball is launched, or the timing when the launched game ball enters the starting prize slot) (a part that calculates the average variable display period as the period from to the end timing of the variable display based on the starting prize winning),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to appropriately obtain a period value by measurement.

The gaming machine of Form 23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 2, Form 6, Form 10, Form 14, and Form 18,
Equipped with a holding storage means capable of storing a plurality of pieces of information regarding variable display as holding storage,
The upper limit number of pending memories that can be stored by the pending storage means is the same in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, The number of reservations that can be stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of one variable display that is not controlled by the advantageous state varies depending on the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means (for example, FIG. 12-6, FIG. 12-8, FIG. As shown in 10, since the selection ratio of the variable display variation pattern in which the variable display result is a failure differs depending on the number of pending memories, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is a failure is stored. (different parts depending on the number of reserved memories),
The period value is the sum of the ratio of the variable display executed for each number of pending memories to the first number of times multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of pending memories (for example, in Figures 12-13 As shown in , the period value in each gaming state is the sum of the ratio of the variable display executed for each number of pending memories to the 110 variable displays multiplied by the average variable display period for each number of pending memories. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 24 is the gaming machine according to Form 23,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio a (for example, in A, the variable display result when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in time saving state A is a failure). The average variable display period, a is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio b (for example, B is the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in time saving state A. The average variable display period, b is the proportion of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio c (for example, C is the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending storage is 2 in time saving state A is a failure). The average variable display period, c, is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio d (for example, D is the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending storage is 3 in time saving state A is a failure). The average variable display period, d is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the time saving state A to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio a, and the average variable display period A, and the first number of times, the ratio b, and the average variable display period B. A pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the ratio c, and the average variable display period C, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the ratio d, and the average variable display period D. (For example, the period value α is the part calculated by the value of A x a + B x b + C x c + D x d).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 25 is the gaming machine described in Form 23 or Form 24,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period E, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio e (for example, E means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B is a failure). The average variable display period, e is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio f (for example, F means that the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 1 in time saving state B is a failure). The average variable display period, f is the proportion of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio g (for example, G is the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending storage is 2 in time saving state B is off) The average variable display period, g is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in 1 to the first number of times is the ratio h (for example, H means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols pending memory is 3 in time saving state B is off). The average variable display period, h is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the time-saving state B to the 110 variable displays in the time-saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio e, and the average variable display period E, and the first number of times, the ratio f, and the average variable display period F. A pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the percentage g, and the average variable display period G, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the percentage h, and the average variable display period H. (For example, the period value β is the part calculated by the value of E x e + F x f + G x g + H x h).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 26 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 23 to 25,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed at 0 to the first number of times is the ratio i (for example, I is the average of the variable display results that are negative when the number of stored second special symbols is 0 in the variable probability state). The variable display period, i is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the variable probability state to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the first number of times is the ratio j (for example, J is the average of the variable display results that are negative when the number of stored second special symbols is 1 in a variable probability state). The variable display period, j is the proportion of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the variable probability state to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in step 1 to the first number of times is the ratio k (for example, K is the average of the variable display results that are negative when the number of stored second special symbols is 2 in the variable probability state). The variable display period, k is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 in the variable probability state to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the first number of times is the ratio l (for example, L is the average of the variable display results that are negative when the number of stored second special symbols is 3 in the variable probability state). The variable display period, l is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the variable probability state to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The period value of the third special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the first number of times, the ratio i, and the average variable display period I, the first number of times, the ratio j, and the average variable display period J. a pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the percentage k, and the average variable display period K, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the first number of times, the percentage k, and the average variable display period L; (For example, the period value γ is the part calculated by the value of I x i + J x j + K x k + L x l).
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 27 is the gaming machine according to any one of Form 4, Form 8, Form 12, Form 16, and Form 20,
Equipped with a reservation storage means (for example, a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B) capable of storing a plurality of information regarding variable display as reservation storage,
The upper limit number of pending memories that can be stored by the pending storage means is the same in the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state (for example, The number of reservations that can be stored in the special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B is up to 4),
The average variable display period of the variable display varies depending on the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 12-6, 12-8, and 12-10, Since the selection ratio of variable display variation patterns that result in negative display results differs depending on the number of retained memories, the average variable display period of variable displays that result in negative variable display results differs depending on the number of retained memories stored. part),
The period value is the sum of the ratio of the variable display executed for each number of pending memories to the second number of times multiplied by the average variable display period of the number of pending memories (for example, in Figure 12-14 As shown in , the period value in each gaming state is the sum of the ratio of the variable display executed for each number of pending memories to the 1100 variable displays multiplied by the average variable display period for each number of pending memories. ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 28 is the gaming machine described in Form 27,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the first special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period A, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio a' (for example, A means that the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in time saving state A is off). The average variable display period, a' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period B, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio b' (for example, B indicates that the variable display result when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in time saving state A is off). The average variable display period, b' is the proportion of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period C, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio c' (for example, C means that the variable display result when the number of stored second special symbols is 2 in time saving state A is off). The average variable display period, c' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period D, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio d' (for example, D means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 3 in time saving state A is off). The average variable display period, d' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time-saving state A to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state A),
The period value of the first special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio a', and the average variable display period A, the second number of times, the ratio b', and the average variable display. A pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by period B, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the second number of times, the percentage c', and the average variable display period C, the second number of times, the percentage d', and the average. It is the total value of the pending 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period D (for example, the period value α' is calculated by the value of A x a' + B x b' + C x c' + D x d' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the first special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of means 29 is the gaming machine according to embodiment 27 or embodiment 28,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the second special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period E, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio e' (for example, E means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B is off). The average variable display period, e' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 0 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period F, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio f' (for example, F indicates that the variable display result is off when the number of second special symbols pending is 1 in time saving state B). The average variable display period, f' is the proportion of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time-saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period G, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio g' (for example, G means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 2 in time saving state B is off). The average variable display period, g' is the proportion of the variable display when there are 2 second special figure pending memories in time-saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in time-saving state B),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period H, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio h' (for example, H means that the variable display result when the number of second special symbols pending is 3 in time saving state B is off). The average variable display period, h' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the time saving state B to the 1100 variable displays in the time saving state B),
The period value of the second special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio e', and the average variable display period E, the second number of times, the ratio f', and the average variable display. A pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period F, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the second number of times, the percentage g', and the average variable display period G, the second number of times, the percentage h', and the average. It is the total value of the pending 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period H (for example, the period value β' is calculated by the value of E x e' + F x f' + G x g' + H x h' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the second special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

The gaming machine of Form 30 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 27 to 29,
The upper limit of the number of reservation storage means is 4 (for example, the number of reservations that can be stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is up to 4 regardless of the gaming state). some part),
In the third special state,
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 0 is the average variable display period I, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed at 0 to the second number of times is the ratio i' (for example, I is a variable display result when the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0 in a probability variable state is a failure). The average variable display period, i' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 0 in the variable probability state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 1 is the average variable display period J, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display performed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio j' (for example, J is a variable display result in which the number of second special symbols pending is 1 in a probability variable state is a loss). The average variable display period, j' is the ratio of the variable display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the variable probability state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 2 is the average variable display period K, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio k' (for example, K is the variable display result when the number of second special symbols pending is 2 in the variable probability state is a failure). The average variable display period, k' is the ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 2 in the variable probability state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The average variable display period of one variable display not controlled to the advantageous state that is executed when the number of pending memories stored in the pending storage means is 3 is the average variable display period L, and the number of pending memories is The ratio of the variable display executed in step 1 to the second number of times is the ratio l' (for example, L is the variable display result when the number of second special symbols pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state is a failure). The average variable display period, l' is the proportion of the variable display when the second special figure holding memory is 3 in the variable probability state to the 1100 variable displays in the variable probability state),
The period value of the third special state is a pending 0 corresponding value obtained by multiplying the second number of times, the ratio i', and the average variable display period I, the second number of times, the ratio j', and the average variable display period I. A pending 1 corresponding value multiplied by the period J, a pending 2 corresponding value multiplied by the second number of times, the ratio k', and the average variable display period K, the second number of times, the ratio l', and the average. It is the total value of the pending 3 corresponding value multiplied by the variable display period L (for example, the period value γ' is calculated by the value of I x i' + J x j' + K x k' + L x l' part),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value of the third special state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

(Characteristic part 018SG form)
(SG2020-018) Characteristic part 018 The gaming machine of form 3-1 of SG form is
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1 of characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A light emitting body (for example, movable LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc.),
A movable body (for example, movable body 32),
A performance execution means (for example, a performance control CPU 120 that is capable of executing a specific performance that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled) and a special performance that operates the movable body and causes the light emitting body to emit light. A part that can perform SP reach effects A to E and movable body effects),
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance, a first specific performance (for example, SP reach performance B) that displays a specific character (for example, enemy character ), and a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) that informs whether or not the advantageous state is controlled without displaying the specific character,
When it is reported that the specific performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, during the execution period of the SP reach performance (of ta2 to ta5) ta3 to ta4) where movable body effects can be performed),
During the execution period of the special performance in the first specific performance, the specific character (for example, character image 018SGX1) is displayed together with an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body (FIG. 13-14). (D2) (see D4)),
During the execution period of the special performance in the second specific performance, an effect image (for example, effect image 018SG250B) related to the movement of the movable body in a manner common to the first specific performance is displayed, while the specific character is not displayed (see Figure 13-14 (D1)),
The light emission mode of the light emitting body in the special performance (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is different when the special performance is performed in the first specific performance and when the special performance is performed in the second specific performance. (see Figure 13-6(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the operation mode of the movable body and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body in the special effects are made common between the first specific effect in which a specific character is displayed and the second specific effect in which the specific character is not displayed, thereby reducing manufacturing costs. It is possible to improve the performance effect by increasing the relationship between the specific performance and the special performance depending on whether or not a specific character is displayed during the execution period of the special performance, while reducing the amount of performance.

The gaming machine of Form 3-2 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled is higher when the first specific effect is executed than when the second specific effect is executed (for example, the variation pattern of super reach β is higher than the variation pattern of super reach α). Since the expectation of a jackpot is higher for the fluctuation pattern, the expectation of a jackpot is higher for SP reach performance B and SP reach performance C than for SP reach performance A (Jackpot expectation level: SP reach performance A < SP reach performance B <SP reach performance C) part)
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the second specific performance will be executed as the specific performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 3-3 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-1 or Form 3-2,
The execution period of the special performance is common to the first specific performance and the second specific performance (for example, the execution period (ta3 to ta4) of the "decision performance" in SP reach performances A to E is Common to productions A to E (ta3 to ta4; SP reach performance A = SP reach performance B = SP reach performance C = SP reach performance D = SP reach performance E),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the execution period of the special effects common, the control data for the movable bodies and light-emitting bodies in the special effects can be shared, so that manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-4 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-3,
The execution period of the special performance includes a first period and a second period after the first period,
While the production mode in the first period is common to the first specific production and the second specific production, the production mode in the second period is different between the first specific production and the second specific production ( For example, the execution period of the movable body performance includes a first period and a second period after the first period, and the performance mode in the first period is common for SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in Figure 13-14 (C) is common), the performance mode in the second period is different between SP reach effects B to E and SP reach effect A. In Figure 13-14 (D1) 13-14 (D2 to D5)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production mode common until the first period, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs, and it is possible to use either the first specific production or the second specific production until the first period. Since it is unclear whether the performance is correct or not, it is possible to improve the performance interest of a specific performance.

The gaming machine of Form 3-5 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-4,
The performance execution means is capable of executing, as the specific performance, a third specific performance (for example, SP reach performance E) that displays a special character (for example, enemy character X-2) different from the specific character,
The rate at which the advantageous state is controlled differs between when the first specific performance is executed and when the third specific performance is executed (for example, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the low base state The determination ratio of the SP reach β fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect B is 300/997, and the determination ratio of the SP reach γ fluctuation pattern corresponding to the SP reach effect E when the variable display result is a jackpot in the high base state. is 800/997),
In the third specific performance, an effect image common to the first specific performance according to the movement of the movable body during the execution period of the special performance that is executed when the control to the advantageous state is notified. (for example, effect image 018SG250B) is displayed and the special character (for example, character image 018SGX2) is displayed,
The light emitting mode of the light emitter in the special performance executed in the third specific performance (for example, the light emission pattern LP3-2) is the same as the light emission mode of the light emitter in the special performance performed in the first specific performance. Common (see Figure 13-6(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs by standardizing the operation mode of the movable body and the light emission mode of the light emitting body in each special performance, and to increase the number of specific performances in which the ratio of being controlled to an advantageous state is different. Since it is possible to draw attention to which specific performance is to be executed, the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-6 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-5,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the motion of the player,
The light emission of the light emitting body in the special performance is independent of the detection timing at which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means during the valid movement period before the control to the advantageous state is notified in the specific performance. The end mode is the same (for example, at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed, or at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and during the operation validity period) Even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when the movable body effect ends, the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes possible to change the manner in which the light emitting body finishes emitting light by changing the timing at which the player operates, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 3-7 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-6,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a later period performance (jackpot notification) in a subsequent period after the special performance during the specific performance,
The light emission pattern is the same regardless of the type of the specific performance in which the after-period performance is executed (for example, a jackpot is confirmed as a later-period performance in the latter period after the movable body performance during the execution of SP reach performances A to E. In the jackpot confirmation notification, the light emission pattern of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 and the movable body LED 208 is the same regardless of the type of SP reach effect A to E (for example, the light emission pattern LP3 -2) part (see Figure 13-6(B)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the later period effect is executed with a common light emission pattern regardless of the type of specific effect, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs.

The gaming machine of Form 3-8 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-1 to 3-7,
Equipped with sound output means (for example, speakers 8L and 8R),
The performance execution means is capable of outputting a special performance sound from the sound output means in the special performance,
The output pattern of the special performance sound is common to any type of the specific performance (for example, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is common to any type of SP reach performance A to E (sound Pattern BP0-1 to BP0-3) portion (see Figure 13-6(C)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the output pattern of the special effect sound common, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost.

The gaming machine of Form 3-9 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-8,
Equipped with a motion detection means (for example, push sensor 35B) capable of detecting the player's motion,
The special effect sound in the special effect is independent of the detection timing at which the movement of the player is detected by the movement detecting means during the movement valid period before the control to the advantageous state is notified in the specific effect. The output end mode is the same (for example, at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "true/fail button effect" is executed, or when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation is valid) Even if the "movable body performance" is executed at the timing when the period ends, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the manner in which the output of the special effect sound ends can be changed by changing the timing of the player's actions, thereby improving the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-10 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 3-1 to 3-9,
The specific character displayed in the special performance executed in the first specific performance is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image (for example, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the The effect image 018SG250B displayed in response to the vibration is displayed in a display color that is common or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 that are displayed at the same time (for example, a similar color),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to enhance the relationship between the specific character and the effect image, thereby increasing the production effect of the special production.

(SG2020-019) The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-11 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 3-1 to 3-10,
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1 of characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A movable body (for example, movable body 32),
A performance execution means (for example, performance control (a part in which the CPU 120 can execute SP reach effects A to E and post effects A and B);
Equipped with
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance, a first mode (for example, SP reach performance B) is a performance that displays a specific character (for example, an enemy character) and informs whether or not the specific character is controlled to the advantageous state. It can be executed in the second mode (for example, SP reach effect D),
When it is reported that the specific performance is controlled to be in the advantageous state, the special performance can be executed during the execution period of the specific performance (for example, during the execution period of the SP reach performance (of ta2 to ta5) ta3 to ta4) where movable body effects can be performed),
During the execution period of the special effect, in both the first mode and the second mode, the specific character (for example, a character image) is 018SGX1) is displayed,
When the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the post-effect using the specific character that was displayed in the specific effect in the first mode is not executed, and the specific effect is executed in the second mode. When executed in the above-mentioned mode, a post-previous effect using the specific character displayed in the specific effect of the second mode is executed (for example, in the case of SP reach effect B, in the SP reach effect While post-effect A in which the enemy character is not displayed is executed instead of post-effect B using the displayed enemy character (The part where post-production B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) is executed using the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in ),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the operation mode of the specific character and the movable body in the special performance is made common between the first aspect and the second aspect, thereby reducing manufacturing costs, and displaying the same specific character in different performances. By doing so, it is possible to increase the relationship between the specific performance and the special performance, and between the specific performance and the subsequent performance, and improve the performance effect.

The gaming machine of Form 3-12 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-11,
The performance execution means is capable of executing a special performance that changes the specific character into a special mode after the special performance executed in the specific performance,
The special performance when the specific performance is executed in the second mode is executed after the previous post performance (for example, in SP reach performance B, in the jackpot notification before post performance A, the special performance is The character image 018SGX1Z in which the attacked enemy character A special image 018SGXZ that disappears and becomes a star after being blown away is displayed (see Figure 13-19 (G1-5)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, the timing at which the special performance is executed changes depending on the mode of the specific performance, so that the performance effect can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-13 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-11 or Form 3-12,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the preceding post-effect during the variable display period in which the first variable display is being executed,
In the aforementioned post performance, gaming value information that can specify the magnitude of the gaming value to be given in the advantageous state notified to be controlled by the specific performance related to the post performance is reported (for example, SP During the execution period of “post effects A and B” in reaches α, β, and γ, SP reach effects A to E are executed during the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols. In the jackpot confirmation notification, from timing ta5 when a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped and displayed, to timing ta7 when a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is stopped and displayed (the variable display ends). (parts marked as (ta5 to ta7)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it is possible to increase the attention to the post performance in which the game value information is reported, and it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 3-14 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-11 or Form 3-12,
A gaming machine that is notified that it will be controlled to the advantageous state by deriving and displaying a specific display result as a result of the variable display,
The performance execution means can execute the post-effects after the specific display result is derived and displayed (for example, the execution period of "post-effects A and B" in SP reaches α, β, and γ is , During the variable display period (ta0 to ta7) from the start to the end of the variable display of decorative symbols, the determined decorative symbols that become the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped in the jackpot confirmed notification of SP reach effects A to E. From the displayed timing ta5 to the timing ta7 (where the variable display ends) at which fixed decorative symbols forming a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (the portion defined as ta5 to ta7),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, it becomes easier to recognize the timing at which the post-effect is performed, so it is possible to increase attention to the post-effect.

The gaming machine of Form 3-15 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-11 to 3-14,
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state in which the gaming value given is greater than the first advantageous state,
The ratio of being controlled to the second advantageous state is higher when the specific effect of the second aspect is executed than when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed (for example, when SP is controlled in the low base condition) If SP reach effect B is executed when the reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, “jackpot B (6R)” (first advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than “jackpot A (6R)” (first advantageous state), is executed. 2 advantageous state) is 30%, and if SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, "jackpot B (6R)" (the 1 advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than the ``jackpot C (10R)'' (second advantageous state), where the proportion controlled is 40%),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since it is possible to draw attention to whether the specific performance is executed in the first mode or the second mode, it is possible to improve the interest in the game.

The gaming machine of Form 3-16 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-11 to 3-15,
When the specific performance is executed in the first mode, the performance execution means is capable of executing the post-performance in a manner in which the specific character is not displayed (for example, post-performance A of SP reach performance A). In this case, since the character does not appear in SP reach performance A, the character does not appear in post performance A.Also, in the post performance A of SP reach performance B and C, the character appears in SP reach performance B and C, but (portions where characters do not appear in post-production A),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the post-effect is executed even when the specific effect of the first aspect is executed, the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-17 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-11 to 3-16,
A gaming machine capable of executing variable display,
The effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect during one variable display,
A variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the second mode is shorter than a variable display period of the variable display in which the specific effect is executed in the first mode,
The period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result in the specific performance of the second aspect is the period from the end of the special performance to the derivation and display of the variable display result in the specific performance of the first aspect. (For example, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), during the period (ta4 to ta7) from timing ta4 when the “movable object effect” ends in SP reach γ to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that become a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, in SP reach β It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from timing ta4 when the "movable object effect" ends to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ > SP Reach β)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the specific effect of the second aspect executed during the short variable display period, by lengthening the period after the end of the special effect, the impression of the variable display is enhanced even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

(SG2020-020) The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-18 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 3-1 to 3-17,
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1 of characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A specific performance that notifies whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the specific performance is notified that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-effect that is executed after the special performance. and a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B),
The performance execution means is
As the specific performance, a specific character (for example, enemy character A first specific effect (for example, SP reach effect D) that displays a special character different from the specific character (enemy character X-2) and the special character (ally character A-1), and a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance E) that notifies whether or not the advantageous state is controlled using the special character,
As the effect after the above article, when the special effect is executed in the first specific effect, the specific character and the special character displayed in the first specific effect are displayed and operated, thereby achieving the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a first post performance (for example, post performance B) that notifies gaming value information (for example, the expected number of balls to be played) that can specify the magnitude of the gaming value to be given,
As the effect after the aforementioned article, when the special effect is executed in the second specific effect, the special character displayed in the second specific effect and the special character are displayed and operated, thereby achieving the advantageous state. It is possible to execute a second post performance (for example, post performance B) that notifies gaming value information (for example, the expected number of balls to be played) that allows specifying the magnitude of the gaming value given in
At least the operation mode of the special character is common between the first post-effect and the second post-effect (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19);
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by using a common character in the specific performance and the post-production, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs, while also making it easier to understand the relationship between the specific production and the post-production, thereby increasing the production effect. can.

The gaming machine of Form 3-19 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-18,
The execution period of the second post-effect is the same as the execution period of the first post-effect (for example, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to each of SP reach effects D and E is the same as the execution period of the first post-effect. common parts),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by standardizing the execution period, it is possible to easily reuse control data for post-effects, especially movement control data for special characters, which can further reduce manufacturing costs. .

The gaming machine of Form 3-20 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-18 or Form 3-19,
The performance execution means is capable of causing a light-emitting body to emit light in the post-post performance,
The light emitting pattern of the light emitting body is common to the first post performance and the second post performance (for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball addition part of the post performance B). The light emission pattern is common between SP reach effect D and SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the light emitting pattern can also be shared, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-21 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-18 to 3-20,
The performance execution means is capable of displaying a background image in the post-post performance,
The background image is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the after-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the after effect B of the SP reach effect E). (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since the background image can also be shared, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Form 3-22 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-18 to 3-21,
The special character is common to the first post-effect and the second post-effect (for example, the ally character A-1 is the same in the after-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the after effect B of the SP reach effect E). common (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, special characters can also be made common, so that manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-23 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 3-18 to 3-22,
The performance execution means is
In the first post-production, the specific character and the special character can be displayed at a common time,
In the second post performance, the special character and the special character can be displayed at the same time (for example, in post performance B corresponding to SP reach performance D, enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 An image of the enemy character X-2 fighting with the ally character A-1 is displayed at the same time, and an image of the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E (Figure 13-18 ~See Figure 13-19)),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, since each character is displayed at the same time, it is possible to enhance the impression of the post-production and improve the production effect.

The gaming machine of Form 3-24 is the gaming machine according to any one of Forms 3-18 to 3-23,
The performance period of the post-performance of the preceding article includes a first performance period and a second performance period after the first performance period,
The performance execution means is
During the first performance period, a suggestion display regarding the magnitude of the gaming value to be given in the advantageous state that is informed that it will be controlled by the specific performance related to the subsequent performance and the magnitude of the gaming value to be added to the suggestion display. (For example, a scheduled pitch addition part in which the expected number of pitches to be pitched is added and displayed in response to the friendly characters appearing in SP reach effects D and E attacking the enemy character),
In the second performance period, the amount of the gaming value shown in the addition display is the gaming value that is added to the gaming value shown in the suggestion display, and the gaming value that is given in the advantageous state. (For example, after the friendly character deals the final blow to the enemy character, the expected number of balls to be released is stopped and displayed, and after the expected number of balls to be released is announced, the confirmed decorative pattern that will be the jackpot combination is displayed. Scheduled pitch notification part where the display stops and the variable display ends),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, in the post performance, after the suggestion display and the addition display are displayed, the magnitude of the gaming value to be given in the advantageous state is notified, so that the performance effect of the post performance can be enhanced.

(SG2020-021) The gaming machine of Embodiment 3-25 is the gaming machine according to any one of Embodiments 3-1 to 3-24,
A gaming machine (for example, Pachinko gaming machine 1 of characteristic part 018SG) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player,
A specific performance that notifies whether or not the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, a special performance that is executed when the specific performance is notified that the control is to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a post-effect that is executed after the special performance. and a performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can execute SP reach performances A to E, a movable body performance, and post-performances A and B),
The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, "Jackpot A (6R)" in the low base state/"Jackpot B (6R)" in the high base state) and a state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. a second advantageous state (for example, "Jackpot B (6R)" in the low base state / "Jackpot C (10R)" in the high base state),
The performance execution means is
The specific performances include a first specific performance (for example, SP reach performance D), a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance E) whose performance mode is different from the first specific performance, and the first specific performance and It is possible to execute a third specific performance (for example, SP reach performance A) that has a different performance form from the second specific performance,
As the post-production of the preceding article, when the special production is executed in the first specific production, a first post-production of a production mode related to the first specific production (for example, an ally A-1 and an enemy X-1 appear) It is possible to perform the post-production B),
As the post-production for the previous article, when the special production is executed in the second specific production, a second post-production of a production mode related to the second specific production (for example, an ally A-1 and an enemy X-2 appear) It is possible to perform the post-production B),
As the post performance, when the special performance is executed in the third specific performance, it is possible to execute a third post performance (for example, post performance A) in a performance mode related to the third specific performance,
The rate at which the second advantageous state is controlled varies depending on which of the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance is executed (for example, SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation in the high base state When a pattern is determined, the rate at which the pattern is controlled to "Jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is SP reach. It is 40% when performance D is executed, and 60% when SP reach performance E is executed, and when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, "Jackpot A (6R)" (The proportion controlled to "Jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state) which is more advantageous to the player than (first advantageous state) is 100% when SP reach effect A is executed),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, not only is it announced that the specific performance will be controlled to an advantageous state, but also the ratio of being controlled to the second advantageous state differs depending on which specific performance is executed. The degree of attention of the players can be suitably increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

The gaming machine of Form 3-26 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-25,
While the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production are common,
The performance period of the third post-performance is different from the performance period of the first post-performance and the second post-performance (for example, the execution period of "post-performance A" corresponding to each of SP reach performances A to C (ta5 to ta7) are all common, and the execution periods (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to SP reach effects D and E are all common, while the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" is the same. ) and the part that is different from the execution period (15 seconds) of "Post-production B"),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the production period of the first post-production and the production period of the second post-production the same, it is possible to easily share production content and control between the first post-production and the second post-production. It is possible to reduce costs, and by executing the third post-production with a different production period, it is possible to prevent the post-production from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the production effect of the post-production. .

The gaming machine of Form 3-27 is the gaming machine described in Form 3-25 or Form 3-26,
The performance execution means is capable of causing the light emitting body to emit light in the post-effect performance,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first post-effect is common to the light-emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the second post-effect,
The light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the third after-effect is different from the light-emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the first after-effect and the second after-effect (for example, the light emission pattern of the light-emitting body in the third after-effect is different from that in the after-effects corresponding to SP reach effect D and SP reach effect E. While the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball notification part of Production B are common, the post production corresponding to SP reach production A The light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in A, and the movable body LED 208 in post-effect B that corresponds to SP reach effect D and SP reach effect E. The light emission patterns of frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 (light emission patterns LP4-5 and LP4-6) are different from each other (see Figure 13-6),
It is characterized by
According to this feature, by making the light emitting pattern of the first post effect and the light emitting pattern of the second post effect common, it is possible to further reduce manufacturing costs, and at the same time, it is possible to further reduce the manufacturing cost. By executing the performance, the performance effect of the post-performance can be enhanced.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (also the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be explained.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1, etc.)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. A pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is roughly divided into a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes a game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is fired from a predetermined ball launcher into this game area.

In addition, "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, to display a plurality of types of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). The variations include updated display of a plurality of symbols, scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, enlargement/reduction of one or more symbols, and the like. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative patterns described below, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative patterns are deformed or enlarged/reduced. Incidentally, the variation also includes a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed blinking. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) as a display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described later). Note that the variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a “second special symbol”. Further, a special map game using the first special map is also referred to as a "first special map game", and a special map game using the second special map is also referred to as a "second special map game". In addition, the number of special symbol display devices that perform variable display of special symbols may be one type.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display), an organic EL (electro luminescence), or the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may include a projector and a screen. The image display device 5 displays various effect images.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special pattern game and the second special pattern game, decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) as multiple types of decorative identification information different from the special pattern are displayed. A variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special figure game or the second special figure game, decorative figures are displayed variably (for example, up and down direction (scroll display and update display). In addition, the special figure game and the variable display of decorative symbols that are executed synchronously are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

A display area may be provided on the screen of the image display device 5 for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display currently being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of pending variable displays is also called the number of pending memories. The number of pending memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as the first number of pending memories, and the number of pending memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as the second number of pending memories. The sum of the first number of pending memories and the second number of pending memories is also referred to as the total number of pending memories.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B each including a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold display 25A displays the number of first hold memories based on the number of lit LEDs. The second hold display 25B displays the second hold storage number based on the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning hole that is always kept open to allow game balls to enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the first special symbol game can be started.

The variable prize winning ball device 6B (normal electric accessory) forms a second starting prize opening that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable pieces, and when the solenoid 81 is in the OFF state, the movable pieces are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable piece becomes the winning ball. It approaches the device 6A and enters a closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting prize opening (also referred to as the second starting winning opening enters a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state, the movable piece of the variable winning ball device 6B is in the tilted position, so that the variable winning ball device 6B enters an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening (second starting winning opening). It is also said that the mouth becomes open.) When the game ball enters the second starting winning hole, a predetermined number (for example, three) of winning balls are paid out, and the second special symbol game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to one that includes an electric tulip type accessory.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations on the lower left side of the game area and one location above the variable winning ball device 6B), there are always kept in a constant open state by predetermined ball receiver members. A general prize opening 10 is provided. In this case, when entering any of the general winning holes 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 having a big winning hole is provided between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball device 7 is equipped with a big winning hole door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 3), and has a big winning hole as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the big winning hole door. Form.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door (special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the big winning hole door closes the big winning hole, and the game ball is You will not be able to enter (pass through) the prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big winning hole door is in the on state, the big winning hole door opens the big winning hole so that the game ball can easily enter the big winning hole. Become.

When game balls enter the grand prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When the game ball enters the big winning hole, more prize balls are paid out than when the game ball enters the first starting winning hole, the second starting winning hole, and the general winning hole 10, for example.

Entering the game ball into each winning hole including the general winning hole 10 is also referred to as "winning". In particular, winning in the starting opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening) is also referred to as starting winning.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, at the lower left of the game area). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of a 7-segment LED, etc., and performs variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9" and lighting patterns such as "-". The normal pattern may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. This variable display of ordinary symbols is also called a ordinary symbol game.

A passage gate 41 through which game balls can pass is provided on the right side of the image display device 5. Based on the game ball passing through the passage gate 41, a common figure game is executed.

A normal symbol holding display 25C is provided below the normal symbol display 20. The Fuzu-zu pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the Fuzu-zu pending storage number, which is the number of Fuzu games whose execution is pending, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above structure, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill that changes the downward direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. At the bottom of the gaming area, there is provided an out opening into which game balls that have not entered any of the winning openings are taken in.

At the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, speakers 8L and 8R are provided for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 in the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right sides of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the gaming area. Furthermore, an attacker lamp 9c is provided at a position near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the game board 2.

A movable body 32, which will be described later, is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1), which operates according to the performance. Further, the movable body 32 is provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable lamp 9d, the main lamp 9a, the frame lamp 9b, and the attacker lamp 9c described above may be collectively referred to as a game effect lamp 9. Note that the main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacker lamp 9c, and movable lamp 9d include LEDs.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided which is operated by a player or the like in order to fire a game ball toward a gaming area using a ball-launching device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, game balls paid out as prize balls and game balls lent out by a predetermined ball rental machine are held (stored) so that they can be supplied to the batted ball firing device. ) is provided with a batted ball supply tray (upper tray). Incidentally, the gaming machine frame 3 may be provided with a payout section (hit ball supply tray) apart from the upper tray from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed down by the player. An operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by a controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing the button or the like. An operation on push button 31B is detected by push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko game machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting a player's movement (operation, etc.), but detection means other than these may be provided.

FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A main board 11 housed in a board case 201 is mounted on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting changeover switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting changeover switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing set values such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the batting rate in a setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is arranged on the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured using, for example, a 7-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are arranged in front of the main board 11 when the back side of the game board 2 is viewed with the gaming machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive ratios, winning ratios, and bases. The consecutive ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the big prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of prize balls that land in the second starting prize opening (electronic chew) and the number of prize balls that land in the grand prize opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of game balls launched. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The display monitor 29 only needs to be capable of displaying setting values to be changed or checked when the settings are changed or checked.

The setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the gaming machine frame 3 is in a closed state. The gaming machine frame 3 is rotatably provided with a glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the game area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko game machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end portion of the outer frame 1a formed in the shape of a vertically long rectangular frame. The security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201 including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 from the back side when the gaming machine frame 3 is closed. The security cover 50A is a substantially L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
When a player rotates a ball-hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko game machine 1, a game ball is launched toward a game area. When the game ball passes through the passage gate 41, a normal pattern game using the normal pattern display 20 is started. In addition, if the game ball passes through the passage gate 41 during the period during which the previous Fuzu game was being executed (the game ball passed through the passing gate 41, but the Fuzu game based on the passage cannot be executed immediately), , the game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this general pattern game, if a specific normal pattern (a pattern per normal pattern) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the normal pattern becomes ``a common pattern hit''. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol missed symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes "ordinary symbol missed". When it becomes a "normal map hit", opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B open for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning opening is brought into the open state).

When the game ball enters the first starting winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

When a game ball enters the second starting winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, a second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

In addition, if the game ball enters the starting winning hole (winning) during the period when the special drawing game is being executed or during the period when the jackpot game state described below is being controlled (a starting winning has occurred, but based on the starting winning If the special figure game cannot be executed immediately), the execution of the special figure game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

In the special pattern game, if a specific special pattern (a jackpot pattern, e.g. "7", the actual pattern differs depending on the jackpot type described later) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special pattern, it becomes a "jackpot" and the jackpot pattern If a special symbol (missing symbol, for example "-") different from the above is stopped and displayed, it becomes a "missing" symbol. It should be noted that the "loss" in this pachinko game machine 1 includes the "loss with time saving" which is controlled from the next variable display to a high base state (time saving state) without going through the jackpot game.

After the display result in the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", the game is controlled to be in a jackpot game state as an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the jackpot formed by the special variable winning ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. The open state is determined by the timing when a predetermined period of time (for example, 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) elapses, or the timing until the number of game balls that enter the grand prize opening reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 balls). This will continue until the earliest of the two. The predetermined period is the upper limit period during which the big prize opening can be opened in one round, and hereinafter also referred to as the upper limit opening period. One cycle in which the big prize opening is opened in this way is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be executed repeatedly until it reaches a predetermined upper limit number of times (15 times or 2 times).

In the jackpot game state, the player can receive a prize ball by entering the game ball into the jackpot opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the longer the open upper limit period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

Incidentally, the jackpot type is set in "jackpot". For example, we prepare multiple types of opening modes for the jackpot (number of rounds and maximum opening period) and gaming states after the jackpot gaming state (normal state, time-saving state, variable probability state, etc.), and set the jackpot type accordingly. has been done. As the jackpot types, there may be provided a jackpot type in which many prize balls can be obtained, a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained, or a jackpot type in which few prize balls can be obtained.

After the jackpot gaming state ends, depending on the above-mentioned jackpot type, it may be controlled to a time saving state or a variable probability state.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol variation time (period for varying the special symbol) compared to the normal state. In the short time state, by shortening the average fluctuation time (period for changing the general pattern) than in the normal state, and by increasing the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the general drawing game compared to the normal state, etc. Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easier for game balls to enter the second starting prize opening is also executed. The time saving state is a state in which the variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved, so it is an advantageous state for the player.

In the variable probability state (probability variable state), in addition to the time saving control, variable probability control is executed in which the probability that the displayed result is a "jackpot" is higher than in the normal state. The variable probability state is a state that is more advantageous to the player because it improves the efficiency of changing the special symbols and is also a state where it is easy to hit the jackpot.

The time saving state and the variable probability state continue until any one of the end conditions is met first, such as the execution of the special figure game a predetermined number of times and the start of the next jackpot game state. A condition where the termination condition is that the special figure game has been executed a predetermined number of times is also called number-cutting (number-cutting time reduction, number-cutting probability variable, etc.).

A normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as an advantageous state such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, a time saving state, or a variable probability state, and the display result in the Fuzu game is "Fuzu hit". The pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game will be a "jackpot", is set to the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after the power is turned on). This state is controlled in the same way as when no processing is executed).

A state in which variable probability control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which variable probability control is not executed is also referred to as a low probability state. A state in which time saving control is being executed is also referred to as a high base state, and a state in which time saving control is not being executed is also referred to as a low base state. Combining these, the time saving state is also called a low certainty/high base state, the variable probability state is also called a high certainty/high base state, the normal state is also called a low certainty/low base state, etc. The high certainty state and low base state is also referred to as the high certainty low base state.

Incidentally, the gaming state may change based on the fact that the game ball has passed through a specific area (for example, a specific area within the big winning opening) during the jackpot gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the control may be changed to a variable probability state after the jackpot game state.

(Progress of production, etc.)
In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects for notifying the progress of the game or for enlivening the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The performance will be explained below. The effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or in place of the display, audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R and the game effect lamp 9 are performed. It may be performed as an effect using lighting or extinguishing of the lights, movement of the movable body 32, or any effect device including some or all of these.

As a performance executed according to the progress of the game, the "left", "middle", "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided on the image display device 5 display the first special pattern game or the first special pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. 2. Corresponding to the start of the special figure game, variable display of decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special pattern) is stopped and displayed in the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game, the fixed decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) that is the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern ) is also stopped and displayed (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts until it ends, the mode of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode refers to the variable display of decorative symbols that are not yet displayed while the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 form part of a jackpot combination that will be described later. This refers to the manner in which the situation continues.

Furthermore, a ready-to-win effect is executed in response to the above-mentioned ready-to-win mode being set during the variable display of the decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the percentage of display results (display results of special pattern games and display results of variable display of decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" (also referred to as jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation level) is determined depending on the performance mode. A plurality of different types of reach effects are executed. The reach performance includes, for example, normal reach and super reach, which has higher jackpot reliability than normal reach.

When the display result of the special figure game becomes a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as a display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (decorative pattern). The display result of the variable display of symbols is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are all stopped and displayed on predetermined valid lines in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

In the case of a "probable variable jackpot" that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, odd-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "7", etc.) are stopped and displayed, and the variable probability state is changed after the jackpot gaming state ends. In the case of an uncontrolled "uncertain variable jackpot (normal jackpot)", even-numbered decorative symbols (for example, "6", etc.) may be stopped and displayed all together. In this case, the odd-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as variable probability patterns, and the even-numbered decorative patterns are also referred to as non-probable variable patterns (normal patterns). After reaching the reach mode with non-probability variable symbols, a promotion performance that ultimately becomes a "probability variable jackpot" may be executed.

When the display result of the special pattern game is "miss", the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern does not become the reach mode, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a fixed decorative pattern (" ) may be stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "non-reach out"). In addition, if the display result is "miss", after the variable display mode of the decorative pattern becomes the reach mode, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern is a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination ("reach is off"). '') may be displayed in a stopped state (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be "out of reach").

The performances that can be performed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 also include displaying the above-mentioned variable display compatible display (pending display and active display). In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that foretells the reliability of the jackpot is executed during the variable display of the decorative symbols. The preview performance includes a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display that is currently being executed, and a preview performance that foretells the reliability of a jackpot in a variable display before execution (a variable display whose execution is pending). As the pre-read preview performance, a performance that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (suspended display or active display) to a different mode than usual may be performed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative pattern during the variable display of the decorative pattern and then restarting the variable display, one variable display can be made to appear pseudo as multiple variable displays. A pseudo-continuous performance may also be executed.

Even during the jackpot game state, a jackpot performance for notifying the jackpot game state is executed. As the jackpot performance, a performance that notifies the number of rounds or a promotion performance that indicates that the value of the jackpot game state is improved may be executed.

Further, for example, when a special figure game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Substrate configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, etc. as shown in FIG. 3, for example. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a firing control board, etc. are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also mounted. Various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards with conductor patterns on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit boards that are configured to have electrical components mounted on them to achieve specific electrical functions. This concept includes electronic circuit mounting boards.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it on), power from an AC power source such as AC 100V in an external power supply such as a commercial power supply is transferred to the power supply board 17. It can be supplied to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the production control board 12. The power supply board 17 includes, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) into direct current (DC), a power supply circuit for converting a predetermined direct current voltage into a specific direct current voltage (for example, 12 V direct current, 5 V direct current, etc.), etc. We are prepared.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and includes the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of the special drawing game (including management of reservations), execution of the general drawing game (including management of reservations), jackpot, etc. It has a function to control the gaming state, gaming state, etc.). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, and a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103. , a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 performs processing for controlling the progress of the game (processing for realizing the functions of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (variation patterns described later, production control commands described later, data such as various tables referred to when making various decisions described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are saved for a predetermined period even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be loaded into the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (gaming random numbers) used when controlling the progress of the game. The gaming random number may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 includes, for example, an input port into which various signals (detection signals to be described later) are input, and various signals (first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, normal symbol display device 20, first pending). It is configured to include an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display 25A, the second hold display 25B, the ordinary card hold display 25C, etc., and a solenoid drive signal.

The switch circuit 110 receives detection signals (when a game ball passes or A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch has been turned on) is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal means that the passage or entry of the game ball has been detected.

A reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 are taken into the switch circuit 110 and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of a control circuit such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, a watchdog timer built-in IC, or a system reset IC. Good to have. The power-off signal becomes an OFF state when a predetermined power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a predetermined value, and becomes an ON state when a period in which the predetermined power supply voltage is below a predetermined value continues for a power-off reference time or longer. Become. The clear signal is turned on, for example, when a clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed.

The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal to turn on the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory and the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door. Transmit.

A display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90 are connected to the main board 11. The door opening sensor 90 detects opening of the gaming machine frame 3 including the glass door frame 3a.

The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) is a production control board that sends production control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. Supply to 12. The production control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the production control board 12. The performance control command includes, for example, various decision results on the main board 11 (for example, display results of the special figure game (including jackpot type), fluctuation patterns used when executing the special figure game (details will be described later), etc. )), game status (for example, start and end of variable display, opening status of big prize opening, occurrence of winnings, number of pending memories, game status), occurrence of errors, etc. are included.

The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, and receives production control commands and performs production (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. It has a function of executing various notifications (including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notification of errors, notification of power outage recovery, etc.).

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control section 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The production control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing together with the display control unit 123 to execute the production (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the production control board 12; (including decisions, etc.). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The performance control CPU 120 displays execution of the performance based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (a signal that is output when an operation by a player is detected, and a signal that appropriately indicates the operation content). The control unit 123 may also be instructed.

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes a performance based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display a performance image by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display device 5 based on a performance execution instruction from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal that designates the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to output sound in synchronization with the display of the effect images and turn on/off the game effect lamps 9. or supplies a lamp signal (a signal specifying the lighting/extinguishing mode of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the sound specified by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. let

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamps 9, drives the game effect lamps 9 based on the lamp signals, and turns on/off the game effect lamps 9 in a manner specified by the lamp signals. do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the audio output and the lighting/extinguishing of the lamp.

Note that the production control CPU 120 executes audio output, control of lamp lighting/extinguishing (supply of sound designation signals and lamp signals, etc.), and control of the movable body 32 (supply of signals for operating the movable body 32, etc.) You can do it like this.

The random number circuit 124 updatesably counts numerical data indicating various random numbers (random numbers for effects) used to execute various effects. The random number for presentation may be updated by the presentation control CPU 120 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the production control board 12 is an input port for receiving production control commands transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and for transmitting various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, lamp signal). It consists of an output port and an output port.

Boards other than the main board 11, such as the production control board 12, the audio control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also referred to as subboards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained.

(Main operations of main board 11)
First, the main operations of the main board 11 will be explained. When power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Next, necessary initial settings are performed (step S2). The initial settings include stack pointer settings, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output ports, etc.), settings to make the RAM 102 accessible, and the like.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery conditions are satisfied (step S3). The recovery condition can be satisfied when the clear signal is off, there is backup data, and the backup RAM is normal. If, for example, a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed when power supply to the pachinko game machine 1 is started, an on-state clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an on-state clear signal is input, it may be determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not satisfied. It is sufficient that the backup data can be stored in the RAM 102, which serves as a backup RAM for game control. In step S3, the presence or absence of backup data, the presence or absence of data errors, etc. may be confirmed or inspected to determine whether the recovery conditions can be met.

If the recovery condition is satisfied (step S3; Yes), the setting confirmation process (step S5) is executed after executing the recovery process (step S4). Through the recovery process in step S4, a work area is set based on the contents stored in the RAM 102. By setting the work area using the backup data stored in the RAM 102, the gaming state can be restored to the state it was in when the power supply stopped. For example, if the special symbols are changing, the special symbol can be changed from the state before the stoppage. It is sufficient if the fluctuation of the symbols can be resumed.

If the recovery condition is not satisfied (step S3; No), initialization processing (step S6) is performed, and then setting change processing (step S7) is performed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clear process for clearing the flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and initial values are set in the work area by executing the clear process.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether predetermined setting confirmation conditions are satisfied. The setting confirmation condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting confirmation process in step S5 is executed when the recovery conditions including that the clear signal is in the OFF state are satisfied in step S3. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be satisfied only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the fact that the clear signal is in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

If the setting confirmation conditions are satisfied in the setting confirmation process in step S5, the setting confirmation state is reached in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A confirmation start command is sent. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by the display on the display monitor 29. When ending the setting confirmation state, a setting confirmation end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is stopped. When the game is in the stopped state, firing of game balls by operating the batting operation handle, detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, second special symbol display device 4B, and normal symbols are stopped. The display 20 may be controlled to stop displaying losing symbols or the like, or to display a display corresponding to a game stop state different from losing symbols. When the setting confirmation state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether predetermined setting change conditions are satisfied. The setting change condition is satisfied, for example, when the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is turned on when power supply is started. The setting change condition may include that the clear signal is in the on state.

If the setting change conditions are satisfied in the setting change process in step S7, the setting change state is entered in which the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed, and the settings are changed from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. A start change command is sent. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is sequentially updated and displayed every time an operation of the setting changeover switch 52 is detected. Thereafter, based on the setting key 51 being turned off by an operation by an attendant at the game parlor, etc., the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated storage). Turn off the light. When ending the setting change state, a setting change end command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the production control board 12.

When the pachinko game machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko game machine 1 may be placed in the game stop state, similar to when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the accompanying game stop state may also end.

On the production control board 12 side, when receiving the setting confirmation start command or the setting change start command, control may be performed to notify that the setting is being confirmed or that the setting is being changed. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light emitting member such as a game effect lamp 9 may be caused to emit light in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on, for example, by pressing down a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when the power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, then if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and step The setting change process in S7 is executed to enable control to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 and the setting confirmation process in step S5 are executed to enable control to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, the initialization process of step S6 is executed if the clear switch is on. However, if the clear switch is off, the recovery process in step S4 is executed, but the setting confirmation state is not controlled.

After executing the setting confirmation process or the setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). ). After that, loop processing begins. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined intervals (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

The CPU 103, which has executed such game control main processing, receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and, upon accepting the interrupt request, executes the game control timer interrupt processing shown in the flowchart of FIG. When starting the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. It is determined whether detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main-side error process, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is diagnosed for abnormality, and a warning can be issued if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpot occurrences, etc.) and starting information (starting Data such as information indicating the number of winnings, etc.) and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability variable state has been reached, etc.) are output (step S23).

Following the information output process, a gaming random number updating process is executed to update at least a part of the gaming random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of execution and suspension of the special symbol game, control of the jackpot game state, control of the game state, and the like.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal pattern process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby managing execution and suspension of the normal pattern game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the passing of the game ball to the passing gate 41), This makes it possible to control the opening of the variable winning ball device 6B based on the "normal map hit". The normal pattern game is executed by driving the normal pattern display 20, and the number of normal patterns pending is displayed by lighting the normal pattern pending display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt processing. After that, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set transmission control commands in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process is performed in which the effect control command set for transmission is transmitted to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12. After executing the command control process, interrupts are permitted, and then the game control timer interrupt process is ended.

FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 5 as the special symbol process process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a starting winning determination process (step S101).

In the starting winning determination process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a starting winning, store pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and update the pending storage number. When a starting prize occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of jackpot) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information. Furthermore, processing for pre-reading and determining display results and fluctuation patterns may be performed based on the extracted random number values. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, transmission settings are made to the production control board 12 to send a production control command for specifying the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and judgment results such as pre-reading judgment. be exposed. The performance control command at the time of start winning that is set to be transmitted is transferred from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. 4 after the special symbol process process is completed. transmitted to.

After executing the starting winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes any of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. In addition, in each process (steps S110 to S120) of the special symbol process process, transmission settings are made to transmit the performance control command corresponding to each process to the performance control board 12.

The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "0" (initial value). In this special symbol normal processing, it is determined whether or not to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of reservation information. In addition, in the special symbol normal processing, based on the random number value for determining the display result, the display result determines whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" and if it is a "jackpot", the jackpot type. is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (either a jackpot symbol or a losing symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set in accordance with the determined display result. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", and the special symbol normal processing ends. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed with priority over the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also referred to as special pattern 2 priority play). Further, the winning order of the game balls in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole may be stored, and the starting conditions for the special figure game may be established in the winning order (also referred to as winning order completion).

When making various decisions based on random numbers, various tables (tables in which decision values to be compared with random numbers are assigned to decision results) stored in the ROM 101 are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the production control board 12. In the production control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random value for determining the fluctuation pattern, based on the pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". It is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2", and the variation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern includes the execution time of the special figure game (special figure variation time) (also the execution time of the variable display of decorative symbols), the variable display mode of the ornamental symbols (the presence or absence of reach, etc.), and the variable display period of the decorative symbols. It specifies the content of the performance (type of reach performance, etc.), and is also called a variable display pattern.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "2". This special symbol variation process includes a process of making settings for varying the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and second special symbol display device 4B, and the elapsed time since the special symbol started to fluctuate. It includes processes such as measuring. It is also determined whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Then, when the elapsed time after starting the variation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "3" and the special symbol variation process ends.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is "3". In this special symbol stopping process, the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the finalized special symbol that becomes the display result of the special symbol is stopped and displayed (derived). Contains processing to configure settings for Then, when the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4". When the display result is "lost", the game state is also updated when the time saving state or the variable probability state is controlled, and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special symbol process flag is updated, the special symbol stop processing ends.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "4". This jackpot opening pre-processing includes processing to start a round in the jackpot game state and set the jackpot opening state based on the display result being a "jackpot", etc. It is. When the big winning opening is opened, a process is executed to supply a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door. At this time, for example, depending on the jackpot type, the opening upper limit period for keeping the jackpot open and the upper limit number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", and the jackpot release preprocessing is completed.

The jackpot opening process in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process of measuring the elapsed time since the jackpot opening is opened, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from when the jackpot opening is opened, and based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, the jackpot opening This includes processing for determining whether it is time to return the switch from an open state to a closed state. Then, when returning the big prize opening to the closed state, after executing a process such as stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6", The jackpot opening process ends.

The jackpot opening process in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "6". This jackpot opening process includes a process to determine whether the number of rounds to open the jackpot has reached the set upper limit number of runs, and a process to enter the jackpot game state when the upper limit number of runs has been reached. This includes processing to make settings for terminating the process. When the number of executions of the round has not reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5", while when the number of executions of the round has reached the upper limit number of executions, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5". The value is updated to "7". When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the jackpot release post-processing ends.

The jackpot end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "7". This jackpot ending process includes a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the period in which the ending performance is executed as a performance operation to notify the end of the jackpot gaming state, and a process of waiting until the waiting time corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state has changed. It includes processing to perform various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such settings are made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot ending process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured such that the probability of winning a jackpot and the ball hitting rate change depending on the set value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) according to the set value, the jackpot winning probability and ball launch rate are changed. For example, the set value has six levels from 1 to 6, where 6 has the highest probability of winning the jackpot, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the probability of winning the jackpot decreases. In this example, when 6 is set as the setting value, it is the highest advantage for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1, the advantage gradually decreases. . If the probability of winning a jackpot changes according to the set value, the ball launch rate may also change according to the set value. While the probability of winning a jackpot is constant regardless of the set value, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may vary depending on the set value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set any one of a plurality of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are notified by transmitting a setting value designation command from the main board 11 side to the performance control board 12 side.

FIG. 7 shows an example of the configuration of the display result determination table. FIG. 7(A) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and FIG. 7(B) shows a configuration example of the display result determination table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second A configuration example of a second special figure display result determination table used in the case of a figure is shown. The display result determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 101. In the display result determination table, the hit determination value compared with the random value MR1 is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is a variable display result of the special symbol, according to the set value. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is randomly updated in the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result determination table, a common display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special figure is the first special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the setting value of the first variable special figure is 2 to 6 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special figure is the second special figure, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, it is in the range of 0 to 65535. It is a numerical value that can take a value, and among the hit judgment values that are compared with the random number MR1 for judging the special figure display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", and 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "time saving". Other numerical ranges are assigned as "outliers". In addition, if the setting value is 1 and the gaming state is variable probability, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Assigned. Incidentally, the case where the variable special figure has a setting value of 2 to 6 in the second special figure and the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Here, if we pay attention to the numerical range of the hit judgment value assigned to "Jackpot" and "Time-saving loss" in each display result judgment table, as shown in Fig. 8, when the gaming state is normal state or time-saving state In the first special figure display result determination table, the range from 1020 to 1237 of the hit determination values is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, if the setting value is 1, the common hit determination value that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535 is selected. Only numbers within the numerical range (1020-1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the non-common numerical range is added to the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values. Numbers within the range are assigned a "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the display result determination table for the first special figure when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65535 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65535, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In addition, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 of the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the setting value. It is set to a common numerical range.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 to setting In the case of the value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each set value from 1347 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, and the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5. , and the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1347 to 1674.

In other words, in the first special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is variable probability state, when the set value is 1, among the hit determination values that can take values in the range of 0 to 65535, the common numerical range ( 1020 to 1346) are assigned to the "jackpot", but if the set value is 2 or more, the jackpot judgment value within the range of the common numerical value range plus the non-common numerical range A numerical value is assigned to a “jackpot.” Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1347 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

In the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the range from 1020 to 1237 among the hit determination values is the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. is set to a common numerical range.

In addition, when the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining jackpots is set (1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot"), while setting value 2 ~ In the case of the setting value 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value from 1238 is set as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. The non-common numerical range of this jackpot judgment value is the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, and the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5. , the setting value 6 is set in the range of 1238 to 1346, respectively.

In other words, in this pachinko game machine 1, when the setting value is 1 in the second special symbol display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time saving state, the value can be taken in the range of 0 to 65535. Among the hit judgment values, only the numbers within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to the "jackpot", while if the set value is 2 or more, the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment values is assigned. Numerical values within the range plus the non-common numerical value range are assigned to the "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical value range increases from 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the jackpot probability is set at 1020 as the standard value for the jackpot determination value (jackpot standard value), and as the set value increases, the non-common numerical range that is continuous with the common numerical range increases, so the jackpot probability increases. go.

Furthermore, in the second special figure display result determination table when the gaming state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range from 65317 to 65425 among the winning determination values determines whether the time-saving win or loss occurs regardless of the set value. It is set in the common numerical range of the time saving judgment value. If we pay attention to the case where the setting value is 6, as mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 of the hit judgment values are set in the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and there is also a time saving function. The loss judgment value is in the range of 65317 to 65425, with 65317 as the reference value for loss with time saver (loss reference value with time saver), in a numerical range different from the jackpot judgment value range (1020 to 1346) of the setting value 6. This setting prevents the numerical range of the time saving loss judgment value from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value which changes according to each set value.

In the display result determination table for the second special figure when the gaming state is in a variable probability state, the range from 1020 to 1346 among the hit determination values is the common numerical value of the jackpot determination value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The range is set. The characteristics of the other second special figure display result determination table are the same as the first special figure display result determination table.

As mentioned above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, regardless of the setting value, 65317 to When the range of 65535 is set to the common numerical range with and without time saving, and the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the setting value will be changed in both the normal state and the time saving state. Regardless, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as a common numerical range with and without time saving. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state is set, the rate at which the variable display result is a loss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so depending on the setting value, the gambling can be prevented from becoming excessively high. Furthermore, regarding the time saving error, which is assigned a common judgment value number for each setting value, all setting values are set in a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the reference value for the time saving error, so the display is variable. This makes it possible to reduce the processing load on the CPU 103 related to determining whether the result is a time saving or not.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, the settable setting values are six from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be 5 or less or 7 or more. . Furthermore, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko game machine 1, the more advantageous it may be to the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different ratios depending on the setting value based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined by a common ratio regardless of the setting value. The variation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of determination values in the variation pattern determination table. Alternatively, the variation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The setting value may be suggested by the frequency with which normal reach and super reach are performed by varying the execution rate of normal reach and super reach depending on the setting value. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reach and super reach may be the same regardless of the setting value. In addition, it may be possible to perform arbitrary setting suggestion effects at different rates depending on the setting value.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, the main operations in the production control board 12 will be explained. When the effect control board 12 receives power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes effect control main processing as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the production control main process shown in FIG. Performs register settings for the installed CTC (counter/timer circuit). In addition, initial operation control processing is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform initial operations of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return to the origin position, and control to perform predetermined operation checks.

Thereafter, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to an on state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on, for example, a register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the process waits.

Furthermore, on the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving a production control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt that occurs when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the production control INT signal being turned on, the production control CPU 120 automatically disables interrupts, but if a CPU that does not automatically disable interrupts is used, interrupts are disabled. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI order). The production control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the production control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port included in the I/O 125 that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The production control command taken in at this time is stored in a production control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. After that, the production control CPU 120 sets the interrupt permission, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various production control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the production control command reception buffer, the read production control commands are Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read performance control command may be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the performance control command received and the content specified by the performance control command can be confirmed in the performance control process processing. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the performance control command specifies a gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the production control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process processing, for example, the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the movable body 32. Control is performed to operate various presentation devices, such as driving operations. Further, regarding the content of control of performance operations using various performance devices, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are performed in accordance with performance control commands transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing in step S76, a performance random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 are updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Other processes may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S76 of FIG. 9 as the production control process process. In the performance control process shown in FIG. 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a pre-read notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-read preview setting process, for example, based on the performance control command at the time of start-up winning that is transmitted from the main board 11, determination, determination, setting, etc. for executing the pre-read preview performance are performed. Further, processing for displaying a pending display is executed based on the number of pending memories specified from the production control command.

After executing the process of step S161, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S175, depending on the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process of determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative patterns on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. Contains such as. When it is determined to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5, the value of the production process flag is updated to "1", and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and fluctuation pattern specified by the production control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of variable display of the decorative pattern, the reach effect, etc. It determines whether or not various performances such as preview performances are to be executed, their mode, execution start timing, and the like. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the performance) that reflects the determination result etc. is set. Thereafter, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start executing the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is ended. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start variable display of decorative symbols.

The variable display effect processing in step S172 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. , driving the movable body 32 , outputting audio and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the audio control board 13 , and outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14 . Various performance controls are executed during variable display of decorative patterns, such as turning on/off/flashing the game effect lamp 9 and decorative LEDs by outputting the output. After performing such performance control, for example, a termination code indicating the end of the variable display of decorative patterns has been read from the performance control pattern, or a command has been received from the main board 11 specifying that fixed decorative patterns should be stopped and displayed. In response to what has been done, etc., the determined decorative pattern that becomes the display result of the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed. When the fixed decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the value of the production process flag is updated to "3", and the variable display production process is completed.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process that is executed when the value of the production process flag is "3". In this special figure winning waiting process, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a performance control command has been received from the main board 11 that designates starting a jackpot game state. Then, when receiving a production control command specifying to start a jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is updated to "4". In addition, if the waiting time for receiving the command elapses without receiving a command specifying the start of the jackpot game state, the display result in the special figure game is determined to be a "loss", and the presentation process flag is flagged. The value of is updated to the initial value "0". When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process for each special figure ends.

The jackpot performance process in step S174 is a process that is executed when the value of the performance process flag is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot game state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot game state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot production process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 to specify ending the jackpot game state, the value of the production process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending production process. ” and ends the jackpot performance process.

The ending effect processing in step S175 is a process that is executed when the value of the effect process flag is "7". In this ending performance processing, the performance control CPU 120 sets a performance control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, for example, and performs various performance controls of the ending performance at the end of the jackpot game state based on the setting contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the production process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending production process is ended.

(Variation of basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 explained in the basic explanation above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of a winning, but the game media is enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of a winning. It may also be an enclosed game machine.

Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") may be displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol does not need to be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" does not need to be displayed as a display result).

In the above basic explanation, the pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as a gaming machine, but medals are inserted and a predetermined number of bets are set, and multiple types of symbols are rotated according to the operation of the operating lever by the player. A slot machine that can execute a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player when the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols when the symbols are stopped in response to the operation of the stop button (for example, a big bonus , regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter referred to as bonus, etc.).

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form in which they are distributed and provided to a computer device included in the pachinko game machine 1 on a removable recording medium, but are provided in advance in a form such as a computer device etc. The software may be distributed by being installed on the storage device of the user. Furthermore, by providing a communication processing section, the program and data for realizing the present invention can be distributed by being downloaded from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. I don't mind.

The game can be executed not only by attaching a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via a communication line in internal memory, etc. It may also be executed directly using hardware resources of other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game may be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices via a network.

In addition, in this specification, expressions that compare various proportions such as the execution rate of production (expressions such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) do not mean that one is a proportion of "0%". May include. For example, one of the ratios is "0%" and the other is "100%" or a ratio of less than "100%".

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 069SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 069SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 11-1 to 11-64. In addition, in the explanation of each step of the flowchart in this feature section 069SG, for example, the part written as "Step S1" is abbreviated as "S1" or "069SGS1", and "Normal reach" is referred to as "N reach" or "Super reach". is sometimes abbreviated as "SP reach". Further, in the characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG, "variation" may be referred to as "variable display". In addition, configurations that are similar to those of the pachinko game machine 1 described in the basic explanation or have different shapes, arrangement positions, etc. but have similar functions will be designated by the same reference numerals and detailed explanations will be omitted. In addition, in the following, the front side of Fig. 11-1 is the front (front, front) side of the pachinko game machine 1, and the back side is the back (rear) side, and the top, bottom, left, and right sides of the pachinko game machine 1 when viewed from the front side. The explanation will be based on the direction. Note that the front surface of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment is the facing surface that faces the player who plays the game with the pachinko game machine 1.

[Embodiment 1]
Embodiment 1 of the feature section 069SG will be described below. As explained in FIG. 7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a jackpot display result set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, 1 to 6) with different display ratios. It will be explained as a gaming machine in which the jackpot probability is set to approximately 1/319, and the jackpot probability is not settable.

Furthermore, even if the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times) in a row with low certainty after the gaming machine is powered on (when RAM clear processing is executed) or after a jackpot occurs, When the next jackpot does not occur, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state B (also referred to as a relief time-saving state or relief time-saving state) among a plurality of types of time-saving states. This relief time reduction is provided to help players who have not won a jackpot despite playing games for a long period of time (for example, to reduce investment in games). , in this example, is a gaming state called "play time".

In this embodiment, when controlled to jackpot A among multiple types of jackpots, variable display is performed 110 times in time saving state A (low probability/high base state) among multiple types of time saving states. While the number of variable displays from the end of the time saving state A to the arrival of the rescue time saving is 790 times, if it is controlled to either jackpot B or jackpot C among multiple types of jackpots, the probability variable state (high probability /high base state), the variable display is performed 110 times, so the number of variable displays remaining from the end of the probability variable state to the arrival of the relief time reduction is 900 times. Further, in the present embodiment, the number of variable display times in the time saving state B (low probability/high base state) based on the value of the rescue time saving number counter becoming "0" is 1100 times.

In this embodiment, in the variable display when the rescue time shortening is reached, by displaying a shutter image (see FIGS. 11-23 (B) and (C)) on the entire screen of the image display device 5, the variable display before the rescue time shortening is In the display, after reducing the visibility of the first background image (see Figure 11-23 (A)) corresponding to the normal state that was displayed as the background image, the third background image corresponding to the shortening of rescue time is displayed as the background image. (See Figure 11-23(D)).

In this embodiment, the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 is formed as a left gaming area where game balls can flow down, and the right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is It is formed in the right game area where game balls can flow down. A game ball weakly launched by the firing device flows down a first path in the left gaming area, and a gaming ball strongly launched by the firing device flows down a second path in the right gaming area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning ball device 7 is formed with a first big winning hole and a second big winning hole along the downward direction of the game balls. The first big prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 069SG2A (see Figure 11-2) to open and close the big winning opening door (not shown), which allows the game ball to enter the open state and the game ball to enter the closed state where the game ball cannot enter. It is possible to change the state. The second grand prize opening is opened and closed by driving the solenoid 069SG2B (see Figure 11-3) to open and close the grand prize opening door (not shown). It is possible to change the state.

Furthermore, in the first grand prize opening, a first count switch 069SG023A that can detect game balls is provided, and in the second grand prize opening, a second count switch 069SG023B that can detect game balls is provided. There is.

In other words, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area (first route) can be won in the general winning opening 10 and the first starting winning opening formed by the winning ball device 6A, and can be won in the right gaming area (second route). ), the game balls flowing down enter the second starting winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the general winning hole 10, the first big winning hole or the second big winning hole formed by the special variable winning ball device 7. It is possible to pass through the passage gate 41.

Note that the switch circuit 110 in this embodiment is connected to a first count switch 069SG023A, a second count switch 069SG023B, and a jackpot start switch 069SG024 built in the jackpot start gate 069SG042.

A plurality of obstacle nails are arranged between the winning ball device 6A, the variable winning ball device 6B, and the special variable winning ball device 7. For this reason, the game balls flowing down the left gaming area cannot win the second starting prize opening or the big winning opening, and the gaming balls flowing down the right gaming area cannot win the first starting prize opening. There is.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, at a predetermined position of the game board 2 of the pachinko game machine 1 in this embodiment (for example, the lower left position of the game area), there is a first special figure that can display a variable display of the first special figure. 1 Special symbol display device 069SG004A, 2nd special symbol display device 069SG004B capable of variable display of the 2nd special symbol, 1st reservation display device 069SG025A capable of displaying the 1st reserved memory number, capable of displaying the 2nd reserved memory number A second reservation display 069SG025B, a normal symbol display 069SG020 that can perform variable display of ordinary symbols, a regular symbol reservation display 069SG025C that can display the number of stored regular symbols, and a number of rounds of the jackpot game during a jackpot game ( Round indicator 069SG131 that can display jackpot type), jackpot game state, high accuracy/high base state (variable probability state), low accuracy/high base state (time saving state), etc. A game in which a game ball is launched toward the right gaming area. The right-handed lamp 069SG132 lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability variable state), the variable-probability lamp 069SG133 lights up in the high-accuracy/high-base state (probability-variable state), and the low-accuracy/high-base state (probability variable state) and the low-accuracy/high-base state (time-saving state). A game information display section is provided in which lighted time-saving lamps 069SG134 are collectively arranged. In addition, when the gaming state is the normal state, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 lights up exceptionally from the timing when the variable display stops when the variable display result becomes a jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 transmits gaming information (signals) to external devices such as a management computer of the gaming hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed via a terminal board (not shown). It is equipped with an information output circuit for output.

In this embodiment, the second big winning opening is provided with a V winning opening and an outlet located downstream of the V winning opening. Further, a variable V winning ball device (V lid) is provided on the upstream side of the V winning opening. The variable V winning ball device changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid. In other words, the game ball flowing down inside the second big winning hole can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the open state, and can pass through the V winning hole when the variable V winning ball device is in the closed state. It is assumed that the water cannot pass through the water and flows down to the outlet.

As shown in FIG. 11-2, the main board 11 includes a V switch 069SG023B1 that can detect, via the switch circuit 110, that a game ball has passed through the V winning hole provided downstream of the second big winning hole. and an ejection switch 069SG023B2 that can detect that the game ball has passed through the ejection port.

Further, a vibration motor 61 built in the push button 31B and a movable body motor 207 for operating the movable body 32 are connected to the effect control board 12. In addition, the lamp control board 14 includes a right-handed LED 069SG031 for encouraging right-handed operation, a first special symbol LED 069SG032 that lights up during variable display of the first special symbol, and an LED 069SG032 that lights up during variable display of the second special symbol. A second special figure LED069SG033 that lights up, a first hold LED069SG034A that lights up when the first hold memory number is 1 to 2, and a first hold LED069SG034B that lights up when the first hold memory number is 3 to 4. , a second hold LED069SG035A that lights up when the second hold memory number is 1 to 2, a second hold LED069SG035B that lights up when the second hold memory number is 3 to 4, and a built-in push button 31B. The button LED 62, the movable body LED 208 built into the movable body 32, and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 provided in the gaming machine frame 3 are connected.

FIG. 11-3(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 11-3(A), in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, in addition to the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the fluctuation pattern determination. Numerical data indicating each of the random number MR3 for the normal figure display result determination, the random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4, is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by updating software in the CPU 103 using different random counters, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

Note that although this embodiment exemplifies a mode in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 11-3(A), the present invention is not limited to this, and may be The range of each random number value MR1 to MR5 may be varied depending on the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes a program read from the ROM 101, and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, the CPU 103 is capable of generating all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing a random number generation program.

The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores, in addition to game control programs, various table data used to control the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data that constitutes a plurality of determination tables prepared for the CPU 103 to make various determinations and decisions. The ROM 101 also contains table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used by the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11, and variable display of each symbol in the variable display of special symbols, normal symbols, etc. A variation pattern determination table and the like that store a plurality of types of variation patterns serving as modes are stored.

FIG. 11-3(B) shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 069SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 069SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 069SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature part 069SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot gaming state is controlled becomes higher (in this feature part 069SG) Approximately 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

The determination table stored in the ROM 101 includes, in addition to the display result determination table for the first special symbol and the display result determination table for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 7, the jackpot type determination table (C1) shown in FIG. In addition to the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), the fluctuation pattern determination table, the regular symbol display result determination table (not shown), the regular symbol fluctuation pattern It includes a decision table (not shown) and the like.

Note that the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is configured such that the probability of winning the jackpot (ball exit rate) does not change depending on the setting value; ) may be changed.

(Jackpot type determination table)
FIG. 11-3 (C1) and FIG. 11-3 (C2) are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, in Figure 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the first starting prize hole (that is, when the first special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table for when Further, in FIG. 11-3 (C1), the jackpot type is determined using the reserved memory based on the game ball entering the second starting prize hole (that is, when the second special symbol is variablely displayed). This is a table of cases.

The jackpot type determination table determines whether the jackpot type is one of jackpot A to jackpot C based on the random number (MR2) for determining the jackpot when it is determined that the variable display result is to be used as a jackpot symbol. This is a table that is referenced to determine the

Here, the jackpot type in this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 11-3(D). In this embodiment, the jackpot types are provided as jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C, in which time saving control is executed for a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be achieved by entering the V winning hole after the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and the maximum after the end of the jackpot game. This is also a jackpot in which variable probability control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this embodiment, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state in which the period of being in the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and a long open state in which the period of being in the open state is long. state (for example, 15 seconds). Jackpot A is when the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and jackpot B and jackpot C are when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. shall be.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short-circuit open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect it, it's essentially a regular jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot B" changes the second jackpot in the first round to an open state that is advantageous for the player, and the first jackpot in the second to sixth rounds that is advantageous to the player. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability change control is executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to 10th rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is two or less, or Four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C1), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-3 (C2), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball is likely to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%. After the jackpot game ends, both probability change control and time saving control are carried out. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot game ends. and time-saving control are both implemented.

In this example, even in the case of jackpot A, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is short-circuited, but it is extremely rare, so in the case of jackpot A, The explanation will be made on the assumption that no prize is won and probability variable control is not executed. In addition, even in the case of jackpot B and jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare that you will not be able to win a prize when the V lid is in a long open state, so it will be jackpot B and jackpot C. In this case, the description will be made on the assumption that V is won and probability variable control is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for determining the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined based on the special figure display result. The determination may be made using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, as the jackpot type for the second special symbol, a form having jackpots B and C in which probability change control and time saving control can be executed 110 times after the end of the jackpot game state is exemplified, The present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a jackpot D may be provided in which the time saving control is performed 1009 times (variable probability state: 110 times + time saving state A: 899 times) after the end of the jackpot gaming state. By doing this, the interest is increased because there is a high chance of hitting the jackpot next time, and even if the probability variable control ends without a jackpot occurring in the probability variable state 110 times after the end of the jackpot D, the time saving state A (low After executing variable display 899 times without a jackpot in the (accurate/high base state), by executing one variable display in the normal state, it will be further controlled to the time saving state B (relief time saving state), which will be described later. This will improve your interest.

(Number of time savings)
FIG. 11-4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the number of time reductions for each transition trigger. As shown in FIG. 11-4, in this example, when jackpot A occurs and the game ball does not enter the variable probability area, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) low probability The time saving state A is controlled 110 times (in this example, it is controlled to BATTLE RUSH where the number of time saving is 110 times. Also, either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball is placed in the probability variable area. When winning a prize, (1) time saving control is performed 110 times, and (2) probability variable state where variable probability control is performed 110 times (in this example, a polar battle rush with 110 time saving times). In addition, when variable display is performed 900 times without being controlled to hit the jackpot in a low probability state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low probability control is performed 1100 times. Controlled to time saving state B (in this example, time saving number of times 1100 times / 1100 BATTLE RUSH (play / 1100 BATTLE RUSH)).However, after time saving state B ends, it is controlled to hit the jackpot in a low probability state. Even if the fluctuation is repeated 900 times without being changed, the time saving state B will not be controlled again based on this fluctuation.

In addition, when the time saving and missed symbols are stopped and displayed in the normal state, (1) time saving control is performed 1100 times, and (2) low accuracy control is performed 1100 times (time saving state B (in this example, time saving). It may be controlled by 1100 play/1100 battle rush). In this case, even if the time-saving winning/losing symbol is stopped and displayed in the high base state (probability variable state, time-saving state), the game state transition control is not performed (it is not controlled to the time-saving state with the number of time-savings being 1100 times). This is to avoid reducing the degree of relief for the player. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the time-saving state is changed to a time-saving state with a number of time-saving times of 1100 times based on the time-saving losing symbol being stopped and displayed when the control is in a variable probability state where it is easy to hit the jackpot, the player This is not preferable because the control will change from an advantageous state to an unfavorable state. Therefore, it is only necessary to configure the game to be controlled to the time saving state of 1100 times only when the game state being controlled when the time saving and missed symbols are stopped and displayed is the normal state.

Note that the relief time reduction attainment rate is the rate at which the time reduction state is controlled via the relief time reduction. Since the time saving state via the relief time saving is controlled by performing variable display n times (900 times in this example) without being controlled by the jackpot gaming state, the relief time saving attainment rate K is as follows. It can be calculated as follows.

K={(1-ML)^n}×100
(K=Relief time saving arrival rate, ML=Jackpot probability, n=Number of variable displays)

Specifically, for example, if the jackpot probability ML in the present embodiment is about 1/319, the relief time saving attainment rate K is 5.9%. In addition, in the case of a gaming machine that allows setting of a setting value, if the setting value with a lower jackpot probability is set, the higher the relief time shortening attainment rate becomes, the player can be rescued even with a setting value with a low jackpot probability. can do.

(variation pattern)
FIGS. 11-5 to 11-8 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the fluctuation pattern determination table in this embodiment.

In Figure 11-5, (A) is a specific example of a variation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0 to 2 in the normal state, and (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 3. A concrete example of a pattern determination table, (C) A concrete example of a variable pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is shown.

As shown in Figure 11-5 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0 to 2, 97 determination values are assigned to non-reach B, and SP reach A is assigned 97 determination values. Two determination values are assigned, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-5 (B), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 3, 97 determination values are assigned to shortened non-reach B, and SP reach A Two determination values are assigned to SP reach B, and one determination value is assigned to SP reach B.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-5(C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP non-via B, and SP 40 determination values are assigned to reach A, and 50 determination values are assigned to SP reach B.

In addition, in Figure 11-6, (A) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0 in a variable probability state, and (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. (C) A specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), in the variation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 2 judgment values are assigned to SP reach C. A determination value of 1 is assigned, and 3 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-6 (B), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 85 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, Ten determination values are assigned to reach A, two determination values are assigned to SP reach C, and three determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0, five determination values are assigned to SP non-via A, and SP reach C 80 determination values are assigned to SP reach D, and 15 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

In addition, in Figure 11-7, (A) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories in time saving state A is 0, and (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. (C) A specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-7 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0, 95 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 5 judgment values are assigned to SP reach E. A judgment value is assigned. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-7 (B), in the variation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 90 judgment values are assigned to shortened non-reach A, Five determination values are assigned to reach A, and five determination values are assigned to SP reach E.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-7(C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, five determination values are assigned to SP non-via A, and SP 95 determination values are assigned to reach E.

In addition, in FIG. 11-8, (A) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0 in time saving state B (relief time saving state), and (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to (C) A specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a loss in the case of 3, and (C) a concrete example of a fluctuation pattern determination table for a jackpot in a case where the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

As shown in Figure 11-8 (A), in the fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0, 97 judgment values are assigned to non-reach A, and 3 judgment values are assigned to SP reach D. A judgment value is assigned. In addition, as shown in Figure 11-8 (B), in the variation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 97 judgment values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach, and SP Three determination values are assigned to reach D.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-8(C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to SP reach D.

As shown in Figures 11-6(A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for a loss that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in the variable probability state is approximately 8.2 seconds {(( 7s x 95) + (40s x 2) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 8.2}, average time of variable display time of variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 is approximately 4.8 seconds {((3s×85)+(7s×10)+(40s×2)+(25s×3))÷100=4.8}.

Here, assuming that the first variable display after the definite variable state starts, the number of pending memories is 0, and the number of pending memories for the 2nd to 110th variable display is 1 to 3, then the number of pending memories that can be determined in the variable state is The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8×109))÷110=4.83}.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the variable probability state is approximately 51.1 seconds {( (22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for jackpot that can be determined in the probability variable state is approximately 51 .1 second.

As shown in Figures 11-7(A) and (B), when the number of pending memories is 0 in time-saving state A, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined is approximately 9.15 seconds {( (7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3s×90)+(7s×5)+(50s×5))÷100=5.55}.

Here, assuming that time saving state A is started and the first variable display has a pending memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a pending memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55×109))/110=5.58}.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in the time saving state A, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for the jackpot that can be determined is about 62.8 seconds { ((22s×5)+(55s×95))÷100=62.85}.

As shown in Figures 11-8(A) and (B), when the number of pending memories is 0 in time saving state B, the average time of variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined is approximately 7.54 seconds {( (7s x 97) + (25s x 3)) ÷ 100 = 7.54}, when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5s×97)+(25s×3))÷100=2.205}.

Here, assuming that the first variable display after time saving state B starts, the number of pending memories is 0, and the number of pending memories for 2 to 1100 variable displays is 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205×1099))/1100=2.20985}.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 in time saving state B, the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for jackpot that can be determined is about 40 seconds. , the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for the jackpot that can be determined in the time saving state B is about 40 seconds.

In this way, when the number of pending memories is 0, the number of fluctuation patterns for failure that can be determined is 3 for the definite variable state, 2 for the time-saving state A, and 2 for the time-saving state B. In the case of 3, the number of fluctuation patterns for failure that can be determined is 4 for the variable probability state, 3 for the time saving state A, and 2 for the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable variation pattern for failure is 4.83 seconds in the variable probability state, 5.58 seconds in the time saving state A, and 2.2 seconds in the time saving state B.

Further, when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined is three for the variable probability state, two for the time saving state A, and one for the time saving state B.

Further, the average time of the variable display time of the determinable jackpot variation pattern is 51.1 seconds in the variable probability state, 62.8 seconds in the time saving state A, and 40 seconds in the time saving state B.

In other words, the number of types of determinable variation patterns for failure decreases in the order of probability variation state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probability variation state > time saving state A > time saving state B), and the number of types of determinable variation patterns for loss decreases in the order of probability variation state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probable variation state > time saving state A > time saving state B). The average display time becomes shorter in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (variable probability state > time saving state A > time saving state B).

In addition, the types of determinable jackpot fluctuation patterns decrease in the order of variable probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B (probable variable state > time-saving state A > time-saving state B), and the variable display of determinable jackpot fluctuation patterns The average time becomes shorter in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (probable variable state>time saving state A>time saving state B). In this way, the time-saving state B has fewer types of variation patterns and has a shorter variable display period than the variable probability state and the time-saving state A. In other words, a monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, although the number of types of variable patterns for losses that can be determined and the number of types of variable patterns for jackpots are larger in the variable probability state than in the time saving state A, the number in the variable time saving state A is larger than in the variable probability state. Alternatively, the variable probability state and the time saving state A may be the same.

Further, the various variation pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 11-5 to 11-8 are commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In particular, in the time-saving state B, the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. Compared to the variable probability state and time saving state A, the number of types of variable patterns that can be determined is smaller and the average time of variable display time is shorter, so that monotonous and efficient variable display is performed.

In addition, different variation pattern determination tables may be used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol.

In addition, if a V winning occurs in the jackpot gaming state due to "Jackpot A", like "Jackpot B" and "Jackpot C", the probability variable state where the probability variable control and time saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state Since the fluctuation pattern is controlled, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-6. In addition, if a V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state due to "jackpot B" or "jackpot C", similarly to "jackpot A", time saving state A where only the time saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state Therefore, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-7. In other words, the fluctuation pattern determination table is not based on the fluctuation pattern determination table depending on the jackpot type, and since irregular states may occur in the jackpot gaming state, the fluctuation pattern judgment table is not tied to the state after the jackpot gaming state ends. The fluctuation pattern determination table obtained is used.

In other words, in a gaming machine that can be controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., V winning hole, etc.) in an advantageous state (e.g., jackpot game state), the V If a V win occurs in a jackpot game state where a win is possible, the system is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state, while if a V win does not occur in a jackpot game state where a V win is possible, the corresponding In the case where the first time saving state is controlled after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and when the V winning does not occur in the jackpot gaming state where it is difficult to win a V winning, the control is controlled to the second time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state, The first time saving state and the second time saving state are common time saving states, and the one variable display period in the first time saving state and the second time saving state is the one variable display period in the time saving state B of this embodiment. It is preferable that it is shorter than the period.

(Fluctuating pattern without reach)
In this embodiment, variation patterns that do not involve reach ("shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "super shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-via A, SP non-reach") are used. "Viaway B") is a variation pattern in which a combination of decorative symbols indicating that a reach is not established and the variable display result becomes a "miss" or "jackpot" after the start of the variable display is stopped and displayed. "Shortened non-reach A, shortened non-reach B", "ultra-shortened non-reach", "non-reach A, non-reach B", "SP non-via A, SP non-via B" are collectively referred to as "non-reach" or "shortened non-reach B". Also called "non-reach variation pattern." Incidentally, "SP non-via A, SP non-via B" is a non-reach variation pattern for a jackpot in which a reach or SP reach is not established and a jackpot is achieved.

In this embodiment, among the variation patterns that do not involve reach, the variable display period when it is determined to be a "non-reach A" variation pattern is 7000 ms, and the variation pattern is determined to be a "SP non-via A" variation pattern. The variable display period in this case is 7000+15000ms, the variable display period in the case where the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach B" is 12000ms, and the variable display period in the case where it is determined to be the variation pattern in "SP non-via B". is 12000+15000ms, the variable display period when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach A" variation pattern is 3000ms, and the variable display period when it is determined to be a "shortened non-reach B" variation pattern is 5000ms. , the variable display period is 1500 ms when it is determined that the variation pattern is "ultra-shortened non-reach". Among these, the variation pattern of "super shortened non-reach" is a variation pattern that can only be determined in time saving state B, and when controlled in other gaming states (time saving state A, probability variable state) where time saving control is executed. The variable display period is shorter than any of the variation patterns determined in .

(Variation pattern with super reach)
In this embodiment, a reach state is established in the fluctuation patterns that involve super reach ("SP reach A", "SP reach B", "SP reach C", "SP reach D", "SP reach E"). Later, as an SP reach effect, a bowling effect (SP reach A) in which an ally character and an enemy character bowl to notify whether or not they have won a jackpot, and a battle between an ally character and an enemy character. A battle performance (SP reach B to E) is executed to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won, and the final display result is determined and stopped after the bowling performance and battle performance are finished. Here, if the final display result is "lost", an effect in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat effect) is executed. On the other hand, if the final display result is a "jackpot", either a performance in which the ally character wins against the enemy character (victory performance), or a performance in which the ally character is defeated by the enemy character (defeat performance) is performed. After the execution, a performance (resurrection performance) in which the ally character revives and wins against the enemy character is performed.

Incidentally, "variable pattern without reach" is a variable pattern in which a variable display result is displayed without the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being in a predetermined reach mode. It should be noted that even if there is a reach promotion such as a "reach notice" which will be described later, it includes a variation pattern in which a variable display result is displayed without finally achieving a reach mode. In addition, "variable pattern with super reach" means that after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes a predetermined reach mode, the reach effect develops and the SP reach effect is executed, and then the display result is displayed. It is a fluctuating pattern.

In addition, super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (SP reach A to E) are given in the jackpot game state after the variable display part where the variable display of decorative symbols is executed and the victory performance and revival performance of the variable display part. It includes a post performance part that specifiably announces the expected number of pitches.

The variable display period of the variable display part is 45,000ms for SP reach A, 80,000ms for SP reach B, 40,000ms for SP reach C, 25,000ms for SP reach D, and 50,000ms for SP reach E, and for each type of SP reach A to E. It's different. On the other hand, the execution period of the post performance part is 15000 ms, which is common to SP reach A to E. In this embodiment, the predetermined period (for example, 15000 ms) in the variable display period is assigned to the post-production part, but the predetermined period may be different depending on the type of SP reach. Further, the fanfare period in the jackpot game state or the like may be assigned to the post performance part.

In addition, in this embodiment, all the variation patterns that involve reach are set as super reach variation patterns, and an example is illustrated in which a normal reach variation pattern is not set, but the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach variation A pattern may be set.

(Production control command)
FIG. 11-9(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the production control command in this embodiment. The production control command has, for example, a 2-byte configuration, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of MODE data is always set to "1", and the first bit of EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in FIG. 11-9(A) is an example, and other command formats may be used. Further, in this example, the control command is made up of two control signals, but the number of control signals making up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-9(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. . Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in the special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern specification command that specifies a variation pattern (variation time) of symbols, etc. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that can be arbitrarily set according to the content of the instruction by the production control command. Note that in the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the variation pattern to be specified.

Command 8C00H is a variable display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates variable display results such as special symbols and decorative symbols. In the variable display result specification command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9 (B), the determination result of whether the variable display result is a "loss" or "jackpot" ("loss with time saving") is determined. (predetermined result) and the result of determining which of a plurality of types of jackpot is to be selected when the variable display result is "jackpot" (jackpot type determination result), different EXT data is set.

Among the variable display result designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(B), command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command in which the variable display result is "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot A" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot B" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "jackpot C" and the jackpot type determination result.

Command 8FXXH stops (confirms) the variable display of decorative patterns in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5, and starts the next variable display. This is a symbol confirmation designation command that specifies the symbol confirmation period until.

Among the symbol confirmation designation commands, for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(C), command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation A designation command in which the variation of the special symbol ends and the symbol confirmation period becomes 0.5 seconds. Command 8F01H is a symbol confirmation B designation command in which the variation of the special symbol ends and the symbol confirmation period becomes 20 seconds.

In this embodiment, the relief time reduction attainment variation is determined by (i) the case where the relief time shortening is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, and (ii) the case where the relief time shortening is reached with 900 variable displays after the jackpot. A symbol confirmation designation command in which different EXT data is set is transmitted. Specifically, (i) When the rescue time shortening is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed, a symbol confirmation A designation command is transmitted in which the symbol confirmation period is 0.5 seconds in the rescue time shortening variation. In addition, (ii) after the jackpot, when the relief time shortening is reached after 900 variable displays, a symbol confirmation B designation command is sent in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time shortening variation.

The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command that designates the current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state in which time saving control is not performed (low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a gaming state in which time saving control is performed (high base state). , time saving state).

The command E1XXH is a remaining time saving number notification command that notifies the remaining number of times of time saving control in the time saving state (time saving state A) excluding the relief time saving. Command E2XXH is a remaining probability variation number notification command that notifies the remaining probability variation number of times in the probability variation state.

Command F100H is a right-handed player LED lighting notification command that notifies the lighting of right-handed player LED069SG031. The command F101H is a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command that notifies that the right-handed LED 069SG031 is turned off.

The command 91XXH is a command for specifying the number of rescue time reductions at the time of recovery, and is an effect control command for converting the value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal and specifying it at the time of power restoration. For example, as shown in Figure 11-9 (D), the command for specifying the number of times saving time saving at recovery time is specified by each digit (1st digit, 2nd digit, 3rd digit) of the value (4-digit value) of the saving time saving counter at power restoration. Different EXT data is set depending on the digit (4th digit).

For example, as shown in Figure 11-9(D), commands 9100H to 910FH are commands 1 command for specifying the number of times saving time saving during recovery that specifies the first digit of the value of saving time saving times. It is. Commands 9110H to 911FH are 2 commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the second digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9130H to 913FH are three commands for specifying the number of rescue time reductions during recovery, which specify the third digit of the value of the number of rescue time reductions. Commands 9140H to 914FH are four commands for specifying the number of times the rescue time is shortened during recovery, which specifies the fourth digit of the value of the number of times the rescue time is shortened.

The command 94XXH is a rescue time reduction number designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number designation command, for example, as shown in Figure 11-9 (E), different EXT data is set depending on the remaining variable display number (126 times or less) until the rescue time is reduced. .

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-9(E), a command 9400H is a rescue time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached. Command 9401H is a relief time reduction number B designation command that specifies that there are 1 to 125 times remaining until relief time reduction is reached. Command 947EH is a relief time reduction number C designation command that specifies that there are 126 times remaining until the relief time reduction is reached. Command 947FH is a relief time reduction number D designation command that specifies that there are 127 or more times remaining until relief time reduction is reached.

Command 96XXH is a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, and is an effect control command that designates the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened. In the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command, for example, a value corresponding to the remaining variable display number (number of times in units of 100) until the rescue time is shortened is set in the EXT data of the rescue time reduction number 2 designation command. For example, if the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened is 100, command 9601H is sent as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command, and if the remaining number of variable display times is 700, the relief Command 9607H is transmitted as a time saving number 1 designation command. Command 9F00 (H) is a customer waiting demonstration display designation command that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

(Game control main processing)
FIG. 11-10 is a flowchart showing the game control main processing in this embodiment. In this example, the processing in steps S1 to S7, the processing in steps S8 to S9, and the processing in steps S10 to S12 are the same as those shown in FIG.

In this example, when the production control command instructing recovery from power outage is transmitted in step S7, the CPU 103 checks the value of the relief time reduction counter for counting the remaining number of variable displays until the relief time is shortened. , a value obtained by converting the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter into a hexadecimal number is set, and control is performed to send a command for specifying the number of rescue time reduction times to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0013).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to set a value corresponding to the current value of the rescue time reduction number counter and send a rescue time reduction number designation command to the effect control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0014). For example, when the current value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 125, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9401H as the relief time reduction number designation command. Therefore, in this example, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the gaming machine is powered on and the recovery process is executed, a command to specify the number of rescue time reductions is sent, and a variable display of the number of times remaining until the current rescue time reduction is performed. You will be notified of the number of times.

Note that this example shows a case where, at the time of power outage recovery, a command for specifying the number of times to shorten rescue time and a command to specify the number of times to shorten rescue time are sent separately from the command at the time of recovery, but this is not limited to such a mode. . For example, the configuration may be such that the EXT data of the recovery command (e.g., power-on designation command) transmitted in step S7 is set with a value corresponding to the remaining number of times until the rescue time is shortened. .

Further, when RAM clear is requested in step S3, if there is no backup data in step S4, or if there is an abnormality in the backup RAM in step S5, the area of the rescue time reduction counter is also cleared in the initialization process of step S8. Execute clear processing on the included area.

Further, when the production control command instructing the initialization is transmitted in step S9, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS0015). Therefore, in this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the gaming machine is powered on, "900" is set in the rescue time reduction counter. That is, in this example, after the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the gaming machine, if a jackpot does not occur even after executing the variable display 900 times, the relief time is shortened and the control is set to the time saving state B. will be done. In addition, in this example, since the production control command that instructs initialization transmitted in step S9 and the initial value ("900") set in the rescue time reduction counter correspond to each other, the CPU 103 executes the initialization. It is also possible to specify the initial value to be set in the relief time reduction counter based on the transmission of the production control command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks the value of the rescue time reduction counter (in this example, it is "900"), converts the current value of the rescue time reduction counter into hexadecimal, sets the value, and saves the rescue time at the time of recovery. Control is performed to transmit the number of times designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 069SGS0016).

In this way, the setting of the relief time reduction number counter is executed before the timer interrupt processing, which is the game progress process, is executed, so that the variable display does not start before the relief time reduction number counter is set. Therefore, it is possible to reliably manage the number of times until relief time is shortened.

In this example, when the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on to the game machine, the rescue time reduction counter is set to "900" and initialized. First, the configuration may be such that the rescue time reduction counter is not initialized when the RAM clear process is executed. With such a configuration, the game can be started from the continuation of the value of the previous day's relief time reduction counter, so the investment amount until the relief time is shortened can be reduced, and the configuration is such that it is not disadvantageous to the player. be able to.

In addition, in the case of the above configuration, the configuration is such that the initial setting of the rescue time reduction counter is not performed only when ON of the clear switch is detected (step S3; Yes) and RAM clear processing is executed. When an abnormality is detected (steps S4, S5; No) and the RAM clearing process is executed, the rescue time reduction counter may be configured to be initialized.

(time saving flag, fixed variable flag)
In this embodiment, the time saving flag can be set when any of the conditions for being controlled to be in the time saving state is satisfied. The time saving flag includes a time saving flag A and a time saving flag B. Note that in the following description, erasing (or clearing) a flag may be referred to as resetting the flag.

The time saving flag A is set when the time saving state A is controlled via the jackpot A. This time-saving flag A is set when the jackpot game state of jackpot A ends, and when the time-saving state A ends (the timing when a jackpot occurs during the time-saving state A, the 110 time-saving control ends and the normal state (timing controlled by).

The time saving flag B is set when the time saving state B is controlled via the relief time saving. This time saving flag B is set when 900 variable displays are executed after the RAM is cleared and the display result does not become a jackpot symbol, or when the display result does not become a jackpot symbol after the end of the jackpot game state in a low probability state. is set when is executed, and is cleared when time saving state B ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during time saving state B, timing when 1100 time saving controls are completed and control returns to normal state, etc.) .

The variable probability flag is set when the variable probability state is controlled. In this embodiment, when a V prize is won in the first round of a jackpot game, a variable probability flag is set as the game state is controlled to a variable probability state when the jackpot game ends. This probability variation flag is erased at the timing when the probability variation state ends (timing when a jackpot occurs during the probability variation state, timing when the 110th probability variation control is executed and control returns to the normal state, etc.). For example, if the determination is YES in step 069SGS69A of FIG. 11-12, which will be described later, the variable probability flag is erased based on the fact that this is the 110th time since the variable display has been controlled to the variable probability state.

(Special design normal processing)
11-11 and FIG. 11-12 are flowcharts showing special symbol normal processing (step S110) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 103 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step 069SGS51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total number of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number is checked. If the total number of pending memories is not 0, the CPU 103 checks whether the second number of pending memories is 0 (step 069SGS52). Specifically, it is checked whether the value of the second pending storage counter for counting the second pending storage number is 0 or not. If the second pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 103 uses the special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process is being performed for the first special symbol or the second special symbol) Data indicating "second" is set in (step 069SGS53). If the second pending memory number is 0 (that is, if only the first pending memory number is accumulated), the CPU 103 sets data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step 069SGS54).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of steps 069SGS52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled to be satisfied in priority to the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, the embodiment is not limited to the embodiment shown in this example, and for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the order in which the game ball wins in the first starting winning hole and the second starting winning hole. It may be configured as follows.

Next, in the RAM 102, the CPU 103 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number=1 indicated by the special symbol pointer, and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102 (step 069SGS55). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 stores each random number stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = 1 in the first pending memory number buffer. The numerical value is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 103 reads each random value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = 1 in the second pending memory number buffer. and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 102.

Then, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the pending storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step 069SGS56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first pending memory number counter, and stores each storage area in the first pending memory number buffer. Shift the contents of . Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second pending memory number counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second pending memory number buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 103 saves the storage area corresponding to the first pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value stored in is stored in a storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number=n-1. In addition, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", it is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending memory number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending memory number buffer of the RAM 102. Each random value is stored in a storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number=n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number) is extracted is always based on the first pending memory number (or each second pending memory number). The second pending storage number) is arranged to match the order of 1, 2, 3, and 4.

Then, the CPU 103 reduces the value of the total number of pending memories by one. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS57). Note that the CPU 103 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 102.

Next, the CPU 103 reads the random number for hit determination from the random number buffer area (step 069SGS61), and executes the jackpot determination module (step 069SGS62). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for winning determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and performs the jackpot determination. The jackpot determination module is a program that compares a predetermined jackpot determination value and a random number for hit determination, and executes a process of determining a jackpot when they match. In other words, it is a program that executes a jackpot determination process. In this case, if the variable probability flag indicating the variable probability state is not set (if the probability variable state is low), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the low probability jackpot determination value. Further, if the probability variation flag is set (if the probability is high), the CPU 103 performs jackpot determination using the high probability jackpot determination value. When the value of the random number for hit determination matches any jackpot determination value, the CPU 103 determines that the special symbol is a jackpot.

If it is determined to be a jackpot (Step 069SGS63; Yes), the CPU 103 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot (Step 069SGS64). The type (jackpot A, jackpot B, jackpot C) corresponding to the value that matches the random number value is determined as the jackpot type (step 069SGS65). In this case, the CPU 103 reads out the random numbers for type determination extracted in the starting winning determination process (step S101) and stored in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer in advance, and determines the jackpot type. Then, the process moves to step 069SGS70. On the other hand, if it is not determined to be a jackpot (step 069SGS63; No), the process moves to step 069SGS66.

In this example, by performing special symbol normal processing, the rescue time reduction condition (the value of the rescue time reduction counter is subtracted to "0") to control the rescue time to be shortened regardless of the variable display result (big hit, miss). The configuration is such that this may occur. In this example, the time saving state A is set based on the jackpot A, and the time saving state is set based on the fact that the next jackpot does not occur even after the variable display has finished a predetermined number of times (in this example, 900 times). Although it is controlled by B, it is assumed that the variable display result of the variable display in which the rescue time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot. Therefore, when the variable display result of the variable display in which the relief time saving condition is satisfied becomes a jackpot, the control is performed to the time saving state A based on the jackpot.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the time saving number counter for counting the number of executions of variable display during the time saving state is 0 (step 069SGS66). If the value of the time saving number counter is not 0, the CPU 103 subtracts 1 from the value of the time saving number counter (step 069SGS67), and checks whether the value of the time saving number of times counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS68). ). If the value of the time saving number counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a time saving end flag indicating that the time saving state is ended at the end of the variable display (step 069SGS69).

Note that this example shows a case where steps 069SGS66 to 069SGSS69 are executed to perform subtraction processing of the time saving number counter before the counting process of the number of variable display times until relief time saving from step 069SGS71 onwards. It is not limited to the form. For example, the process of subtracting the time saving number counter may be performed after the process of counting the number of times of variable display until the relief time saving from step 069SGS71 onwards is executed. In this case, for example, if the variable display is for saving time saving, if the subtraction process is executed after setting the time saving counter to "110" (see step 069SGS172), the value of the time saving counter will increase by 1. Since the value is subtracted, in the variable display for saving time saving, the value of the time saving number counter may be incremented by 1 again after the subtraction process. Further, the time reduction counter may be configured to be set in advance to "111" which is one more.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS69A). If the probability variation flag is set (that is, if the probability variation state is present), the process moves to step 069SGS84. In this example, when the process of step 069SGS69A is executed and the game is in a variable probability state, the processes after step 069SGS70 (particularly the process of step 069SGSS71) are not performed, so when the gaming state is in a variable probability state ( In this example, even if the variable display is executed during extreme/battle rush), the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not subtracted. If the probability variation flag is not set (that is, if the state is non-probability variation), the process moves to step 069SGSS70.

Note that in this embodiment, when the probability change flag is set, the process moves to step 069SGS84 without executing the processes from step 069SGSS70 onwards. is set, the process moves to step 069SGSS70, but the process of step 069SGSS71 may not be executed. That is, although the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not updated, a rescue time reduction number designation command or a rescue time reduction number 2 designation command corresponding to the value of the rescue time reduction number counter that has not been updated may be transmitted.

Next, the CPU 103 determines whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes). If the value of the relief time reduction counter is 0 (step 069SGS70; Yes), the process moves to step 069SGS84. If the value of the rescue time saving number counter is 0 at this point, it means that the timing after the time saving state (time saving state B) has already been controlled via the rescue time saving (time saving state B) or the time saving state B This is the timing when the control is returned to the normal state after 1100 fluctuations), and the jackpot that is the trigger for setting the relief time reduction number counter to 900 has not occurred. Further, if the value of the relief time reduction number counter is not 0 (step 069SGS70; No), the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1 (step 069SGS71). In addition, in this example, by executing the process of step 069SGS71, regardless of whether the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. , the value of the relief time reduction counter is uniformly updated.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 126 or less (step 069SGS72; No), the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data and issues a relief time reduction number designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS73). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9401H as a relief time reduction number designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 126, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 947EH as a relief time reduction number designation command.

Next, the CPU 103 checks whether the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS74). If the value of the relief time reduction number counter after the subtraction is not 0, the process moves to step 069SGS84. If the value of the relief time reduction count counter after the subtraction is 0, the CPU 103 sets a relief time reduction determination flag indicating that control is to be made to the time reduction state B at the end of the fluctuation based on the occurrence of relief time reduction (step 069SGS75). ). Then, the process moves to step 069SGS84.

On the other hand, if the value of the rescue time reduction number counter after the subtraction is 127 or more (step 069SGS72; Yes), the CPU 103 uniformly sets 7FH as EXT data and sends command 957FH as the rescue time reduction number designation command for effect control. Control is performed to transmit to the CPU 120 (step 069SGS76). Next, the CPU 103 determines the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time is shortened in units of 100 times (in this example, 100 times, 200 times, 300 times, 400 times, 500 times, 600 times, 700 times, or 800 times). It is confirmed whether or not (step 069SGS77). Note that whether or not the remaining number of variable display times until the relief time reduction is in units of 100 can be determined by checking the value of the relief time reduction number counter. If the remaining number of variable display times until relief time reduction is the number of times in units of 100, the CPU 103 sets a value corresponding to the value of the relief time reduction number counter in the EXT data, and issues a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Control is performed to transmit data to the control CPU 120 (step 069SGS78). For example, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 100, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit command 9601H as the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Further, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 800, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a command 9608H as a relief time reduction number 2 designation command. Then, the process moves to step 069SGS84.

In addition, in this example, when the game control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the CPU 103) side counts the number of variable display times remaining until the relief time reduction, and sends the relief time reduction number designation command and the relief time reduction number 2 designation command. is shown, but is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the CPU 120 for effect control may be configured to count the number of variable displays remaining until the relief time is shortened and execute a stirring effect or a countdown effect, which will be described later.

For example, if the relief time reduction count counter is set (set to "900") at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the configuration is such that relief time reduction can occur continuously, only when the relief time reduction occurs the first time. The system is configured to send a command for specifying the number of times of saving time reduction and a command for specifying number of times of saving time reducing 2, and is configured not to send a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving and a command for specifying number of times of saving time saving 2 when saving time is shortened from the second time onwards. Good too.

Next, the CPU 103 determines the stop symbols of the special symbols according to the determination result of the jackpot type (step 069SGS84). In this case, for example, if it is decided to make jackpot A, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "2", and if it is decided to be jackpot B, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "3". If it is determined to be a jackpot C, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "7", and if it is determined to be a loss, the stopping symbol of the special symbol is determined to be "-". Further, the CPU 103 stores the determined special symbol stop symbols in the stop symbol storage area provided in the RAM 102 (step 069SGS85).

Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S111) (step 069SGS86).

(Special pattern stop processing)
11-13 and FIG. 11-14 are flowcharts showing the special symbol stop processing (step S113) in the special symbol process processing. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 first subtracts 1 from the value of the symbol determination period timer (step 069SGS131), and checks whether the value of the symbol determination period timer after the subtraction is 0 (step 069SGS132). .

If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is not 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has not yet ended), the special symbol stop processing ends. do. If the value of the symbol confirmation period timer after the subtraction is 0 (that is, if the fixed display period of the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol has ended), the CPU 103 sets the jackpot flag. It is confirmed whether or not it is set (step 069SGS133). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 counts the number of executions of the probability variable flag, time saving flag A, time saving flag B, rescue time saving determination flag, and variable display during the time saving state. The time saving number counter is cleared (step 069SGS134).

Next, the CPU 103 sets the relief time reduction counter to "900" (step 069SGS135). Therefore, in this example, when a jackpot is triggered, the relief time reduction counter is set to "900", and even if the variable display is executed 900 times in a low probability state after the jackpot game ends, the next jackpot does not occur. In this case, the rescue time is shortened and the time saving state B is controlled.

In addition, this example shows a case where when a jackpot is achieved by executing the process of step 069SGS135, the rescue time shortening counter is initialized by setting "900" at the start of the fanfare period of the jackpot. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the relief time reduction counter may be set to "900" during a round of a jackpot game, and the relief time reduction counter may be initialized to "900" at the start or end of the ending period of a jackpot game. It may be configured as follows.

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS136). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED lighting notification command for notifying the lighting of the right-handed LED 069SG031 to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS137).

Next, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a jackpot start designation command to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS138). Next, the CPU 103 sets a timer for time before the opening of the big winning opening to measure the time before opening the big winning opening (fanfare time) until the first big winning opening 069SG007A and the second big winning opening 069SG007B are controlled to be open. (Step 069SGS139). Then, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the jackpot release preprocessing (step S144) (step 069SGS140).

If the jackpot flag is not set (step 069SGS133; No), the CPU 103 checks whether the relief time saving determination flag is set (step 069SGS170). If the relief time saving determination flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the relief time saving determination flag (step 069SGS171), and if it is set, the CPU 103 sets the time saving flag B to control to the time saving state (step 069SGS171A). . Then, the time saving number counter is set to "1100" (step 069SGS172).

Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a time saving state B designation command to the production control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to start lighting the right-handed batting lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS174A), and performs control to transmit a right-handed batting LED lighting notification command to notify the lighting of the right-handed batting LED 069SG031 to the production control CPU 120 (step 069SGS174A). 069SGS174B). Thereafter, the process moves to step 069SGS175.

In addition, although this example shows an example in which the time reduction state B is simply controlled at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the relief time reduction number counter is not set, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, it may be configured such that the time reduction state B is controlled at the timing when the relief time reduction occurs, and the relief time reduction number counter is also set (set to "900"). According to such a configuration, it becomes possible to cause the relief time reduction to occur continuously, and once the relief time reduction occurs, it is possible to configure the time saving state to continue until a jackpot occurs.

In addition, in this example, when setting the relief time reduction number counter, "900" is set, and each time the variable display is executed, the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes "0". ”, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, when setting the relief time reduction counter, set it to "0", and each time you execute the variable display, the value of the relief time reduction counter is incremented by 1, so that the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes "900". It may be configured to shorten the relief time based on this.

Furthermore, in this example, a case is shown in which, by executing the process of step 069SGS172, 1100 times, which is a larger value than the variable display number (900 times) until relief time saving occurs, is set as the number of time saving times. , but is not limited to such embodiments. For example, in step 069SGS172, the time reduction counter may be set to the same value as "900" or a smaller value.

Further, in step 069SGS172, it may be configured such that values corresponding to a plurality of types of times of time saving can be set in the time saving number counter. For example, if the time saving is shortened for the first time, the time saving counter is set to "110", and when the time saving is shortened the second time, the time saving counter is set to "1100". Good too.

Alternatively, for example, a lottery process based on random numbers may be performed to determine the number of time reductions, and in step 069SGS172, a value corresponding to the number of time reductions determined by the lottery process may be set in the time reduction counter. good. In this case, for example, the number of time reductions may be determined to be 110 times with a probability of 10%, and 1100 times with a probability of 90%. In addition, when the number of time savings is determined by lottery processing, the number of time savings may be determined by using the type determination random number used for determining the jackpot type and time saving type, or the number of time savings may be determined using a dedicated random number. You may.

Further, if the relief time saving determination flag is not set in step 069SGS170, the CPU 103 checks whether the time saving end flag is set (step 069SGS141). If the time saving end flag is set, the CPU 103 resets the time saving end flag (step 069SGS142).

Next, the CPU 103 resets any of the set time saving flags (any of the time saving flags A to B) and ends the time saving state (step 069SGS145). Then, the CPU 103 performs control to end lighting of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 (step 069SGS150). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a right-handed LED extinguishing notification command to the production control CPU 120 to notify that the right-handed LED 069SG031 is turned off (step 069SGS151). Further, the CPU 103 performs control to transmit a normal state designation command (a type of gaming state designation command) to the performance control CPU 120 (step 069SGS152). Then, the process moves to step 069SGS175.

In addition, in this example, by executing the processing of steps 069SGS141 to S152, a transition is made to the normal state at the end of the symbol confirmation period in the time shortening final variation, and the right hit notification is ended. It is not limited to this aspect. For example, in the time saving final variation, it may be configured to shift to the normal state and end the right hit notification at the start of the variation or the start of the symbol confirmation period.

Further, if the time saving end flag is not set in step 069SGS141 (step 069SGS141; No), the process moves to step 069SGS175.

In step 069SGS175, the CPU 103 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S110) (step 069SGS175).

(state transition)
Next, state transition in this embodiment will be explained. FIGS. 11-15 are state transition diagrams for explaining state transitions in this embodiment.

As shown in Figure 11-15, in the normal state (low probability/low base state), if jackpot B occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, it is controlled to the probability variable state, and if jackpot A occurs. In this case, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot (low probability/high base state)) is controlled. Although not shown, even if the jackpot B occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via the jackpot) is controlled. Also, even if you lose, the next jackpot will not occur if the rescue time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clearing process or (P-2) after the probability change state ends). When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After the completion of 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next jackpot occurring. case), it is controlled to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving (low probability/high base state)).

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-15, in the variable probability state (high probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the variable probability region, the state returns to the variable probability state. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the probability variable area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-15, in time saving state A (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state A, when the variable display is completed 110 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-15, in time saving state B (low probability/high base state), if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball passes through the probability variable area, the probability variable state will occur. controlled. Although not shown, if either jackpot B or jackpot C occurs and the game ball does not pass through the variable probability area, the time saving state A (time saving state via jackpot) is controlled again. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display is completed 1100 times without a jackpot occurring, the control is returned to the normal state. Furthermore, even if you lose, the next jackpot will not occur if the rescue time is shortened ((P) (P-1) after the RAM clearing process or (P-2) after the probability change state ends). When the number of variable displays reaches 900 times, or (Q) (Q-1) After the completion of 110 variable displays in time saving state A, the number of variable displays reaches 790 times without the next jackpot occurring. case), it is controlled to time saving state B (time saving state via relief time saving).

In addition, in this example, when a jackpot occurs during the time saving state B and the game ball does not enter the probability variable area, the case is shown in which the game is uniformly shifted to the time saving state A. I can't do it. For example, compare the remaining number of current time savings with the number of time savings corresponding to the case where the game ball does not enter the probability variable area (in this example, 110 times), and determine if the remaining number of current time savings is greater. For example, the current time saving state B may be continued as it is.

In this example, although it is possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol during the time saving state or the variable probability state, it would be a disadvantageous game for the player. 1. State transitions are explained without assuming that variable display of special symbols will be executed.

(Explanation of play time)
Next, the characteristics of "play time" which is the time saving state B (relief time saving state) in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18. In FIGS. 11-16, (A1) and (A2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where "Yutime" is not installed, and (B1) and (B2) are diagrams showing an example of the case where "Yutime" is installed. FIGS. 11-17 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of deviation fluctuations in a normal state. In Figure 11-18, (E1) and (E2) are explanatory diagrams of the play time in which the fluctuation efficiency is unchanged from the normal state, and (F1) to (F4) are explanatory diagrams of the play time in this case where the fluctuation efficiency is higher than the normal state. It is. In addition, in FIGS. 11-16 to 11-18, for convenience of explaining the features of "play time", explanation images different from the effect images explained below will be used for explanation.

First, in the case of a pachinko game machine that is not equipped with the "play time" of this embodiment, for example, as shown in FIGS. state (low probability/low base state)), a variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times when the jackpot probability is about 1/300, about 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot. Even if you do, you will not be controlled into a "play time" state, that is, a time-saving state. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play for a long time without hitting the jackpot, and his investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, in the case of a pachinko game machine equipped with the "play time" of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. When variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled by the jackpot in the certain/low base state), it becomes "play time" and the specified number of times ( For example, the time saving state B is controlled over a variable display of 1,100 times (up to about 3.8 times the jackpot probability denominator). At this point, the probability of hitting the jackpot is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play for a long time without hitting the jackpot, and his investment is quite high. However, by controlling the "play time", that is, the time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-17 (A) to (D), the player continues to play without winning a jackpot for a period from the end of the jackpot until the "play time" is controlled. (``addicted''), and various preview performances have been carried out during that period to continue to stir up excitement. In addition, when the variable display is performed 900 times, for example, when the variable display is executed the first time (for example, 105 times) after the end of the jackpot (see Figure 11-17 (A)), the variable display is executed the second time (for example, 105 times) (see Figure 11-17 (A)). For example, when the variable display is executed the third time (for example, 506 times) (see Figure 11-17 (C)), the variable display When it is executed the fourth time (for example, 882 times) (see Figure 11-17 (D)), a performance with a high expectation of a jackpot such as at least SP reach (for example, an SP reach performance of "Very hot") is predetermined. It has been executed many times and these SP reach effects keep coming off, so there is a high possibility that it is quite depressing.

Therefore, as shown in Figures 11-18 (E1) and (E2), even if control is finally made to "play time" (time saving state B) after 900 variable displays, this time saving state B is normally If the fluctuation efficiency is low, such as the state (low accuracy/low base state), the number of wasted balls batted will increase, leading to further additional investment and prolongation of the game. Also, in the 900 variable displays, all the SP reach effects have been missed and it is quite depressing, so if the provocation effects occur frequently during "play time", the player's desire to play will decrease.

Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 11-18 (F1) to (F4), the "free time" (time saving state B) of this embodiment has a higher fluctuation efficiency than the normal state (low accuracy/low base state). Since this is a time-saving state, it is possible to continue playing the game while suppressing additional investment. In addition, in the time saving control, the variable display is executed a specific number of times (for example, 1100 times, the maximum number of times is about 3.8 times the jackpot probability), so that the jackpot is controlled during the period when the time saving state B is controlled. Since there is a high probability (for example, about 97%) that this will happen, you can play the game with confidence. For example, if the jackpot probability is 1/319.9, the probability of not hitting the jackpot with one variable display is approximately 99% {(319.9-1) ÷ 319.9 = 0.996874}, which is 1100 rotations. The probability that you won't hit the jackpot within that time is approximately 3% (0.996874^1100=0.031937). Therefore, the probability of hitting the jackpot within 1100 rotations is approximately 97% (1-0.031937=0.968063).

Furthermore, in "Play Time", the variable display period of the selected fluctuation pattern is short, so the fluctuation efficiency is higher than in other time-saving states, so it is possible to efficiently digest the variable display and hit the jackpot in a short period of time. This is an advantageous state in which there is a high possibility that a jackpot that is advantageous to the player (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C) will be awarded by hitting the jackpot in the second special game due to the right-handed game. be. Further, since the preview performance, SP reach performance, etc. which will be described later are less likely to be executed, and there is less opportunity to be provoked by a missed performance, it is possible to suitably suppress a decrease in the desire to play. In other words, the "play time" of this embodiment is different from a gaming state in which one waits for the next jackpot while enjoying the performance, such as the variable probability state or the time saving state A, and the "play time" is more about waiting for the next jackpot than enjoying the performance. This is a gaming state where priority is given to efficiently digesting the game and winning the next jackpot. The details of the "play time" (time saving state B) of this embodiment will be explained below.

(Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when controlled to time saving state A via jackpot A, the production mode is controlled to "battle rush". FIG. 11-19(A) is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "battle rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), when the gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state A) and the value of the time saving number counter is between 0 and 110, the production mode is set to " ``BATTLE RUSH'', a second background image 069SG320 representing an evening cityscape is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the image of ``BATTLE RUSH'' is displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5. A performance mode display 069SG221 consisting of characters is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX= 0 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5.

At this time, in response to the variable display of the second special symbol being executed, active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and this corresponds to the fact that the value of the second reserved memory number is 4. Four second hold displays 069SG002 are displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. In addition, at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying arrows (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, the above-mentioned first pending memory number, second pending memory number, pending display, small symbol, error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1, time saving remaining display 069SG201, right hit notification image 069SG400 For example, by displaying on the front side (upper layer) than the effect images such as characters, the effect images overlap and the visibility of the number of first reserved memories, the number of second reserved memories, small symbols, and error displays is reduced. On the other hand, by displaying the decorative designs on the back side (lower layer) of the performance images, it is possible to prevent the decorative designs from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the performance images. You can do it like this.

Incidentally, the above-mentioned small symbol is also referred to as the fourth symbol. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating that the special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol) is variably displayed, and is displayed in a constant manner in a manner that is always visible on a display device such as the image display device 5, for example. It is displayed variably depending on the operation (see the small pattern displayed in the display area 5SL shown in FIG. 11-19 (A1), etc.). By variably displaying the fourth symbol, an effect may be performed in which the effect content including the variable display of the decorative pattern momentarily disappears from the screen, or the movable body 32 may be displayed on all or part of the screen of the image display device 5. Even if the decorative pattern is difficult to recognize, such as when a display is performed that blocks the display, it is possible to recognize whether or not the display is currently in a variable display state. The performance control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the first special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the first variable display start command. Further, the performance control CPU performs variable display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the second special symbol by operating the image display device 5 based on receiving the second variable display start command.

In addition, a fourth symbol display is provided at a location other than the image display device 5 (for example, the special variable winning ball device 7, which is a predetermined location on the game board 2), such as LED069SG032 for the first special symbol and LED069SG033 for the second special symbol. The pattern displayed on the device is also referred to as the fourth pattern.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display is completed when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state). In this case, the first background image 069SG310 representing a daytime city scene is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the first background image 069SG310 is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. A variable display number display 069SG202 (in this example, characters "game 0 times") corresponding to the variable display number of times is displayed. At this time, the production mode display 069SG221 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 100), the image The right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed hitting" at the lower right of the screen of the display device 5 are erased.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction counter is 300 or less when the control is in the low accuracy/low base state (normal state), a countdown effect to be described later is executed, and the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. At the bottom, a special number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, the characters "until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the characters "XXX more times", and a triangular object, XXX=1 to 300) are displayed.

(Yu-1100 Battle Rush [Yu-time])
In this embodiment, when the time saving state B is controlled via the rescue time saving mode, the production mode is controlled to "Play 1100 Battle Rush" (also referred to as "Play Time"). FIG. 11-19(B) is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Play/1100 Battle Rush".

As shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), when the gaming state is controlled to a low accuracy/high base state (time saving state B) and the value of the time saving number counter is between 0 and 1100, the production mode is set to " 1100 Battle Rush", a third background image 069SG330 representing a night city scene is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, "Play 1100 Battle Rush" is displayed.・A production mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, characters "XX times remaining", XX=0 to 1100) are displayed, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying arrows (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

In addition, regarding the remaining time saving display 069SG201, the display mode (for example, design, font, color, etc.) is common for the variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B, so that costs can be reduced. .

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B2), after the 1100th variable display is completed when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, The first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern. At this time, the characters "1100 BATTLE RUSH" are displayed at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, and the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is displayed at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX=0~ 1100), the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5 are deleted.

In addition, in this embodiment, after the 1100th variable display ends without a jackpot occurring in the time saving state B, even if the variable display is executed 900 times without a jackpot occurring in the low probability state, the time saving will continue. It is not controlled by state B. Therefore, after the 110th variable display ends without a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state described later, the variable display number display 069SG202 is displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display ends without a jackpot occurring in the time saving state B, the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed on the image display device 5. By doing this, after the 1100th variable display ends without a jackpot in the time saving state B, if the 900th variable display is executed without a jackpot in the low probability state, the time saving state is reached. This can prevent B from thinking that he is being controlled.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-19 (B1), during the period when the time saving state B is controlled, the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the active display area 069SG013, and the active display 069SG003 is displayed in the second hold display area 069SG012. Although the second hold display 069SG002 is displayed as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. During the period when the time saving state B is controlled, the active display 069SG003 and the second hold display 069SG002 are displayed. You may choose not to do so. In addition, in the time saving state A and the probability changing state, the active display 069SG003 and the second pending display 069SG002 may be displayed or may not be displayed.

In addition, after the 110th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, for example, characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" are displayed. After that, control may be performed to a low accuracy/low base state. On the other hand, after the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state, the characters such as "BATLE RUSH end" as described above are displayed. It is preferable not to display it.

In addition, after the 1100th variable display when the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B, when the game state is controlled to low accuracy/low base state, the shutter effect ( (see FIG. 11-23(B)), and then control to the low accuracy/low base state may be performed.

In addition, when the 101st variable display starts when the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state A, a countdown notification indicating that there are 10 remaining time saving times is performed, while the gaming state is in the time saving state. Even if the 1091st variable display starts while being controlled by B, the countdown notification may not be performed.By doing this, the time saving state B (play time) is likely to end, but the countdown notification may not be performed. You can prevent this from happening.

(Kiwami Battle Rush)
In this embodiment, when controlled to change probability state via jackpot B or jackpot C, the performance mode is controlled to "extreme battle rush". FIG. 11-20 is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the image display device 5 when the effect mode is controlled to "Extreme/Battle Rush".

As shown in Figure 11-20 (A), when the gaming state is controlled to a high accuracy/high base state (variable probability state) and the value of the time saving number counter is between 11 and 110, the production mode is set to "Extreme".・Battle Rush", a fourth background image 069SG340 representing a daytime wilderness landscape is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and at the top of the screen of the image display device 5 is "Polar Battle Rush". A production mode display 069SG223 consisting of the characters "RUSH" is displayed. In addition, at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5, a time saving remaining display 069SG201 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX= 11 to 110) are displayed, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. In addition, at the upper left of the screen of the image display device 5, a small pattern corresponding to the first pending memory number (for example, the number "0", etc.), the second pending memory number (for example, the number "4", etc.), and the decorative pattern is displayed. A display area 5SL for displaying arrows (for example, arrows "↓↓↓") is provided, and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of decorative symbols.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(B), when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state and the value of the time saving number counter is between 0 and 10, the lower left of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. In the part, an emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 in an enlarged form than the time saving remaining display 069SG201 when the value of the time saving number counter is 11 to 110 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", XX = 0 to 10 ) is displayed. Note that the emphasized time-saving remaining display 069SG201 is not limited to an enlarged form of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201, and the display color of the time-saving remaining display 069SG201 may be changed or an effect display may be added to the time-saving remaining display 069SG201. Further, a dedicated sound effect may be reproduced and output from the speaker at the timing when the time saving remaining display 069SG201 is switched to the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201.

Also, in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, the remaining time saving display may be displayed in the same manner as in the variable probability state. Further, regarding the time saving state B, stress may not be given to the player by not displaying the emphasized time saving remaining display.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(C), when the gaming state is controlled to a high accuracy/high base state, the 110th variable display is executed in which the display result is "lost". , a result image 069SG500 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. The result image 069SG500 is given the words "Goku/BATTLE RUSH ended" to notify that the Goku/Battle Rush has ended, and the text "BONUS x x times" indicating the number of jackpots (where "Z" is the number of jackpots). The characters "XXXX pt" indicating the total number of game balls given (XXXX is the total number of game balls given) are included.

The number of jackpots included in this result image 069SG500 is the number of consecutive jackpots based on the variable display in a high probability state (the so-called number of consecutive hits), and the total number of awarded game balls is the number of consecutive hits This includes the number of prize balls awarded in the jackpot.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-20(D), after the 110 variable displays are completed when the gaming state is controlled to the high accuracy/high base state, the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state. In this case, the first background image 069SG310 is displayed as the background image of the decorative pattern, and the variable display number corresponding to the variable display number executed after being controlled to the low accuracy/low base state is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. Display 069SG202 (in this example, characters "game 0") is displayed. At this time, the production mode display 069SG223 at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, the emphasized time saving remaining display 069SG201 at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5 (in this example, the characters "XX times remaining", X = 0 to 10), The right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed hitting" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5 are erased.

Incidentally, when the game state is controlled from the variable probability state, the time saving state A, and the time saving state B to the normal state, a left-handed hitting notification effect may be executed to instruct the player to play left-handed based on the completion of the time saving control. In the left-handed hitting notification effect, a left-handed hitting notification image, the words "left-handed hitting", and an arrow image are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5, and a sound saying "please hit left-handed hitting" is played back and output from the speakers 8L and 8R. be done.

Also, as shown in Figure 11-19 (A2), after the 110th variable display is completed when the time-saving state A is controlled, or when the time-saving state B is controlled as shown in Figure 11-19 (B2). Either after the 1100th variable display is completed when the state is being controlled, or after the 110th variable display is completed when the variable state is controlled as shown in FIG. 11-20(D), By displaying the variable display number of the variable display number display 069SG202 as a common "0 times" when control of the low accuracy/low base state (normal state) is started, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the previous jackpot) It is possible to prevent the user from easily knowing whether the user is being controlled in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, variable probability state, etc., and to increase expectations for being controlled in time-saving state B.

In addition, when the control of the low accuracy/low base state (normal state) is started, the variable display number displayed on the variable display number display 069SG202 is "110 times" when the control of the time saving state A is finished; The number of variable display times executed in each state may be displayed, such as "1100 times" when the control in the time saving state B has ended, and "110 times" when the control in the variable probability state has ended. By doing this, it is possible to roughly check the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (the type of jackpot it hit last time, whether it was controlled in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, or variable probability state), and thereby the time-saving state B. Since it becomes easier to predict the number of variable displays until the game is controlled, this can lead to an increase in the desire to play.

In addition, in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, a common song (for example, song A) is fixedly played as BGM, and in the variable probability state, multiple songs including song A (for example, songs A to X, etc.) are played as BGM. One of them may be selectable, and the selected song may be playable.

In addition, when a song A is played in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the game effect lamp 9 and the movable LED 208 are set to emit light in a light emission pattern corresponding to the song A (such as a light emission pattern that matches the rhyme of the song). You can also do this.

In addition, when the song A is played in the time saving state B, the game effect lamp 9, the movable LED 208, etc. have a different light emission pattern (such as a light emitting pattern that matches the background image) than when the song A is played in the time saving state A and the probability change state. It may also be made to emit light.
Furthermore, the light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state A and the variable probability state (a pattern that matches the rhyme of the song) is better than the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable body LED 208 in the time saving state B. (a pattern matching the background image), the light emission pattern is emphasized, and the light emission pattern of the game effect lamp 9, movable body LED 208, etc. in the time saving state B becomes a calm light emission pattern. Note that the light emission patterns to be emphasized include patterns with higher brightness than the calm light emission patterns, patterns with short switching intervals of light emission data, patterns with short blinking cycles, and the like. By doing this, in the time saving state B, as explained in the flow above, the player may be depressed, so the light emitting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the movable LED 208 is overemphasized. By calming the player down, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming dissatisfied.

Also, for example, a common background image is displayed in time-saving state A and time-saving state B, but in time-saving state B, the perspective (visibility) of the background image is different from that in time-saving state A, so that the same background image is displayed. Even when images are used, it may be possible to make it clear that they are in a completely different state (give a different impression).

Also, the sizes of the decorative patterns in time-saving state A and time-saving state B are different (for example, time-saving state A: normal, time-saving state B: large), and even if the background image is used, the states are completely different. You can also make it easy to understand (give an impression).

Further, after the execution of the variable entry effect/time saving effect A, a display to prevent forgetting to take out a prepaid card or a display of the gaming machine manufacturer may be performed. In this case, after execution of the time-saving effect B, it is preferable not to display a display to prevent forgetting to take out a prepaid card or display a gaming machine manufacturer. By doing so, it is possible to prevent stress from being caused to the player by performing the above display when entering the time saving state B without going through the jackpot.

(Variable display number display, special number display)
In the present embodiment, when the gaming state is controlled to the low accuracy/low base state (normal state), a message indicating that the game will be executed after being controlled to the low accuracy/low base state is displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. A variable display number display 069SG202 (in this example, characters such as "Game XXX times") corresponding to the number of variable displays that have been performed, and a special number display 069SG203 (in this example, corresponding to the remaining number of variable displays until the shortened rescue time is reached) , "Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", "XXX more times", triangular objects, etc.) can be displayed. In this embodiment, the effect in which the special number of times display is displayed is referred to as a countdown effect.

In this embodiment, it is determined whether the variable display number display or the special display number is displayed depending on the value of the relief time reduction counter. Further, the display mode of the special number display can be changed according to the value of the relief time reduction number counter. FIG. 11-21 is a diagram showing an example of the effect on the image display device 5 when a variable display number display or a special display number display is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(A), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 301 and 900, the variable display number display 069SG202 (in this example, "Game XXX characters, XXX=0 to 699, etc.) are displayed. The number (XXX) in the variable display count display 069SG202 is added and displayed each time the variable display is executed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(B), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 31 and 300, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number of times is displayed in white at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. (In this example, the text "Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the white text "XXX more times", and a white triangular object, XXX=31 to 300) are displayed.

As shown in FIG. 11-21(C), when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 30, a countdown effect is executed, and the special number display 069SG203 (main In the example, the text "Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", the red text "XXX more times", and the red triangular object (XXX=30) are enlarged for a predetermined period (for example, about 3 seconds), and then the image is displayed. As shown in 11-21(D), the image is moved to the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 and displayed in a reduced size. Then, when the value of the rescue time reduction number counter is 1 to 30, a countdown effect is executed, and a special number of times is displayed in red at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. ``Up to'', red letters ``XXX more times'', and a red triangular object (XXX=1 to 30) are displayed.

In this embodiment, the special number display is not displayed in the variable display when the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0; however, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not limited to such a form. In the variable display when the number becomes 0, a special number of times display may be displayed. For example, in a variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 1, if a variable display in which the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 is executed after a special number display in red mode is displayed, then a special number display in gold mode is executed. A number of times display 069SG203 (in this example, characters such as "Until 1100 BATTLE RUSH", gold characters "0 times left", a golden triangular object, etc.) may be displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, the variable display number display 069SG202 is hidden during the period when the special number display 069SG203 is displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display number display 069SG202 is not displayed. The special number display 069SG203 may be displayed while the display number display 069SG202 is displayed, and in conjunction with the variable display, addition display of the variable display number display 069SG202 and subtraction display of the special number display 069SG203 may be performed. In this case, the variable display number display 069SG202 is displayed in a manner with lower visibility than the special number display 069SG203 (for example, the variable display number display 069SG202 is displayed in a smaller size than the special number display 069SG203, etc., in an inconspicuous manner. ) is preferable.

In addition, the trigger for starting the display of the special number display 069SG203 is when the variable display starts when the number of remaining variable displays reaches a predetermined number (for example, 50 remaining times, etc.) before being controlled to the time saving state B. It may be a fixed timing, the timing when the special number of times display 069SG203 display start lottery is executed and a winner is won, the timing when the fluctuation pattern of SP reach is finished, or the timing until the time saving state B is controlled. It may be an irregular timing, such as when it is suggested by executing a remaining number suggestion effect that the number of remaining variable display times has reached a predetermined number (for example, 50 remaining times, etc.). Furthermore, when starting to display the special number of times display 069SG203, the special number of times display 069SG203 may be highlighted by displaying it on the entire screen. Further, instead of displaying the special number of times display 069SG203, it may be possible to execute a special background effect that switches to a special effect mode (for example, "If you reach, it will be very hot").

Also, when the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 301 to 900, the change pattern table is changed to a variation pattern table that makes it more difficult to determine the fluctuation pattern of SP reach than before the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 301 to 900. It's okay. By doing so, it becomes possible to play the game with a variable display that takes into account the intentions of the player who wants to quickly shorten the rescue time.

Furthermore, during the display period of the special number of times display 069SG203 (including the above-mentioned full-screen display period), the execution of various preview effects described below may be restricted (for example, not executed or displayed in an inconspicuous manner). . In addition, if the execution timing of the preview effect and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 may be displayed in a manner that is not highlighted, or the pre-read notice described below may be displayed. If the execution time of the production and the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) overlap, the special number display 069SG203 will be displayed when the variable display starts after the pre-read preview production ends. display, or if a predetermined variable display during the display period of the special number display 069SG203 (including the above full-screen display period) results in a jackpot, the display of the special number display 069SG203 may be restricted (for example, it may not be displayed or it may not be displayed conspicuously). (e.g. display in a different manner).

(Example of performance when relief time is shortened)
As mentioned above, (i) If the relief time shortening is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed (if the relief time shortening is reached without hitting the jackpot even once after RAM clearing), the symbol is confirmed in the relief time shortening variation. A symbol confirmation A designation command with a period of 0.5 seconds is sent, and (ii) after a jackpot, the relief time shortening is reached with 900 variable displays (after hitting the jackpot once, and then reaching the relief time shortening without hitting the jackpot) In this case), a symbol confirmation B designation command is sent in which the symbol confirmation period is 20 seconds in the relief time shortening variation. In the present embodiment, since the symbol confirmation period is different between the above case (i) and the above case (ii), the low probability/high base state is started after the relief time shortening variation in the low probability/low base state ends. (Time-saving state B) and the presentation mode during the period (that is, the symbol confirmation period) until the relief time-saving game starts is different.

Next, an example of the effect when (i) the rescue time shortening is reached after the RAM clearing process is executed will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25. In this example, a case will be described in which (i) the rescue time shortening is reached after the RAM clear process is executed, and the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) off".

(Example of production in case (i))
Figure 11-22 shows the execution of each effect when the fluctuation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) out" when the rescue time shortening is reached after the RAM clear process is executed. This is a time chart showing the timing, and FIGS. 11-23 are explanatory diagrams showing examples of effect images related to each of these effects.

First, as shown in FIG. 11-23(A), when the gaming state is controlled to the normal state (low probability/low base state), the CPU 103 displays the variable display of the first special symbol (relief time shortening counter). At the timing to end the variable display (when the value is 1) (at the timing T1 shown in FIG. 11-22), the production control CPU 120, which has received the symbol confirmation A designation command, displays the symbol display area of the image display device 5. At 5L, 5C, and 5R, the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "146") is determined and stopped. That is, the combination of decorative symbols that result in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped.

At this time, the production control CPU 120 displays the active display 069SG003 in the active display area 069SG013, and displays the pending display 069SG001 in the first pending display area 069SG011 based on the fact that the first pending memory number is 1. I'm letting you do it. Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 displays the first background image 069SG310 as the background image of the decorative pattern based on the fact that the gaming state is the normal state.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 causes the display area 5SL to display the character "1" because the first pending memory number is 1, and to display the character "0" because the second pending memory number is 0. ing. Further, the combination of small symbols (in this example, "146") is fixed and stopped in the small symbol display area. That is, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (see FIG. 11-22) At the timing T2 shown), the effect control CPU 120 executes the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-22), the effect is that the symbol confirmation A designation command is received. The control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed at the center of the screen of the image display device 5. A right-hand hitting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the notification image 069SG400, and the characters "right-hand hitting" are displayed in a fade-in manner. By doing this, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player will continue to play the left-handed game and the player will lose interest in the game. By displaying the notification image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-23 (D), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-22), When the game state is controlled to the time saving state B (low accuracy/high base state), the production control CPU 120 sets the production mode as the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the production mode becoming "Play 1100 Battle Rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "YU・1100BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a time saving remaining display 069SG201 (main) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "XX times left" (XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed hit" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the previously executed decorative pattern combination ("234" in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Moreover, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before ("234" in this example) is displayed in the small symbol display area.

Next, (ii) an example of the effect when the relief time is shortened after 900 variable displays after hitting the jackpot will be described using FIGS. 11-24(A) and 11-25. In this example, (ii) after hitting the jackpot, a case will be explained in which the relief time shortening is reached in 900 variable displays and the variation pattern is "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) off".

(Example of production in case (ii))
Figure 11-24 shows (A) when the variation pattern is determined to be "non-reach (shortened non-reach B or non-reach B) off" when the relief time shortening is reached after 900 variable displays after hitting the jackpot. (B) is a time chart showing the execution timing of each performance, and (B) is a time chart showing a modification of the time-saving rush performance B. FIG. 11-25 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of effect images related to each of these effects.

First, the production structure in Figures 11-25 (A) and (B) is the "non-reach (shortened non-retrieval)" when the rescue time shortening is reached after the RAM clearing process shown in Figures 11-23 (A) and (B). Since it is the same as the production structure in the variation pattern of "reach or non-reach", the explanation will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)), the CPU 103 issues a symbol confirmation B designation command. The received performance control CPU 120 determines and stops the final combination of small symbols (in this example, "234") in the small symbol display area of the image display device 5. That is, the combination of small symbols that results in a "miss" display result is fixed and stopped. In addition, in response to the end of the variable display, a right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed on the lower right side of the screen of the image display device 5 in front of the shutter image 069SG250. In the center of the screen, a right-handed player notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed player notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed in a fade-in manner. By doing this, if only the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed, the player will continue to play the left-handed game and the player will lose interest in the game. By displaying the notification image 069SG401 in a fade-in manner, it is possible to suitably lead to a right-handed game.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-25 (D), at the timing when 0.5 seconds have elapsed of the symbol determination period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol determination B designation command (as shown in Figure 11-24 (A)). At the timing of T4 shown in FIG. After the fade-out display, a time-saving rushing effect B is executed, and a rushing image 069SG473 (in this example, an image including the characters "Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH rushing"), which will be described later, is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. In the time-saving rush performance B, the player is informed that the gaming state will be controlled to the time-saving state B (low probability/high base state) by displaying the rush image 069SG473 that includes the words "Play 1100 BATTLE RUSH rush". ing.

In addition, the entry image 069SG473 is displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen in the minimum size and with a transmittance of 0%, together with the entry image 069SG470, which is commonly displayed when control in the time saving state A and variable probability state is started. The play time image 069SG473A is composed of the characters "1100", and the play time image 069SG473B is composed of the characters "YU".

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-25 (E), at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T5 shown in FIG. 11-24 (A)). , when the game state is controlled to time saving state B (low accuracy/high base state), the performance control CPU 120 changes the background image of the decorative pattern in response to the fact that the performance mode becomes "Play 1100 Battle Rush". The third background image 069SG330 is displayed as the third background image 069SG330. At this time, the performance control CPU 120 displays a performance mode display 069SG222 consisting of the characters "YU・1100BATTLE RUSH" at the top of the screen of the image display device 5, and displays a time saving remaining display 069SG201 (main) at the bottom left of the screen of the image display device 5. In the example, the characters "XX times left" (XX=1100) are displayed, and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the characters "right-handed hit" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 displays the previously executed decorative pattern combination ("234" in this example) in the pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. Furthermore, the combination of small symbols executed immediately before (in this example, "234") is displayed in the small symbol display area.

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24 (A) and 11-25, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed and the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B. , an example is shown in which the production mode is "Play/1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed, but it is not limited to this form, and the pattern confirmation period (20 The production mode may be changed to "Game 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed at a timing different from the timing at which the gaming state is controlled to the time saving state B after the second) has elapsed. For example, after the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B, (A) the timing at which the customer waiting demo display designation command is received, or (B) the first variable display after being controlled to time-saving state B is started. At this timing, the production mode may be set to "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 may be displayed. Also, the timing when 0.5 seconds has elapsed (in this example, the symbol confirmation period specified by the symbol confirmation A specification command) out of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B specification command. (In this example, at timing T4), the production mode changes to "Play 1100 Battle Rush" and the third background image 069SG330 is displayed without executing the time-saving rush production B (Figure 11-25 (D)). You may also do so.

Furthermore, when displaying the shutter image 069SG250 in FIG. 11-23(B) or FIG. 11-25(B), an image (for example, the word "play") that suggests that the time-saving state B is selected is displayed. May be displayed. By doing this, when the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed in common at the timing when the time-saving state B is controlled and the timing other than the timing when the time-saving state B is controlled (for example, the timing when the production mode is switched), , it becomes easier to distinguish.

In addition, in this embodiment, as explained in FIGS. 11-22 to 11-25, (i) when the rescue time shortens after the RAM is cleared, and (ii) after the jackpot, the rescue is performed with 900 variable displays. Although we have exemplified a mode in which the production mode is different depending on when the time is shortened, the present invention is not limited to this, and the production mode is common between the above (i) and the above (ii). may be executed. In other words, the time-saving rush performance B may be executed in the above (i) and the above (ii), or the time-saving rush performance B may be executed in the above (i) and the above (ii). You may choose not to execute it. Further, the time-saving rush effect B may be executed in different ways between the above (i) and the above (ii).

In addition, in the examples of FIGS. 11-24(A) and 11-25, a form is illustrated in which the time-saving rush effect B is executed during the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the time-saving rush performance B may be started after being controlled to the time-saving state B. Hereinafter, modified examples of the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time shortening is reached will be explained based on FIG. 11-24(B), FIG. 11-26, and FIG. 11-27.

FIG. 11-24(B) is a time chart as a modified example showing the execution timing of each effect when the rescue time shortening is reached. FIG. 11-26 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance operation when the number of pending memories is 0 when the rescue time shortening is reached.

First, the presentation configuration in FIG. 11-26(A) is the same as the presentation configuration shown in FIG. 11-25(A), so a description thereof will be omitted. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(B), at the timing when the CPU 103 starts variable display of the first special symbol (variable display when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0) (FIG. 11-24(B)). At timing T2 shown in B), the performance control CPU 120 starts variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at the timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-24 (B)), the CPU 103 issues a symbol confirmation B designation command. The received performance control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") that results in a "miss" display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "miss" is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26(D), based on the reception of the right-handed hitting LED lighting notification command, the right-handed hitting LED 069SG031 is turned on, the special number of times display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. , a right-handed player notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed, and a right-handed player notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed player notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display to the front side of the decorative pattern and start the right hit notification.

Next, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing T4 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the control of the time saving state B is started, Although variable display can be started, if the number of reserved memories is 0, the display of right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 shown in FIG. 11-26(D) is maintained.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-26(E), the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B, and the first variable display starts based on the occurrence of the second starting prize (or the first starting winning). At the timing determined (at timing T5 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-handed hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-26 (F), after the first variable display ends, the production control CPU 120 starts the process at the timing when the second variable display starts (see FIG. 11-24 (B)). After finishing the shutter effect (at the timing T6 shown in FIG. 1) and hiding the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand hit notification image 069SG401, the entry image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving entry effect B is started.

In addition, even if the time-saving entry performance B is started at a timing other than the start timing of the second variable display in the time-saving state B (for example, during the first variable display or at the start of the second and subsequent variable displays). good. Further, when the variable display period is short (for example, 1500 ms), such as when a super-shortened variation pattern is determined as the variable display variation pattern, the variable display may be continuously executed over a plurality of variable displays. In this case, it is preferable that the video of the time-saving rush performance B be displayed continuously without depending on the variable display of the decorative symbols. In addition, if a variable jackpot display starts during the execution period of time-saving effect B, the running time-saving effect B will be interrupted or ended, and the effect according to the variable pattern (for example, SP reach effect) will be changed. Alternatively, the jackpot notification performance may be executed without performing the performance according to the fluctuation pattern.

Next, FIG. 11-27 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the performance operation when the number of pending memories is 1 or more when the rescue time shortening is reached.

First, the presentation configurations in FIGS. 11-27(A) to 11-27(C) are the same as the presentation configurations shown in FIGS. 11-26(A) to 11-26(C), so a description thereof will be omitted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(C), at the timing when the CPU 103 ends the variable display of the first special symbol (at timing T3 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the CPU 103 issues a symbol confirmation B designation command. The received performance control CPU 120 determines and stops the combination of decorative symbols (in this example, "234") that results in a "miss" display result in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. , in the display area 5SL of the image display device 5, the combination of small symbols whose display result is "miss" is fixed and stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), based on the reception of the right-handed hitting LED lighting notification command, the right-handed hitting LED 069SG031 is turned on, the special number of times display 069SG203 is hidden, and the lower right corner of the screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. , a right-handed player notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed, and a right-handed player notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed player notification image 069SG400, and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed in the center of the screen of the image display device 5. , fade-in display to the front side of the decorative pattern and start the right hit notification.

Here, if the number of pending memories is 1 or more, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (at the timing of T4 shown in Figure 11-24 (B)) , the time saving state B control is started, and the first variable display is started, so as shown in FIG. 11-27(D), the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect, and the image display device The shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of No.5. In addition, the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250.

After that, as shown in FIG. 11-27(E), the effect control CPU 120 ends the shutter effect at the timing when the second variable display starts after the first variable display ends, and the shutter image 069SG250 After hiding the right hit notification image 069SG401, the entry image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving entry effect B is started.

In this way, when the variable display of the relief time shortening variation is finished, the performance control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command, and displays it on the display screen of the image display device 5. Since the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, 069SG401 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed to start the right-handed hitting notification, the variable display does not start after the time saving state B control is started, so the time saving state B control is Even when the shutter performance indicating the start or the time-saving entry performance B is not started, it is possible to suppress the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time-saving state B is controlled.

In addition, in the above embodiment, when the relief time shortening is reached after the RAM is cleared, 0.5 seconds is set as the symbol confirmation period, and after the jackpot, when the relief time shortening is reached after 900 variable displays, the symbol confirmation period is set. Although 20 seconds is set as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and as described above, when the rescue time shortens after clearing the RAM and after a jackpot, 900 variable displays are performed. A common symbol confirmation period (for example, 0.5 seconds) may be set when the relief time shortening is reached. In addition, even in this case, the time-saving state B is controlled by executing the right-handed hit notification and the time-saving entry effect B after the variable display starts after the control of the time-saving state B is started. To prevent a player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without realizing it.

In the above embodiment, when the rescue time shortening is reached after clearing the RAM, the shutter effect is ended at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, and the shutter image is An example is shown in which the background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush is displayed at the same time as the display of 069SG250 ends. Here, if the production control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation A designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation A designation command sent from the CPU 103 is missed, or if the symbol confirmation A designation command is garbled. , If the received command cannot be recognized as the symbol confirmation A designation command, then (A) the timing at which the customer waiting demo display designation command was received, or (B) 1 after being controlled to the time saving state B. At the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern specification command, etc.) is received, the shutter When the effect is finished, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 may be finished, and at the same time, the background image of the game 1100 Battle Rush may be displayed. In addition, at the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a gaming state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect ends and the shutter The background image of Yu-1100 Battle Rush may be displayed at the same time as the display of image 069SG250 ends.

In addition, in the above embodiment, after hitting the jackpot, when the relief time shortening is reached after 900 variable displays, 0.5 seconds of the symbol confirmation period (20 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation B designation command has elapsed. An example is shown in which, at this timing, the shutter effect is ended, the display of the shutter image 069SG250 is ended, and the time-saving rush effect is executed. Here, if the production control CPU 120 cannot normally receive the symbol confirmation B designation command, for example, if the symbol confirmation B designation command sent from the CPU 103 is missed, or if the symbol confirmation B designation command is garbled, , if the received command cannot be recognized as the design confirmation B designation command, then (A) the timing of receiving the customer waiting demo display designation command, or (B) 1 after being controlled to time saving state B. At the timing when a command corresponding to the start of the first variable display (for example, variable display start command (first variable display start command, second variable display start command), variation pattern specification command, etc.) is received, the shutter The time-saving rush effect B may be executed at the same time as ending the effect and ending the display of the shutter image 069SG250. In addition, at the timing when another command corresponding to the first variable display after being controlled to the time saving state B (for example, a gaming state designation command, a symbol confirmation designation command, etc.) is received, the shutter effect ends and the shutter The time-saving rush performance B may be executed at the same time as the display of the image 069SG250 ends.

In addition, in Figures 11-22 to 11-25, the variation pattern is "non-reach (reduced We have explained each effect that is executed when it is determined that "Non-Reach B or Non-Reach B) Missing", but although not particularly shown, the variation pattern is determined to be "SP Reach A Missing or SP Reach B Missing". When an SP reach effect corresponding to the SP reach type is executed (for example, a bowling effect for SP reach A, a battle effect for SP reach B), an ally character is defeated by an enemy character in the bowling effect or battle effect. After an image is displayed and it is reported that the variable display result is a failure, the shutter performance may be started, and the time-saving entry performance B may be started in the symbol determination period after the end of the shutter performance.

Further, if the variable display (relief time reduction attainment variation) in which the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 is a jackpot, the following (1) to (3) may be performed.

(1) If the variable display for jackpot "SP reach B (battle SP)" is determined in the variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction counter becomes 0, a shutter effect is performed at the start of the variable display (for example, 11-23 (B)), for example, the shutter effect ends at the timing when it develops into SP reach effect B (see the timing in Figure 13-11 (A2)), and then SP reach effect B is executed and the jackpot is reached. may be notified.

(2) If the jackpot variable pattern "SP Reach B (Battle SP)" is determined in the variable display where the value of the rescue time shortening counter becomes 0, the special number display remains "1" and no shutter effect is performed. It is also possible to perform a winning effect such as SP reach effect B being executed.

(3) When the value of the relief time saving number counter is 0, a dedicated jackpot variation pattern (for example, shutter closed → shutter opened with decorative symbols aligned → jackpot) may be provided.

In addition, the execution of the look-ahead effect described later when the value of the rescue time reduction number counter reaches 0 and reaches a specific number of times, and the execution of the look-ahead effect in a variable display where the value of the rescue time reduction number counter becomes 0 are restricted. It is preferable.

(Example of customer waiting screen)
In this embodiment, when the performance control CPU 120 receives a customer waiting demo display designation command that specifies that the customer is waiting for a customer, a customer waiting demonstration performance in which the demo image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5 is executed. . FIG. 11-28(A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a screen in a customer waiting state.

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), this demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A indicating an ally character, the words "Demonstration video", and a notice image 069SG700a (in this example, a triangular object with "Play" (image with the words "Equipped with time") is included. In addition, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the special number display 069SG203 (main In the example, a special number of times display in white form is further included.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify the player while waiting for a customer that the number of variable display times remaining until the rescue time reduction is reached is small (in this example, the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 300 or less). It is possible to promote operation.

(Modified example of customer waiting screen)
In the example of FIG. 11-28(A), when the value of the relief time saving number counter is between 1 and 300, the demo image 069SG700 includes the special number display 069SG203, but the present invention is not limited to this form. , Regardless of the value of the rescue time reduction counter, the special number display 069SG203 is not included in the demo image 069SG700 in both cases where the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 301 or more and 300 or less. Good too.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(B), when a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed, a demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the image display device 5. At this time, the demo image 069SG700 includes a character image 069SG100A indicating an ally character, the text "Demonstration video", and a notification image 069SG700a (in this example, an image of a triangular object with the text "Equipped with play time"). ), but the special number display is not included regardless of the value of the relief time reduction number counter.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-28(C), at the timing when a new starting prize occurs and the variable display of the first special symbol starts, the customer waiting demonstration effect ends, and the right side of the screen of the image display device 5 Special number display 069SG203 is displayed at the bottom.

According to such a configuration, by not informing the player of the remaining number of variable display times until reaching the rescue time shortening while waiting for a customer, only gaming machines with a small number of remaining variable display times until reaching the rescue time shortening are selected. Therefore, it is possible to prevent excessive imbalance in the operation of the gaming machine.

Note that regardless of whether or not RAM clear processing is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display count display and special count display may be hidden until the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) after the power is turned on. .

For example, if the RAM clear process is not executed when the power is turned on, a variable display of a predetermined number of times is displayed whether the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of the power is turned on is 301 or more, or when it is less than 300. By not displaying the variable number of times display and the special number of times display until this is executed, it is possible to suppress a player who only aims to shorten the rescue time from playing a game. In addition, when the RAM clear process is executed when the power is turned on, the variable display of the predetermined number of times is displayed both when the value of the power cut relief time reduction counter is 301 or more and when it is 300 or less. By hiding the variable display number display and the special number display until the game is executed, it is possible to suppress the player from avoiding playing the game.

According to such a configuration, if the RAM clearing process is not executed when the power is turned on when the store opens, a player who wants to save time can refer to the final variable display count when the power was cut off the previous day. By doing so, it is possible to suppress selecting a gaming machine with a small number of remaining variable display times until the rescue time shortening is reached and playing the game. In addition, if the RAM clearing process is executed when the power is turned on when opening a store, a player who aims to shorten the rescue time can shorten the rescue time by referring to the final variable display count at the time of the previous day's power outage. It is also possible to prevent the player from avoiding playing a game on a gaming machine that has a large number of variable display times remaining until reaching .

In addition, not limited to the above form, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter reaches a specific value, even if the variable display has not been performed the predetermined number of times since the power was turned on, the variable display number display and A special number of times display may be displayed.

For example, if RAM clear processing is not performed when the power is turned on, and the value of the rescue time reduction counter at the time of the power is turned on is a specific value (for example, 20 or less) that is smaller than the value corresponding to the predetermined number of times (for example, 50). In this case, the special number of times display may be displayed during the customer waiting state after the power is turned on or when the variable display of special symbols is being executed. In addition, if RAM clear processing is not performed at power-on, although the value of the rescue time-saving counter at power-on is not a specific value, the number of rescue time-saving counters is determined by the variable display executed after the power-on. Even when the value of the counter reaches a specific value (for example, 20 or less) and the value of the relief time reduction counter does not correspond to the predetermined number of times, a special number of times display is displayed. good.

(Characteristic part 069SG modification example 1)
Next, the first modification of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described. FIG. 11-29 is a diagram illustrating an example of the production operation regarding transition to the customer waiting screen as the first modification of the characteristic section 069SG. FIG. 11-30 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the production operation example related to transition to the customer waiting screen as the first modification of the characteristic part 069SG.

First, to explain an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 11-29 (A1), for example, the variable display of symbols in the normal state (low accuracy/low base state) When a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30,000 ms, etc.) has elapsed without starting a new variable display after the stop, the production control CPU 120 starts displaying the image based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command. The demonstration image 069SG700 is displayed on the device 5 and a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed (see FIG. 11-29 (A2)). Thereafter, when a starting prize is generated, the demo image 069SG700 is hidden and variable display is started (see FIG. 11-29 (A3)).

Next, to explain an example of the performance operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after reaching the relief time shortening, as shown in Figure 11-29 (B1), the variable display of symbols in the relief time shortening reaching fluctuation when the relief time shortening has been reached stops. When the number of pending memories is 0, the production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display, and turns on the right-handed LED 069SG031, At the bottom right of the screen, a right-handed player notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed player" are displayed, and at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed player notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed player information image 069SG400, and "Right-handed player" are displayed. The characters are faded in and displayed in front of the decorative pattern, and the right-hand hit notification is started. Further, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, the time saving state B control is started (see FIG. 11-29 (B2)).

Then, when a predetermined period of time (for example, about 30,000 ms, etc.) has elapsed without starting a new variable display after the variable display of symbols in the relief time shortening variation has stopped, the performance control CPU 120 controls the customer waiting demonstration. Even if a display designation command is received, the demo image 069SG700 is not displayed on the image display device 5 and the customer waiting demonstration effect is not executed, but the state in which the right-hand hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are maintained is maintained (Figure 11-29 (See (B3)).

After that, when a starting winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning (or the first starting winning) occurs. At this timing, the shutter effect is started and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (B4)).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand hit notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the timing (timing T6 shown in FIG. 11-24(B)), the entry image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving entry effect B is started (see FIG. 11-29(B5)).

Next, to explain an example of the production operation related to the transition to the customer waiting screen after the start of the right hit notification, as shown in Figure 11-29 (C1), the variable display of the symbol in the relief time shortening reaching variation when the relief time shortening has been reached is shown in Figure 11-29 (C1). When the number of pending memories is 1 or more (for example, 1) when stopped, the production control CPU 120 lights up the right-handed LED 069SG031 based on the reception of the right-handed LED lighting notification command in response to the end of the variable display. Then, at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting" are displayed, and at the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed hitting notification image larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 is displayed. The image 069SG401 and the words "Right-handed player" are faded in and displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250, and the right-handed player notification is started. Also, at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed, the time saving state B control is started, and the first hold memory is consumed and the first variable display is performed. is started, the effect control CPU 120 starts the shutter effect and displays the shutter image 069SG250 on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are kept displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-29 (C2)).

After that, when the first variable display ends and the first reserved memory becomes 0, the state in which the right-hand hit notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 are displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 is maintained (Figure 11-29 (C3 )reference).

Then, a predetermined period of time (e.g., about 30,000 ms) has elapsed without a new variable display starting from the time when the variable display of the symbol stopped in the first variable display after the control of time saving state B was started. At this time, even if the production control CPU 120 receives the customer waiting demonstration display designation command, it does not display the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and execute the customer waiting demonstration production, but displays the right-handed notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401. The shutter image 069SG250 remains displayed on the front side (see FIG. 11-29 (C4)).

Thereafter, when a starting prize occurs, the production control CPU 120 starts the second variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning (or the first starting winning is also possible) occurs. At the timing, the shutter effect is finished, the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand hit notification image 069SG401 are hidden, and then the rush image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving rush effect B is started (Figure 11-29 (C5) reference).

In this way, in the characteristic part 069SG modification example 1, the performance control CPU 120 executes the customer waiting demonstration performance during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving attainment fluctuation until the end of the time-saving rush performance B. By restricting and executing the right-handed hitting notification with priority, the display of the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG401, which is displayed larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, does not disappear. As shown in 29(A2), by displaying the demo image 069SG700, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game without knowing that the time-saving state B is being controlled.

In addition, in this modification, the execution of the customer waiting demonstration performance is restricted during the period from the end of the variable display of relief time-saving attainment variation until the end of time-saving rush performance B, and the execution of the right-hand notification is given priority. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the CPU 103 may issue the customer waiting demonstration display designation command during the period from the end of the variable display of the relief time-saving attainment variation to the end of the time-saving rush performance B. Execution of the customer waiting demonstration effect may be restricted by not transmitting the information.

Next, a description will be given of yet another modified example of the effect operation example regarding the transition to the customer waiting screen when the rescue time shortening is reached.

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D1), when the variable display of the symbols in the relief time shortening variation that reaches the relief time shortening stops, if the number of pending memories is 0, the performance control CPU 120 terminates the variable display. Based on the reception of the right-handed batting LED lighting notification command in response to the right-handed batting, the right-handed batting LED 069SG031 is turned on, and the right-handed batting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed batting" are displayed at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5. In the center of the screen of the image display device 5, a right-handed batting notification image 069SG401 larger than the right-handed batting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed batting" are displayed in a faded manner in front of the decorative pattern, and the right-handed batting notification is started. do. Further, control of the time saving state B is started at the timing when the symbol confirmation period (0.5 seconds) specified by the symbol confirmation A designation command has elapsed (see FIG. 11-30 (D2)).

Then, after the variable display of the symbol in the relief time-saving arrival variation stops and is controlled to the time-saving state B, when a predetermined time (for example, about 30,000 ms, etc.) has elapsed without starting a new variable display, the performance control Based on the reception of the customer waiting demo display designation command, the CPU 120 displays the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 to execute the customer waiting demonstration performance, and also displays a right-click display at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5. A notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handed" are displayed (see FIG. 11-30 (D3)).

After that, when a starting winning occurs, the performance control CPU 120 starts the first variable display based on the fact that the right-handed game is started in the time saving state B and the second starting winning (or the first starting winning) occurs. At this timing, the shutter effect is started and the shutter image 069SG250 is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5. Note that the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400 and 069SG401 remain displayed in front of the shutter image 069SG250 (see FIG. 11-30 (D4)).

As shown in FIG. 11-30 (D3), when the player touches the touch ring of the ball-hitting operation handle 30 while displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demonstration effect, At the same timing, the demonstration image 069SG700 is hidden and the customer waiting demonstration effect is ended, and the right-hand hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "Right-handling" shown in Figure 11-30 (D2) are displayed, and then the first variable display is displayed. The shutter effect may be started at the timing when the shutter effect is started.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 ends the shutter performance at the timing when the first variable display ends, hides the shutter image 069SG250 and the right-hand hit notification image 069SG401, and then starts the second variable display. At the appropriate timing, the entry image 069SG473 is displayed and the time-saving entry effect B is started (see FIG. 11-30 (D5)).

In this way, it may be possible to display the demo image 069SG700 and execute the customer waiting demonstration effect during the period from the end of the variable display of the rescue time-saving arrival fluctuation until the end of the time-saving rush effect B. At the same time, right-handed hitting notification may be executed by displaying the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 and the words "right-handed hitting". In this way, the control for displaying the demo image 069SG700 on the image display device 5 and executing the customer waiting demonstration effect is the same as in the normal state, thereby reducing the processing load, while the right-handed notification image 069SG400 and the By displaying the words "Right-handed game" at the lower right of the screen of the image display device 5, it is possible to prevent the player from starting a disadvantageous left-handed game.

In addition, for example, the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400 is displayed in a state with higher visibility than the demo image 069SG700, such as displaying the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG401, which is larger than the right-handed hitting notification image 069SG400, overlappingly in front of the demo image 069SG700. You may also do so.

(Characteristic part 069SG modification example 2)
Next, a second modification of the characteristic portion 069SG will be described. FIG. 11-31 is a flowchart showing game control timer interrupt processing as the second modification of the characteristic section 069SG. FIG. 11-32 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing as the second modification of the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 11-33 is a flowchart showing special symbol stop processing as the second modification of the characteristic part 069SG. FIG. 11-34 is a flowchart showing display processing as the second modification of the feature section 069SG.

In the above embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14, the right-handed lamp 069SG132 is turned on and off during the special symbol stop process, and the right-handed LED lighting notification command and right are sent to the production control board 12. Although the form in which the notification command for hitting LED off is sent as an example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but the present invention is not limited to this. The process of transmitting the lighting notification command and the right-hit LED extinguishing notification command may be executed outside the special symbol stop process. In addition, we have exemplified a form in which the value of the relief time reduction counter is subtracted in the special symbol normal processing, and when the relief time reduction is reached, the relief time reduction determination flag is turned on, but the value of the relief time reduction number counter is subtracted. Execute this in the special symbol stop process to turn on/off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 without using the relief time shortening flag, and send the right-handed LED lighting notification command and right-handed LED turn-off notification command to the production control board 12. You may also do so.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-31 as the characteristic part 069SG modification example 2, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 turns on and off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 after executing the game random number update process (step S24). In addition to executing the display process (step 069SGS24A) including the setting process and the sending process of the right-handed LED lighting notification command and the right-handed LED turning off notification command to the production control board 12, the normal symbol process process (step S26) is executed. Display control processing (step 069SGS26A) for turning on and off the right-handed lamp 069SG132 may be executed in accordance with the setting processing performed later in the display processing.

In the characteristic part 069SG modification example 2, in order to execute the display processing (step 069SGS24A) and display control processing (step 069SGS26A) described above, the CPU 103 executes the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33. do.

In the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-32 and 11-33, first, if the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 103 performs the same procedure as in the special symbol stop processing shown in FIGS. 11-13 and 11-14. , executes the processing from step 069SGS131 to step 069SGS135. Then, after executing the processes of step 069SGS138 and step 069SGS139 without starting the lighting of the right-hander lamp 069SG132 or sending the right-hander LED lighting notification command, the CPU 103 changes the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B, which will be described later. The memory is cleared (step 069SGS139a), and the process of step 069SGS140 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is not set, the CPU 103 specifies the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B at that time after executing the processing of steps 069SGS131 to 069SGS133, and determines the state of the time-saving flag A and the time-saving flag B. The state of flag B is updated and stored (step 069SGS160). Also, it is determined whether the probability change flag is set (step 069SGS161). If the probability variation flag is set (step 069SGS161; Yes), the process advances to step 069SGS174E, and if the probability variation flag is not set (step 069SGS161; No), it is further determined whether the value of the relief time reduction counter is already 0 or not. (Step 069SGS162).

If the value of the rescue time reduction counter is already 0, that is, if the time reduction state B is already established (step 069SGS162; Yes), the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E, and if the value of the rescue time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS162; No). ) increments the value of the relief time reduction number counter by 1 (step 069SGS163), and determines whether or not the value of the relief time reduction number counter becomes 0 after decrementing the value by 1 (step 069SGS164).

If the value of the relief time reduction counter is not 0 (step 069SGS164; No), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS141 to 069SGS145, and then executes the right-hand drive lamp 069SG132 lighting end and right-hand drive LED off notification command. After executing the process of step 069SGS152 without executing transmission, the process proceeds to step 069SGS174E.

In addition, when the value of the relief time reduction counter becomes 0 (step 069SGS164; Yes), the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps 069SGS172 to 069SGS174, and then starts lighting the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and issues a right-handed LED start notification command. outputs information indicating that the number of variable displays has reached 1,100 times without executing the transmission of the variable display result becoming a jackpot from an external output terminal (not shown) to a hall management computer, etc. A specific number (for example, 4) is set in a specific number of times reaching information output count counter indicating the number of times the specified number of reaching information is output, and a specific number of reaching information output period timer indicating a period of outputting the specific number of reaching information per time is set. Proceed to 069SGS174E (step 069SGS174C, step SGS174D).

In addition, in the information output process at the time of the next interrupt (step S23), the CPU 103 sets the output of the specific number of times attainment information over the period set in the specific number of times attained information output period timer to the specific number of times attained information output count counter. You just need to execute it the number of times specified.

Then, in step 069SGS174E, the CPU 103 executes lighting/extinguishing of the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and sending of a right-handed batting LED lighting notification command and a right-handed batting LED turning-off notification command in the display process (step 069SGS24A) at the time of the next interrupt. After setting the transition flag, the process of step 069SGS175 is executed to end the special symbol stop process.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the display process, the CPU 103 first checks whether the transition flag is set, that is, whether special symbol stop processing in which the variable display result is off was executed during the previous interrupt. It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS181). If the transition flag is not set (step 069SGS181; No), the display process ends; if the transition flag is set (step 069SGS181; Yes), the transition flag is cleared (step 069SGS182), and the storage The status of the current time saving flag A and time saving flag B is compared with the current state of the time saving flag A and time saving flag B (step 069SGS183), and the time saving flag A or time saving flag B changes to the on state (set state). It is determined whether or not (step 069SGS184).

When the time-saving flag A or the time-saving flag B has changed to the ON state, that is, when the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is newly controlled (step 069SGS184; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are turned on. While performing the lighting setting, a right hit LED lighting notification command is transmitted to the production control board 12, and the display process is ended (step 069SGS185, step 069SGS186).

In addition, if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the on state (step 069SGS184; No), whether the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the off state (cleared state) or not. (Step 069SGS187). If the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has not changed to the OFF state (step 069SGS187; N), the display process is ended, and if the time saving flag A or the time saving flag B has changed to the OFF state, that is, the new When the time-saving state A or the time-saving state B is controlled to the normal state (step 069SGS187; Yes), the right-handed lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 are set to turn off, and a right-handed LED turn-off notification command is sent to the production control board 12. is transmitted, and the display process ends (step 069SGS188, step 069SGS189).

In addition, in the display control process (step 069SGS16A), the CPU 103 may turn on and off the right-hand lamp 069SG132 and the time-saving lamp 069SG134 according to the lighting setting of step 069SGS185 or the turning-off setting of the process of step 069SGS188.

Furthermore, the production control CPU 120 starts displaying the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the words "right-handed hitting" on the screen of the image display device 5 in response to receiving the right-handed hitting LED lighting notification command from the CPU 103, In response to receiving the right-handed hitting LED off notification command from the CPU 103, the display of the right-handed hitting notification images 069SG400, 069SG401 and the characters "right-handed hitting" in the center of the screen of the image display device 5 may be terminated.

(Characteristic part 069SG modification example 3)
In the embodiment described above, when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is between 1 and 300, by displaying a special number display at the bottom right of the screen of the image display device 5, the remaining variable display number until reaching the rescue time reduction is reduced. Although it was a production structure that suggests that the number of times remaining is decreasing, it is not limited to this form, it is a production different from the special number display, and it is a production that indicates that the remaining variable number of display until the rescue time shortening is reached is decreasing. A suggested relief time-saving suggestion performance may be performed.

First, the effect structure in FIGS. 11-35 (A) and (B) is similar to the effect structure regarding the variable display number display and the special number display (white mode) shown in FIGS. 11-21 (A) and (B). Therefore, the explanation will be omitted. In addition, the production configuration other than the relief time shortening suggestion production in Figures 11-35 (C) and (D) is the same as the production configuration regarding the special number of times display (red mode) shown in Figure 11-21 (C). The explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 11-35(C), when the first step in the relief time reduction suggestion performance is executed when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 11 to 30, the first suggestion image (in this example, A first suggestion image 069SG800A) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of shortening the rescue time, which covers the upper 1/4 area of the background image, is displayed superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The first suggestion image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (it appears to be in a higher display layer and displayed in the foreground). Therefore, to the player, the visibility of the background image in the portion where the first suggestion image is displayed in a superimposed manner appears to be reduced. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the first suggestion image 069SG800A.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-35 (D), when the second stage of the relief time reduction suggestion performance is executed when the value of the relief time reduction number counter is 1 to 10, the second suggestion image (in this example Here, the second suggestion image 069SG800B) related to the shutter image 069SG250 at the time of short rescue time and covering the upper 1/2 area of the background image is displayed superimposed on the first background image 069SG310. The second suggestion image is an image that has a higher display priority than the background image (it appears to be in a higher display layer and displayed in the foreground). Therefore, from the player's perspective, the visibility of the background image in the portion where the second suggestion image is displayed in a superimposed manner appears to be reduced. That is, the background image at this time is displayed as the first background image 069SG310 including the second suggestion image 069SG800B.

In this embodiment, the background image including the suggestion image (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) by the relief time saving suggestion effect is displayed as a background image on the image display device 5 even when the variable display of the special symbol is not executed. Is displayed. In this way, the display mode of the interface image displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 is changed depending on the value of the rescue time reduction counter regardless of whether or not the variable display of the special symbol is executed, thereby reducing the rescue time. It is possible to suggest that the number of variable display times remaining until reaching the destination is decreasing, and it is also possible to improve interest.

In addition, in this example, an example was shown in which suggestion images (first suggestion image, second suggestion image) related to the shutter image when the rescue time is shortened are displayed superimposed on the background image as images for changing the interface image. The present invention is not limited to this form, and an image that is not related to the shutter image when the rescue time is shortened may be displayed superimposed on the background image. For example, effect images with different display areas and display colors may be displayed in a superimposed manner depending on the value of the rescue time reduction counter, and when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 21 or more, the display area of the effect image is area (for example, 25% of the screen) and the display color is blue, but when the value of the rescue time reduction counter is 20 or less, the display area of the effect image is displayed in a second area (for example, 25% of the screen) that is wider than the first area. 50%), and the display color may be red.

(Explanation of various performances)
Next, various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 will be explained based on FIGS. 11-36 to 11-50. FIG. 11-36 is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects. FIG. 11-37 is a diagram illustrating an example of a countdown notice production operation. Similarly, FIG. 11-38 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the countdown notice. FIG. 11-39 is a diagram illustrating an example of performance operation of pending change notice. FIG. 11-40 is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance operation of symbol chance eye preview. FIG. 11-41 is a diagram illustrating an example of the performance operation of the effect display notice. In FIG. 11-42, (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a look-ahead notice type determination table. In FIG. 11-43, (A) to (F) are diagrams showing a prefetched preview performance pattern determination table. FIG. 11-44 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display start setting processing. FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of variable display rendering processing. FIGS. 11-46 are diagrams in which (A) shows a reach notice execution determination table, and (B) to (E) show button preview performance pattern determination tables. FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing character preview pattern determination tables. FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body motion pattern determination tables. FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing movable body notice pattern determination tables. In FIG. 11-50, (A) to (C) are diagrams for explaining the characteristics of each gaming state.

As shown in FIG. 11-36, the production control CPU 120 provides a countdown notice and a pending change notice as advance notice performances that foretell the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (the variable display in which execution is pending). , a pattern chance notice, and an effect display notice.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a movable body preview, a character preview, a reach notice, and a button notice as preview performances that suggest that a jackpot will be controlled in the variable display.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 uses a win/fail button performance and a movable object performance as a deciding performance to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern (SP reach A to E). and is executable.

In addition, the production control CPU 120 controls the scheduled output to be given in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part in which the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display based on the super reach jackpot fluctuation patterns (SP reach A to E) is executed. It is possible to perform a post-effect in a post-effect part that informs the number of pitches in a specifiable manner.

In addition, when the control of any of the special states, such as the probability variable state, time saving state A, and time saving state B, is started, the performance control CPU 120 displays a state start display to display the start of control of each game state. It is possible to perform a rush effect to notify the user.

(Advance preview performance)
Next, a look-ahead preview performance will be explained. In this embodiment, in the starting winning determination process in step S101 in FIG. 6, the CPU 103 detects the occurrence of a starting winning, stores pending information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and executes a process of updating the pending storage number. . When a starting prize occurs, a random value for determining the display result (including jackpot type) and fluctuation pattern is extracted and stored as pending information, and the display result and fluctuation pattern are determined based on the extracted random value. Processing for prefetch determination is executed. After storing the pending information and the number of pending memories, an effect control command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 for specifying determination results such as the occurrence of a starting prize, the number of pending memories, and a pre-reading determination.

The performance control CPU 120 enters a jackpot game state with respect to the pending memory stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 based on the information received from the main board 11 in the advance notice setting process of step S161 in the performance control process process of FIG. Whether or not to execute a look-ahead notice effect that suggests that it will be controlled, and if it is decided to execute, the type of look-ahead notice effect to be executed (for example, "countdown notice", "pending change notice", "symbol chance notice") , "effect display notice" and various notice presentation patterns).

Note that in this embodiment, the execution of the pre-read preview effect is determined on the condition that the number of pending memories is "4"; It may also be determinable. In addition, although the type of advance preview performance to be executed is determined to be any one of countdown notice, pending change notice, pattern chance notice, and effect display notice, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, multiple notices may be executed simultaneously.

The "countdown notice" starts the variable display of pending memories that were not subject to the look-ahead notice performance until the variable display of the held memories that were the target of the look-ahead notice performance (hereinafter also referred to as target hold) begins. This is an effect that performs a countdown such as "3" → "2" → "1" → "0" for each time.

In this embodiment, the effect pattern for the countdown notice is one of a pattern in which the countdown ends at "3", a pattern in which it ends in "2", a pattern in which it ends in "1", and a pattern in which it ends in "0". The pattern is determined. The expectation level increases in the order of patterns ending with "3", patterns ending with "2", patterns ending with "1", and patterns ending with "0" (Expectation level: ending with "3" < " End with "2" < End with "1" < End with "0").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-37 (A), if a countdown notice is executed and a pattern that ends with "0" is determined upon the occurrence of a starting prize, after the variable display ends (Figure 11 -37 (B)), and when the next variable display starts, character image 069SG100D and countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed (see Figure 11-37 (C)), The display ends (see Figure 11-37(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100C different from the character image 069SG100D and a countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed (see FIG. 11-37(E)), and the corresponding variable display is displayed. The display ends (see Figure 11-37(F)).

Next, when the next variable display starts, a character image 069SG100A different from the character images 069SG100D and 069SG100C and a countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed (see FIG. 11-38 (G)), The variable display ends (see Figure 11-38 (H)). Next, when the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started, a character image 069SG100B different from the character images 069SG100D to 069SG100A and a countdown display 069SG414 indicating "0" are displayed. is displayed (see Figure 11-38 (I)), and the countdown notice ends.

Although not particularly shown, if the pattern "3" is determined, a countdown notice will be given at the time when the character image 069SG100D and the countdown display 069SG411 indicating "3" are displayed in Figure 11-37(C). When the pattern of "2" is decided, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100C and the countdown display 069SG412 indicating "2" are displayed in Figure 11-37 (E). If the pattern "1" is determined, the countdown notice ends when the character image 069SG100A and the countdown display 069SG413 indicating "1" are displayed in FIG. 11-38(G).

Further, the countdown effect pattern is arbitrary, and five or more types of effect patterns may be set. Further, the countdown may be started from a number other than "3". Alternatively, the count may be increased such as "0" → "1" → "2" → "3".

"Pending change notice" changes the display color of the pending display of the target pending until it is announced whether or not it will be a jackpot in the variable display of the pending memory (target pending) that is the subject of the look-ahead preview effect. It's a performance.

In this embodiment, the performance patterns of the pending change notice include a pattern in which the display color of the pending display is finally "blue," "green," "red," and "gold." There are two patterns, and one of these patterns is determined. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the display color of the pending display changes (for example, when the change is made, such as at the time of starting winning, when the pending memory is used up, or during the variable display period of the target pending), etc. , if "red" is determined, it can be arbitrarily determined whether to change to "red" from the beginning or to change it stepwise such as "blue" → "green" → "red", etc.) . The expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-39 (A), when a starting prize is generated, execution of a hold change notice and a "red" pattern is determined, the hold of the target hold that was the subject of the hold change notice. After the display is displayed in white, the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target pending changes to "blue" (see FIG. 11-39(B)), and the variable display ends. Then, when the next variable display starts, the display color of the target pending changes from "blue" to "red" (see FIG. 11-39(C)), and the variable display ends. Then, the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started.

Note that the number of presentation patterns for the pending change notice is arbitrary, and may include five or more types of patterns. Further, the pending change is not limited to changing the color as described above, but may also be a change to a character, an item, or the like.

"Symbol chance notice" means that until the variable display of the pending memory (target pending) that was the target of the look-ahead notice performance starts, the missed symbol will be displayed in the variable display of the held memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice performance. This is an effect that is stopped and displayed when an "even numbered symbol combination" or "odd numbered symbol combination" occurs.

In this embodiment, the performance patterns for predicting the chance of a symbol are two patterns in which the missing symbol is stopped and displayed in an "even symbol combination" (for example, "264", etc.), and a pattern in which the losing symbol is a "odd symbol combination" ( For example, there is a pattern that is stopped and displayed at "135", etc.), and it is determined whether the missed symbol is an "even symbol combination" or an "odd symbol combination" based on the variable display result. Furthermore, one of a plurality of types of symbol combinations such as "a combination of even symbols" and "a combination of odd symbols" may be determined. In addition, there are patterns in which the display color of the pedestal display section 069SG052, which will be described later and which constitutes a decorative pattern, is "blue", "green", "red", and "gold". A pattern is determined. The expectation level is higher when the missing symbols are "a combination of odd symbols" than "a combination of even symbols." Furthermore, the pedestal display area becomes higher in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-40 (A), when a starting winning occurs and the symbol chance eye notice is executed and the performance pattern is determined, the variable display ends and the symbol starts from the next variable display. Start the chance notice.

If the missed symbol is determined to be a "combination of even numbered symbols" and a pattern in which the pedestal display section 069SG052 is "blue" is determined, the missed symbol will be stopped and displayed as a combination of even numbered symbols of "246", and the pedestal display The section 069SG052 is displayed in "blue" (see FIGS. 11-40 (B1) and (B2)). On the other hand, if a pattern is determined in which the missing symbol is "a combination of odd symbols" and the pedestal display section 069SG052 is "red", the missing symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of odd symbols "375", and the pedestal display section 069SG052 is displayed in "red" (see Figures 11-40 (C1) and (C2)).

In this embodiment, the decorative designs are displayed on a number display section 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a pedestal display section displayed on a lower display layer (on the back side) than the number display section 069SG051. 069SG052. The pedestal display section 069SG052 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape so as to surround the numbers "1" to "9" displayed on the numeric display section 069SG051, and is displayed in a predetermined display color (for example, white). This is a common display format for all numbers (“1” to “9”).

Note that the number of performance patterns for the symbol chance eye preview is arbitrary, and the number of symbol combinations, the display color of the pedestal display section 069SG052, etc. may have five or more types of patterns. Note that a character image, a decorative image, or the like may be displayed on the pedestal display section 069SG052. Further, for example, individual character images corresponding to each number (“1” to “9”) may be displayed.

"Effect display notice" is used until the variable display of the pending memory (target pending) that was the target of the look-ahead notice performance starts, and when the variable display of the pending memory that was not the target of the look-ahead notice performance starts. , an effect image is displayed in the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5.

In this embodiment, the effect display preview production pattern includes a pattern in which the effect image is "blue", "green", "red", and "gold". A pattern is determined. Although a detailed explanation will be omitted in this embodiment, the manner in which the display color of the effect image changes (for example, if "red" is determined, it may be changed to "red" from the beginning, or it may be changed from "blue" to " It is possible to arbitrarily determine whether the color is changed stepwise (such as from "green" to "red"). The expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold" (expectation level: "blue" < "green" < "red" < "gold").

For example, as shown in Figure 11-41(A), when the effect display notice is executed and the "red" pattern is determined upon the occurrence of a starting prize, the variable display ends (Figure 11-41(A)). B), after the next variable display starts (see FIG. 11-41(C)), when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the area below the movable body 32 on the display screen of the image display device 5 is displayed. A “blue” effect image 069SG420 is displayed (see FIG. 11-41(D)). Next, when the next variable display starts, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41(E)), and when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the movable body on the display screen of the image display device 5 A “red” effect image 069SG420 is displayed in the area below 32 (see FIG. 11-41(F)). Then, when the next variable display, that is, the target pending variable display (for example, super reach variation pattern) is started, the effect image 069SG420 is hidden (see FIG. 11-41(G)).

Note that the number of presentation patterns for the effect display preview is arbitrary, and may include five or more types of presentation patterns. Furthermore, the size of the effect image 069SG420 may be varied depending on the degree of expectation. Further, the effect image 069SG420 may be displayed not only at the end of the variable display, but also at the start of the variable display or during other periods.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines that the reserved memory stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 will be controlled to a jackpot gaming state based on the information received from the main board 11 in the pre-read notice setting process of step S161. The look-ahead preview performance type determination tables A to D used for determining whether to execute the suggested look-ahead preview performance and the type of look-ahead preview performance to be executed when execution is determined will be described. In Figure 11-42, (A) is the preview performance type determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is the preview performance type determination table B used in the variable probability state, and (C) is the preview performance used in the time-saving state A. The type determination tables C and (D) are the preview performance type determination table D used in the time saving state B. In the following, random numbers from 0 to 99 are used as random numbers for determining various performance types.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (A), in the preview performance type determination table A used when the gaming state is the normal state, when the variable display result is "Jackpot", 20 pieces are set to "Non-execution". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol chance notice". , and 20 determination values are assigned to "Effect Display Preview". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice" is assigned. 10 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance eye preview", 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display preview", and 15 determination values are assigned to "effect display preview".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (B), in the preview performance type determination table B used when the gaming state is a variable probability state, when the variable display result is "Jackpot", 20 pieces are placed in "Non-execution". Judgment values are assigned, 20 judgment values are assigned to "Countdown notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pending change notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol chance notice". , and 20 determination values are assigned to "Effect Display Preview". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 60 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 5 judgment values are assigned to "countdown notice", and "pending change notice" is assigned. 5 judgment values are assigned to ``symbol chance eye notice'', 15 judgment values are assigned to ``effect display notice'', and 15 judgment values are assigned to ``effect display notice''.

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (C), in the preview performance type determination table C used when the gaming state is time saving state A, when the variable display result is "jackpot", 40 pieces are displayed in "non-execution". 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pending Change Notice", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Symbol Chance Eye Notice", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Effect Display Notice". Twenty judgment values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pending change notice", and "symbol chance 10 determination values are assigned to "Notice", and 10 determination values are assigned to "Effect display notice".

As shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), in the preview performance type determination table D used when the gaming state is time saving state B, when the variable display result is "jackpot", 70 , and 30 determination values are assigned to "symbol chance notice". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, in the pre-read preview performance, when the variable display result is "miss", the percentage of "non-execution" increases in the order of normal state, variable probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B. In other words, it is most likely to be executed in the variable probability state, and not executed (least likely to be executed) in the time saving state B. Further, the "countdown notice" is a notice that is not executed in the time saving state A and the time saving state B, and the "pending change notice" and the "effect display notice" are notices that are not executed in the time saving state B.

Here, the determination of the pre-read notice performance type will be compared in three gaming states (variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed.

First, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the execution rate of the look-ahead preview effect is 80% in the variable probability state, 60% in the time-saving state A, and 30% in the time-saving state B, and the variable display result is a "miss". In this case, the number of types of pre-read preview performances that can be determined is 40% in the variable probability state, 30% in the time saving state A, and 0% (non-execution) in the time saving state B.

In addition, the number of types of look-ahead preview effects that can be determined when the variable display result is a “jackpot” is “4 types” in the variable probability state, “3 types” in the time-saving state A, and “2 types” in the time-saving state B. The number of types of look-ahead preview effects that can be determined when the variable display result is “miss” is “4 types” in the variable probability state, “3 types” in the time saving state A, and “0 types (not applicable)” in the time saving state B. Execution).

In this way, in time-saving state B, only the "symbol chance notice" can be executed when the variable display result becomes "jackpot", and other pre-reading notice performances are not executed. , if the variable display result is "miss", the pre-read preview effect is not executed. That is, in the time-saving state B, the execution rate of the pre-read preview performance is lower than in the variable probability state or the time-saving state A, and the number of types of performance that can be determined is smaller.

In addition, in the time saving state B, it is possible to perform a "symbol chance notice" as a look-ahead notice effect. This is because in time-saving state B, a variation pattern with a short variable display time (for example, super shortened non-reach) is likely to be determined, and when performing a look-ahead effect in variable display 1, the time will be shorter, for example. , it is easy to miss color changes in small pending display areas such as ``pending change notice''. Further, although the "countdown notice" is executed using a plurality of variable displays, it is difficult to notice changes in the count because the count is displayed for a short period in one variable display. On the other hand, the "design chance eye notice" is executed with multiple variable displays, and changes in the display color of the decorative design and the pedestal can be suitably shown when the decorative design is stopped and displayed, so the time-saving state B It can be said that this is a look-ahead preview performance suitable for execution in the future.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time saving state B, the pre-read preview effect is not executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. If the execution rate of the look-ahead preview performance when the variable display result is "miss" is lower than the execution ratio of the look-ahead notice performance when the variable display result is "miss" in the variable probability state or time-saving state A, then the time-saving state B In the case where the variable display result is "miss", a pre-read preview effect may be executed. In addition, if the number of types of pre-read preview performances that can be determined when the variable display result is "miss" is smaller than in the variable probability state or time-saving state A, then two or more types of pre-read notice performances can be executed in time-saving state B. may be done.

Next, performance pattern determination tables A to F used when the performance control CPU 120 determines the performance pattern of the pre-read preview performance that has been decided to be executed will be explained. In Figure 11-43, (A) is a performance pattern determination table A used in the normal state, (B) is a performance pattern determination table B used in the variable probability state, and (C) is a performance pattern determination table used in the time saving state A. C and (D) are performance pattern determination tables D used in the time saving state B, (E) are performance pattern determination tables E used in the normal state, and (F) are performance pattern determination tables F used in the variable probability state.

As shown in FIG. 11-43(A), the performance pattern determination table is commonly used when determining the performance patterns of pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice when the gaming state is the normal state. In A, when the variable display result is "Jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Red". 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43(B), a performance pattern determination table commonly used when determining performance patterns for pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice when the gaming state is in a variable probability state. In B, when the variable display result is "Jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "red". 20 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". Judgment values are assigned, and five judgment values are assigned to "gold".

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (C), when the gaming state is time saving state A, performance pattern determination that is commonly used when determining performance patterns for pending change notice, symbol chance notice, and effect display notice. In Table C, when the variable display result is "Jackpot", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Green", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Red". judgment values are assigned. On the other hand, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "blue", 20 judgment values are assigned to "green", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "red". A judgment value is assigned.

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (D), in the performance pattern determination table D used to determine the performance pattern for symbol chance notice when the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is "Jackpot". In this case, 90 determination values are assigned to "red" and 10 determination values are assigned to "gold". On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", the "symbol chance notice" is not executed, so no determination value is assigned to any performance pattern.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (E), when the gaming state is the normal state, the performance pattern determination table E used to determine the performance pattern of the countdown notice, the variable display result is "Jackpot". If , 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1". 20 determination values are assigned, and 70 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", 65 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 5 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

As shown in FIG. 11-43 (F), when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, the variable display result is "Jackpot" in the effect pattern determination table F used to determine the effect pattern of the countdown notice. In this case, the pattern ending with "3" is assigned 5 decision values, the pattern ending with "2" is assigned 5 decision values, and the pattern ending with "1" is assigned 20 decision values. A determination value of 70 is assigned to a pattern ending in "0". On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", 50 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "3", and 20 judgment values are assigned to the pattern ending with "2". , 20 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "1", and 10 determination values are assigned to the pattern ending with "0".

In this way, the production patterns for pending change notices, symbol chance notices, and effect display notices are set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "blue," "green," "red," and "gold." Expectation level: "Blue" < "Green" < "Red" < "Gold"). In addition, the performance pattern in the countdown preview is set so that the expectation level increases in the order of "3", "2", "1", and "0" (expectation level: "3"). ” to end < “2” to end < “1” to end < to “0”).

Here, the determination of performance patterns for various notices will be compared in three gaming states (variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B) in which time saving control is executed.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of various preview performance patterns that can be determined is "4 types" in the variable probability state, "3 types" in the time saving state A, and "2 types" in the time saving state B. When the variable display result is ``miss'', the number of various notice presentation patterns that can be determined is ``4 types'' in the variable probability state, ``3 types'' in the time saving state A, and ``0 types (not applicable) in the time saving state B. Execution).

In this way, in time-saving state B, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", it is possible to determine one of two types, "red" or "gold", as the production pattern for the "symbol chance notice". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", no one is determined as the performance pattern of "symbol chance eye notice" (non-execution). That is, in the time-saving state B, the number of performance patterns that can be determined is smaller than in the variable probability state or the time-saving state A.

(Preview performance)
Next, the preview performance will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-36, the "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", and "button notice" as advance notice performances are the predetermined ones in the non-reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute various preview performances, and if execution is determined, the performance of the preview performance to be executed. Determine the pattern.

The "movable body notice" is an effect that suggests a jackpot by vibrating the movable body 32 up and down when the variable display starts (see Figures 11-57 (A1) (B1)) ). There are two types of presentation patterns for movable object announcements: "Vibration (small) pattern" where the vertical vibration width is small, and "Vibration (large) pattern" where the vertical vibration width is larger than the vibration (small), and the display results are variable. Depending on this, one of non-execution, "vibration (small) pattern", and "vibration (large) pattern" is determined.

The movable body 32 is movable in the vertical direction between an origin position above the display screen of the image display device 5 and a presentation position approximately in the center of the display screen, and does not fall due to its own weight from the origin position to the presentation position. It is considered possible. The vibration in the movable body preview is an effect in which the movable body 32 is vibrated up and down between the origin position and a predetermined position between the origin position and the effect position. Further, the presentation pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set.

"Character preview" is when a predetermined character appears during the period from the start of variable display until the variable display mode of the decorative pattern changes to reach mode, the character's lines are displayed, and the speaker 8L, 8R This is an effect that incites whether or not a reach mode will be achieved by outputting the audio of the displayed dialogue (see FIGS. 11-57 (A2) (B2)). There are two production patterns for the reach notice: a ``Speech A pattern'' in which the character's line is ``Reach?'' and a ``Speech B pattern'' in which the character's line is ``Maybe it's reach!!'', and depending on the variable display result. , non-execution, "Serif A pattern", or "Serif B pattern" is determined. The content of the lines is arbitrary, and lines other than those listed above may be used.

Note that the character's dialogue pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set. Further, although the type of character does not change, it may be possible to select one of a plurality of types of characters depending on the variable display result.

"Reach notice" is a stop display in the left decorative pattern display area 5L after the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the decorative pattern that was variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed. This is an effect that incites whether or not the decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern will be stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, that is, whether or not it will be in the reach mode (Figure 11-57 (A3 to A5), ( (See B3-B5).

Specifically, after the decorative pattern that has been variably displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed, the left decorative pattern is displayed in front of the stop display position in the variably displayed right decorative pattern display area 5R. The deceleration display of the decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the area 5L is started (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Then, when an operation by the player is detected within a predetermined operation valid period after the deceleration display starts, or when no operation is detected and the operation valid period has elapsed, if the reach mode does not occur, the left decoration A decorative pattern with the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the pattern display area 5L passes through the stop display position, and the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (see Figures 11-57 (A5) and (B5)), and the reach mode is reached. In this case, a decorative pattern having the same number as the decorative pattern stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L is stopped and displayed at the stopped display position.

In addition, the reach mode refers to the combination of multiple decorative symbols (for example, "333", ), while the decorative patterns (e.g., the left and right patterns, etc.) excluding one of the decorative patterns (e.g., the middle pattern, etc.) are stopped and displayed, the variable display of that one decorative pattern (e.g., the middle pattern, etc.) is performed. This is the manner in which this is done (also referred to as reach performance).

When the variation pattern is non-reach or SP reach, the production control CPU 120 executes the reach notice in the reach notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278, which will be described later, regardless of whether the variable display result becomes a jackpot display result. It is determined by lottery whether or not it is, and a performance control pattern (process table) is set according to the determined content. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is non-reach, the reach mode will not be activated after the reach notice is executed, and if the fluctuation pattern is SP reach, the reach mode will be activated after the reach notice is executed, and the SP reach effect will be executed. .

"Button notice" is when the above-mentioned reach notice is executed, after the deceleration display of the decorative symbol with the same number as the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L starts in the right decorative symbol display area 5R. , is an effect that is executed until a predetermined operational validity period has elapsed (see FIGS. 11-57 (A4) and (B4)). Specifically, it is an operation promotion effect that encourages the operation of the push button 31B from the start of the deceleration display of the decorative pattern until the elapse of a predetermined operation effective period, and the operation promotion display and the push button 31B are simulated. The operation promotion display and the button image are displayed when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has elapsed. is hidden and exits.

The presentation pattern (operation promotion mode) of the button notice is a "long press pattern" that encourages the user to press and hold the push button 31B for a predetermined operation period, and a "long press pattern" that prompts the push button 31B to be repeatedly pressed for a predetermined operation period. There is a "repeated hit pattern" and a "single hit pattern" that prompts you to press the push button 31B once. Depending on the variable display result, you can choose between non-execution, "long press pattern", "repeated hit pattern", and "single hit pattern". Either one is decided. Note that the presentation patterns are not limited to those described above, and four or more types, or two or less types may be set.

The operation promotion display becomes ``Long press!'' in the ``Long press pattern'', ``Continuous hit!'' in the ``Multiple hit pattern'', and ``One hit!'' in the ``One hit pattern''.

(Decision performance)
Next, the final performance will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-36, the deciding performance is a performance that is executed before notifying whether or not the jackpot will be controlled at the end of the SP reach performance in the variable display of the super reach variation pattern (Fig. 11-36). 58 (C4 to C8), Figures 11-59 (A10 to D3), and (B7 to D3)), and is executed during the predetermined operation validity period and after the There is a "movable body performance" that is executed.

The "right/fail button effect" is an operation promotion effect that urges the user to operate the push button 31B until a predetermined operation validity period has elapsed, and is an operation promotion display consisting of the words "Release!!" and "Press!!" and a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period, or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has passed. , the operation promotion display and the button image disappear and the process ends (see FIG. 11-58 (C4), FIG. 11-59 (A8 to A10), and (B7)).

There are two production patterns: a "white pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits white light and the button image is displayed in white, and a "red pattern" in which the button LED 62 emits red light and the button image is displayed in red, which will be described later. In the "movable body motion pattern determination process", if "pattern A-1", "pattern A-2", "pattern B-1", and "pattern B-2" are determined, the "white pattern" is determined. If the "pattern B-3" is determined, the "red pattern" is determined. It should be noted that either the "white pattern" or the "red pattern" may be determined in accordance with the variable display result, regardless of the "movable body motion pattern determination process". Further, the presentation pattern is not limited to the above, and three or more types may be set, or only one type may be set.

The "movable body performance" is a performance that notifies whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether or not the movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position. Specifically, it is executed when the operation of the push button 31B is detected within the valid operation period in the "pass/fail button presentation", or when no operation is detected and the valid operation period has elapsed, and the movable body 32 returns to the origin position. If the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the production position, it will be notified that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled, and if the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the production position, it will not be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, that is, it will be notified that it is a loss. (See Figure 11-58 (C6) and Figure 11-59 (D1)).

Note that when the movable body 32 falls, the movable body LED 208 and the game effect lamp 9 built into the movable body 32 light up in a predetermined manner, and an image of an enemy character being defeated is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5. , an effect image emphasizing the movable body 32, etc. are displayed, and when the movable body 32 does not fall, lighting of the movable body LED 208 and game effect lamp 9, display of an image of an enemy character being defeated, an effect image, etc. are not executed.

In this way, in the "decision effect", if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the win/fail button effect is performed, the movable object effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and the variable display result is a loss. In some cases, after the success/failure button performance is performed, a failure notification is performed without executing the movable object performance.

(Post-production)
Next, the post performance will be explained. As shown in FIG. 11-36, the post performance is the post event after it is announced that the jackpot gaming state will be controlled in the variable display part where the variable display of decorative symbols in the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is executed. The performance part is a performance in which the expected number of balls to be issued in the corresponding jackpot game state is notified in a specifiable manner (see FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10)).

The variable display part is the period from the start of the variable display in the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern until the variable display result is announced, and the post performance part is the period during the variable display period of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. This is the period from the end of the variable display part until the end of the variable display. That is, the variable display period of the super reach jackpot variation pattern includes the variable display part period and the post performance part period. In addition, the post production is executed during the fanfare period from the start of the jackpot game state until the start of the round game, and during the symbol confirmation period after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern. You can do it like this.

In the post-production, the ally characters and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach production and the expected number of pitches counter display that shows the number of pitches expected to be given in the jackpot game state are displayed, and the ally character attacks the enemy character. Each time the number of pitches to be pitched is added, the counter display for the number of pitches expected to be pitched increases. Next, during a predetermined operation validity period, an operation promotion display consisting of the words "Press!" and a button image imitating the push button 31B are displayed, and when an operation of the push button 31B is detected within the operation validity period, Or, when no operation is detected and the operation validity period has elapsed, the friendly character defeats the enemy character, a predetermined number (for example, 1000 or 1500, etc.) is displayed on the expected ball count counter display, and the expected ball count during the jackpot is displayed. The number of pitches will be reported. Then, after the post performance ends, a jackpot game state is started.

(Entertainment effect)
Next, the rush effect will be explained. As shown in Figure 11-36, the entry performance consists of a "rush introduction performance" that is executed before the start of the "probability change entry performance" and "time saving rush performance A", and a control of the probability change state after the end of the jackpot game state. "Probability variable entry performance" that is executed when the game starts, "time-saving entry performance A" that is performed when the control of time-saving state A starts after the end of the jackpot game state, and jackpot game state in the low-probability state. There is a "time-saving entry performance B" that is executed when the control of the time-saving state B is started due to the variable display being executed 900 times without being controlled by. In addition, the timing to start the rescue time saving arrival variation (variable display when the value of the rescue time saving number counter becomes 0) at which "time saving rush effect B" is executed, that is, before the execution of "time saving rush effect B" is "Shutter effect" (see FIGS. 11-23(B)(C) and FIGS. 11-25(B)(C)) is executed.

Specifically, the "probable variable entry performance" and the "time-saving entry performance A" are executed during the ending period of the jackpot game state, and the "time-saving entry performance B" is executed at the 900th time when the control start conditions for the time-saving state B are satisfied. This is executed during a symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds) after the variable display (relief time shortening variation) ends.

"Time-saving entry performance A" is a time-saving state A by displaying the characters "BATTLE RUSH entry!!" after the entry introduction performance (see Figures 11-63 (A) to (C)) is executed. This is an effect that notifies the start of control (see FIG. 11-63(D)).

In the "probable entry effect", after the entry introduction effect (see Figures 11-63 (A) to (C)) is displayed, the word "Kiwami" is displayed in addition to the words "BATTLE RUSH Rush!!" This is an effect that notifies that control of the variable probability state is started (see FIG. 11-63 (D) and FIG. 11-64 (A1 to A4)).

"Time-saving rush effect B" does not display the rush introduction effect (see Figures 11-63 (A) to (C)), but instead displays the words "BATTLE RUSH rush!!" and "Play 1100". This is an effect that indicates that the time saving state B control is to be started by displaying characters (see FIG. 11-63 (D) and FIG. 11-64 (B1 to B4)).

In addition, for the variable entry performance/time-saving entry performance B, the characters ``BATTLE RUSH RUSH!!'' may be displayed after the characters ``Kiwami'' and ``Yu-1100'' are displayed.

(Variable display start setting process)
Next, the operation of the production control board 12 will be explained. FIG. 11-44 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, the production control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the first variation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271). If the first fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS271; Yes), it corresponds to the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special figure pending memory in the reception command buffer at the time of start winning. The various command data and various flags that are attached and stored are shifted upward by one buffer number (step 069SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1" of the first special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-0", and the The various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2" of the 1st special figure reservation memory is shifted so that it is stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1", and the data is stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-1". The various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-3" are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "1-2", and the data is stored in the buffer number "1-4" of the first special drawing holding memory. ” is shifted so that it is stored in association with the buffer number “1-3”.

Further, if the first fluctuation start command reception flag is not in the on state (off state) in step 069SGS271 (step 069SGS271; No), it is determined whether the second fluctuation start command reception flag is in the on state ( Step 069SGS273). If the second fluctuation start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS273; No), the variable display start setting process is ended, and if the second fluctuation start command reception flag is on (step 069SGS273; Yes), Shift the various command data stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special figure pending memory in the received command buffer at the time of start winning to the upper position by one buffer number. (Step 069SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift them to, so they are erased.

Specifically, the various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1" in the second special figure reservation memory are shifted so as to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-0", and the The various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2" of the second special figure reservation memory is shifted so that it is stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and the data is stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-1", and The various command data stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-3" are shifted to be stored in correspondence with the buffer number "2-2", and the data is stored in the buffer number "2-4" of the second special figure holding memory. ” is shifted so that it is stored in association with the buffer number “2-3”.

After executing step 069SGS272 or step 069SGS274, the production control CPU 120 reads the fluctuation pattern designation command from the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area (step 069SGS275). The variable pattern designation command is stored in the variable pattern designation command storage area in response to reception of the fluctuation pattern designation command in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, and is deleted when the variable display ends. Note that the fluctuation pattern designation command may be deleted in response to reading.

Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the decorative symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (that is, the received display result designation command) (step 069SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stop symbols of the decorative symbols according to the display result specified by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stop symbols of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display result storage area. do. In addition, in the command analysis process (S75) shown in FIG. 6, the received display result designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area in response to the reception of the display result designation command, and the received display result designation command is stored at the end of the variable display. will be deleted. Note that the display result designation command may be deleted in response to reading.

In addition, in this feature part 069SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120, for example, selects a stop symbol other than "7". It is determined from among a plurality of combinations of even-numbered symbols (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "222", "444", "666", and "888"). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot B, the stop symbols may include multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, "111", " 333'', ``555'', ``999'', etc.). In addition, if the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to jackpot C, a combination of decorative symbols in which 3 symbols are aligned with "7" (jackpot symbol) is used as the stop symbol. decide. Further, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a loss, a decorative pattern in which three symbols are irregular is determined as a stop symbol.

In addition, in the advance notice setting process of step S161 in the production control process process of FIG. 10, if the production control CPU 120 decides to execute the above-described symbol chance eye notice, the variable display until the variable display of the target pending is started. The stopping symbols are determined to be a combination of even symbols or a combination of odd symbols.

In determining these stop symbols, the production control CPU 120 extracts random numbers for determining the stop symbols, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which numerical values are associated with data indicating combinations of decorative symbols. Then, the stop symbol of the decorative symbol can be determined. That is, the stop symbols may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a rescue time reduction number A designation command that specifies that the rescue time reduction has been reached is stored in the command storage area, that is, whether or not the fluctuation is a variation in which the rescue time reduction has been reached. (Step 069SGS276A). If it is a relief time-saving attainment variation (step 069SGS276A; Yes), a shutter effect setting process is executed (step 069SGS276B), and if it is not a relief time-saving attainment variation (step 069SGS276A; No), the process advances to step 069SGS277. In the shutter performance setting process, a period until the start of the performance is set in a shutter performance start wait timer, and the corresponding shutter performance is started at the timing when the performance start wait timer times out.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277). If the variation pattern is a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super shortened non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; Yes), the process advances to step 069SGS283. If the variation pattern is not a shortened non-reach variation pattern or a super shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), execute reach notice execution determination processing. (Step 069SGS278).

In the reach notice execution determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the execution of the reach notice is extracted, and the presence or absence of execution of the reach notice is determined using the reach notice execution determination table shown in FIG. 11-46 (A). do.

In the reach notice execution determination table, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), for each of "non-execution" and "execution", when the gaming state is "normal state" and "variable probability state" , "Time-saving state A", and "Time-saving state B" are assigned different judgment values so that the number of judgment values shown in FIG. 11-46(A) is obtained.

Specifically, when the gaming state is "normal state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the gaming state is a "variable probability state", 50 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 50 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the gaming state is "time saving state A", 60 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 40 determination values are assigned to "execution". Further, when the gaming state is "time saving state B", 80 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 20 determination values are assigned to "execution".

In this way, when comparing the reach notice in three gaming states excluding the normal state, the execution rate is set to be lower in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state >Time-saving state A>Time-saving state B).

In addition, in this embodiment, a mode in which the reach notice can be executed with a probability of 20% in the time saving state B is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach notice is not executed in the time saving state B. You can do it like this.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, in step 069SGS279A, it is determined whether or not it was decided to execute the reach notice in step 069SGS278 (step 069SGS279A), and if it is determined that the execution of the reach notice has not been decided (step 069SGS279A; No), proceed to step 069SGS280, and if it is determined that the execution of the reach notice has been decided (step 069SGS279A; Yes), select the effect control pattern (process table) corresponding to the reach notice (step 069SGS279B), and then press the button notice. Pattern determination processing is executed (step 069SGS279C).

In the button notification pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for button notification pattern determination is extracted, and the button notification pattern corresponding to the gaming state is determined as shown in FIGS. 11-46 (B) to (E). A button notification pattern is determined using Tables A to D.

In the button notification pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E), When the variable display result is "Jackpot", "Out of reach", and "Out of reach", different judgment values are shown in Figures 11-46 (B) to (E). It is assigned as follows.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-46(B), in the button preview pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "One hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Continuous hit", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Long press". 20 judgment values are assigned to . In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "successive hit". 10 determination values are assigned to "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "Non-reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "One hit," and five judgment values are assigned to "Continuous hit." 10 determination values are assigned to "long press" and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-46(C), in the button notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is "probable variable state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non-execution ”, 20 judgment values are assigned to “one hit”, 40 judgment values are allocated to “single hit”, 20 judgment values are allocated to “long press”, and “long press” is assigned 20 judgment values. Twenty judgment values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 70 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 15 judgment values are assigned to "one hit", and 15 judgment values are assigned to "successive hit". 10 determination values are assigned to "long press", and 5 determination values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "Non-reach," 70 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "One hit," and five judgment values are assigned to "Continuous hit." 10 determination values are assigned to "long press" and 15 determination values are assigned to "long press".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), in the button preview pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is "time saving state A," when the variable display result is "jackpot," 20 judgment values are assigned to "Execution", 40 judgment values are assigned to "One hit", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Continuous hit", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Long press". 20 judgment values are assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "out of reach", 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 10 judgment values are assigned to "single hit", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "successive hit". Five determination values are assigned to "long press", and five determination values are assigned to "long press". In addition, when the variable display result is "non-reach," 80 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution," 5 judgment values are assigned to "one hit," and "successive hits" are assigned 5 judgment values. 5 judgment values are assigned to ``long press'', and 10 judgment values are assigned to ``long press''.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-46(E), in the button preview pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non- 90 determination values are assigned to "Execution" and 10 determination values are assigned to "Blow". Further, in the case where the variable display result is "out of reach", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 5 determination values are assigned to "one hit". Furthermore, in the case where the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when comparing button announcements in three gaming states other than the normal state, the execution rate is set to be lower in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (execution ratio: variable probability state >Time-saving state A>Time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", the non-reach or SP reach fluctuation pattern is determined, but if the execution rate of reach notice is low and , even if the reach notification is executed, the button notification will not be executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the time saving state B, even if the reach notice is executed, the button notice is not executed. , the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of the button notice is lower than the execution rate of the button notice when the variable display result is ``miss'' when the number of pending memories is ``0'' in the variable probability state or time saving state A. The button notification may be executable.

In addition, in the time saving state B, when the number of pending memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the button notice is executed at a rate of 5% in the reach notice. The present invention is not limited to this, and the button preview may not be executed when the variable display result is "miss" regardless of the number of pending memories.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot or a hit that is out of reach, a "one-hit" pattern may be executed that prompts the player to perform a single operation, but the execution rate is extremely low, and the player is not required to perform an operation for a predetermined operation validity period. The "repeat hit" and "long press" operations that encourage the player, that is, the "repeat hit" and "long press" operations that are more cumbersome than the "single hit" operation that prompts the player to perform a single operation, are not promoted.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS279A that execution of the reach notice has not been decided (step 069SGS279A; No), or after executing the button notice pattern determination process in step 069SGS279C, the production control CPU 120: Character preview pattern determination processing is executed (step 069SGS280). In the character preview pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for character preview pattern determination is extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-47 (A) to (D), character preview pattern determination table A corresponding to the game state is extracted. ~D is used to determine the character preview pattern.

In the character preview pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-47 (A) to (D), "Non-execution", "Speech A (reach?)", "Speech B (may be reach!!)" For each pattern of ``, when the variable display result is ``Jackpot'' and ``Lose,'' the different judgment values are the number of judgment values shown in Figures 11-47 (A) to (D). As such, it is assigned.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-47(A), in the character preview pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", 20 determination values are assigned to "non-execution," 30 determination values are assigned to "line A," and 50 determination values are assigned to "line B." In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Ten judgment values are assigned to.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-47(B), in the character preview pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is "probable variable state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non-execution ”, 30 determination values are assigned to “Speech A”, and 50 determination values are assigned to “Speech B”. In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "not executed", 20 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Ten judgment values are assigned to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-47(C), in the character preview pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non- 20 determination values are assigned to "Execution", 30 determination values are assigned to "Speech A", and 50 determination values are assigned to "Speech B". In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "not executed", 10 judgment values are assigned to "line A", and 10 judgment values are assigned to "line B". Ten judgment values are assigned to.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-47 (D), in the character preview pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non- 90 determination values are assigned to "Execution", and 10 determination values are assigned to "Speech B". Further, when the variable display result is "miss", 95 determination values are assigned to "non-execution" and 5 determination values are assigned to "line A". Further, in the case where the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 determination values are assigned to "non-execution".

In this way, when character announcements are compared in three game states other than the normal state, the execution rate is set to be lower in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable state >Time-saving state A>Time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time saving state B, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of retained memories is "0", the non-reach or SP reach variation pattern is determined, but in the variable display of any variation pattern. Character previews are never executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the character preview is not executed, but the present invention is limited to this. Even if it is possible to execute character previews at a lower rate than the execution rate of character previews when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0" in the variable probability state or time saving state A. good.

Further, in the time saving state B, when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" and the variable display result is "miss", the character preview is executed at a rate of 5%. However, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the character preview may not be executed if the variable display result is "miss" regardless of the number of reserved memories.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, after executing the character preview pattern determination process in step 069SGS280, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether the fluctuation pattern stored in the fluctuation pattern designation command storage area is a super reach fluctuation pattern. Determination is made (step 069SGS281A). If the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, if it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the process proceeds to step 069SGS282. If the variation pattern is a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; Yes), a movable body motion pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS281B).

In the movable body motion pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining a movable body motion pattern is extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), a movable body motion pattern corresponding to the game state is A movable body motion pattern is determined using determination tables A to D.

In the movable body movement pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in FIGS. 11-48 (A) to (D), the movable body advance notice is not executed and the movable body 32 is dropped by the movable body performance (decision performance). "Pattern A-1" for the jackpot, the movable object notice is vibration (small), "Pattern A-2" for the jackpot where the movable object 32 falls with the moving object effect, the movable object notice is vibration (large), "Pattern A-3" is for a jackpot in which the movable body 32 is dropped in a movable body performance, and "Pattern B-1" is for a loss in which the movable body 32 is not dropped in a movable body performance in the decisive performance when the movable body notice is not executed. , "Pattern B-2" for failures in which the movable body notice is vibration (small) and the movable body 32 does not fall with the movable body performance, the movable body notice is vibration (large), and the movable body 32 is dropped with the movable body performance For each pattern of "Pattern B-3" for a loss without letting the player win, different judgment values are shown in Figures 11-48 (A) to ( The determination values are allocated to the number of determination values shown in D).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (A), in the movable body movement pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", , 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". A value is assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-48(B), in the movable body movement pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is "probable variable state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "pattern 20 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". It is being In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 20 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-48(C), in the movable body movement pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", 80 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-1", 10 judgment values are assigned to "pattern B-2", Ten determination values are assigned to "pattern B-3".

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-48 (D), in the movable body movement pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 90 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-1", 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-2", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern A-3". Assigned. Furthermore, when the variable display result is "miss", 100 determination values are assigned to "pattern B-1".

In this way, when comparing the movable body movement patterns when the variable display result is a jackpot in three game states excluding the normal state, "Pattern A--" in which both the movable body notice and the movable body presentation are executed. The execution rate of "Pattern A-2" and "Pattern A-3" is higher in the variable probability state and the time-saving state A than in the time-saving state B. On the other hand, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" in which the movable object preview is not executed and only the movable object effect is executed is higher in the time saving state B than in the variable probability state and the time saving state A.

In addition, when comparing the movable body movement patterns when the variable display result is a failure in three game states excluding the normal state, "Pattern B-2" in which only the movable body notice is executed, and "Pattern B-3" '' is higher in variable probability state and time-saving state A than in time-saving state B (non-execution).

That is, in the case of time saving state B, the execution rate of movable body notices is lower than in the variable probability state and time saving state A (execution rate of movable body notices: variable probability state > time saving state A > time saving state B).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the time saving state B, "pattern A-1" is executed in which the movable object notice is not executed and only the movable object presentation is executed. Although the ratio is 90%, the present invention is not limited to this, and "Pattern A-1" is used when the variable display of the super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the variable probability state or time saving state A. The execution rate may be 90% or less as long as it is higher than the execution rate. Further, in the time saving state B, when the variable display of the super reach jackpot variation pattern is determined, the execution rate may be 100%.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if it is determined in step 069SGS281A that the variation pattern is not a super reach variation pattern, that is, it is a non-reach variation pattern (step 069SGS281A; No), the production control CPU 120 determines the movable body notice pattern. The process is executed (step 069SGS282). In the movable body notice pattern determination process, a random number (0 to 99) for determining a movable body notice pattern is extracted, and as shown in FIGS. 11-49 (A) to (D), a movable body notice pattern corresponding to the game state is extracted. A movable body notice pattern is determined using determination tables A to D.

In the movable body notice pattern determination tables A to D, as shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D), the patterns of "non-execution", "vibration (small)", and "vibration (large)" are determined respectively. , different judgment values are assigned to cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" and a "miss", respectively, so that the numbers of judgment values shown in Figures 11-49 (A) to (D) are obtained. ing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-49(A), in the movable object notice pattern determination table A used when the gaming state is "normal state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", , 10 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "vibration (large)". Assigned. In addition, when the variable display result is "Off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)". (Large)” are assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (B), in the movable object notice pattern determination table B used when the gaming state is "probable variable state", when the variable display result is "jackpot", "non-probable" 10 judgment values are assigned to "Execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)", and 60 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (large)". There is. In addition, when the variable display result is "Off", 60 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)". (Large)” are assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), in the movable object notice pattern determination table C used when the gaming state is "time saving state A", when the variable display result is "jackpot", " 10 judgment values are assigned to ``non-execution'', 30 judgment values are assigned to ``vibration (small)'', and 60 judgment values are allocated to ``vibration (large)''. ing. In addition, when the variable display result is "Off", 70 judgment values are assigned to "Non-execution", 20 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)", and 20 judgment values are assigned to "Vibration (small)". (Large)” are assigned 10 judgment values.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (D), in the movable object notice pattern determination table D used when the gaming state is "time saving state B", when the variable display result is "jackpot", super Since only the reach variation pattern is determined, no determination value is assigned to "non-execution," "vibration (small)," and "vibration (large)." In addition, if a non-reach variation pattern is determined when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0", 100 judgment values are assigned to "non-execution". There is.

In this way, when comparing the three game states excluding the normal state, the movable object notice is set so that the execution rate becomes lower in the order of variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B (execution ratio: probability variable). State>Time-saving state A>Time-saving state B).

In particular, in the case of time saving state B, if a non-reach variation pattern is determined, the movable object notice will not be executed, even when the number of reserved memories is "0".

In this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is "0" in the time saving state B, the movable object notice is not executed. The movable object notice is executed at a lower rate than the execution rate of the movable object notice when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is "0" in the variable probability state or time saving state A, but is not limited to this. It may be possible.

Further, although the movable object notice is not executed when the variable display result is "miss" when the number of reserved memories is other than "0" in time saving state B, the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the variable display result is "miss" when the number of pending memories is other than "0", the movable object preview may be executed.

Furthermore, if execution of any of the effect patterns is determined in the above-described button notice pattern determination process, character notice pattern determination process, or movable body notice pattern determination process, the period until the start of the notice is set in the various notice start waiting timers. , the corresponding notice is started at the timing when the various notice start waiting timers are timed up.

Returning to FIG. 11-44, if the variation pattern is a shortening non-reach variation pattern or a super shortening non-reach variation pattern in step 069SGS277, if the moving body movement pattern determination process in step 069SGS281B is executed, the moving body advance notice pattern determination in step 069SGS282 When the process is executed, the effect control CPU 120 selects the effect control pattern (process table) according to the variation pattern designation command in step 069SGS283. Then, the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table is started (step 069SGS284).

The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation part control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A, etc. are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N). There is.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 controls the performance device (image display as a performance component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The device 5, various lamps as performance parts, speakers 8L and 8R as performance parts, and operation units (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) are controlled (step 069SGS285). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the variation pattern on the image display device 5. Further, in order to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the audio control board 13 in order to output audio from the speakers 8L and 8R.

In this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 performs control so that the decorative symbols are displayed variably according to the variation patterns that correspond one-to-one to the variation pattern designation commands. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the command.

Then, a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (step 069SGS286). Also, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (step 069SGS287). Note that the predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the decorative symbol on the left center right to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data to the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data obtained is output to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby achieving variable display (fluctuation) of the decorative pattern. Next, the value of the production control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the production process during variable display (step S172) (step 069SGS288), and the process ends.

(Variable display processing)
Next, FIG. 11-45 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (step S172) in the effect control process. In the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decreases each value of the process timer, variable display time timer, and variable display control timer by 1 (step 069SGS301, step 069SGS302, step 069SGS303). In addition, the performance control CPU 120 has various performance start wait timers set (it has been decided to perform a preview performance, etc.), or the flag for performing a preview performance is on (execution of a preview performance, etc.). (in step 069SGS304; Y), various production processes are executed (step 069SGS305). If both the performance start wait timer and the preview performance execution flag are off, the process proceeds to step 069SGS306 without executing the performance process of step 069SGS305.

In step 069SGS306, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step 069SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer setting value in the process table to the process timer (step 069SGS308). Further, the control state for the production device (production component) is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, sound control execution data, operation unit control data, etc. set next (step 069SGS309a). On the other hand, if the process timer has not timed out, the production device (for production (step 069SGS309b).

Next, it is checked whether the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310). If the variable display control timer has timed out (step 069SGS310; Y), the production control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-center right decorative pattern (displayed after 30 ms has elapsed from the previous display switching point of the decorative pattern). The image data of the screen to be displayed) is created and written into a predetermined area of the VRAM (step 069SGS311). In this way, variable display control of decorative patterns is realized in the image display device 5. The display control unit 123 sends to the image display device 5 a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table. Output. In this way, on the image display device 5, the background image, character image, and decorative pattern in the variation of the decorative pattern are displayed. Also, a predetermined value is reset to the variable display control timer (step 069SGS312).

Furthermore, if the variable display control timer has not timed out (step 069SGS310; N), after executing step 069SGS312, the production control CPU 120 checks whether the variable display time timer has timed out (step 069SGS313). . If the variable display time timer has not timed out (step 069SGS313; No), it is determined whether the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is in the on state (step 069SGS314). If the confirmed command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS314; No), the process ends.

If the variable display time timer has timed out in step 069SGS313 (step 069SGS313; Yes), or if the confirmed command reception flag is on in step 069SGS314 (step 069SGS314; Yes), the right-handed LED lighting start command is received. It is determined whether the flag is on (step 069SGS315). If the right-handed player LED lighting start command reception flag is in the on state (step 069SGS315; Yes), the right-handed player LED 069SG031 starts lighting up, and right-handed player notification images 069SG400, 069SG401, etc. are displayed to start right-handed player notification. After that (step 069SGS316), the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends.

If the right-handed LED lighting start command reception flag is not on (step 069SGS315; No), it is determined whether the right-handed LED lighting end command reception flag is on (step 069SGS317). If the right-handed player LED lighting end command reception flag is in the ON state (step 069SGS317; Yes), the right-handed player LED 069SG031 is turned off, the right-handed player notification image 069SG400, etc. is hidden, and the right-handed player notification is ended ( Step 069SGS318), the value of the production control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319), and the process ends. In addition, if the right hit LED lighting end command reception flag is not in the on state (step 069SGS317; No), the value of the production control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the special figure per waiting process (step S173) (step 069SGS319). , the process ends.

Although not shown in detail, after the processes from step 069SGS315 to step 069SGS318 are executed, the production control process flag is set after the symbol confirmation period specified from the symbol confirmation designation command based on the confirmation command reception flag has elapsed. The value of is updated to a value corresponding to the special figure waiting process (step S173).

In addition, even if the variable display time timer has not timed out, the control will shift to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received, so for example, a fluctuation pattern that shows a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Even when a designated command is received, the variable display of the decorative symbol can be ended when the regular variable display time has elapsed (when the variable display of the special symbol ends).

Incidentally, process data during variable display of the decorative pattern is set in the process table used for variable display control of the decorative pattern. In other words, the sum of the process timer setting values of process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the variable display time of the decorative pattern. Therefore, when the process timer for the last process data n times out in the process of step 069SGS306, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the variable display control of decorative patterns based on the process table is performed. ends.

(Examples of various operations depending on gaming status)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three game states, time saving state B, variable probability state, and time saving state A, will be explained based on FIG. 11-50. 11-50, (A) is a diagram showing an example of fluctuating operation for each gaming state, (B) is a diagram showing an example of performance operation for each gaming state, and (C) is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of time-saving state B. It is a diagram.

First, as shown in Figure 11-50 (A), the contents of each item "A1" to "A5" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probable variable state", and "time saving state A" will be compared. .

<Item A1>
Regarding the number of deviation fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in the "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. "Reach" and "SP Reach D" are "2", and in "Probability Variable State", as shown in Figure 11-6 (A) (B), when the number of reserved memories is 1 to 3, the maximum is " There are 4 items: "shortened non-reach A", "non-reach A", "SP reach C", and "SP reach D", and in "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (A) (B) As shown, when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, the maximum is ``3'', ``shortened non-reach'', ``non-reach'', and ``SP reach E''.

In other words, when the variable display result is "miss", the number of variable display patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 in "time-saving state B" (for example, 2) is the same as the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time-saving state A". number (for example, 3) and also smaller than the number (for example, 4) of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the "probable variable state".

The number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and variable probability state, or the number of variation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and variable-probability state, or in the case of time-saving state B, the number of deviation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of time-saving state B, time-saving state A, and probability-variable state. As long as it is small, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A2>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. The average time of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for possible deviations is approximately 2.205 seconds {((1.5s×97)+(25s×3))÷100=2.205}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after time saving state B starts, the number of pending memories is 0, and the number of pending memories for 2 to 1100 variable displays is 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in time saving state B. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for deviation is approximately 2.2 seconds {(7.54+(2.205×1099))/1100=2.20985}.

In the "probable variable state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is approximately 8.2 seconds. {((7s×95)+(40s×2)+(25s×3))÷100=8.2}, variable display time of fluctuation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 The average time is about 4.8 seconds {((3s×85)+(7s×10)+(40s×2)+(25s×3))÷100=4.8}. Here, assuming that the first variable display after the definite variable state starts, the number of pending memories is 0, and the number of pending memories for the 2nd to 110th variable display is 1 to 3, then the number of pending memories that can be determined in the variable state is The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern is approximately 4.83 seconds {(8.2+(4.8×109))÷110=4.83}.

In "time saving state A", as shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and (B), the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 is approximately 9.15. seconds {((7s x 95) + (50s x 5)) ÷ 100 = 9.15}, when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, the average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for loss that can be determined is approximately 5.55 seconds {((3s×90)+(7s×5)+(50s×5))÷100=5.55}. Here, assuming that time saving state A is started and the first variable display has a pending memory number of 0, and the variable display of 2 to 110 times has a pending memory number of 1 to 3, it is possible to determine in time saving state A. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure is approximately 5.58 seconds {(9.15+(5.55×109))/110=5.58}.

In other words, the average time (for example, about 2.2 seconds) of the variable display time of the losing variation pattern that the CPU 103 determines in "time saving state B" when the variable display result is "missing" is the same as that in "time saving state A". It is shorter than the average time of the variable display time (for example, about 5.58 seconds) of the error variation pattern to be determined, and the average time of the variable display time of the error variation pattern to be determined in the "probable variation state" (for example, about 4.83 seconds). seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 7.54 seconds) of the variable display time of the fluctuation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state B" is It is shorter than the average time (for example, about 9.15 seconds) of the variable display time of the outlier fluctuation pattern determined when the number is 0, and the outlier fluctuation pattern is determined when the number of retained memories is 0 in the "probable variable state". (for example, about 8.2 seconds).

In addition, the average time (for example, about 2.205 seconds) of the variable display time of the variation pattern for failure that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 in "Time saving state B" is different from that in "Time saving state A". It is shorter than the average time of variable display time (for example, about 5.55 seconds) of the error variation pattern to be determined, and the average time of the variable display time of the error variation pattern to be determined in the "probable variation state" (for example, about 4.8 seconds). seconds).

According to items (A1) and (A2), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the control is made to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the long period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. A variable display in which the variable display is not determined provides a preferable time-saving state B because there are fewer types of variation patterns and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the digesting speed of the variable display is higher than in the variable probability state or time-saving state A. can do.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the deviation variation pattern becomes longer in the order of time saving state B, definite variable state, and time saving state A, or in the case of time saving state B, it becomes longer than at least one of time saving state A and definite variable state. As long as it is shorter, the above-mentioned time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A3>
Regarding the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be selected by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-8 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, ", and in the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, "SP non-via", "SP reach C", "SP reach D ", and in "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, "SP non-via" and "SP reach E ” is “2 pieces”.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns (for example, 1) that the CPU 103 can determine in "time saving state B" is the same as the number of variable display patterns that can be determined in "time saving state A". number (for example, two), and also smaller than the number (for example, three) of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the "probable variable state".

The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of time saving state B, time saving state A, and variable probability state, or the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 increases in the order of time saving state B, time saving state A, and probability variable state, or in the case of time saving state B, the number increases in the order of time saving state B, time saving state A, and probability variable state. As long as it is small, the above number can be changed in various ways.

<Item A4>
Regarding the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. The average time of the variable display time of the variation pattern is approximately 40 seconds.

In the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 51.1 seconds { ((22s x 5) + (55s x 80) + (40s x 15)) ÷ 100 = 51.1}, so the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for a jackpot that can be determined in a variable probability state is approximately It becomes 51.1 seconds.

In "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (C), the average time of the variable display time of the variable pattern for the jackpot that can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3 is approximately 62.8 seconds. {((22s×5)+(55s×95))÷100=62.85}.

In other words, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the average time (for example, about 40 seconds) of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern that the CPU 103 determines in "time saving state B" is determined in "time saving state A". It is shorter than the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern (for example, about 62.8 seconds), and the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in the "probability change state" (for example, about 51.1 seconds) less than.

According to items (A3) and (A4), in the time saving state B which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the jackpot gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. In the case of a variable display in which the variable display is determined, there are fewer types of variation patterns and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, so that the digesting speed of the variable display is higher than in the variable probability state or the time-saving state A. Therefore, a suitable time-saving state B is selected. can be provided.

In addition, the average time of the variable display time of the jackpot fluctuation pattern is longer in the order of time saving state B, probability variable state, and time saving state A, or in the case of time saving state B, it is longer than at least one of time saving state A and probability variable state. As long as it is shorter, the above-mentioned time can be changed in various ways.

<Item A5>
Regarding the determination ratio of the non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern determined by the CPU 103, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIGS. In the "probable variable state", as shown in Figures 11-6 (A) and (B), it is 80% when the number of pending memories is 0, 1 to 3, and in the "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-6 (A) (B), it is 80%. -7 As shown in (A) and (B), when the number of reserved memories is 0, 1 to 3, it is 70%.

In other words, when the variable display result is "miss" in "time saving state B", the percentage (e.g. 97%) of the "non-reach deviation variation pattern" being determined by the CPU 103 is the same as the variable display result in "time saving state A". is higher than the percentage (for example, 95%) in which the "non-reach deviation variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 when the variable display result is "off" in the "probability change state", and the CPU 103 is higher than the percentage (for example, 95%) at which the "non-reach variation pattern" is determined.

According to item (A5), in the time-saving state B that is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is not decided to control to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the long period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled. In the variable display, by setting the mode of the variable display to the ready-to-reach mode, it is less likely to be provoked by mischief, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss", the rate at which the "non-reach miss variation pattern" is determined by the CPU 103 is 97% in time saving state B, and 97% in both definite variable state and time saving state A. Although 95% is exemplified in the order of time-saving state B, variable probability state, and time-saving state A, the present invention is not limited to this. , 95%) and time-saving state A (for example, 94%), or if time-saving state B is higher than at least one of time-saving state A and variable probability state, the above-mentioned The proportions can vary.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is "miss" in "time saving state B", the proportion of "non-reach deviation variation pattern" determined by the CPU 103 is 97%; however, The present invention is not limited to this, but when the variable display result is "miss" in "time saving state B", the percentage of the "non-reach miss variation pattern" determined by the CPU 103 is 100%, that is, " If the variable display result is "miss" in "time saving state B", the reach variation pattern may not be determined.

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss", the CPU 103 determines a loss variation pattern that can be determined in "time-saving state B" (for example, "non-reach A"), and a loss variation pattern that can be determined in "time-saving state A" and "probable variable state". Possible deviation variation patterns (for example, "non-reach A") are common, so it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

In addition, when the variable display result is a "jackpot", the CPU 103 determines a losing fluctuation pattern (for example, "SP reach D") that can be determined in the "time saving state B" and a losing fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the "probable variable state" (for example, "SP reach D"). For example, "SP Reach D") is common, so it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Next, as shown in Figure 11-50 (B), we compared the contents of each item "B1" to "B10" in the three gaming states: "Time saving state B", "Probable variable state", and "Time saving state A". do.

<Item B1>
Regarding the execution rate of "movable object notice" and "character notice" as jackpot suggestion effects in the variable display of the loss fluctuation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, in "time saving state B", Figure 11-49 ( As shown in D), the execution rate of "movable object notice" is 0% (not executed), and as shown in Figure 11-47 (D), the execution rate of "character notice" is 0% (not executed). Yes, in the "variable state", as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), the execution rate of "movable object notice" is 40%, and as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), the execution rate of "character notice" is 40%. The ratio is 30%, and in "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-49 (C), the execution ratio of "movable object notice" is 30%, as shown in Figure 11-47 (C), The execution rate of "character preview" is 20%.

In other words, when the variable display is executed in the error fluctuation pattern that is determined when the number of pending memories is 0 in "time saving state A", and when the number of pending memories is 0 in the "probable variable state" When a variable display is executed in a variable pattern, a suggestive effect such as a "movable body notice" or "character notice" is executed in the variable display, while the number of reserved memories is 0 in "time saving state B". When a variable display is executed using the deviation variation pattern determined in , no suggestive effects such as "movable object notice" or "character notice" are executed in the variable display.

According to item (B1), in the time saving state B which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it can be determined when the number of pending memories is 0, considering that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. In the variable display of a variable pattern (for example, "non-reach" or "SP reach" other than shortened non-reach), it is not provoked by movable object notices or character notices, so it provides a suitable time-saving state B. be able to.

To explain in detail, when the control of the probability variable state, time saving state A, and time saving state B is started, the pending memory is stored in the first pending memory because the left-handed game was played in the normal state until then. Even if there is, it is possible that there is no pending memory in the second pending memory. In other words, when the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started for the first time, or when the control of the time saving state B is started by executing the variable display 900 times, it takes time to store the pending memory in the second pending memory. In order to earn money, a losing fluctuation pattern that can be determined when the number of retained memories is 0 is a losing fluctuation pattern that has a longer variable display time than a shortened non-reaching pattern (for example, a non-reaching pattern with a fluctuation time of 7 seconds or a fluctuation time of 25 seconds). 40 seconds SP reach, etc.) are determined at a high rate. Then, when a deviation variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach pattern is determined, suggestive performances such as "movable object preview" and "character preview" can be executed in the variable display.

However, when control in time-saving state B is started, it is highly likely that the player has executed various missed notices during the long gaming period, If a "Character Notice" or "Character Preview" is executed, it will cause trouble. Therefore, when a variable display is executed using a deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the time saving state B, "Character Notice" is executed. "Body preview" and "Character preview" are not implemented.

In this embodiment, when the variable display is executed in the error variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in the "time saving state B", "movable object notice" or " Although we have exemplified a form in which a suggestive effect such as "Character Notice" is not executed, for example, when a variable display is executed with a deviation variation pattern determined when the number of reserved memories is 0 in "Time Saving State B", the corresponding The execution rate of suggestive effects such as "movable object notice" and "character notice" in variable display is higher than that of suggestive effects such as "movable object notice" and "character notice" in "variable state" and "time saving state A". It is preferable to set it lower than the execution rate.

In addition, when the variable display is executed in the error variation pattern determined when the number of pending memories is 0, the rate at which suggestive effects such as "movable object notice" and "character notice" are executed is lower than that in time-saving state B. If the execution rate of "movable body notice" and "character notice" is lower than the execution rate of "movable body notice" and "character notice" in at least one of time saving state A and variable probability state, the above ratios may vary. It can be changed to

In addition, in time saving state B, if it is a losing fluctuation pattern, "movable object notice" or "character notice" will not be executed, and if it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, "movable object notice" or "character notice" will be executed. You can do it like this. By doing so, in the time saving state B, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not a suggestive effect such as a "movable body notice" or a "character notice" will be executed.

In addition, the suggestive effects that suggest that the game will be controlled into a jackpot gaming state include the ``reach notice'' and the It may also include a "button notice". By doing so, in the time saving state B, interest can be increased by drawing attention to whether or not the "reach notice" and "button notice" will be executed.

Also, based on the variable display results, the first suggestion performance (for example, dialogue A or vibration (small)) and the second suggestion performance, which has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot gaming state than when the first suggestion performance is executed, are determined. By being able to perform multiple types of suggestive performances (for example, dialogue B and vibration (large)), it is possible to perform multiple types of suggestive performances, including suggestive performances (for example, lines B and vibrations (large)), so that in time-saving state B, attention is drawn to whether or not the suggestive performances are executed. can be increased.

<Item B2>
Regarding the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is incorrect, in "time saving state B", as shown in FIG. 11-42 (D), none of them are determined, so "0"'', and in the ``probability change state'', as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), there are 4 pieces: ``countdown notice'', ``pending change notice'', symbol chance notice'', and ``effect display notice''. Yes, and in "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-42(C), there are "3": "pending change notice", "symbol chance notice", and "effect display notice".

In other words, the number of types of prefetched notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 (for example, 0) when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is the same as the number of types of prefetched notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state A". Pre-reading that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in a case where the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in a certain case (for example, 3) and when the variable display result is off in the "probability change state" It is less than the number of types of notices (for example, 4).

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B", the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 is 0, but the present invention For example, the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is "time saving state A" and "probable variable state". If the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 is smaller than the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined when the variable display result is a failure in at least one of the above, one or more types of pre-read notices may be executable.

In addition, the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the production control CPU 120 when the variable display result is incorrect in the "time saving state B" is variable display in at least one of the "time saving state A" and the "probability variable state". The above-mentioned number can be changed in various ways as long as it is smaller than the number of types of pre-read notices that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 when the result is a failure.

<Item B3>
Regarding the execution rate of "pre-read notice" when the variable display result is negative, in "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-42 (D), it is "0%" because neither is executed; In "Status", as shown in Figure 11-42 (B), the total execution rate of "Countdown notice", "Pending change notice", "Symbol chance notice", and "Effect display notice" is "40%", In the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-42(C), the total execution ratio of "pending change notice", symbol chance notice" and "effect display notice" is "30%".

In other words, the execution rate (for example, 0%) of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in "time-saving state B" is the execution ratio of the look-ahead notice when the variable display result is wrong in "time-saving state A". (for example, 30%), and also lower than the execution rate (for example, 40%) of the pre-read preview when the variable display result is a failure in the "variable probability state".

According to items (B2) and (B3), in the time saving state B which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the jackpot gaming state is controlled in consideration of the fact that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. In the case of a variable display in which the pre-read notice effect is not determined, the development cost can be suppressed because the number of types of pre-read notice effects that can be determined is small, and since the user is less likely to be unnecessarily provoked by the pre-read notice effect, it is possible to provide a suitable time-saving state B. can.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B", the execution rate of the pre-read notice is 0%, that is, the form in which the pre-read notice is not executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the execution rate of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is the same as the variable display result in at least one of "time saving state A" and "probable variable state". The pre-read notification may be made executable if it is lower than the execution rate of the pre-read notification in the case of a failure.

In addition, the execution rate of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in "time-saving state B" is the same as the execution rate of the pre-read notice when the variable display result is wrong in at least one of "time-saving state A" and "probable variable state". The above ratio can be changed in various ways as long as it is lower than the execution ratio of the advance notice.

In addition, as a look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state, the first look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "symbol chance notice" ", "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second lookahead notice performance pattern (for example, "on hold") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first lookahead notice performance pattern is executed. "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the first look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed in time saving state B (for example, 0%, Fig. 11 -43 (D)) is lower than the rate at which the first look-ahead preview performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 10%, see Figure 11-43 (C)). In state B, the user is less likely to be mischievously provoked by the first look-ahead preview performance, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, as a look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be commonly executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state, the first look-ahead notice performance pattern (for example, "pending change notice", "symbol chance notice" ", "blue" pattern of "effect display notice"), and a second lookahead notice performance pattern (for example, "on hold") that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first lookahead notice performance pattern is executed. "change notice", "symbol chance eye notice", "red" pattern of "effect display notice"), and the rate at which the second look-ahead notice performance pattern is executed in time saving state B (for example, 90%, Fig. 11 -43 (D)) is higher than the rate at which the second look-ahead preview performance pattern is executed in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state (for example, 50 to 70%, see Figure 11-43 (C)). In the time-saving state B, the second look-ahead preview effect is likely to be executed, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, the look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state and the look-ahead notice performance pattern that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B are common (for example, "symbol chance eye" By not setting a prefetched preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Further, the pre-reading notice presentation pattern that can be determined by the presentation control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading notice presentation pattern that can be determined by the presentation-controlling CPU 120 in at least one of the time-saving state A and the variable probability state are common. By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B (for example, "symbol chance notice"), it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Further, the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined by the performance control CPU 120 in the time-saving state B and the pre-reading notice performance pattern that can be determined by the performance-controlling CPU 120 in both the time-saving state A and the variable probability state are common (for example, By not setting a look-ahead preview performance pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, the development cost can be reduced and the program capacity can be reduced.

<Item B4>
As shown in Figure 11-46 (E), in "time saving state B", the execution rate of the "button notice" as a movement promotion effect that encourages the player's actions is "10%" in the case of a jackpot, and "10%" in the case of a miss. In the case of "probability change state", as shown in Figure 11-46 (C), it is "80%" in the case of a jackpot, "30%" in the case of a miss, and "time saving". In "Status A", as shown in FIG. 11-46(D), the percentage is "80%" in the case of a jackpot, and "20%" in the case of a loss. Note that these execution rates are the rates when "reach notice" is executed.

In other words, the execution rate of button announcements per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% for jackpot, 5% for loss) is the same as the execution rate of button notices per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". It is lower than the ratio (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 20% for a miss) and lower than the execution ratio of button announcements per variable display in the "probability change state" (e.g., 80% for a jackpot, 30% for a miss). low.

According to item (B4), in consideration of the fact that in the time-saving state B, which was controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which the jackpot gaming state was not controlled, the player was asked to press the push button in the first variable display. Since the number of executions of the button notice, which is an operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of 31B, is small, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in "time saving state B" is higher than the execution rate of button announcements per variable display in "time saving state A" and "variable probability state". Although the present invention is not limited to this, for example, the button preview may not be executed in the "time saving state B" (execution ratio 0%).

In addition, if the execution rate of button announcements per 1 variable display in "Time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of button announcements per 1 variable display in "Time saving state A" or "Probable variable state", then the above ratio can be changed in various ways.

<Item B5>
In the button preview, there is a "single hit pattern" as a first action promotion effect that prompts the player to make a single action, and a "repeated hit pattern, long hit pattern" as a second action promotion effect that encourages the player to make an action over a predetermined movement period. Regarding the execution ratio of the "push pattern", in the "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-46 (E), the execution ratio of the "one hit pattern" is "10%" in the case of a jackpot, and "10%" in the case of a miss. is "5%", and in the case of "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern", it is "0% (non-execution)" in the case of jackpot and miss.

In the "probability variable state", as shown in Figure 11-46 (C), the execution rate of the "one hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot, "10%" on average in the case of a loss; In the case of "repeat hit pattern, long press pattern", the winning percentage is "40%" and the average winning percentage is "20%".

In "time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-46 (D), the execution rate of the "one hit pattern" is "40%" in the case of a jackpot, and "7.5%" on average in the case of a loss. In the case of the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern", the winning percentage is "40%" and the average winning percentage is "17.5%".

In other words, the performance control CPU 120 can decide to execute both the "one hit pattern" and the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" in the "variable probability state" and the "time saving state A", and in the "time saving state B". , it is possible to determine a "single hit pattern", but it does not determine whether to execute a "repeated hit pattern or long press pattern".

In addition, the execution rate of "repeat pattern, long press pattern" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% for jackpots and misses) It is lower than the execution rate of "pattern, long press pattern" (for example, 40% for jackpot, 20% for miss), and the execution rate of "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern" per variable display of 1 in "time saving state A". (For example, 40% for a jackpot and 17.5% for a miss).

According to item (B5), in the time-saving state B, which is controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, the player can press the A suitable time-saving state B can be provided because the player is less likely to be prompted to perform troublesome operations such as "repeat-hit pattern, long-press pattern" that requires continuous operation of the button 31B.

In addition, in this embodiment, the performance control CPU 120 is able to determine the "one hit pattern" in the "time saving state B", but does not determine the execution of the "repeated hit pattern, long press pattern". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the determination ratio of the "one-hit pattern" in the "time-saving state B" is the "one-hit pattern" in at least one of the "time-saving state A" and the "variable probability state". If the determination rate is lower than the determined rate, the "one-hit pattern" may be made executable.

In addition, in the time saving state B, the percentage (for example, 10%) at which the "button notice" is executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a jackpot is the percentage (for example, 10%) that the "button notice" is executed by the performance control CPU 120 when the variable display result is a jackpot. By setting the rate higher than the percentage (for example, 5%) at which "button notices" are executed by the CPU 120, it is possible to draw attention to the fact that "button notices" are executed in time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, the production patterns of the "button notice" include a "one hit" pattern, and a "repeated hit" or "long press" pattern that has a higher rate of being controlled to a jackpot game state than when the "one hit" pattern is executed. The rate at which the "one hit" pattern is executed in time saving state B (e.g. 10%) is the same as the rate at which the "sequential hit" or "long press" pattern is executed in time saving state A or the probability change state (e.g. 40%). ), but even if the rate of execution of the "one hit" pattern in time saving state B is higher than the rate of execution of "repeat hit" or "long press" pattern in time saving state A or variable probability state. good. By doing so, when the movement promotion effect is executed in the time saving state B, it is often a "one-hit" pattern, so that the interest can be improved.

In addition, the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state A and the variable probability state and the period in which the "button notice" is executed in the time saving state B are common (for example, the period in which the "reach notice" is executed By making the execution period of the "button notice" common in the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, before executing the "button notice", the performance control CPU 120 also performs operation promotion preparation performance (for example, although not particularly shown, before the operation valid period starts, the push button 31B to be operated is displayed in a fade-in manner. (e.g., a presentation in which an effect is displayed, a presentation in which an effect display is displayed, etc.) can be performed, the period in which the movement promotion preparation presentation is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, and the period in which the movement promotion preparation presentation is performed in the time saving state B. It is preferable that the execution period be the same, and by doing so, it is possible to reduce the development cost and to suitably notify that the "button notice" will be executed.

<Item B6>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of "movable object notice" as a suggestive performance that suggests that the jackpot game state will be controlled, in "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-49 (D), In the case of a jackpot or a miss, it is 0% (non-execution), and in the "probability variable state", as shown in Figure 11-49 (B), it is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 40% in the case of a miss. In "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-49(C), the percentage is 90% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a loss.

In other words, the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 0% jackpot, 0% loss) is the same as the execution rate of "movable object notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". It is lower than the execution rate of "Notice" (for example, 90% jackpot, 30% miss), and the execution rate of "movable notice" per one variable display in "probability change state" (for example, 90% jackpot, 40% miss). ) lower than

According to item (B6), it is suggested that in the time saving state B, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the control is made to the jackpot gaming state, taking into account that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. Since the number of executions of the movable body advance notice is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the execution ratio of "movable object notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is 0%, but the present invention is not limited to this. , ) means that the execution rate of "movable object notice" per one variable display in "time-saving state B" is higher than the "movable object notice" execution rate per one variable display in at least one of "time-saving state A" and "probable variable state". If the execution rate is lower than the execution rate of "mobile body notice", it may be possible to execute "movable body notice" in "time saving state B".

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 0%) is different from the rate at which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state A or probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot. Although it is lower than the percentage (for example, 90%) in which "movable object notice" is executed, the percentage in which "movable object notice" is executed in time-saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot is lower than the percentage (for example, 90%) in which "movable object notice" is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot. In this case, the rate at which "movable object notice" is executed may be higher than in the time saving state A or the variable probability state. By doing this, the degree of attention to the "movable object notice" can be made different between the time-saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in time-saving state B (for example, 0%) is different from that in time-saving state A and probability variable state when the variable display result is a jackpot. is lower than the percentage (for example, 30%) in which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state B when the variable display result is a jackpot. If the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which the "vibration (small)" pattern is executed in the time saving state A or the variable probability state may be higher (for example, 30%). By doing this, the degree of attention to the "movable object notice" can be made different between the time-saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time-saving state B, thereby increasing interest.

<Item B7>
Regarding the execution rate per variable display of "character notice" as an inciting effect to incite whether or not to change the mode of variable display to reach mode, in "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-47 (D) In the case of a jackpot, the percentage is 10%, and in the case of a miss, it is 5%, and in the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-47 (B), the percentage is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 30% in the case of a loss. Yes, in "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-47(C), the percentage is 80% in the case of a jackpot and 20% in the case of a loss.

In other words, the execution rate of "character preview" per 1 variable display in "time saving state B" (for example, 10% jackpot, 5% loss) is the same as the execution rate of "character notice" per 1 variable display in "time saving state A". (e.g., 80% jackpot, 20% miss), and lower than the execution ratio of "character preview" per variable display in "probability change state" (e.g., 80% jackpot, 30% miss). low.

In addition, as shown in Figure 11-46 (A), regarding the execution rate per variable display of "reach notice" as an inciting effect to incite whether or not to change the variable display mode to reach mode, "time saving state In "B", it is 20%, in "variable probability state", it is 50%, and in "time saving state A", it is 40%.

In other words, the execution rate of "reach notice" per one variable display in "time saving state B" (e.g. 20%) is the same as the execution ratio of "reach notice" per one variable display in "time saving state A" (e.g. , 40%), and also lower than the execution rate (for example, 50%) of the "reach notice" per one variable display in the "probability variable state".

According to item (B7), in the time-saving state B that is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is determined whether or not a reach is achieved, taking into consideration the long period in which the jackpot game state is not controlled. Since the number of executions of reach notices and button notices is reduced, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution ratio of "character notice" per one variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution ratio of "time saving state A" and "movable object notice" as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the execution rate of "character preview" per variable display in "time saving state B" may be set to 0%, that is, it may not be executed. In addition, as long as the execution rate of "character notice" per variable display in "time saving state B" is lower than the execution rate of "time saving state A" or "movable object notice", the above ratio can be changed in various ways. be.

<Item B8>
As a movable body operation pattern of "movable body notice" and "movable body performance" that can be executed by the performance control CPU 120 in one variable display, "pattern A" is used to execute "movable body notice" and "movable body performance". -2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first effect execution pattern)" and "Pattern A-1 (first effect execution pattern)" which executes only the "movable object effect" without executing the "movable object notice". Regarding the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a jackpot, in "Time-saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-48 (D). In the "variable probability state", it is 20%, as shown in Figure 11-48 (B), and in the "time saving state A", it is 10%, as shown in Figure 11-48 (C). .

In other words, the execution rate (for example, 90%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a failure in "Time-saving state B" is the same as the execution rate (for example, 90%) of "Pattern A-1" when the variable display result is a failure in "Time-saving state A." It is higher than the execution rate (for example, 10%) of ``Pattern A-1'' and also higher than the execution rate (for example, 20%) of ``Pattern A-1'' when the variable display result is wrong in the ``probability variable state''. expensive.

According to item (B8), in the time saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is decided to control to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. In this case, the movable body 32 is rarely moved inadvertently during the movable body notice before the movable body performance in which a jackpot is announced by falling of the movable body 32 is executed, and thus the time-saving state B is suitable. can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state B" is the same as the execution rate of "pattern A-1" when the variable display result is wrong in "time saving state A" or "variable probability state". Although the execution rate is lower than the execution rate of "Pattern A-1" in the case of The execution rate of "Pattern A-1" may be set to 0%, that is, it may not be executed.

In addition, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the rate at which "patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first performance execution pattern)" are executed (for example , 80-90%), when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state B, "patterns A-2, A-3, B-2, B-3 (first performance execution pattern)" are executed. By setting the percentage higher than the ratio (for example, 10%), in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, it is possible to draw attention to whether or not the movable body 32 operates, thereby increasing interest.

In addition, the execution frequency of the "movable object performance" in the time saving state B (for example, about 10%) is lower than the execution frequency (for example, 80 to 90%) of the "movable object performance" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. In the time-saving state B, the movable body 32 is rarely operated unnecessarily, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

<Item B9>
Regarding the performance mode of the "post-performance" that informs the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state in which the performance control CPU 120 has notified that the SP reach performance will be controlled to the jackpot game state, see Figure 11-60. As shown in , this is common to "time-saving state B,""variable probability state," and "time-saving state A."

According to item (B9), in the time saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is decided to control to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. The variable display has fewer types of variable display patterns and the average time of the variable display time is shortened, which increases the speed at which the variable display is digested. Since A and the variable probability state can be enlivened by a common performance, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, there is a "movable object performance" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state A or variable probability state, and a "movable object effect" that is executed when the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state B. , are common (see FIG. 11-59 (D1)), so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the "after effect" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and the control data used to control the movable body LED 208 to emit light in conjunction with the "after effect" in the time saving state B. Since the control data used is common (for example, light emission control data executed based on the extended command D300), development costs can be reduced.

In addition, a vibration mode is performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post performance" in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, and a vibration mode is performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the "post performance" in the time saving state B. , are common (for example, vibration control data executed based on the extended command S300), thereby making it possible to reduce development costs.

<Item B10>
When the time saving control is started, the production control CPU 120 notifies the start of the time saving control by displaying a rush image 069SG470 (for example, characters such as "BATTLE RUSH rush!!") as a special state start display. Regarding the "rush effect" as a special state start effect, when the control of the variable probability state is started, the rush image 069SG470 is displayed in the variable variable entry effect, and when the control of the time saving state B is started, the time saving entry effect B is displayed. In addition to displaying the entry image 069SG470, the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B (for example, characters such as "Play 1100") are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control in the variable probability state or time saving state A is started. (See Figure 11-63 (D), Figure 11-64 (A4) (B4)).

According to item (B10), in consideration of the fact that in the time saving state B, which was controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which the jackpot game state was not controlled, in the rush performance, the control of the probability variable state was In addition to the entry image 069SG470 that is common to when the time saving state B starts, the play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B, which are special displays that are not displayed when the control of the variable probability state is started, are displayed, so that the start of the time saving state B can be excited. I can do it.

Furthermore, the effect control CPU 120 may be able to determine a special variation pattern having a variable display time that allows execution of the "rush effect" in the relief time shortening variation. By doing so, the "rush effect" can be suitably executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-50(C), the difference between the "time saving state B", the "probable variable state" and the "time saving state A" will be explained.

<Item C1>
As explained in each item A1 to A5 shown in FIG. 11-50(A), the number of losing fluctuation patterns and jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined by the CPU 103 is the smallest in time saving state B, and The average time of the variable display time of the pattern or jackpot fluctuation pattern is the shortest in the time saving state B, and the determination rate of non-reach is the highest in the time saving state B. Therefore, the average consumption time per variable display in each of "time saving state B", "probable variable state", and "time saving state A" in which time saving control is performed is that time saving state B is the fastest, and definite variable state is medium speed. , time saving state A is low speed.

In this way, among the time-saving state B, probability variable state, and time-saving state A, in which the fluctuation efficiency is higher than the normal state by performing time-saving control, the probability variable state and time-saving state A provide a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. In contrast, the time saving state B is controlled through execution of variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without a jackpot occurring in a low probability state. be.

In addition, in the variable probability state and the time-saving state A, the number of variable displays during which the time-saving control is performed is the first number (for example, 110 times), whereas in the time-saving state B, the number of variable displays during which the time-saving control is performed is the first number (for example, 110 times). The second number of times is greater than the first number of times (for example, 1100 times).

In other words, in time-saving states such as variable probability state and time-saving state A, players are in a gaming state where they can wait in anticipation of the next jackpot while enjoying reach and various performances while reducing investment compared to normal states. On the other hand, in the case of time-saving state B, there is no jackpot and the game is controlled after a long period of playing in a disadvantageous state for the player, and the number of variable display times of the time-saving control is greater than in the variable probability state or time-saving state A. Taking into consideration the time-saving situation, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency as mentioned above, we reduce the number of wasted batted balls and reduce investment, but rather than enjoying the production, we can efficiently digest the variable deviation display and shorten the time By giving priority to winning the jackpot within a short period of time, it is possible to suppress a decline in the player's desire to play.

<Item C2>
Furthermore, as explained in each item B1 to B10 shown in FIG. 11-50(B), the execution rate of the various preview effects mentioned above is lowest in the time-saving state B, highest in the variable probability state, and highest in the time-saving state A. Inside.

In other words, during the long period of play until the game is controlled to time-saving state B, there is a high possibility that the player is quite depressed as various preview performances are executed and continue to miss. In state B, the execution rate of the preview performance is lower than in other game states, so that it is possible to suitably prevent a decrease in the player's desire to play due to a missed performance.

<Item C3>
In this way, time-saving state B has a higher fluctuation efficiency than other variable-variable states and time-saving state A where time-saving control is performed in the same way, and there are fewer opportunities to be stimulated by advance announcements, so additional investment can be made. This is a gaming state in which the player waits for the jackpot by suitably digesting the variable display while suppressing the decline in motivation and desire to play.

More specifically, the time saving state B is based on the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of hitting a ``normal pattern'' in the normal pattern game, and the ease with which the game ball enters the second starting prize opening. While the control (high opening control, high base control), etc. is common to other variable probability states and time-saving state A, the average special symbol fluctuation time (period for varying special symbols) is different from other probability variable states and time-saving state A. This is a time-saving state in which variable efficiency is prioritized over performance by reducing the execution frequency of various effects while increasing the variation efficiency by shortening the time compared to state A.

In addition, the CPU 103 can determine a deviation variable display pattern (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) that can be determined in the time saving state B, and a deviation variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, a non-reach , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines a deviation variable display pattern that can be determined in time saving state B (for example, non-reach, SP reach D) and a deviation variable display pattern that can be determined in both time saving state A and probability variable state (for example, non-reach, SP reach D). ) and are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state. It is preferable to make the control period shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, thereby increasing the speed of digestion of the variable display, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable time saving state B, and in the time saving state A, The interest in the game can be increased by increasing the average time of the control period.

Further, the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in the time saving state B (for example, 2) is smaller than the number of outlier fluctuation patterns that can be determined in the time saving state A (for example, 3). The number of determinable losing variation patterns (e.g., 3) is smaller than the number of determinable losing variation patterns (e.g., 4) in the variable probability state, so that the number of determinable losing variation patterns in time-saving state B is The interest of the game can be increased by reducing the number to give priority to the use of the variable display, while increasing the number of determinable loss variation patterns in the probability variation state.

The CPU 103 also provides a jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in the time saving state B (for example, SP reach D) and a jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, the probability variable state). , SP reach D) are common, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Also, the jackpot fluctuation pattern that the CPU 103 can determine in the time saving state B (for example, not via SP) and the jackpot variable display pattern that can be determined in both the time saving state A and the probability variable state (for example, not via the SP) are common. By doing so, and by not setting a variable display pattern that can be determined only in the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Further, the average time of the control period controlled to the time saving state B is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state, and the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state is shorter than the average time of the control period controlled to the variable probability state. It is preferable to make the control period shorter than the average time of the control period. In this way, in the time saving state B, the average time of the control period is shorter than in the variable probability state, thereby increasing the speed of digestion of the variable display, thereby making it possible to provide a suitable time saving state B, and in the time saving state A, The interest in the game can be increased by increasing the average time of the control period.

In addition, the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that the CPU 103 can determine in time-saving state B (for example, 1) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in time-saving state A (for example, 2), and in time-saving state A. The number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined (e.g., 2) is smaller than the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined (e.g., 3) in the variable probability state. The interest of the game can be increased by reducing the number to give priority to the variable display while increasing the number of jackpot fluctuation patterns that can be determined in variable probability states.

Furthermore, a non-reach deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined by the CPU 103 in the time-saving state B, and a non-reach deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability variable state. and are common, and by not setting a non-reachable deviation that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

In addition, the non-reach deviation variation pattern (for example, non-reach) that the CPU 103 can determine in the time-saving state B and the non-reach deviation pattern (for example, non-reach) that can be determined in both the time-saving state A and the variable probability state are common. By not setting a non-reachable deviation that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, it is possible to reduce the development cost and the program capacity.

In addition, the CPU 103 determines a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in the time-saving state B (for example, non-SP) and a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined in at least one of the time-saving state A and the probability-variable state (for example, non-SP). ) and are common, and by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in time-saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

In addition, a non-reach jackpot fluctuation pattern that can be determined by the CPU 103 in time-saving state B (for example, not via SP), and a non-reach out-of-reach fluctuation pattern that can be determined in both time-saving state A and probability variable state (for example, not via SP), are common, and by not setting a non-reach jackpot that can be determined only in the time-saving state B, it is possible to reduce development costs and program capacity.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the time-saving state B, the execution rate of various performances that can be performed by the performance control CPU 120 is lower than in the variable probability state or the time-saving state A, but for example, in the normal state (low probability /Low base state), when the remaining number of variable displays until the time saving state B is controlled (relief time saving attainment variation) becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, remaining 100 times, 50 times, etc.), the effect control CPU 120 The execution rate of various effects that can be executed by the CPU 120 may be set lower than the execution rate of various effects that can be executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the normal state. In addition, in this case, the execution rate of performance 1 may be lower than the execution rate in the normal state, but higher than the execution rate in time-saving state B (execution rate of performance 1; normal state (remaining 101 or more times) > normal state (remaining number of times 100 or less) > time saving state B).

In addition, in the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), the number of remaining variable displays before being controlled to time-saving state B (relief time-saving attainment fluctuation) becomes less than a predetermined number (for example, 100 or 50 times remaining). Sometimes, the contents of the items A1 to A5 and B1 to B10 may be changed to correspond to the time saving state B. By doing so, it is possible to suppress the troublesomeness until the time saving state B is controlled.

In addition, in the normal state (low accuracy/low base state), the period in which the remaining number of variable displays is less than or equal to a specific number (for example, 50 times remaining, 10 times, etc.) before being controlled to time-saving state B (relief time-saving attainment variation) In the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, the rate at which performances with low expectations (for example, SP reach performance A, weak pattern preview performance, etc.) are executed may be increased.

(Variable display mode of design)
Next, variable display modes of decorative symbols and small symbols will be explained based on FIGS. 11-51 to 11-55. FIG. 11-51 is a timing chart showing variable display modes of symbols in (A) a probability variable state, a short-term shortening non-reach fluctuation pattern in time-saving state A, and (B) a short-short non-reach fluctuation pattern in time-saving state B. . FIG. 11-52 is an example of the production operation of the shortened non-reach variation pattern in the probability variation state and time saving state A. FIG. 11-53 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach variation pattern in the probability variation state and time saving state A. FIG. 11-54 is an example of the performance operation of the shortened non-reach variation pattern in the time saving state B. FIG. 11-55 is an example of the performance operation of SP reach E and SP reach D.

In this embodiment, each decorative pattern that is variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R is a number display section 069SG051 consisting of numbers "1" to "9" and a lower order number display section 069SG051. A pedestal display section 069SG052 displayed on the display layer (back side) of. On the other hand, the left small design, medium small design, and right small design displayed in the display area 5SL at the upper left of the display screen of the image display device 5 are each made up of only numbers "1" to "9" that are displayed smaller than the decorative designs. configured. The decorative symbols and small symbols are variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbols.

The variable display modes of the variation patterns (for example, non-reach variation patterns) in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5R are normal state, variable probability state/time saving state A, and time saving state B. There is a difference between if and when. Below, regarding the variable display mode of decorative symbols based on the non-reach variation pattern (including shortened non-reach A and non-reach A) in the normal state, variable probability state/time saving state A, the timing shown in Fig. 11-51 (A) will be explained. This will be explained based on the chart and with reference to FIGS. 11-52 and 11-53. In addition, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach system in the normal state, variable probability state/time saving state A is common, in FIG. do.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(A), at the start timing ta1 of the variable display of shortened non-reach in the variable probability state and time saving state A, the decorative symbols and small symbols of each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5R are variable. The display starts simultaneously (all at once) (see Figure 11-52(A)). That is, the start order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. In addition, each decorative pattern starts variable display at "low speed", changes to "medium speed" at timing ta2 when a predetermined time has elapsed, and then changes to "high speed" which is the maximum speed at timing ta3 when a predetermined time has elapsed. After that, it is displayed variably at a constant rotation speed. On the other hand, the small symbols are variably displayed at the highest speed "high speed" from the start timing ta1 of variable display. Note that "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decorative pattern and "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative symbols changes from "medium speed" to "low speed" in the order of the left decorative symbol display area 5L, the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and the middle decorative symbol display area 5C. . Then, at timing ta4 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52(B)). Next, the pedestal display section 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then a specific action display (stop display action) is performed that returns to the original size (see Figure 11-52 (C)), and then the original size is displayed. At the timing of returning to , the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-52(D)).

Next, at timing ta5 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-52(E)). Next, after the pedestal display section 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see Figure 11-52 (F)), and then the original size is displayed. At the timing of returning to , the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-52 (G)).

Next, at timing ta6 when a predetermined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, a predetermined pattern stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-53 (H)). Next, after the pedestal display section 069SG052 is displayed enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size, a specific action display (stop display action) is performed (see FIG. 11-53 (I)), and then the original size is displayed. At timing ta6 when the display returns to , the decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-53 (J)). Although not shown in detail, the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a temporary halt display mode (for example, , oscillating motion, etc.).

Then, at timing ta7 (timing at which the pattern confirmation designation command is received) when a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing ta6 when the decorative pattern was stopped and temporarily displayed in the center decoration pattern display area 5C, the left, middle, and right small patterns are displayed at the same time. (all at once) are stopped and displayed (see Figure 11-53(K)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without any specific action being displayed. Further, at timing ta7 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, at timing ta8 when a symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from timing ta7 when the small symbol was stopped and displayed, the next variable display can be started.

Next, the variable display mode of the non-reach-type decorative symbols in the time saving state B will be explained based on the timing chart of FIG. 11-51(B) and with reference to FIG. 11-54. In addition, since the variable display mode of the decorative pattern of the non-reach system in the time saving state B is common, in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 11-51(B), at the start timing tb1 of the variable display of super shortened non-reach in time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols and small symbols in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5R, and 5R is They are started simultaneously (all at once) (see Figure 11-54(A)). That is, the start order of variable display of each decorative pattern is common. Moreover, each decorative pattern is variably displayed at a constant rotational speed after reaching the highest speed, ie, "high speed", at timing tb2, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the variable display was started at "medium speed". On the other hand, the small symbols are variably displayed at "high speed" which is the highest speed from the variable display start timing tb1. Note that "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the decorative pattern and "high speed" which is the maximum speed of the small pattern may be the same or different.

Next, as the end of the variable display approaches, the variable display speed of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C becomes "medium speed" at the same time (all at once), and At timing tb3 when the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once), a predetermined symbol stop sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R (see FIG. 11-54(B)). Incidentally, the variable display speed of the decorative pattern may change from "high speed" to "low speed" without passing through "medium speed". Next, after the pedestal display section 069SG052 is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size, a specific action display (stop display action) is not performed, and a predetermined period of time has elapsed from timing tb3 when each decorative pattern was temporarily stopped and displayed. At timing tb4 (timing at which the symbol confirmation designation command is received), the left, middle, and right small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time (all at once) (see FIG. 11-54(C)). In this way, the three small symbols are stopped and displayed at the same time without any specific action being displayed. Further, at timing tb4 when the small symbols are stopped and displayed, the three decorative symbols that have been temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed.

Then, at timing tb5 when a symbol determination period (for example, 0.5 ms) has elapsed from timing tb4 when the small symbol was stopped and displayed, the next variable display can be started.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "medium speed" during acceleration or deceleration is common to the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A. The time saving state B may be shorter than the variable probability state or the time saving state A. In addition, the period during which the variable display speed of the decorative pattern in the variable display is "high speed" is shorter in the time saving state B than in the definite variable state and in the time saving state A; It may be common to A.

In addition, in this embodiment, the stop display mode of the decorative symbols variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A (left, middle, right). Although the present invention is not limited to this example, for example, in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the decorative symbols on the left, middle, and right are arranged horizontally and displayed in a stopped state. While the decorative symbols are horizontally arranged and stopped, the left, middle, and right decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in different positions in the vertical direction in time-saving state B. The manner may be different from the manner in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable display mode of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is common to the time saving state B, the probability variable state, and the time saving state A (variably displayed in the vertical direction). ), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the variable probability state and the time-saving state A, the display is variably displayed in the vertical direction, while in the time-saving state B, the display is displayed variably in the horizontal direction. Variable display in time-saving state B, such as displaying a variable display, or displaying a variable display of a decorative pattern in a reduced size in the display area 5SR, etc., and continuing to display special effects by friendly characters, enemy characters, etc. on the display screen. The mode may be different from the variable display mode in the variable probability state or the time saving state A.

In this way, the start order of the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is as follows: in the variable probability state and time-saving state A, the non-reach variation pattern is used, and in the time-saving state B, the non-reach variation pattern is used. The time required for the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C to reach the maximum speed is shorter in the time-saving state B than in the variable probability state and the time-saving state A. (tb1-tb2<ta1-ta3). Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression depending on the state and increase interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is that if the non-reach variable pattern is in the variable probability state or time-saving state A, the display is stopped in the order of left → right → middle, and the display is stopped in the order of left → right → middle. In state B, if the non-reach is a variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are simultaneously stopped and displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression depending on the state and increase interest.

In addition, the stop order of the variable display of decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C is that in the variable probability state and time-saving state A, the non-reach is a shift variation pattern, and in the time-saving state B, the non-reach is a shift variation pattern. As is common to both cases, the time from when a decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in one of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C until the next decorative pattern is stopped and displayed is in a variable state. , the non-reach variation pattern may be different in the time-saving state A and the case where the non-reach variation pattern is the shift variation pattern in the time-saving state B. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression depending on the state and increase interest.

In addition, the number of times the symbol stop sound is output in the variable display of 1 is 3 times because the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at different timings when the non-reach variable pattern is in the variable probability state and time saving state A. , in the time-saving state B, if the non-reach is a variation pattern, the left, middle, and right are stopped and displayed at the same timing, so it is displayed only once. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression depending on the state and increase interest.

In addition, the number of outputs of the symbol stop sound in variable display 1 is common between the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the variable probability state and time-saving state A, and the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the time-saving state B. good. Therefore, it is possible to give a different impression depending on the state and increase interest.

In addition, in the variable probability state and time saving state A, a specific action display (symbol stop action) is performed when the non-reach is a fluctuation pattern, whereas in the time saving state B, when the non-reach is a fluctuation pattern, a specific action display ( Symbol stop action) is not performed. Therefore, in the variable probability state and the time-saving state A, the performance effect is enhanced by displaying the specific action, while in the time-saving state B, by not performing the specific action display, smooth variable display can be realized.

In addition, the specific action display (symbol stop action) is common in the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the probability variable state and time-saving state A, and the case where the non-reach is a deviation variation pattern in the time-saving state B. While enhancing the display effect, development costs can be reduced by making the mode of displaying the specific action common between the variable probability state, time-saving state A, and time-saving state B.

In addition, during the period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed to when the small symbol is stopped and displayed, the non-reach variation pattern in time-saving state B is better than the non-reach variation pattern in time-saving state A, and the non-reach variation pattern in time-saving state A. {t1 (ta6 to ta7)>t2 (tb3 to tb4)}. Therefore, smooth variable display can be realized in the time saving state B.

In addition, the pattern confirmation period (ta7 to ta8) is the minimum period from when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 to when the variable display of the decorative pattern starts in the next variable display in the variable probability state and time saving state A. And, in time saving state B, the symbol confirmation period (tb4 to tb5) is the minimum period from when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display of 1 until the variable display of the decorative symbol starts in the next variable display. Common. Therefore, development costs can be reduced by standardizing control that takes into account the drawing process until the decorative pattern is completely stopped and displayed.

In addition, although the specific motion display of each decorative pattern has been exemplified as a motion display that is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size, the present invention is not limited to this, and the motion mode is not limited to the above, and can be modified in various ways. In addition, in the specific action display, the specific action is displayed only on the pedestal display section 069SG052, and the specific action display on the number display section 069SG051 is not performed, so the display of the specific action enhances the production effect while ensuring the visibility of the identification information. However, the numeric display section 069SG051 as well as the pedestal display section 069SG052 may also display a specific action. Moreover, the specific operation mode may be made to differ depending on each decorative pattern having a different number.

Further, in the above example, the variable display mode is the same for the shortening type non-reach deviation variation pattern and the non-shortening type non-reach deviation variation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the variable display mode may be different between the shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern and the non-shortened non-reach deviation variation pattern.

Furthermore, the display position of the decorative pattern in the time-saving state B may be different between when the variable display starts and when the variable display stops.By doing this, the variable display can be suitably displayed even during a short variable display period. I can show you.

Furthermore, instead of accelerating the variable display speed of the decorative pattern until it reaches the maximum speed as in the present embodiment, the decorative pattern is changed to a mode that is difficult to see (for example, a dark mode) during variable display, and A variable display with a sense of speed may be realized by changing the decorative pattern from a difficult-to-see mode to a normal mode when the decorative pattern is stopped.

Next, the reach specific motion display and the jackpot specific motion display will be explained based on FIG. 11-55.

First, in the variable display of the SP reach E jackpot fluctuation pattern, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55 (A)), and after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 11-55 (B)), the decorative symbol is displayed at a reduced speed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a reach notice and button notice are executed (see FIG. 11-55 (C)), and the decorative symbol is displayed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R. is temporarily stopped and displayed, the pedestal display section 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L and right decorative pattern display area 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to its original size. A return reach specific motion display is performed (see FIG. 11-55 (D)), and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-55 (E)).

Next, although not particularly shown in the drawings, when a jackpot notification is performed through the SP reach effect, fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (Fig. 11 -55(F)). After that, the pedestal display section 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size. After that, a jackpot specific operation display is performed. (See FIG. 11-55(G)), and the determined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (See FIG. 11-55(H)).

On the other hand, in the variable display of the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, the variable display starts (see Figure 11-55 (I)), and the reach mode is not displayed, but the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C are Confirmed decorative symbols that result in a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-55 (F)). After that, the pedestal display section 069SG052 of the decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is enlarged to a predetermined size and then returned to the original size. After that, a jackpot specific operation display is performed. (See FIG. 11-55(G)), and the determined decorative pattern is stopped and displayed (See FIG. 11-55(H)).

In this way, in the case of the SP reach E variation pattern, when the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, there is a reach specific movement display in which the decorative pattern moves in a specific manner, and the decorative pattern stops at a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined jackpot combination. A second specific action display that causes the decorative pattern to perform a specific action when displayed can be executed, and in the variation pattern of SP reach E via reach, a reach specific action display and a jackpot specific action display are executed. However, in the variation pattern of SP reach D that does not go through reach, the reach specific operation display is not executed and the jackpot specific operation display is executed. Therefore, in the SP reach D that can be executed in the time-saving state B, there is less chance of being provoked by mischief, so a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

Note that in this embodiment, after the variable display starts as shown in FIG. 11-55(I), the reach mode is not displayed and the decorative pattern is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-55(F). Although we have exemplified a form in which fixed decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C, the present invention is not limited to this. A "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 falls may be performed without any operation by the player before the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed. .

(Display mode of non-reach deviation fluctuation pattern)
Next, we will compare the non-reach variation patterns. FIG. 11-56 is a diagram comparing examples of production operations of non-reach variation patterns. FIG. 11-57 is a diagram comparing examples of performance operations of non-reach variation patterns. Note that, in the following, a detailed example of the specific operation display performed when the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed will be omitted.

As shown in Figure 11-56, when comparing the shortening type non-reach variation patterns, firstly, in the "ultra shortening non-reach" that can be determined in time saving state B, each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R At the same time, variable display of decorative patterns starts (see FIG. 11-56 (A1)). The variable display of the decorative patterns in each of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is simultaneously stopped and displayed (see FIG. 11-56 (A2)). On the other hand, in "reduced non-reach A" that can be determined in the variable probability state and time saving state A, variable display of decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts at the same time (Figure 11-56 (B1) reference). Next, the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the left decorative pattern display area 5L (see FIG. 11-56 (B2)), and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see FIG. 11-56 (B3)). The decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the center decorative pattern display area 5C (see FIG. 11-56 (B4)).

In this way, regarding the shortening type non-reach variation pattern, in the variable probability state and time saving state A, the variable display time is "3 seconds" and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the order of left, right, and center. On the other hand, in the time saving state B, the variable display time is "1.5 seconds", which is a super shortening non-reach, and the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed simultaneously on the left, right, and center.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-57, when comparing the non-reach variation patterns, firstly, in "non-reach A" which can be determined in a variable probability state, the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R variable display starts at the same time. At this time, a "movable body notice" in which the movable body 32 moves up and down may be executed (see FIG. 11-57 (A1)). Next, before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a character image 069SG100C and a line display 069SG431 consisting of characters such as "Reach?" are displayed. "Notice" may be executed (see Figure 11-57 (A2)).

Next, after the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the left decorative symbol display area 5L (see Figure 11-57 (A3)), a "reach notice" is displayed in which the decorative symbols are displayed at a reduced speed in the right decorative symbol display area 5R, and a push button is pressed. A button image 069SG441 imitating the button 31B and an operation promotion display 069SG442 such as "Long press!" may be displayed to prompt the operation of the push button 31B. A "button notice" may be executed (Figure 11- 57(A4)). After that, a decorative pattern different from the left pattern is stopped and displayed in the right decorative pattern display area 5R (see Figure 11-57 (A5)), and the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in the middle decorative pattern display area 5C without reaching the reach mode. Then, the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (A6)).

In addition, the "non-reach A" that can be determined in the time-saving state A (see Figures 11-57 (B1) to (B6)) is the non-reach variation pattern that can be determined in the variable probability state (see Figure 11-57 (A1)). ) to (A6)), the explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in "non-reach A" that can be determined in time saving state B, after the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts at the same time (see Figure C1), the decorative symbol display area 5L , 5C, and 5R are simultaneously stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends (see FIG. 11-57 (C2)).

In this way, regarding the non-reach variation pattern, the variable display time is "7 seconds" in common in the variable probability state, time saving state A, and time saving state B, but in the variable probability state and time saving state A, "movable object notice" , "character preview," "reach notice," and "button notice" are executed at a high rate, whereas in time-saving state B, "movable body notice," "character notice," "reach notice," and "button notice" are executed at a high rate. The execution rate of various performances such as "Notice" is lower (or not executed) than in the case of variable probability state or time saving state A.

(Display mode of SP reach fluctuation pattern)
Next, we will compare the super reach variation patterns. FIG. 11-58 is a diagram comparing examples of production operations of super reach variation patterns. FIG. 11-59 is a diagram comparing examples of performance operations of super reach variation patterns. FIG. 11-60 is a diagram comparing examples of performance operations of post-effect performance in super reach variation patterns.

Below, when comparing the super reach variation patterns based on FIGS. 11-58 and 11-59, first, in the variation pattern of "SP reach E" that can be determined in time saving state A, the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C , 5R, the variable display of the decorative patterns of each of them starts at the same time (see FIG. 11-58 (A1)). Next, before the decorative pattern is stopped and displayed in any of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a character image 069SG100C and a line display 069SG431 consisting of, for example, the words "You might reach!!" are displayed. "Character preview" may be executed (see Figure 11-58 (A2)).

Next, the variable display mode becomes the reach mode (see FIG. 11-58 (A3)). Although not particularly shown in the drawings, when entering the reach mode, "reach notice", "button notice", etc. may be executed.

Next, a reach title image 069SG440 consisting of a character image and text such as "SP reach effect E" is displayed (see FIG. 11-58 (A4)). Further, at this time, the decorative patterns that have been variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR provided at the upper right of the display screen of the image display device 5. Then, a "battle effect" is started in which the character image 069SG100C of the ally character and the character image 069SG100X of the enemy character confront each other (see FIG. 11-58 (A5)).

Next, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the battle performance, and the final confrontation begins (see FIGS. 11-59 (A6) and (A7)). Here, a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display 069SG452 such as "Start charging!", and a gauge display 069SG453 are displayed as an operation promotion effect that promotes the long press operation of the push button 31B. The "pass/fail button effect" is executed (see FIG. 11-59 (A8)). Note that if a long press operation by the player is detected within the valid operation period during which the operation promotion display 069SG452 is displayed, the level of the gauge display 069SG453 increases (see FIG. 11-59 (A9)).

In addition, before displaying the button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B during or immediately before the performance period of the win/fail button performance, a pre-effect (for example, a light condensing effect in which light gathers at the position where the button image 069SG451 is displayed) is added. etc.) may be executable. Further, it is preferable that such advance performance is not executed in the time saving state B.

Next, when a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the operation promotion display 069SG452, the display of the operation promotion display 069SG452 is changed to "Release!!" to promote the release of the push button 31B. At the same time, the operation time for opening the operation is displayed on the gauge display 069SG453 (see FIG. 11-59 (A10)). Then, an ally character attacks at the timing when the release of the push button 31B is detected before the predetermined effective operation period has elapsed, or at the timing when the effective operation period has elapsed without the release of the push button being detected. An image 069SG455 representing the above is displayed, and the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position (see FIG. 11-59 (A11)).

Next, if the variable display result is a jackpot, a movable object effect is executed, and the movable object 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image and the movable object 32 are displayed showing that the attack of the friendly character hit the enemy character. The movable object effect image 069SG456 consisting of an effect image for emphasis is displayed, and after the movable object 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position (see Figure 11-59 (D1)), the enemy character is defeated and becomes an ally. A notification image 069SG457 indicating that the character has won the battle is displayed (see Figure 11-59 (D2)), and the confirmed decorative symbols that will be the predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. By being displayed, it is announced that the variable display result has become a jackpot (see FIG. 11-59 (D3)).

When a jackpot is announced, as shown in FIG. 11-60, the background image is switched to the fifth background image 069SG350, and the character image 069SG100C and the expected number of balls to be released in the jackpot game state are displayed. A number counter display 069SG460 is displayed and the post performance is started (see FIG. 11-60 (D4)).

Next, an image of the friendly character attacking the enemy character is displayed, and an additional ball count display 069SG461 (for example, "+50") is displayed in response to the attack, and the displayed expected number of balls is displayed. It is added to the counter value displayed on the number counter display 069SG460 (see FIG. 11-60 (D5)). When the counter value displayed on the expected pitch counter display 069SG460 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), a button image 069SG451 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Press!!" are displayed. An operation promotion display 069SG452 and a gauge display 069SG453 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect that promotes a single press operation of the push button 31B is executed (see FIG. 11-60 (D6)).

Next, at a timing when a pressing operation on the push button 31B is detected before a predetermined operation valid period has elapsed, or at a timing when the operation valid period has elapsed without a pressing operation being detected, an ally character attacks and the scheduled ball is released. The counter value of the number counter display 069SG460 is variably displayed (see FIG. 11-60 (D7)), and the enemy character is displayed in a fade-out manner (see FIG. 11-60 (D8)). Then, the expected pitch count counter display 069SG460 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750" which is the expected number of pitches that can be obtained in the case of "6R jackpot") is stopped and displayed. (See Figure 11-60 (D9)).

In the case of jackpot A or jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the planned ball count counter display 069SG460 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state without being updated, and in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the planned ball count display 069SG460 is controlled to the jackpot gaming state. After the counter value displayed on the ball counter display 069SG460 is updated to a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500", etc.) (see FIG. 11-60 (D10)), it is controlled to a jackpot game state.

In addition, if the variable display result is incorrect, although detailed illustrations are not provided, the attack of the ally character does not hit the enemy character, the movable body 32 does not fall from the origin position to the production position, and the enemy character is not defeated. When an ally character loses the battle, the combination of losing symbols is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, thereby informing that the variable display result has become a loss (Figure 11-59). (See D4).

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the jackpot variation pattern of "SP reach C" that can be determined in a variable probability state, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts at the same time (FIG. 11-58). -58 (B1)). Next, at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen is started (see FIG. 11-58 (B2)). After that, the same effect as in FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (A3 to A7) is performed without the variable display mode changing to the reach mode (see FIGS. 11-58 and 50 (B3 to B6)). -59 (A8 to A9) is not performed, and the same effect as in FIG. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed (see FIG. 11-59 (B7 to B8)). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) are performed.

Returning to FIG. 11-58, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern of "SP reach D" that can be determined in time saving state B, the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts at the same time (Fig. 11-58 (C1)). Next, at a timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the variable display, a blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen is started (see FIG. 11-58 (C2)). After that, the same effect as in Fig. 11-58 (A5) is performed without the variable display mode changing to the reach mode, and without the effect shown in Fig. 11-58 (A4) being performed (Fig. 11-58 (C3)), the same effect as in Fig. 11-59 (A10 to A11) is performed without the effect in Fig. 11-59 (A8 to A9) (see Fig. 11-59 (C4 to C5)) ). Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 11-59 (D1 to D3) and FIG. 11-60 (D4 to D10) described above are performed.

(Example of control operation of super reach jackpot fluctuation pattern)
Next, examples of control operations for jackpot fluctuation patterns for SP reaches E, C, and D will be compared based on FIG. 11-61. FIG. 11-61 is a timing chart showing an example of control operations in SP reaches E, C, and D.

As shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to (C), SP reach E, C, and D are obtained in the variable display part that performs variable display of decorative symbols and in the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It consists of a post-performance part that notifies the number of possible expected pitches. In the variable display part, when the variable display starts, the aforementioned "movable body notice", "character notice", "reach notice", "button notice", etc. are executed, and after entering the reach mode, the SP reach effect "Battle production" and "short battle production" are executed. Then, at timing ta1, after the "win/fail button performance" as an operation promotion performance is started in the "decision performance", the "movable object performance" is started at timing ta2. After that, after the results of the "battle performance" and "short battle performance" are announced, at timing ta3, the confirmed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and a jackpot specific action is displayed (jackpot pattern stop action). After the procedure (see FIG. 11-55 (G)) is performed, at timing ta4, the jackpot confirmed symbol combination is temporarily stopped and displayed to notify that the jackpot has been achieved. Thereafter, the post effect is executed during the period from timing ta5 to ta6.

The variable display time (ta0 to ta5) of the variable display part is 50 seconds for SP reach E that can be determined in time saving state A, 40 seconds for SP reach C that can be determined in variable probability state, and 40 seconds for SP reach that can be determined in time saving state B. In D, it is 25 seconds. On the other hand, the time of the post performance part (ta5 to ta6) is 15 seconds in common for each of SP reaches E, C, and D.

In other words, while the variable display times (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and variable probability state are different from the variable display times (25 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state B, the variable display times (25 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and variable probability state are different. The variable display time (15 seconds) of the post performance part in the variable probability state and the variable display time (15 seconds) of the post production part in the time saving state B are common, so the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B are the same. In this way, the development cost can be reduced by making the post-production parts common, while enhancing the production effects by making the various productions in the variable display parts different.

In addition, while the variable display times (50 seconds, 40 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and variable probability state are different from the variable display times (25 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state B, the variable display times (25 seconds) of the variable display parts in the time-saving state A and The display time of the jackpot specific action display in the variable probability state (ta3 to ta4) and the display time of the jackpot specific action display in the time saving state B (ta3 to ta4) are the same, so there are differences in the various effects in the variable display part. The development cost can be reduced by standardizing the display time of the jackpot specific action display while increasing the production effect.

Incidentally, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the "true/fail button performance" is the same for SP reach C and D, and only SP reach E is different.

The display control unit 123 also generates the image drawn in the image drawing area in the VRAM area as image data (display data) to be displayed on the image display device 5 in the display image creation area, and When performing display processing to output image data (display data) as a video signal, extended commands (e.g. extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc.) are used as movable body control information to operate the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. ("X" is an arbitrary number)), extended commands as lamp control information to turn on/off the movable LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. (for example, extended command BXXX, etc. " is an arbitrary number)) and sends it to the performance control CPU 120.

Based on receiving the extended commands DXXX and SXXX, the production control CPU 120 executes operation control execution data for the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the push button 31B described in the process data. Separately from the operation control based on this, operation control is started to operate the movable body motor 207 of the movable body 32 and the vibration motor 61 that vibrates the push button 31B in an operation pattern corresponding to the extended commands DXXX and SXXX.

In addition, based on receiving the extended command BXXX, etc., the production control CPU 120 performs control corresponding to the extended command BXXX, etc., separately from the control based on the lamp control execution data of the movable body LED 208 described in the process data. Control for lighting/extinguishing the movable body LED 208 is started in accordance with the lighting pattern (for example, refer to the lighting pattern shown in FIG. 13-6(B) in the characteristic portion 018SG).

Further, control data for operating the movable body 32 and the push button 31B, and control data for lighting the movable body LED 208 are stored in the ROM 121.

Here, control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100 and S200) used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state A or the variable probability state and the control data (for example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as D100, S200, etc.) used to control the operation of the movable body 32 and push button 31B in the "movable body performance" in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state B are common. By doing so, development costs can be reduced.

In this embodiment, extended commands (for example, extended commands DXXX, SXXX, etc. ("X" is an arbitrary number)) as movable body control information for operating the movable body 32, push button 31B, etc. , separately from extended commands (for example, extended commands BXXX, etc. ("X" is any number)) as lamp control information for turning on/off the movable body LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. Although the generated form has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a "movable object effect" etc., in order to turn on/off the movable object LED 208, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, etc. Based on the extended command B000 as the control information for the lamp, the lighting/extinguishing control of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and the control for movable bodies such as the movable body 32 and the push button 31B are executed. It is also possible to do so. That is, lighting control and operation control may be performed using common control information (extended commands).

In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or variable probability state, the vibration mode is performed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance", and in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state B, the "movable body performance" is Since the vibration mode executed by the vibration motor 61 in conjunction with the operation of the movable body 32 in "physical presentation" is common, development costs can be reduced.

In addition, control data ( For example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) and control data used to control the movable body LED 208 that emits light in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" in the case of a jackpot in time saving state B. (For example, control data corresponding to extended commands such as B000) are common, so development costs can be reduced.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for movable body motion control and LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for movable body motion control and the extended command for LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended commands used for moving object production are separated into an extended command for controlling moving object movement and an extended command for controlling LED lighting, there is a risk that one of the extended commands will be missed due to a problem, but it will be made common. This makes it possible to suitably perform moving body effects.

In addition, in the case of a jackpot in the time-saving state A or the variable probability state, an effect image is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body effect" (see movable body effect image 069SG456 in Figure 11-59 (D1)). And, in the case of a jackpot in the time saving state B, the effect image that is displayed in conjunction with the movement of the movable body 32 in the "movable body performance" (see movable body performance image 069SG456 in FIG. 11-59 (D1)) is By being common, development costs can be reduced.

(Comparison of super reach variation pattern and non-reach deviation variation pattern)
Next, a comparison between the super reach variation pattern and the non-reach variation pattern will be explained based on FIG. 11-62. FIG. 11-62 is a diagram comparing a super reach variation pattern and a non-reach variation pattern.

As shown in Figure 11-62, the variable display period (tb0 to ta4) from the start of the variable display of decorative symbols until they are stopped in the super reach-out variation pattern is the same as that in the non-reach-out variation pattern. It is longer than the variable display period (tb0 to tb4) from the start of variable display to the stop display.

In addition, the variable display period (tb0 to tb1) of the non-reach variation pattern is longer than the period (tb0 to tb1) from when the variable display of decorative symbols starts in the super reach variation pattern until the variable display mode changes to the reach mode. By being shorter than tb3), the variable display ends in a shorter period than the period until the reach mode is reached, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in the non-reach variation pattern, the period (tb0 to tb1) from the start of variable display of the decorative symbols in the left decorative symbol display area 5L to the stop display (tb0 to tb1) is longer than that in the super reach variation pattern. By being shorter than the period (tb0 to tb2) from when the variable display of the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display area 5L is started until they are stopped and displayed, the variable display of the decorative symbols in the predetermined row ends in a short period. A suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

(Entertainment effect)
Next, an example of the performance operation of the rush performance will be explained based on FIGS. 11-63 and 11-64. FIG. 11-63 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation in which (A) to (C) are rush introduction effects and (D) is time-saving rush effect A. FIG. 11-64 is a diagram showing an example of performance operation in which (A1) to (A4) are variable entry performance and (B1) to (B4) are time saving performance B.

As shown in Figures 11-63 (A) to (C), in the "rush introduction effect", the effect image 069SG470A is gradually enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and the "BATTLE RUSH rush!!" The character images 069SG470B are moved into the frame from the right side of the display screen of the image display device 5 in units of a predetermined number (for example, one character) and are displayed moving to the center of the display screen.

Then, a rush image 069SG470 consisting of an effect image 069SG470A whose display color has changed as the maximum display is displayed, and a character image 069SG470B consisting of the characters "BATTLE RUSH Rush!!" gathered in the center of the display screen is displayed. By performing the "rush effect A", it is notified that the control of the time saving state A is started.

In addition, in the case of "probable entry effect", after the entry image 069SG470 of Figure 11-63 (D) is displayed, the characters consisting of "Koku" and the effect image are displayed as shown in Figure 11-64 (A1). After the definite variation image 069SG471 having a predetermined transmittance is displayed on a display layer higher than the entry image 069SG470, it moves toward the lower left of the display screen while gradually shrinking and decreasing in transmittance. The information will be displayed (see Figure 11-64 (A2 to A3)).

Then, a "probable variation entry effect" is performed in which an entry image 069SG472 consisting of the entry image 069SG470 and the probability variation image 069SG471, which is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen in the minimum size and with a transmittance of 0%, is displayed. , it is announced that control of the variable probability state is started (see FIG. 11-64 (A4)).

In addition, in the case of "time-saving entry effect B", the "entering introduction effect" explained in FIGS. 11-63 (A) to (C) is not executed, and the 900th time when the control start condition for time-saving state B is satisfied. When the symbol confirmation period (for example, 20 seconds, etc.) after the end of the variable display of is started, the entry image 069SG470 of Fig. 11-63 (D) is displayed, and then the image shown in Fig. 11-64 (B1) is displayed. As shown, after the playtime image 069SG473A, which has a predetermined transmittance and consists of the characters "1100" and an effect image, is displayed on a display layer higher than the rush image 069SG470, it is displayed toward the lower left of the display screen. The image is displayed moving while being gradually reduced in size and the transmittance is decreasing (see FIG. 11-64 (B2 to B3)).

Then, there is an entry image 069SG470, a play time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "1100" displayed at the bottom left of the display screen in the minimum size with a transmittance of 0%, and a play time image 069SG473A consisting of the characters "Play". By performing the "time-saving entry effect B" in which the entry image 069SG473 consisting of the image 069SG473B is displayed, it is notified that the control of the time-saving state B is started (see FIG. 11-64 (B4)).

In this way, when the control of the time-saving state A is started, the entry image 069SG470 is displayed in the time-saving entry effect A, and when the control of the variable probability state is started, the entry image 069SG470 and the entry image 069SG470 are displayed in the variable probability entry effect. While displaying the entry image 069SG472 consisting of the image 069SG471, when the control of the time saving state B is started, the entry image 069SG470 that is displayed when entering the time saving state A and the variable probability state in the time saving entry effect B. In addition to displaying the common entry image 069SG470, play time images 069SG473A and 069SG473B are displayed as special displays that are not displayed when control in the variable probability state or time saving state A is started.

Therefore, in consideration of the fact that in the time-saving state B, which was controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, there was a long period in which the jackpot game state was not controlled, in the time-saving entry performance B, the control in the probability variable state and the time-saving state A was In addition to the entry image 069SG470 that is common to when the time saving state B starts, the play time image 069SG473B, which is not displayed when the control of the variable probability state or the time saving state A is started, is displayed, so the start of the time saving state B can be excited. .

[Embodiment 2]
Next, a second embodiment of the feature section 069SG will be described based on FIGS. 11-65 to 11-69. FIG. 11-65 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern determination table as the second embodiment in the feature section 069SG. FIG. 11-66 is a diagram showing a part of the variable display start setting process in the second embodiment in the characteristic section 069SG. FIG. 11-67 is a diagram showing a variable display effect pattern determination table. FIG. 11-68 is an example of the performance operation of SP reach D. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining the characteristics of each gaming state. In the second embodiment, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment will be omitted, and differences will be mainly explained.

In Figure 11-65, (A) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0 in time-saving state B (relief time-saving state), and (B) is a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3. A specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for the loss of the case, (C) a specific example of a fluctuation pattern judgment table for a jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0, (B) a jackpot when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3 A specific example of a variation pattern determination table for use is shown.

As shown in FIG. 11-65(A), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 0, 100 determination values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach. Further, as shown in FIG. 11-65(B), in the variation pattern determination table for failure when the number of pending memories is 1 to 3, 100 determination values are assigned to super-shortened non-reach.

On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-65(C), in the fluctuation pattern determination table for jackpot when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach E, and 10 determination values are assigned to SP reach D. Ninety judgment values are assigned.

In this embodiment, when the variable display of the variation pattern of SP reach D is determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, the performance control CPU 120 performs the "Short Battle" described in the first embodiment as a variable display performance. If a variable display of the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D is determined in the time saving state B while executing the "Short Battle Effect", the effect control CPU 120 executes the "Short Battle Effect" as the variable display effect, which will be described later. Execute "hit performance" or "full rotation performance".

In addition, the fluctuation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A is the reach fluctuation pattern in which the "short battle effect" is executed after the variable display starts and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode. On the other hand, the variation pattern of SP reach D that can be determined in time-saving state B is that after the variable display starts, the variable display mode does not change to the reach mode, and instead it is "immediate hit effect" or "full rotation effect". is a non-reach variation pattern that is executed.

Next, FIG. 11-66 is a part of a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 11-44. In this embodiment, after executing steps S069SGS271 to S069SGS276 in the variable display start setting process, the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable pattern stored in the variable pattern designation command storage area in step S069SGS277 in the shortened non-reach mode. If it is determined that it is not a variation pattern or a super shortened non-reach variation pattern, that is, if the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern (step 069SGS277; No), the reach notice execution determination process of step 069SGS278 is executed. Before execution, the processes from step 069SGS277A to step 069SGS277D are executed.

Specifically, the production control CPU 120 determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern (step 069SGS277A), and determines whether the variation pattern stored in the variation pattern specification command storage area is the SP reach D variation pattern. If so (step 069SGS277A; Yes), it is determined whether the gaming state is time saving state B (step 069SGS277B). If it is determined that the gaming state is the time saving state B (step 069SGS277B; Yes), a variable display effect pattern determination process is executed (step 069SGS277C).

In the variable display performance pattern determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining a variable display performance pattern is extracted, and a variable display performance pattern is determined using the variable display performance pattern determination table shown in FIG. 11-67.

In the variable display effect pattern determination table, as shown in FIG. A, B (6R)", different determination values are assigned to each case so that the number of determination values shown in FIG. 11-67 is obtained.

Specifically, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot C (10R)", 10 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect" and 60 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". is assigned. In addition, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot A, B (6R)", 70 judgment values are assigned to the "immediate hit effect" and 30 judgment values are assigned to the "full rotation effect". Assigned.

In this way, when comparing the "immediate winning performance" and "full rotation performance" in three gaming states except the normal state, they are not executed in the variable probability state and time saving state A, but in the case of time saving state B. It is a variable display effect that can be executed only in the variable probability state and the time saving state A, and is executed using both the SP reach D variation pattern that can be determined in the variable probability state and the time saving state A.

In addition, the execution rate of “immediate hit effect” when the jackpot type is “jackpot A, B (6R)” is higher than the execution rate of “immediate hit effect” when the jackpot type is “jackpot C (10R)”. However, when the jackpot type is "Jackpot C (10R)", the execution rate of "full rotation effect" is higher than when the jackpot type is "Jackpot A, B (6R)". ” is higher than the execution rate. In other words, if the jackpot type is "Jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous for the player because the expected number of balls that can be acquired in the jackpot game state is larger than "Jackpot A, B (6R)", "Immediate win performance" "Full rotation performance" is executed at a higher rate than.

Next, examples of performance operations of "immediate hit performance" and "full rotation performance" will be explained. When the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the variable probability state and time saving state A, after the variable display starts and the variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the ally character wins against the enemy character in the battle performance. As a result, a "short battle effect" is executed in which it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 11-58 to 11-59), but in the time saving state B, the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined. In this case, after the variable display is started, the "immediate win performance" or "full rotation performance" is executed in which the variable display mode does not become the reach mode and it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot.

As shown in Figure 11-65, the "immediate hit effect" is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts at the same time in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (Figure 11-65). 68 (A1)), when a predetermined period of time has elapsed, the determined decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A2)). ). After that, in the "decisive performance", an operation promotion performance is performed in which a button image imitating the push button 31B, an operation promotion display such as "Press!!", and a gauge display are displayed to promote the operation of the push button 31B. The movable body effect image 069SG456 indicating that the attack of the friendly character has hit the enemy character is displayed, and the "movable body effect" in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to near the intermediate position is executed. (See Figure 11-68 (A3)). Then, the determined decorative pattern is temporarily stopped and displayed again in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (A4)). After that, in the post performance part, after the post performance similar to the post performance explained in Fig. 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see Fig. 11-68 (C1 to C7)), the jackpot game state is controlled. be done.

As shown in Figure 11-65, the "full rotation effect" is a blackout effect in which the display screen becomes a black screen at the start of the variable display in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern after being executed for a predetermined period (see Figure 11-65). 11-68 (B1)), variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R starts simultaneously in the third background image 069SG330 (see FIG. 11-68 (B2)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed, a full-rotation display is started in which the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are variably displayed in a state in which the determined ornamental symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are aligned. (See Figure 11-68 (B3)). Thereafter, the determined decorative symbols that constitute a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (see FIG. 11-68 (B4)). After that, in the post performance part (design confirmation period), after the post performance similar to the post performance explained in Figure 11-60 (D4 to D10) is executed (see Figure 11-68 (C1 to C7)), Controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

In this way, in time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the variable display notifies you that the variable display result is a jackpot without going through the reach mode after the variable display starts. By executing the "immediate winning performance" or the "full rotation performance" as the performance, the player can enjoy the SP reach performance with peace of mind without worrying about being provoked by the reach performance.

In addition, in the "immediate win effect" or "full rotation effect," like the "button notice" and "win/fail button effect" explained in the first embodiment, a button image imitating the push button 31B, "Press!! '' etc. and a gauge display are displayed to encourage the operation of the push button 31B, and operation promotion effects that require the player to operate the push button 31B are not executed, so the time saving state B In this case, the player can suitably digest the variable display without having to facilitate or perform any troublesome operations.

(Examples of various operations depending on gaming status)
Next, various operation examples for each of the three gaming states of the time saving state B, the variable probability state, and the time saving state A in this embodiment will be explained based on FIG. 11-69. FIG. 11-69 is a diagram for explaining various operation examples for each game state. Hereinafter, as shown in FIG. 11-69, the contents of each item "D1" to "D4" in the three gaming states of "time saving state B", "probability variable state", and "time saving state A" will be compared.

<Item D1>
First, regarding the rate at which the CPU 103 determines the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern that does not go through the reach mode, in "time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-65 (C), the number of pending memories is 0, 1 to 3. In this case, the determination ratio of "SP reach D (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode is "90%", and in the "probability variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), When the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, the decision ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through reach mode is "5%", and in "time saving state A", Figure 11-7 (C) As shown in FIG. 2, when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3, the determination ratio of "SP non-via A (non-reach)" that does not go through the reach mode is "5%".

In the variable probability state and time saving state A, "SP reach D" is a reach variation pattern in which a "short battle performance" is executed via a reach mode, and is not a non-reach variation pattern that does not go through a reach mode.

In other words, the percentage (for example, 90%) of "SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in time saving state B is the same as the percentage (for example, 90%) that does not go through the reach mode in time saving state A. This is higher than the percentage (e.g., 5%) in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" is determined, and the percentage in which the "SP non-via A jackpot variation pattern" that does not pass through the reach mode is determined (e.g., 5%). 5%).

According to item (D1), in the time-saving state B that is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, it is not determined to control to the jackpot gaming state, considering that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. In the variable display, by setting the mode of the variable display to the reach mode, the jackpot game state is controlled without being provoked by mischief, so that a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the ratio of "SP reach D jackpot variation pattern (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode in the time saving state B is determined by the reach mode in the time saving state A or the probability variable state. Although we have exemplified a form in which the rate of "A jackpot fluctuation pattern not via SP" that does not go through is higher than the determined ratio, the present invention is not limited to this, and the case where the variable display result is a jackpot in time saving state B The "SP reach D variation pattern (immediate hit performance or full rotation performance)" that does not go through the reach mode may be determined at a rate of 100%.

<Item D2>
The performance control CPU 120 can execute, for example, a "win/fail button performance" in the SP reach performance as a motion promotion performance that encourages the player's actions, and can execute, for example, a "win/fail button performance" in the SP reach performance as a specific performance that notifies a variable display result. It is possible to perform "movable object performance".

Then, in the probability variable state or time saving state A, when the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "win/fail button performance" in the "decision performance" in the variable display of SP reach D. While executing the first performance execution pattern that later executes the "movable body performance", in the time saving state B, if the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the "immediate hit performance" in the variable display of SP reach D is executed. In this step, a second effect execution pattern is executed in which the "movable object effect" is executed without executing the "true/fail button effect".

Therefore, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the execution rate of the "immediate win effect" in which the "movable body effect" is executed without executing the "win/fail button effect" is as follows in the "time saving state B". As shown in Figure 11-65 (C), when the number of reserved memories is 0 to 3, it is "90%", and in the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), the number of reserved memories is 90%. In the case of 0 to 3, it is "0%", and in the "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7(C), it is "0%" when the number of pending memories is 0 to 3.

In other words, in the time-saving state B, the execution rate (for example, 90%) of the "immediate win effect" in which the "movable object effect" is executed without executing the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is the same as that of the time-saving state A. In the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern, it is higher than the percentage (e.g. 0%) of executing the "movable object effect" without executing the "win/fail button effect", and in the SP reach D jackpot variation pattern in the probability variable state This is higher than the percentage (for example, 0%) of executing the "movable object effect" without executing the "button effect".

According to item (D2), in the time-saving state B controlled after a predetermined number of variable displays, it is decided to control to the jackpot gaming state in consideration of the fact that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. Since there is less need to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B when the player is notified of the change, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, the percentage of executing "immediate hit performance" or "full rotation performance" in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state B is the same as that in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern in the time saving state A or the probability variable state. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the ratio is higher than the execution rate of "immediate hit performance" or "full rotation performance," the present invention is not limited to this. The rate at which "performance" or "full rotation performance" is executed may be set to 100%.

<Item D3>
When the number of pending memories is 0, the rate at which the CPU 103 determines a shortening non-reach variation pattern (for example, "super shortening non-reach" with a variation time of 1.5 seconds or "shortening non-reach A" with a variation time of 3 seconds) is " In "Time saving state B", as shown in Figure 11-65 (A), when the number of pending memories is 0, it is "100%", and in "Probability variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (A), it is "100%". , is "0%" when the number of pending memories is 0, and in "time saving state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7(A), is "0%" when the number of pending memories is 0.

On the other hand, when the number of pending memories is 0, the CPU 103 selects a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a longer variable display time than the shortened non-reach variation pattern (for example, non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds, SP with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). As shown in Figure 11-65 (A), the ratio that determines the reach fluctuation, etc.) is "0%" when the number of retained memories is 0, and in the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-65 (A). As shown in Figure 11-6 (A), when the number of reserved memories is 0, it is "100%", and in "Time saving state A", as shown in Figure 11-7 (A), the number of reserved memories is "100%". If it is 0, it is "100%".

In other words, when the number of pending memories is 0 in the variable probability state or the time saving state A, the CPU 103 uses a negative variation pattern with a long variable display time (for example, the variable display time is On the other hand, if the number of pending memories is 0 in time-saving state B, it is possible to determine an out-of-reach variation pattern with a long variable display time (such as a 7-second non-reach pattern or a SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). For example, a shortened non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time (for example, a variation time of more than 1.5 seconds) than a non-reach variation pattern with a shorter variable display time (such as non-reach A with a variation time of 7 seconds or SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 seconds or 40 seconds). Shortened non-reach) can be determined.

According to item (D3), in the time-saving state B controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, even if the number of pending memories is 0, considering that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. An outlier variation pattern with a longer variable display period than the shortened variation pattern (for example, a non-reach variation with a variation time of 7 seconds or an SP reach variation with a variation time of 25 or 40 seconds) is determined, and the digestion speed of the variable display is determined. Since there is no decrease in the amount of time, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

<Item D4>
In this embodiment, as jackpot types, "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" in which a 6R round game is executed are more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A" and "Jackpot B" (for example, , "Jackpot C" (the number of rounds, that is, the number of expected pitches that can be obtained is large) can be determined (see FIG. 11-3 (D)).

In addition, in the time saving state B, when the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined, the performance control CPU 120 sets " It is possible to perform a full rotation performance.

In addition, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the SP reach D jackpot fluctuation pattern, the ratio at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" is as follows in the "time saving state B". As shown in Figure 11-67, it is "90%", and in the "probable variable state", as shown in Figure 11-6 (C), it is "0%" ("Full rotation performance" is not executed), and "Time saving In "state A", as shown in FIG. 11-7(C), it is "0%" ("full rotation effect" is not executed).

In other words, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time-saving state B, the ratio (for example, 100%) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" is the same as that of jackpot in time-saving state A. This is higher than the rate at which the production control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation production" (for example, 0% (not executed)) when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the type, and the jackpot type in the probability variable state. It is higher than the ratio (for example, 0% (not executed)) at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as "Jackpot C (10R)".

According to item (D4), in time-saving state B, which is controlled through a predetermined number of variable displays, the number of rounds is higher than in jackpot A and jackpot B, considering that the period in which the jackpot gaming state is not controlled continues for a long time. When it is decided to control the jackpot C, which is highly advantageous for many players, a special variable display "All Since "rotation performance" is more easily executed, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided.

In addition, in this embodiment, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state B, the ratio at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" is 100%. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in time saving state B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance". If the ratio is higher than the ratio at which the performance control CPU 120 executes the "full rotation performance" when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the percentage is less than 100%. It may also be executed in proportion. Further, when "Jackpot C (10R)" is determined as the jackpot type in the time saving state A or the variable probability state, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the "full rotation performance".

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 069SG)
In the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which a jackpot gaming state is applied is illustrated as an example of an "advantageous state advantageous to the player," but the present invention is not limited to this, and may include a variable probability state, a small winning gaming state , a ready-to-reach state, a pseudo-continuous performance state, a pending combination, a chance-up performance, a pre-read notice performance, a time reduction with or without a time reduction, a ceiling time reduction control, etc. may be included.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, a so-called pachinko game machine that can be controlled to a variable state for a predetermined period after the end of a jackpot game is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the type is a variable jackpot, it may be a pachinko machine that is controlled to a variable probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it is controlled to the next jackpot, or it may be controlled to a variable probability state from the end of a jackpot game until it wins a probability variable lottery. It may also be a pachinko game machine that is controlled. In addition, a so-called 1 type 2 type gaming machine may be applied that can be controlled to a jackpot gaming state by generating a V prize triggered by a small win in a time saving state after the end of a jackpot game, and the gaming properties can be changed in various ways. It is possible.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, a form in which time-saving state A, variable probability state, and time-saving state B are applied as special states in which variable display is executed more frequently than non-special states (for example, normal state) is exemplified; The invention is not limited to this, and four or more types of game states other than those described above may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, a first special state that is controlled when an advantageous state controlled from a non-special state (for example, a normal state, a low probability/low base state) ends, and an advantageous state in a non-special state As a second special state that is controlled on the condition that variable display is executed a predetermined number of times without being controlled by Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the probability variable state (first special state) with a high probability and high base and the time saving state B with a low probability and high base are illustrated. (Relief time reduction (second special state)) may be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, a form in which a variable probability state is applied as the third special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the first special state or the second special state ends is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this; for example, in the case of a pachinko game machine of type 1 or 2, a time saving state different from the time saving state as the first special state {for example, execution of the time saving state than the first special state A short-time state in which the number of times is large (the control period is long), etc.) may be applied.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, at least one of the first special state, the second special state, and the third special state is a plurality of types in which, for example, the number of executions of time saving control, the frequency of execution of variable display, etc. are different. May have special status.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, a mode in which a normal state (low accuracy/low base state) is applied as a non-special state is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display is more effective than the special state. As long as it is a gaming state in which the execution frequency is low, it is not limited to the low certainty/low base state, but may be a high certainty base state, a low certainty/high base state, etc.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, the time saving state B (relief time saving state) as the second special state is variablely displayed a predetermined number of times (for example, 900 times) without being controlled to an advantageous state in the non-special state. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the predetermined number of times can be changed in various ways. Further, the control may be performed when another condition is satisfied in addition to the above-mentioned conditions.

In addition, in the characteristic part 069SG, in the time-saving state B, the time-saving state A, and the variable probability state, the average common symbol fluctuation time (the period in which the common symbol is varied), the probability of "hitting a common symbol" in the common symbol game, the 2. Without changing the control that makes it easier for game balls to enter the winning opening (high opening control, high base control), the average special symbol fluctuation time (period for varying the special symbol) in time-saving state B is changed to the definite fluctuation state. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the variation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved by executing control to shorten the time compared to the time saving state A, the present invention is not limited to this, and the time saving state B In, the average normal pattern fluctuation time (period for changing the normal pattern), the probability of hitting the normal pattern in the normal pattern game, the control that makes it easier for the game ball to enter the second starting prize opening (high opening control, The variation efficiency of the special symbols (especially the second special symbol) may be further improved by making at least one of the high base control) different from the probability variable state or the time saving state A.

Further, in the characteristic section 069SG, the CPU 103 sets the variable display mode to a specific mode (for example, reach mode) and then displays a first non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A - E, etc.) and a second non-specific variable display pattern (e.g., "non-reach, off") that displays an out-of-reach display result without setting the variable display mode to a specific mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first non-specific variable display pattern and the second non-specific variable display pattern may include types of variation patterns other than those described above. Further, as a variation pattern, a first specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach A to C, E jackpot", etc.) in which the variable display mode is set to a specific mode (for example, reach mode) and then a missed display result is displayed; Determine a second non-specific variable display pattern (for example, "SP reach D (immediate hit or full rotation)", "SP non-via", etc.) that displays a missed display result without changing the variable display mode to a specific mode. Although possible forms have been illustrated, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the first specific variable display pattern and the second specific variable display pattern may include types of variation patterns other than those described above.

Furthermore, the "specific mode" is not limited to the "reach mode", and includes, for example, "chance mode (for example, 133, etc.)," "pseudo-link mode (for example, 122, etc.)," "normal reach mode," and "normal reach mode." It may include various aspects such as "Aspect" and "Super Reach Aspect."

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which "movable object notice" and "character notice" are applied as a suggestive effect that suggests that the jackpot game state is controlled is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. If it is a performance that suggests that the game will be controlled into a jackpot game state, it may include various performances such as stop symbol announcements, pseudo-continuation announcements, dialogue announcements, operation announcements, reach announcements, and look-ahead announcements. You can stay there.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, "countdown notice", "holding change notice", and "symbol chance notice" are provided as advance notice effects that suggest that the pending memory stored in the pending memory will be controlled in an advantageous state. , an example is given in which an "effect display notice" is applied; however, the present invention is not limited to this, and may include various reading notices such as "continuous effect" or "foreshadowing effect". good.

Further, in the feature section 069SG, a form in which a "button notice" and a "right/fail button performance" are applied as action promotion effects to encourage the player's actions has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned It may also include various effects other than the above. Furthermore, the "player's actions" are not limited to the operation of the push button 31B, but include effects that prompt the operation of other operation means (for example, a touch panel, etc.) provided other than the push button 31B, and operations. Instead, it may be an effect that encourages the player's actions (movements).

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, "patterns A-2, A-3" are provided as an example of a first performance execution pattern in which a "movable object performance" is executed as a specific performance after the "pass/fail button" is executed as a movement promotion performance. Although the embodiment in which "Pattern A-1" is applied as an example of a second performance execution pattern in which a specific performance is executed without performing a motion promotion performance is applied, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, other operation promotion effects such as "button notice" may be applied as action promotion effects, or effects other than "movable body effects" (for example, battle results in SP reach effects) may be applied as specific effects. You may.

Further, in the feature section 069SG, an example is given in which an operation promotion display for a "one-hit" operation is applied as the first action promotion effect that prompts the player to make one action, but the present invention is not limited to this. Rather than encouraging the player to perform a single push operation, the player may be encouraged to perform a single pull operation, rotation operation, reciprocating operation, or the like.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, an example is given in which an operation promotion display for "repeat hit" or "long press" operation is applied as a second action promotion effect that prompts the player to perform an action over a predetermined action period. The invention is not limited to this, but may be one that promotes a pulling operation, a rotation operation, a reciprocating operation, etc. over a predetermined operation period. Further, the operation over a predetermined operation period is not necessarily limited to an operation detected continuously, and may include operations performed intermittently, operations according to a predetermined pattern, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic section 069SG, a form in which "character notice" and "reach notice" are applied as an effect including an inciting effect that incites whether or not to make the variable display mode a specific mode is exemplified. This is not limited to, but is also a production that encourages "chance position (e.g., 133)," "pseudo-linked form (e.g., 122, etc.)," "normal reach form," or "super reach form." It may include various effects such as.

Furthermore, in the feature section 069SG, in the subsequent performance, the expected number of balls to be released is reported as gaming value information that can specify the magnitude of the gaming value that will be given in the advantageous state that is reported to be controlled in the specific performance. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state (for example, 6R, 10R, etc.) may be notified. In addition, in a state where there are consecutive jackpots such as a jackpot occurring in a variable probability state, the expected total number of balls to be played in the current jackpot plus the total number of balls to be played during the prescribed consecutive jackpot period. The number of pitches etc. may also be displayed.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, when the special state control is started, a special state start display is displayed to notify the start of the special state control, as a special state start performance, a rush introduction production, a fixed change entry production, etc. , a time-saving rush performance A, a time-saving rush performance B, and a shutter performance have been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to these, and various rush performances other than the above may be possible. Furthermore, the performance mode of each rush performance is not limited to the above, and can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, although the definite variable entry performance and the time-saving entry performance A are separate performances, the present invention is not limited to this, and the definite variable entry performance and the time-saving entry performance A are may be used as a common rush effect.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, an example is given in which the rush introduction effect is not executed when the time saving rush effect B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rush introduction effect is performed instead of the shutter effect. It may also be executed. Also, when executing the time-saving rush effect B, the rush introduction effect may be executed. In this case, in order to eliminate the troublesomeness of the performance, it is preferable to use a rush introduction performance that has a shorter performance period compared to the case where the variable entry performance or the time-saving rush performance A is executed.

In addition, in the feature section 069SG, as an example of a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state, jackpots A and B (with different numbers of gaming rounds in the jackpot gaming state) Although a form in which the first advantageous state) and jackpot C (second advantageous state) are applied is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the degree of advantage for the player is higher than the first advantageous state. The second advantageous state is not only a jackpot where the player has a high advantage in the jackpot gaming state, such as the number of game rounds or the expected number of balls that can be acquired, but also a gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. (For example, a jackpot in which the time saving control after the jackpot game state is long, or a jackpot controlled by a "small win rush" in which the execution frequency of the small win game state becomes high after the jackpot ends, etc.) may be used. .

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 099SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 099SG in this embodiment will be explained based on FIGS. 12-1 to 12-22. In this feature section 099SG, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 069SG will be omitted, and differences will be mainly explained. Furthermore, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 099SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 069SG.

The pachinko game machine 1 in this characteristic part 099SG is formed in the left game area on the left side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2, where the game ball can flow down, like the pachinko game machine 1 shown in FIG. 11-1. The right side of the image display device 5 on the game board 2 is formed in a right game area where game balls can flow down. In other words, in the pachinko game machine 1 according to the present feature part 099SG, the game ball weakly launched by the firing device due to the normal game state flows down the first path in the left game area, and the game ball is in the time saving state. A, the time-saving state B, and the game ball that is strongly launched by the firing device due to being in the variable probability state flows down the second path in the right gaming area. In addition, some of the game balls flowing down the second route in the right game area can pass through a gate 41 provided on the second route (on the right side of the image display device 5). Based on passing 41, variable display of normal symbols is executed. Then, based on the variable display result of the normal symbol becoming a hit (ordinary symbol hit), the second starting prize opening provided on the second path changes from the closed state to the open state, and the second starting prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state. Game balls can be won in the winning slot. Note that in this feature section 099SG, "variable display" may be referred to as "variation" or "variable display".

FIG. 12-1(A) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random value counted on the main board 11 side in this feature section 099SG. As shown in FIG. 12-1(A), in this feature part 099SG, on the main board 11 side, random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and random number MR2 for determining the fluctuation pattern. Numerical data representing each of a random number MR3, a random number MR4 for determining the normal figure display result, and a random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is controlled to be countable. Note that random numbers other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. The random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may be one that counts numerical data indicating some or all of these random numbers MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section (not shown), to update various numerical data by software, thereby updating the random numbers MR1 to MR4. Numerical data indicating a portion may be counted.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control a variable display result such as a special pattern in a special pattern game as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state. For example, It takes a value in the range of "0" to "65535". The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number used to determine the jackpot type as one of "jackpot A", "jackpot B", and "jackpot C" when the variable display result is "jackpot". For example, it takes a value in the range of "0" to "299".

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols to one of multiple types prepared in advance, and is, for example, "0" to " Takes a value in the range of 99.

The random number MR4 for determining the general pattern display result is used to determine whether the variable display result in the general pattern game by the normal pattern display 20 is to be "normal pattern hit" or "normal pattern hit". This is a random number value, for example, in the range of "3" to "13".

The random number MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 is a random number used to determine the initial value of the random number MR4, and takes a value in the range of "3" to "23".

FIG. 12-1(B) shows an example of the structure of the special figure display result determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this feature section 099SG, a common special figure display result judgment table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the special figure display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this. , separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

The special figure display result determination table is a variable display result and a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special figure display device 4A and a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special figure display device 4B. Before the finalized special symbol is derived and displayed, it is referred to in order to determine whether or not to control the variable display result as a "jackpot" into a jackpot game state based on the random number MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. This is the table that will be used.

In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 099SG, the special figure display results are determined depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low probability state), or a variable probability state (high probability state). A numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number MR1 for determining the figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" or "miss".

In the special figure display result determination table, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result is used to determine whether or not to treat the special figure display result as a "jackpot" and control it to a jackpot gaming state. This is the judgment data assigned to the result. In the special figure display result determination table in this feature section 099SG, when the gaming state is in a variable probability state (high probability state), more judgment values are determined as " It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Jackpot". As a result, in a variable probability state (high probability state) in which probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, when the pachinko game machine 1 is in a normal state or a time saving state (low probability state), the special figure display result is set as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. Then, compared to the probability determined (approximately 1/319.68 in this feature part 099SG), the probability that the special figure display result is determined as a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled becomes higher (in this feature part 099SG) Approximately 1/80.02). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a variable probability state (high probability state), it is determined that control is to be made into a jackpot gaming state compared to when it is in a normal state or a time saving state. In order to increase the probability, the determination data is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control the jackpot game state.

FIGS. 12-1 (C1) and 12-1 (C2) show examples of the structure of the jackpot type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. 12-1 (C1) shows that when the variable display result is determined to be a "jackpot" and the control is controlled to a jackpot gaming state during execution of the variable display of the first special symbol, the random value MR2 for jackpot type determination is This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type from jackpot A and jackpot B based on the table. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine the jackpot type from jackpot B and jackpot C based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is decided to control the jackpot game state as ``.''.

Here, the jackpot type in this feature section 099SG will be explained using FIG. 12-1(D). In this feature section 099SG, as jackpot types, jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C are provided, in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 110 variable displays after the jackpot game state ends. In addition, these jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C can be achieved by entering the V winning hole after the game ball enters the second big winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state, and the maximum after the end of the jackpot game. This is also a jackpot in which variable probability control is executed over 110 variable displays.

In this characteristic part 099SG, the open state of the variable V winning ball device (V lid) includes a short open state in which the period of being in the open state is short (for example, 0.1 seconds), and a long open state in which the period of being in the open state is long. state (for example, 15 seconds). Jackpot A is when the variable V winning ball device is in the short open state in the first round of the jackpot game state, and jackpot B and jackpot C are when the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round of the jackpot gaming state. shall be.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot A" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to sixth rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot A", since the variable V winning ball device is in a short-circuit open state in the first round, it is extremely difficult to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can't expect it, it's essentially a regular jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot B" changes the second jackpot in the first round to an open state that is advantageous for the player, and the first jackpot in the second to sixth rounds that is advantageous to the player. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot B", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability change control is executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

The jackpot game state due to "Jackpot C" changes the second big prize opening to an open state that is advantageous to the player in the first round, and changes the first big prize opening to an advantageous state for the player in the second to 10th rounds. It is a normal open jackpot that changes to an open state. In addition, in "Jackpot C", the variable V winning ball device is in the long open state in the first round, so it is extremely easy to put the game ball into the V winning hole, and the probability variable control is not executed. Since you can expect it, it will be a real surefire jackpot.

In addition, in this embodiment, although the form in which three types of jackpot A to jackpot C are provided as jackpot types is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of jackpot types is two or less, or Four or more types may be provided.

Also, as shown in Figure 12-3 (B1), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the first special symbol), out of the range of judgment values of MR2 from 0 to 299, 0 to 149 are assigned to jackpot A. 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot B. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 12-3 (B2), in the jackpot type judgment table (for the second special symbol), out of the judgment value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot B. 100 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C.

In other words, in this feature section 099SG, if the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state at a rate of 50%, After the jackpot game ends, both probability change control and time saving control are carried out. Furthermore, if the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the game ball will be in a state where it is easy to enter the V winning hole in the first round of the jackpot game state with a probability of 100%, and the probability change control will be performed after the jackpot game ends. and time-saving control are both implemented.

In this feature section 099SG, even if the jackpot A is achieved, it is possible to win a V prize when the V lid is short-circuited, but it is extremely rare. will be explained assuming that there is no V winning and probability variable control is not executed. In addition, even in the case of jackpot B and jackpot C, it is possible but extremely rare that you will not be able to win a prize when the V lid is in a long open state, so it will be jackpot B and jackpot C. In this case, the description will be made on the assumption that V is won and probability variable control is executed.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, the jackpot type is determined using MR2, which is a random number value for jackpot type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the jackpot type is determined by the special figure display result. The determination may be made using MR1, which is a random value for determination.

Figure 12-2 (A) shows whether the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit) based on the fact that the variable display of the normal symbol is executed when the gaming state is the normal state. 12-2 (B) is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to to determine whether the normal symbol is hit or not. This is a normal symbol hit determination table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is a hit (ordinary symbol hit) based on the execution of the variable display.

In addition, the time saving state B in this feature part 099SG means that the gaming state is variable 900 times without being controlled to the jackpot gaming state in the normal state (low probability/low base state where neither probability change control nor time saving control is executed). This is a gaming state that is controlled when a display is executed, and is a time-saving state A (low accuracy/high base state) in which time-saving control is executed over a maximum of 1100 variable displays.

In the normal symbol hit determination table shown in Figure 12-2 (A), out of the range 3 to 13 of the random number MR4 for normal symbol hit determination, 3 is assigned to a hit, and 4 to 13 is assigned to a miss. ing. On the other hand, in the normal symbol hit determination table shown in FIG. 12-2(B), out of the range 3 to 13 of the random number MR4 for normal symbol hit determination, 3 to 12 are assigned to a win, and 13 is assigned to a win. It is assigned to the outskirts. In other words, in this feature part 099SG, the proportion per normal figure when the gaming state is any of the time-saving state A, variable probability state, and time-saving state B is higher than the proportion per common figure when the gaming state is the normal state. It is also set high.

Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-2 (C), when the gaming state is the normal state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbols is set to 60 seconds, whereas the gaming state is the time saving state A and the variable probability state. , time saving state B, the normal symbol fluctuation time is set to 0.1 seconds. Furthermore, as shown in Figure 12-2 (D), the opening time of the second starting prize opening when a winning pattern occurs when the gaming state is normal is set to 0.1 seconds. On the other hand, the opening time of the second start prize opening when a winning pattern occurs when the gaming state is one of the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B is set to 3 seconds.

In other words, the time-saving state A, variable probability state, and time-saving state B in this feature part 099SG are, compared to the normal state, "the probability of winning the normal symbol is high," "the variable display time of the normal symbol is short," " Due to the long opening time of the second starting winning hole when a hit with the normal symbol occurs, it is easy for the game ball to enter the second starting winning hole, that is, the execution frequency of the variable display of the second special symbol is high. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Compared to the normal state, the time saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time saving state B have a high probability of winning a normal symbol, a ``normal Variable display of the second special symbol by satisfying at least one of the following conditions: "The variable display time of the symbol is short" and "The opening time of the second starting winning opening is long when a hit with the normal symbol occurs." The execution frequency may be set to be high.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 099SG is similar to the pachinko gaming machine in the feature section 069SG (see FIG. 11-1), when the gaming state is the normal state, the player moves the game ball to the left gaming area 2L. By launching the game ball toward the first starting prize hole, it is possible to enter the first starting winning hole, but it is impossible to enter the second starting winning hole, the big winning hole, passing through the gate 41, etc., and the game ball saves time. In the case of state A, variable probability state, or time saving state B, the game ball can be won into the second starting prize opening by the player launching the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, and the gate 41 It is possible to pass through. In addition, when the gaming state is a jackpot gaming state, by the player launching the gaming ball toward the right gaming area, the gaming ball can enter the second starting prize opening and the big winning opening, and the gate It is possible to pass through 41.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-12 (A), when the gaming state is the normal state, the game ball that is launched toward the left gaming area 2L is triggered by a plurality of nails etc. arranged on the gaming board 2 to start winning the game ball. Since the winning probability of the game ball entering the first starting prize opening is about 5.5% (continuation by the player's operation of the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30). (The condition is that the game ball be launched into the left game area 2L). In addition, when the game state is normal, even if the player launches the game ball toward the right game area 2R, the variable display time of the normal symbol due to the game ball passing through the gate 41 is extremely long, at 60 seconds. In addition to this, the opening time of the second starting prize opening when a normal hit occurs is extremely short at 0.1 seconds (see Figures 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D)), so the game ball Winning into the second starting winning hole almost never occurs.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 12-12(B), when the gaming state is one of the time-saving state A, the variable probability state, and the time-saving state B, the game ball launched toward the right gaming area 2R passes through the gate 41. It is possible to pass through, and the variable display time of the normal symbol due to passing through the gate 41 is as short as 3 seconds, and the opening time of the second starting prize opening when a normal symbol occurs is 3 seconds ( (See Figures 12-2 (C) and 12-2 (D)), the winning probability of the game ball entering the second starting prize opening is approximately 55% (player's batting ball operation handle (operation knob) The condition is that the game ball be continuously launched into the right game area 2R by the operation of step 30).

FIG. 12-3 is a diagram showing a variation pattern used in the variable display of the special symbol of this feature section 099SG. In this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-3, the variation pattern when the variable display result is off is that the special figure variation time is 1500ms for super shortened non-reach, and the special figure variation time is 3000ms for shortened non-reach. Reach A is off, special figure variation time shortened by 5000ms Non-reach B is off, special figure variation time is 7000ms non-reach A is off, special figure variation time is 12000ms non-reach B is off, special figure variation time is 45000ms super reach A is off, super reach B is off with a special pattern variation time of 80000ms, super reach C is off with a special pattern variation time of 4000ms, super reach D is off with a special pattern variation time of 25000ms, super reach E is off with a special pattern variation time of 50000ms. Each variation pattern is provided. Incidentally, the variation pattern from Super Reach A Off to Super Reach E Off is also a variation pattern in which a super reach effect is executed during variable display.

In addition, as a variation pattern when the variable display result becomes a jackpot, there is a 7000ms variable display in which the super reach reach effect is not executed, followed by a 15000ms jackpot notification period (the special symbol variation time is 7000ms + 15000ms) without super reach. A jackpot, super reach reach effect is not executed, there is a 15000ms jackpot notification period after a variable display of 15000ms (special symbol fluctuation time 12000ms + 15000ms) B jackpot, super reach reach effect is executed, 45000ms There is a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display (the special figure fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms), a super reach A jackpot, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms after the variable display of 80,000 ms in which the super reach reach effect is executed (the special figure fluctuation time is 45,000 ms + 15,000 ms). Super Reach B jackpot (with figure fluctuation time of 80,000ms + 15,000ms), Super Reach C jackpot (with special figure fluctuation time of 40,000ms + 15,000ms), which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000ms after the variable display of 40,000ms in which the reach effect of Super Reach is executed; Super Reach D jackpot, which has a 15,000ms jackpot notification period after the 25,000ms variable display where the Super Reach reach effect is executed (the special symbol fluctuation time is 25,000ms + 15,000ms), a 50,000ms variable display where the Super Reach reach effect is executed. After that, each variation pattern of the Super Reach E jackpot is provided, which has a jackpot notification period of 15,000 ms (the special symbol variation time is 50,000 ms + 15,000 ms). In addition, the variation pattern of Super Reach A is a variation pattern in which a bowling performance is executed as a reach performance in which an ally character and an enemy character perform bowling to notify whether or not they have won the jackpot. , Super Reach C, and Super Reach E are fluctuation patterns in which, as a reach effect, a battle effect is executed to notify whether or not a jackpot has been won by a battle between an ally character and an enemy character, The variable pattern of Super Reach D is a reach effect in which an ally character and an enemy character engage in a shorter battle than the battle effects in the variable patterns of Super Reach B, Super Reach C, and Super Reach E to win the jackpot. This is a fluctuating pattern that executes a short battle performance that notifies you of the presence or absence of the enemy.

The RAM 102 in this feature section 099SG includes a game control data holding area 099SG150 as shown in FIG. is provided. The game control data holding area 099SG150 shown in FIG. 12-4 includes a first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A, a second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B, a regular symbol reservation storage section 099SG151C, and a game control flag setting section 099SG152. , a game control timer setting section 099SG153, a game control counter setting section 099SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 099SG155.

The first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A stores special figures that have not yet started even though a game ball has passed (entered) the first starting prize opening formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting prize (first starting prize) has occurred. Stores pending data of a figure game (a special figure game using the first special figure on the first special figure display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the first starting condition for the passing (entering) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. , and are stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Incidentally, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 099SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the first special figure pending storage unit 099SG151A indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

The second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B indicates that the game ball has passed (entered) the second starting prize opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a starting prize (second starting prize) has occurred, but it has not started yet. Stores pending data of a special figure game (a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special figure display device 4B). As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B associates the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting prize opening with the reservation number, and sets the second starting condition for the passage (approach) of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, etc., extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the establishment, are held as pending data. is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). Incidentally, the upper limit that can store pending data (pending memory) in the second special figure pending storage section 099SG151B is always 4 regardless of the gaming state. The pending data stored in the second special figure pending storage unit 099SG151B indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is on hold, and the variable display result (special figure display) in this special figure game is suspended. This is pending information that makes it possible to determine whether or not there will be a jackpot based on the result).

In other words, in this feature section 099SG, it is possible to store up to 4 pending memories as the first special figure pending memory (holding memory that can be stored in the first special figure pending memory section 099SG151A), and the second special figure pending memory (Suspension memories that can be stored in the second special figure reservation storage section 099SG151B) can store up to four reservation memories.

In addition, there is hold information (first hold information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the game ball passing (entering) the first starting prize opening, and holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the gaming ball passing (entering) the second starting winning opening. The reservation information (second reservation information) based on the establishment of the second starting winning may be stored in a common reservation storage unit in association with the reservation number. In this case, starting hole data indicating whether the game ball passed through (entered) the first starting winning hole or the second starting winning hole may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the holding number. .

In addition, when executing the variable display, the CPU 103 first inputs random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B if the second special symbol reservation memory exists in the special symbol normal processing (see FIG. 6). After reading out, the storage contents of the second special figure reservation storage section 099SG151B are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 099SG151B, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored as the reservation memory of reservation number 1 in the second special figure reservation storage section 099SG151B. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR3, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Further, if no pending memory is stored in the second special figure pending storage section 099SG151B, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the first special figure pending memory exists. When the first special figure reservation memory exists, after reading the random numbers MR1 to MR3 from the first special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A, the storage contents of the first special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A are shifted. In other words, when the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A, the CPU 103 stores the random numbers MR1 to MR3 stored as the reservation memory of the reservation number 1 in the first special figure reservation storage section 099SG151A. At the same time as reading out the values of MR1 to random number MR3, the pending memory of the pending number 1 is erased, and the pending memory stored as the pending memory of pending number 2 is used as the pending memory of pending number 1 and the pending memory of pending number 3. The stored suspension memory is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 2, and the suspension memory stored as suspension memory of suspension number 4 is re-stored as suspension memory of suspension number 3.

Then, the CPU 103 determines the variable display result based on the random number MR1 read from the first special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151A or the second special figure reservation storage unit 099SG151B (if the variable display result is a jackpot, the random number value After executing the judgment of the jackpot type based on MR2), in the variation pattern judgment process (see Figure 6), different variation patterns are determined depending on the gaming state, the variable display result, and the number of reserved memories of the special symbol for which variable display is executed. A fluctuation pattern is determined using a determination table.

In other words, in the feature section 099SG, the CPU 103 can determine a variation pattern in accordance with the number of pending memories obtained by subtracting 1 from the pending memory immediately before variable display in the variation pattern setting process.

The normal figure reservation storage unit 099SG151C stores the hold information of the normal figure game which has not been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball passing through the passage gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the standard figure reservation storage unit 099SG151C associates the game balls with the reservation numbers in the order in which they pass through the passage gate 41, and determines the standard figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 etc. by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls. Numerical data indicating the random number MR4 for the purpose is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting section 099SG152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags whose states can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit 099SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or off state for each of a plurality of types of flags including the above-mentioned ball release state flag.

The game control timer setting section 099SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting section 099SG153 stores data indicating timer values for each of a plurality of types of timers.

The game control counter setting section 099SG154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting section 099SG154 stores data indicating count values for each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting part or all of the gaming random numbers so that the CPU 103 can update them by software.

The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 099SG154 stores random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, as a random count value, and according to the execution of software by the CPU 103, Numerical data indicating each random value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data updating operation in the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scrambling processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data obtained.

The game control buffer setting section 099SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 099SG155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

Next, a variable pattern determination table used when performing variable display of special symbols will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 12-5 to 12-11, this feature section 099SG has the following features: the game state when variable display of special symbols is executed, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display of special symbols is executed. Accordingly, the variation pattern can be determined using different variation pattern determination tables.

Specifically, when the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is a loss, and the number of reserved special symbols for which variable display is executed is 0 to 2, the change for loss shown in Figure 12-5 (A) is performed. Using pattern determination table A, a variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of non-reach B being off, super reach A being off, and super reach B being off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table A for failure, 97 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach B among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 2 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach B. Super reach A is assigned to a variation pattern that is off, and one numerical value is assigned to a variation pattern that is off super reach B. In other words, if the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 0 to 2, the variation pattern is 97% of the time and the non-reach B is off. Super reach A is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 2%, and super reach B is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is a failure, and the number of reserved special symbols for which variable display is executed is 3, use the failure variation pattern determination table B shown in Figure 12-5 (B). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach B is off, super reach A is off, and super reach B is off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table B for failure, 97 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortening non-reach B among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 2 numerical values are is assigned to the variation pattern in which Super Reach A is off, and one numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern in which Super Reach B is out. In other words, if the gaming state is normal, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3, the variation pattern will become a variation pattern of shortened non-reach B that is off at a rate of 97%. Super reach A is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 2%, and super reach B is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the gaming state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display (even if the number of reserved memories is between 0 and 3), ), using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of super reach non-via B jackpot, super reach A jackpot, and super reach B jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 10 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-super reach B jackpot, and 40 values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-super reach B jackpot. is assigned to the variation pattern of Super Reach A jackpot, and 50 numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern of Super Reach B jackpot. In other words, if the gaming state is normal and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern will be determined to be the Super Reach non-via B jackpot variation pattern at a rate of 10%, regardless of the number of pending memories, and at a rate of 40%. At a rate of 50%, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach A jackpot is determined, and at a rate of 50%, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach B jackpot is determined.

In addition, if the gaming state is a definite variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 0, use the variation pattern determination table C for loss shown in FIG. 12-6 (A). The fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A is off, super reach C is off, and super reach is D. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table C for failure, 95 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach A among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 2 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach A. Super reach C is assigned to the off variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D to the off variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is in a variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols that execute variable display is 0, the variation pattern will be determined to be a non-reach A variation pattern at a rate of 95%. At a rate of 2%, the super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern that is off, and at a rate of 3%, the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that is off.

In addition, if the gaming state is a definite variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of special symbols reserved for variable display is one, the variation pattern judgment for a loss is determined as shown in Figure 12-6 (B). Using table D, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of shortened non-reach A is off, non-reach A is off, super reach C is off, and super reach D is off. In addition, in the deviation pattern determination table D, among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 80 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of shortened non-reach A, and 15 numerical values are are assigned to the non-reach A variation pattern, two numerical values are assigned to the super reach C variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is in a certain variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern will change to the variation pattern in which the shortened non-reach A is off at a rate of 80%. 15% of the time, non-reach A is determined to be an out-of-reach variation pattern, 2% of the time, super reach C is decided to be an out-of-reach variation pattern, and 3% of the time, super reach D is decided to be an out-of-reach variation pattern. Ru.

In addition, if the gaming state is a variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved special symbols for which variable display is executed is 2, as shown in Figure 12-6 (C), the variation pattern judgment for loss is performed. Using table E, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A is off, non-reach A is off, super reach C is off, and super reach D is off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table E for failure, 90 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortening non-reach A among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 5 numerical values are are assigned to the non-reach A variation pattern, two numerical values are assigned to the super reach C variation pattern, and three numerical values are assigned to the super reach D variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is in a variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for special symbols that execute variable display is 2, the variation pattern will change to a variation pattern in which shortened non-reach A is off at a rate of 90%. 5% of the time, non-reach A is determined to be a deviation pattern, 2% of the time, super reach C is determined to be a deviation pattern, and 3% of the time, super reach D is determined to be a deviation pattern. Ru.

In addition, if the gaming state is a definite variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 3, as shown in Figure 12-6 (D), the variation pattern judgment for loss is performed. Using Table F, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A, super reach C is off, and super reach D is off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table F for failure, 95 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortened non-reach A among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 2 numerical values are is assigned to the variation pattern that is out of super reach C, and three numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern that is out of super reach D. In other words, if the gaming state is in a certain variable state, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes variable display is 3, the variation pattern will become a variation pattern in which shortened non-reach A is off at a rate of 95%. Super reach C is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 2%, and super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that is off at a rate of 3%.

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is off in the variable probability state, the determination ratio of each variation pattern is different depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in the variable probability state in this feature part 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the number of pending memories of the special symbol to be executed (if the variable display of the first special symbol is the first special symbol) The number of pending memories stored in the pending storage section 099SG151A is different depending on the number of pending memories stored in the second special symbol holding storage section 099SG151B if it is a variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, when the gaming state is a variable probability state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of pending memories, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot is determined using the fluctuation pattern judgment table B for super reach non-super reach, as shown in Figure 12-7. It is determined from the fluctuation patterns of Via A jackpot, Super Reach C jackpot, and Super Reach D jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-super reach A jackpot, and 80 Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach C jackpot, and 15 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the Super Reach D jackpot. In other words, if the gaming state is a variable state and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of pending memories, the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach non-via A jackpot will be determined at a rate of 5%, and the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach non-via A jackpot will be determined at a rate of 80%. A variation pattern of C jackpot is determined, and a variation pattern of super reach D jackpot is determined at a rate of 15%.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 0, as shown in Figure 12-8 (A), the variation pattern for loss is Using determination table G, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach A and super reach E. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table G for failure, among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 95 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach A, and 5 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach A. Super Reach E is assigned to the deviant variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 0, the variation pattern will be the non-reach A variation pattern at a rate of 95%. The super reach E is determined to be a variation pattern in which the super reach E deviates at a rate of 5%.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of special symbols reserved for variable display is 1, as shown in Figure 12-8 (B), the variation pattern for loss is Using determination table H, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A is off, non-reach A is off, and super reach E is off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table H for failure, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 85 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortening non-reach A, and 10 numerical values are is assigned to the non-reach A variation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned to the super reach E variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes variable display is 1, the variation pattern will be shortened at a rate of 85%, and the variation pattern will be shortened and the non-reach A will be off. At a rate of 10%, non-reach A is determined to be an out-of-reach variation pattern, and at a 5% rate, super-reach E is determined to be an out-of-reach variation pattern.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 2, as shown in Figure 12-8 (C), the variation pattern for loss is Using determination table I, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of shortened non-reach A is off, non-reach A is off, and super reach E is off. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table I for failure, among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 90 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortening non-reach A, and 5 numerical values are is assigned to the non-reach A variation pattern, and 5 numerical values are assigned to the super reach E variation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 2, the variation pattern will be reduced at a rate of 90%, and the variation pattern will be shortened and the non-reach A will be off. At a rate of 5%, non-reach A is determined to be an out-of-reach variation pattern, and at a 5% rate, super-reach E is determined to be an out-of-reach variation pattern.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 3, as shown in Figure 12-8 (D), the variation pattern for loss is Using the determination table J, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the shortened non-reach A deviation and the super reach D deviation. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table J for failure, among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 95 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for shortening non-reach A, and 5 numerical values are is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the gaming state is time-saving state A, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 3, the variation pattern is reduced at a rate of 95%, and the variation pattern is shortened and non-reach A is off. is determined, and the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that deviates at a rate of 5%.

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state A, the determination ratio of each variation pattern is different depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol that executes the variable display. In other words, in the time saving state A in this characteristic part 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol to be executed (or the first special symbol if the variable display of the first special symbol is variable). The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage section 099SG151A is different depending on the number of pending memories stored in the second special symbol holding storage section 099SG151B if the second special symbol is variable display.

In addition, when the gaming state is time saving state A and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in Figure 12-9, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot can be changed to super reach using the fluctuation pattern determination table C. Determined from the fluctuation pattern of non-transit A jackpot and super reach E jackpot. In addition, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table C, among the possible values of the random number MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 5 numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-super reach A jackpot, and 95 numbers are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the non-super reach A jackpot. Numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach E jackpot. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state A and the variable display result is jackpot, the fluctuation pattern will be determined to be the super reach non-via A jackpot fluctuation pattern at a rate of 5%, regardless of the number of pending memories, and the fluctuation pattern will be determined to be the fluctuation pattern of super reach non-via A jackpot, and 95% The fluctuation pattern of Super Reach E jackpot is determined by the percentage.

In addition, when the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 0, as shown in Figure 12-10 (A), the variation pattern for loss is Using determination table K, the fluctuation pattern is determined from the fluctuation patterns of non-reach B and super reach D. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table I for failure, among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, 97 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of non-reach B, and 3 numerical values are assigned to the fluctuation pattern for non-reach B. Super reach D is assigned to the deviation pattern. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols that execute variable display is 0, the fluctuation pattern will be the non-reach B out fluctuation pattern at a rate of 97%. The super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that deviates at a rate of 3%.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of special symbols to be held and stored for variable display is one, as shown in Figure 12-10 (B), the variation pattern for the loss is Using the determination table L, the variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table L for failure, 97 numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern for ultra-shortened non-reach failure among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 3 numerical values is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories for the special symbol that executes the variable display is 1, the variation pattern is a super shortened non-reach off variation pattern at a rate of 97%. , and the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that deviates at a rate of 3%.

In addition, when the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memory of special symbols for which variable display is executed is 2, as shown in Figure 12-10 (C), the variation pattern for loss is Using the determination table M, a variation pattern is determined from the variation patterns of the super shortened non-reach deviation and the super reach D deviation. In addition, in the fluctuation pattern determination table M for failure, 99 numerical values are assigned to the variation pattern for ultra-shortened non-reach failure among the possible values of the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, and 1 numerical value is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach D. In other words, if the gaming state is time-saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 2, the variation pattern is a super-shortening non-reach off variation pattern at a rate of 99%. , and the super reach D is determined to be a variation pattern that deviates at a rate of 1%.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of special symbols reserved for variable display is 3, as shown in Figure 12-10 (D), the variation pattern for loss is Using the determination table N, the variation pattern is determined only from the ultra-shortened, non-reach-out variation patterns. In addition, in the variation pattern determination table N for a miss, 100 numerical values are assigned to the super-shortened non-reach variation pattern among the possible values of the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination. In other words, if the gaming state is time saving state B, the variable display result is off, and the number of reserved memories of special symbols that execute variable display is 3, the variation pattern is 100% and the super shortening non-reach variation pattern is off. determined.

As mentioned above, regarding the variable display in which the variable display result is off in the time saving state B, the determination ratio of each variation pattern is different depending on the number of reserved memories of the special symbol for executing the variable display. In other words, in the time saving state B in this characteristic part 099SG, the average variable display period of the variable display in which the variable display result is off is the number of reserved memories of the special symbol to be executed (or the first special symbol in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol). The number of pending memories stored in the figure pending storage section 099SG151A is different depending on the number of pending memories stored in the second special symbol holding storage section 099SG151B in the case of variable display of the second special symbol.

In addition, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, regardless of the number of pending memories, as shown in Figure 12-11, the fluctuation pattern for jackpot can be changed to super reach using the fluctuation pattern determination table D. D Only the fluctuation pattern of the jackpot is determined. In the jackpot variation pattern determination table D, 100 numerical values are assigned to the super reach D jackpot variation pattern among the possible values of the random number MR3 for variation pattern determination. That is, when the gaming state is time saving state B and the variable display result is a jackpot, the variation pattern is determined to be the super reach D jackpot variation pattern at a rate of 100%, regardless of the number of pending memories.

Here, the period values in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present feature part 099SG will be explained based on FIGS. 12-13 to 12-23.

First, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is time saving state A is a period value α, the period value α is A× It is calculated by the value of a+B×b+C×c+D×d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a failure when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state A is 0, and a is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 in time-saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A, b is the proportion of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state A, and C is the proportion of the second special figure holding memory number being 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case of 2 pieces is off, and c is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in the time saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state A is three, and d is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is three in time-saving state A. This is the ratio of the fluctuating display to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state A. Incidentally, the variable display period in which the variable display result in this feature section 099SG is off refers to the period from the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol to the end timing of the variable display.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-13 (B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is time saving state B is the period value β, the period value β is E× It is calculated by the value of e+F×f+G×g+H×h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a failure when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state B is 0, and e is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 in time-saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B, f is the proportion of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B, and G is the proportion of the second special figure holding memory number being 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case of 2 pieces is off, and g is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in the time saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state B is three, and h is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is three in time-saving state B. This is the ratio of the fluctuating displays to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-13(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is a variable probability state is the period value γ, the period value γ is I×i+J It is calculated by the value of ×j+K×k+L×l. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state, and i is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probability variable state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the probability variable state, and j is the percentage in the probability variable state. The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state, K is the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 2 in the variable probability state k is the average fluctuation time when the change occurs, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are 2 second special symbols held in the probability variable state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probability variable state, and H is the percentage of the second special symbol in the probability variable state. The average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of reserved figures stored is 3, l is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of stored special figures is 3 in the probability variable state, and the fluctuation display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state. This is the percentage of the display.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-13(A) to 12-13(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra A to L and a to l, the period value α in time-saving state A, and the period value α in time-saving state B When calculating the period value β and the period value γ in the probability variable state, the period value α is larger than the period value β, and the period value γ is larger than the period value β (α>β, γ> β).

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state each reaches 1100 by being controlled multiple times in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state. do. As shown in FIGS. 12-14(A) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of 1100 fluctuations when the gaming state is time saving state A is the period value α', the period value α' is It is calculated by the value of A×a′+B×b′+C×c′+D×d′. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state A, and a' is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state A. B is the ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A, b' is the ratio of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when there are 2 pieces, and c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in time saving state A. 1100 times of fluctuation display in time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, and d' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A. This is the proportion of the fluctuating displays when the time saving state A occupies the 1100 fluctuating displays of the time saving state A.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-14(B) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is time saving state B is the period value β', the period value β' is It is calculated by the value of E×e'+F×f'+G×g'+H×h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B, and e' is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B, f' is the ratio of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure pending memories in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when there are 2 pieces, and g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in time saving state B. The fluctuation display is 1100 times in time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, and h' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B. This is the proportion of the fluctuating displays when the time saving state B occupies the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 12-14(C) and 12-23, if the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation when the gaming state is a variable probability state is the period value γ', the period value γ' is It is calculated by the value of xi'+Jxj'+Kxk'+Lxl'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state, and i' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability fluctuation state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the probability fluctuation state, and j' is the probability fluctuation The percentage of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbols reserved in the state is one is the proportion of the 1100 fluctuation displays in the variable probability state, and K is the fluctuation when the number of second special symbols reserved is two in the variable probability state. The average fluctuation time when the display result is off, k' is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special symbol holding memory is 2 in the variable probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the variable probability state, H is the ratio in the variable probability state The average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 3, l' is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state. This is the proportion of 1100 fluctuation displays.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-14(A) to 12-14(C) and FIG. 12-23, by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra A to L and a' to l', the period in time saving state A is calculated. When calculating the value α', the period value β' in the time-saving state B, and the period value γ' in the variable probability state, the period value α' is larger than the period value β', and the period value γ' is the period value β. (α'>β', γ'>β').

Next, attention will be paid to the case where variable display is performed 110 times in the time saving state A, the time saving state B, and the variable probability state. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-15(A) and 12-23, the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, causing 110 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the period value δ is the average fluctuation time when it is executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is three, the period value δ is calculated by the value of D×110. Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the time saving state A as described above.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-15(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs every 110 times in the time saving state A. If the period value ε is the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage number is 3, then the period value ε is calculated by the value of H×110. Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the time saving state B as described above.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-15(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 110 times every time in the variable probability state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 3 is the period value ζ, the period value ζ is calculated by the value of L×110. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the variable probability state as described above.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-15(A) to 12-15(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra D, H, and L, the period value δ in time-saving state A and the period value in time-saving state B When calculating the period value ζ in a definite variable state, the period value δ is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is larger than the period value ε (δ>ε, ζ>ε) .

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state each reaches 1100 by being controlled multiple times in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-16(A) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending memory is 3 is the period value δ', then the period value δ' is calculated by the value of D x 1100. . Here, D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the time saving state A as described above.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-16(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the time saving state B. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending memory is 3 is the period value ε', then the period value ε' is calculated by the value of H x 1100. . Here, H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the time saving state B as described above.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-16(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the probability change state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 3 is the period value ζ', the period value ζ' is calculated by the value of L x 1100. Here, L is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 in the variable probability state as described above.

Above, from FIGS. 12-16(A) to 12-16(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra D, H, and L, the period value δ' in time-saving state A, the period in time-saving state B When calculating the value ε' and the period value ζ' in the variable state, the period value δ' is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ' is larger than the period value ε' (δ' ＞ε', ζ'＞ε').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17(A) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs every 110 times in the time saving state A. If the period value of the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 2 is η, the period value η is calculated by the value of C×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17(B) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, resulting in 110 fluctuations every time in the time saving state B. Average fluctuation time when executed when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 2. 110 times of variable display when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is always 2 when executing the variable display. If the average fluctuation time is a period value θ, the period value θ is calculated by the value of G×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-17(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 110 times every time in the variable probability state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 2 is the period value ι, the period value ι is calculated by the value of K×110.

Above, from FIGS. 12-17(A) to 12-17(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra C, G, and K, the period value η in time-saving state A, the period value in time-saving state B When calculating the period value ι in a definite variable state, the period value η is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is larger than the period value θ (η>θ, ι>θ) .

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state each reaches 1100 by being controlled multiple times in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-18(A) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the number of stored second special symbols is two is the period value η', the period value η' is calculated by the value of C×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-18(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs every 1100 times in the time saving state B. If the period value θ' is the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the number of stored second special symbols is two, the period value θ' is calculated by the value of G×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-18(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the probability change state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 2 is the period value ι', the period value ι' is calculated by the value of K x 1100.

Above, from FIGS. 12-18(A) to 12-18(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra C, G, and K, the period value η' in time-saving state A, the period in time-saving state B When calculating the value θ' and the period value ι' in the variable state, the period value η' is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι' is larger than the period value θ' (η' >θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19(A) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs every 110 times in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is one is the period value κ, the period value κ is calculated by the value of B×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19(B) and 12-23, the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, resulting in 110 fluctuations every time in the time saving state B. If the period value λ is the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is one, the period value λ is calculated by the value of F×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-19(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 110 times every time in the variable probability state. , if the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is one is the period value μ, the period value μ is calculated by the value of J×110.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-19(A) to 12-19(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part into each algebra B, F, and J, the period value κ in time-saving state A and the period value in time-saving state B When calculating the period value μ in a definite variable state, the period value κ is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is larger than the period value λ (κ>λ, μ>λ) .

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state each reaches 1100 by being controlled multiple times in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-20(A) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is one is set as the period value κ', the period value κ' is calculated by the value of B×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-20(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the time saving state B. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and the second special figure pending storage is one is the period value λ', the period value λ' is calculated by the value of F×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-20(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the probability-changing state. , if the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is one is the period value μ', the period value μ' is calculated by the value of J×1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-20(A) to 12-20(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra B, F, and J, the period value κ' in time-saving state A, the period in time-saving state B When calculating the value λ' and the period value μ' in the variable state, the period value κ' is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ' is larger than the period value λ' (κ' >λ', μ'>λ').

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21(A) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, resulting in 110 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the period value ν is the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuations and the number of stored second special symbols is 0, the period value ν is calculated by the value of A×110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21(B) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, resulting in 110 fluctuations every time in the time saving state B. If the period value ξ is the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 0, the period value ξ is calculated by the value of E x 110.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-21(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 110 times every time in the probability change state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 0 is the period value π, the period value π is calculated by the value of I×110.

Above, from FIGS. 12-21(A) to 12-21(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra A, E, and I, the period value ν in time-saving state A, and the period value in time-saving state B. ξ, when calculating the period value π in a definite variable state, the period value ν is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π is larger than the period value ξ (ν>ξ, π>ξ) .

Also, pay attention to the average fluctuation time when the number of fluctuation displays in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state each reaches 1100 by being controlled multiple times in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state. do. First, as shown in FIGS. 12-22(A) and 12-23, the player constantly hits the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, causing 1100 fluctuations every time in the time saving state A. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 0 is the period value ν', the period value ν' is calculated by the value of A×1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-22(B) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1100 times every time in the time saving state B. If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the number of fluctuations and second special figure pending storage is 0 is the period value ξ', the period value ξ' is calculated by the value of E x 1100.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 12-22(C) and 12-23, when the player constantly shoots the game ball toward the right gaming area 2R, the fluctuation occurs 1,100 times every time in the probability change state. , If the average fluctuation time when executed in a state where the second special figure pending storage number is 0 is the period value π', the period value π' is calculated by the value of I×1100.

As described above, from FIGS. 12-22(A) to 12-22(C), by substituting the numerical values in this characteristic part for each algebra A, E, and I, the period value ν' in time-saving state A, the period in time-saving state B When calculating the value ξ' and the period value π' in the variable state, the period value ν' is larger than the period value ξ, and the period value π' is larger than the period value ξ' (ν' ＞ξ', π'＞ξ').

Next, the actual shooting values (number of game balls fired, special figure 1 starting Pachinko obtained from the number of mouth wins, special figure 2 starting opening winning number, special figure 1 variation display count, special figure 2 variation display number, total special figure 1 variation time, total special figure 2 variation time) and these actual shooting values The design values of the gaming machine 1 are shown in FIGS. 12-24(A) and 12-24(B). In addition, as shown in Figure 12-24 (A), if the total time of the test firing test time in the normal state, time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state is less than 10 hours, the remaining time is in the jackpot game state. There is something. In addition, the actual shooting value in the normal state is based on the condition that the game ball is continuously launched into the left gaming area 2L by operating the ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30, and in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state. The actual shooting value is conditional on continuous hitting of the game ball into the right game area 2R by operating the ball hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30.

As shown in Figure 12-24 (A), under normal conditions, the test firing test time is 346.08 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 34,580, the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting hole is 1939, and the number of winnings at the special drawing 2 starting hole is 1,939. The number of winnings is 0, the number of times the special pattern 1 variation is displayed is 1883 times, the number of times the special pattern 2 variation is displayed is 0, the total special pattern 1 variation time is 23840 seconds, and the total special pattern 2 variation time is 0 seconds. In addition, in time saving state A, the test firing test time is 77.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 7676, the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting hole is 0, the number of winnings at the starting opening of special drawing 2 is 4371, and the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting hole is 4371. The number of variation displays is 0, the number of special figure 2 variation displays is 658 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 3548 seconds. In addition, in time saving state B, the test firing test time is 14.96 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 1494, the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting slot is 0, the number of winnings at the starting opening of special drawing 2 is 821, and the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting slot is 821. The number of variation displays is 0, the number of special figure 2 variation displays is 594, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 954 seconds. In addition, in the variable probability state, the test firing test time is 116.00 minutes, the number of game balls fired is 11515, the number of winnings at the special drawing 1 starting hole is 0, the number of winnings at the starting opening of special drawing 2 is 6556, and the number of winnings in the special drawing 1 is variable. The number of display times is 0, the number of special figure 2 variation displays is 987 times, the total special figure 1 variation time is 0 seconds, and the total special figure 2 variation time is 4387 seconds.

From the above actual firing values, the design value for the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature part 099SG is that the number of game balls fired per minute in the normal state is 99.9 balls/minute, as shown in Figure 12-24 (B). The winning rate of special pattern 1 is 5.6 pieces/minute, the winning rate of special pattern 2 is 0 pieces/minute, the average special pattern 1 variation time is 12.661 seconds, and the average special pattern 2 variation time is 0 seconds. ing. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in time-saving state A is 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special drawing 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special drawing 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, and the average winning rate of special drawing 1 is 0 balls/minute. The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 5.393 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in time-saving state B is 99.9 balls/minute, the special figure 1 winning rate is 0 balls/minute, the special figure 2 winning rate is 54.8 balls/minute, and the average special figure 1 winning rate is 0 balls/minute. The fluctuation time is calculated to be 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 fluctuation time is 1.607 seconds. In addition, the number of game balls fired per minute in the variable probability state is 99.9 balls/minute, the winning rate of special drawing 1 is 0 balls/minute, the winning rate of special drawing 2 is 56.7 balls/minute, and the average winning rate of special drawing 1 is 99.9 balls/minute. The time is 0 seconds, and the average special figure 2 variation time is calculated to be 4.445 seconds.

In addition, when comparing the special figure 2 winning rates in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state, only the special figure 2 winning rate in time-saving state B is different, but this is because the number of game balls fired in time-saving state B is different. This is due to an error caused by fewer than two states.

Here, the average fluctuation time in the normal state, time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is actually calculated based on the numerical values obtained from the design values shown in FIGS. 12-24.

First, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (A), in the normal state, the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result when the number of 1st special symbol reservation memories is 0 is an error, and the number of 1st special symbol reservation memories are For the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number is 1, and the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the first special figure reservation memory number is 2, the first special figure reservation memory number is 0. From the fluctuation patterns that can be selected in the case of ~2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-5 (A)), 12000 (ms) × 97/100 + 45000 (ms) × 2/100 + 80000 (ms) × 1/ It is calculated as 100=13340 (ms). In addition, regarding the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the first special figure reservation memory number is 3, the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the first special figure reservation memory number is 3 and these fluctuation patterns. From the determination ratio (see FIG. 12-5 (B)), it is calculated as 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 45000 (ms) x 2/100 + 80000 (ms) x 1/100 = 6550 (ms).

In addition, when calculating the percentage of variable display executed in each case where the number of first special symbols reserved is 0 to 3 based on the normal state shown in Figure 12-24 (A), it is shown in Figure 12-25 (B ), the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of 1st special figure pending memory is 0 is 10%, and the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of 1st special figure pending memory is 1. is 40%, the proportion of variable display executed when the number of first special figure pending memory is 2 is 40%, the proportion of variable display executed when the number of first special figure pending memory is 3 is 10 It is calculated as %.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-25 (C), the average fluctuation time in the normal state is 13340 (ms) x 10/100 + 13340 (ms) x 40/100 + 13340 (ms) x 40/100 + 6550 (ms) x 10 /100=12661 (ms) is calculated.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-26 (A), in the time saving state A, the average fluctuation time A at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure reservation memory number is 0 is From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-8 (A)), 7000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 9150 (ms) ) is calculated, and the average fluctuation time B at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure reservation memory number is 1 is calculated based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reservation memory number is 1, and these. From the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern (see Figure 12-8 (B)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 85/100 + 7000 (ms) x 10/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5750 (ms), and the second The average fluctuation time C at which the fluctuation display result is out of order when the number of special figure reservation memories is 2 is calculated from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reservation memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns ( (See Figure 12-8 (C)), 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5550 (ms), and the number of 2nd special symbol pending memories is 3. The average fluctuation time D at which the fluctuation display result is off in the case of , is determined from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special symbol retention memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Figure 12-6 (D) ), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 50000 (ms) x 5/100 = 5350 (ms).

In addition, based on the time-saving state A shown in Figure 12-24 (A), this is executed in each case where the number of second special symbols held is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable display in the time-saving state A. When calculating the percentage of variable display that will be performed, as shown in Figure 12-26 (B), the percentage of variable display that is executed when the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0 (a and a') is 0. .9090909%, the ratio of variable display (b and b') executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 is 0.9090909%, executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 The percentage of variable display executed (c and c') is 2.7272727%, and the percentage of variable display executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 (d and d') is 95.4545455%. Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-26 (C), the average fluctuation time (α and α') of one fluctuation in time saving state A is 9150 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5750 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 5550. (ms)×2.7272727/100+5350(ms)×95.4545455/100=5393.636(ms).

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-27 (A), in the time saving state B, the average fluctuation time E at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of stored second special symbols is 0 is From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number of memories is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10 (A)), 5000 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 5600 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time F at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure reservation memory number is 1 is calculated based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reservation memory number is 1, and these From the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern (see Figure 12-10 (B)), it is calculated as 1500 (ms) x 97/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 2205 (ms), and the number of 2nd special symbol pending memories is 2. The average fluctuation time G at which the fluctuation display result is off in the case of 2 is determined from the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special symbol retention memory number is 2 and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (Figure 12-10 (C) ), calculated as 1500 (ms) x 99/100 + 25000 (ms) x 1/100 = 1735 (ms), and the average fluctuation time H at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbol reservation memories is 3 is 1500 (ms) x 100/100 = 1500 (from the variation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure retention memory number is 3 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-10 (D)). ms).

In addition, based on the time saving state B shown in Figure 12-24 (A), this is executed in each case where the number of second special symbols held is 0 to 3 in the 110th and 1100th variable display in the time saving state B. As shown in Figure 12-27 (B), when the percentage of variable displays executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0, the percentage of variable displays (e and e') that is executed is 0. .9090909%, the ratio of variable display (f and f') executed when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 1 is 1.8181818%, executed when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 2 The percentage of variable display executed (g and g') is 24.5454545%, and the percentage of variable display executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 3 (h and h') is 72.7272727%. Calculated.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-27 (C), the average fluctuation time (β and β') of one fluctuation in time saving state B is 5600 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 2205 (ms) x 1.8181818/100 + 1735 (ms)×24.5454545/100+1500(ms)×72.7272727/100=1607.773(ms).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-28 (A), in the probability variable state, the average fluctuation time I at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbol reservation memories is 0 is From the variation patterns that can be selected when the number is 0 and the determination ratio of these variation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (A)), 7000 (ms) x 95/100 + 40000 (ms) x 2/100 + 25000 x 3/100 = The average fluctuation time J, which is calculated as 8200 (ms) and causes the fluctuation display result to be off when the number of second special figure pending memories is 1, is the variation that can be selected when the second special figure pending memory number is 1. From the pattern and the determination ratio of these fluctuation patterns (see Figure 12-6 (B)), 3000 (ms) x 80/100 + 7000 (ms) x 15/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 5000 (ms) ) is calculated, and the average fluctuation time K at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure reservation memory number is 2 is calculated based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reservation memory number is 2, and these. From the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern (see Figure 12-6 (C)), 3000 (ms) x 90/100 + 7000 (ms) x 5/100 + 40000 (ms) x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 4600 (ms) ), and the average fluctuation time L at which the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure reservation memory number is 3 is calculated based on the fluctuation patterns that can be selected when the second special figure reservation memory number is 3, and these. From the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern (see FIG. 12-6 (D)), it is calculated as 3000 (ms) x 95/100 + 40000 x 2/100 + 25000 (ms) x 3/100 = 4400 (ms).

In addition, based on the variable probability state shown in FIG. 12-24 (A), this is executed in each case where the number of second special symbols held is 0 to 3 in the variable display of 110 and 1100 times in the variable probability state. When the proportion of variable display is calculated, as shown in Figure 12-28 (B), the proportion (i and i') of variable display executed when the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0 is 0.9090909. %, the percentage of variable display (j and j') executed when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 1 is 0.9090909%, and executed when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 2 The rate of variable display (k and k') is 2.7272727%, and the rate of variable display (l and l') executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 3 is calculated as 95.4545455%. Ru.

Therefore, as shown in Figure 12-28 (C), the average fluctuation time (γ and γ') for one fluctuation in a variable state is 8200 (ms) x 0.9090909 + 5000 (ms) x 0.9090909/100 + 4600 ( ms)×2.7272727/100+4400(ms)×95.4545455/100=4445.455(ms).

From the above, when comparing the average fluctuation time of one change in time saving state A, time saving state B, and probability variable state in pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature part 099SG, as shown in Figure 12-29, one change in time saving state B The average fluctuation time (β and β') of 1 fluctuation in time-saving state A is shorter than the average fluctuation time (α and α') of 1 fluctuation in time-saving state A (α>β and α'>β'). The average fluctuation times (β and β') of are set shorter than the average fluctuation times (γ and γ') of one fluctuation in the definite variable state (γ>β and γ'>β').

Next, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are executed in time saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuation displays are performed in time saving state B, and the 110 fluctuation displays in definite variable state. The total average fluctuation time when executed, the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state A, the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B, and the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in time-saving state B. Calculate the total average variation time when the variation display is executed 1100 times.

As shown in FIGS. 12-30(A) and 12-35, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A is a period value χ, the period value χ is α( Or α')×110=5393.633(ms)×110=593299.63(ms). Furthermore, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 110 fluctuation displays in time saving state B is the period value ψ, the period value ψ is β (or β') x 110 = 1607.773 (ms) x 110 =176855.03 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 110 fluctuation displays in a variable state is the period value ω, then the period value ω is γ (or γ') x 110 = 4445.455 (ms) x 110 = It is calculated as 489000.05 (ms).

In other words, in this characteristic part 099SG, the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state B by 110 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time-saving state A by 110. The period value ω is set smaller than the period value ω, and the period value ψ is also set smaller than the period value ω obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the variable probability state by 110 (χ>ψ and ω＞ψ).

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 12-31(A) and 12-36, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in time saving state A is the period value χ', then the period value χ' is calculated as α (or α') x 1100 = 5393.633 (ms) x 1100 = 5932996.3 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in time saving state B is the period value ψ', the period value ψ' is β (or β') x 1100 = 1607.773 (ms). It is calculated as ×1100=1768550.3 (ms). Also, if the total average fluctuation time when performing 1100 fluctuation displays in a variable state is the period value ω', the period value ω' is γ (or γ') x 1100 = 4445.455 (ms) x It is calculated as 1100=4890000.5 (ms).

In other words, in this characteristic part 099SG, the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time saving state B by 1100 is obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in time saving state A by 110. The period value ψ' is set smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of one fluctuation in the variable state by 110 ( χ'>ψ' and ω'>ψ').

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending stored is 3. First, as shown in Figure 12-31 (A), this is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 3. The period value δ is calculated as D×110=5350 (ms)×110=588500 (ms). In addition, the period value ε, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B, with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 3, is H x 110 = 1500 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=165000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is performed in a state where the second special symbol pending storage number is 3 is L x 110 = 4400 (ms) x It is calculated as 110=484000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-15, the period value δ is larger than the period value ε, and the period value ζ is larger than the period value ε (δ ＞ε, ζ＞ε).

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are performed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending stored is 3. First, as shown in Figure 12-31 (B), this is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 3. The period value δ' is calculated as D×1100=5350 (ms)×1100=5885000 (ms). In addition, the period value ε' which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of 2nd special symbols held stored is 3 is H x 1100 = 1500 (ms )×1100=1,650,000 (ms). Then, the period value ζ' which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is performed in a state where the number of second special symbols pending is 3 is L x 1100 = 4400 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=4840000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-16, the period value δ' is a value larger than the period value ε', and the period value ζ' is a value larger than the period value ε'. (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε').

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending stored is 2. First, as shown in Figure 12-32 (A), this is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 2. The period value η is calculated as C×110=5550 (ms)×110=610500 (ms). In addition, the period value θ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B, with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 2, is G × 110 = 1735 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=190850 (ms). Then, the period value ι, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is performed in a state where the number of second special symbols pending is 2, is K × 110 = 4600 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=506000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-17, the period value η is larger than the period value θ, and the period value ι is larger than the period value θ (η ＞θ, ι＞θ).

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending stored is 2. First, as shown in Figure 12-32 (B), this is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 2. The period value η' is calculated as C×1100=5550 (ms)×1100=6105000 (ms). In addition, the period value θ' which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 2 is G × 1100 = 1735 (ms )×1100=1908500 (ms). Then, the period value ι', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed every fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held in memory is 2 in the definite variable state, is K x 1100 = 4600 (ms) It is calculated as ×1100=5060000 (ms). That is, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIG. 12-18, the period value η' is a value larger than the period value θ', and the period value ι' is a value larger than the period value θ'. (η'>θ', ι'>θ').

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 1. First, as shown in Figure 12-33 (A), this is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 1. The period value κ is calculated as B×110=5750 (ms)×110=632500 (ms). In addition, the period value λ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 1, is F × 110 = 2205 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=242550 (ms). Then, the period value μ which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is performed in a state where the second special symbol pending storage number is one is J×110=5000(ms)× It is calculated as 110=550000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-19, the period value κ is larger than the period value λ, and the period value μ is larger than the period value λ (κ >λ, μ>λ).

Also, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending stored is 1. First, as shown in Figure 12-33 (B), this is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 1. The period value κ' is calculated as B×1100=5750 (ms)×1100=6325000 (ms). In addition, the period value λ' which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state B with the second special figure pending memory number being 1 per fluctuation is F x 1100 = 2205 (ms )×1100=2425500 (ms). Then, the period value μ' which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is performed in a state where the number of second special symbols pending is 1 is J x 1100 = 5000 (ms). It is calculated as ×1100=5500000 (ms). That is, in this characteristic part 099SF, as shown in FIG. 12-20, the period value κ' is a value larger than the period value λ', and the period value μ' is a value larger than the period value λ'. (κ'>λ', μ'>λ').

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 0. First, as shown in Figure 12-34 (A), this is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 0. The period value ν is calculated as B×110=9150 (ms)×110=1006500 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in time saving state B with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0, is E × 110 = 5600 (ms) It is calculated as ×110=616000 (ms). Then, the period value π, which is the average fluctuation time when 110 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is 0 and the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0, is I × 110 = 8200 (ms) × It is calculated as 110=902000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-21, the period value ν is a larger value than the period value ξ, and the period value π is a larger value than the period value ξ (ν ＞ξ, π＞ξ).

In addition, a comparison will be made regarding the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 0. First, as shown in Figure 12-34 (B), this is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in time saving state A with each fluctuation and the number of second special symbols held stored is 0. The period value ν' is calculated as B×1100=9150 (ms)×1100=10065000 (ms). In addition, the period value ξ', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed for each fluctuation and the number of stored second special symbols is 0 in time saving state B, is E x 1100 = 5600 (ms )×1100=6160000 (ms). Then, the period value π', which is the average fluctuation time when 1100 fluctuations are executed in a state where each fluctuation is 0 and the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0, is I x 1100 = 8200 (ms). It is calculated as ×1100=9020000 (ms). In other words, in this characteristic part 099SE, as shown in FIG. 12-22, the period value ν' is a value larger than the period value ξ', and the period value π' is a value larger than the period value ξ'. (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ').

In other words, in this feature section 099SG, when comparing the time required to display the fluctuations 110 times in each of the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), the time required to display the fluctuations 110 times is The time required for variable display is set to be the shortest in time saving state B (χ>ψ, ω>ψ). In addition, when comparing the time required to display 1100 fluctuations in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, as shown in Figure 12-30 (B), the time required to display 1100 fluctuations is also reduced. State B is set to be the lowest (χ'>ψ', ω'>ψ').

In addition, in the case where 110 fluctuations are executed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 0, it is necessary to display the 110 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-34(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (ν>ξ, π>ξ). In addition, regarding the case where 1100 fluctuations are executed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending memory is 0, it is necessary to display the 1100 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in Figure 12-34 (B), the time required for displaying the 1100 fluctuations is set to be the shortest in time state B (ν'>ξ', π'>ξ') .

In addition, in the case where 110 fluctuations are executed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 1, it is necessary to display the 110 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-33(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (κ>λ, μ>λ). In addition, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 1, it is necessary to display the 1100 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in Figure 12-33 (B), the time required to display the 1100 fluctuations is set to be the shortest in time state B (κ'>λ', μ'>λ') .

In addition, in the case where 110 fluctuations are performed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 2, it is necessary to display the 110 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-32(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuating displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (η>θ, ι>θ). In addition, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 2, it is necessary to display the 1100 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in Figure 12-32 (B), the time required to display the 1100 fluctuations is set to be the shortest in time state B (η'>θ', ι'>θ') .

In addition, in the case where 110 fluctuations are executed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols pending is 3, it is necessary to display the 110 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in FIG. 12-31(A), the time required for the 110 fluctuation displays is set to be the shortest in time state B (δ>ε, ζ>ε). In addition, in the case where 1100 fluctuations are performed in each of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, and the number of second special symbols held is 3, it is necessary to display the 1100 fluctuations. Comparing the times, as shown in Figure 12-31(B), the time required to display the 1100 fluctuations is set to be the shortest in time state B (δ'>ε', ζ'>ε') .

In other words, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state in this feature part 099SG, when the number of 2nd special figure reservations is 0 and the number of fluctuations is 110 or 1100 times, the 2nd special figure reservation When performing 110 or 1100 fluctuations with the number of stored items being 1, hold the 2nd special pattern.When performing fluctuations 110 or 1100 times with the number of stored items being 2, hold the 2nd special pattern. When performing 110 or 1100 fluctuations with the number of memorized items being 3, time-saving state B is set to have the highest special symbol fluctuation efficiency (shortest average fluctuation display time per fluctuation). ing. Also, if the player plays the game without worrying about the number of second special symbols held in memory in the time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state (Fig. 12-26 (B), Fig. 12-27 (B)) , when the fluctuation display is performed 110 or 1100 times for each number of retained memories at the rate shown in Figure 12-28 (B)), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol fluctuation efficiency (the average required per fluctuation). The variable display time is set short).

As mentioned above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature part 099SG, in addition to the time saving state (time saving state A) and variable probability state in the conventional pachinko gaming machine, the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols is higher than in the time saving state A and the variable probability state. By being able to control the time saving state B, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's desire to play.

For example, in a conventional pachinko game machine, after the end of a jackpot, the probability of winning a jackpot is a predetermined number of times (for example, the jackpot probability is about 1 Even if variable display is performed (approximately 3 times the jackpot probability denominator), such as 900 times in the case of /300, the machine will not be controlled to the time saving state B like the pachinko game machine 1 of this feature section 099SG. At this point, the jackpot probability denominator is already about three times higher, so the player continues to play for a long time without hitting the jackpot, and his investment is also increasing. However, this normal state (low probability/low base state) continues until a jackpot occurs, and further investment is required, which may significantly reduce the player's desire to play.

On the other hand, if it is possible to control to the time saving state B like the pachinko machine 1 of this feature part 099SG, after the jackpot ends, the jackpot will be hit in the low probability state (for example, the normal state (low probability/low base state)). If variable display is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, about 2.5 to 3 times the jackpot probability denominator) without being controlled, the time saving state B is controlled, and the maximum number of jackpots is a specified number of times (for example, 1100 times). The time-saving state B is controlled over a variable display (such as about 3.8 times the probability denominator). At this point, the probability of hitting the jackpot is already about three times as high, so the player continues playing the game for a long time without hitting the jackpot, and his investment is quite high. However, by being controlled to the time-saving state B, additional investment is suppressed and the possibility of a jackpot is increased, so it is possible to suppress a decrease in the desire to play.

In particular, in characteristic part 099SG, since the player requires a large amount of time and investment when the gaming state is controlled to the time-saving state B, in the time-saving state B, the variable display of the loss is displayed in the shortest possible time. When executed, it functions as a gaming state to shorten the period until the jackpot gaming state is controlled, so to speak, to rescue the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 099SG, even if the number of reserved memories is fixed and consumed in any state from 0 to 3, in addition to the fact that the time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency than the time saving state A or the variable probability state. Various effects (for example, countdown notice, pending change notice, pattern chance eye notice, effect display notice) explained in FIG. 11-36 of the feature section 069SG (and the drawing in which the feature points related to said FIG. 11-36 are described) The execution rate of advance preview performances such as movable body announcements, character announcements, reach announcements, button announcements, etc.) is lower than the execution rate of various performances in time saving state A and variable probability state (in feature part 099SG The execution rate of the various effects is the same as the execution rate of the various effects described in FIG. 11-36 of the feature section 069SG). Therefore, even if a player continues to play for a long time without winning a jackpot and is depressed due to high investment, if the player is controlled to time saving state B, the number of pending memories is in any state from 0 to 3. To provide a suitable time-saving state B since fluctuations can be efficiently digested with less unnecessary agitation even if the fluctuations are digested either in a fixed state or in a state where the number of pending memories is 0 to 3. be able to.

In addition, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-15, 12-17, 12-19, and 12-21, the average fluctuation time in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is multiplied by 110. The values are calculated and compared. This means that out of the 1100 fluctuating displays in time-saving state B, the consumption time of 110 fluctuating displays (total time of 110 fluctuating displays) is longer than the digesting time of 110 fluctuating displays in time-saving state A and variable probability state. This shows that it is also short. If the duration of 110 fluctuating displays in time-saving state B is the same (or almost the same) as the duration of 110 fluctuating displays in time-saving state A or probability variable state, then the 1100 fluctuating displays in time-saving state B The time taken to complete the fluctuating display is several times longer than the time needed to display the 110 fluctuating displays in time-saving state B. Therefore, if the gaming state is controlled to time-saving state B, the time required to complete the fluctuating display becomes longer, causing inconvenience to the player. It is possible that it gives a feeling of pleasure or dissatisfaction. Therefore, the present invention prevents the player from feeling dissatisfied when the time-saving state B is controlled by making the fluctuation efficiency in the time-saving state B higher than that in the time-saving state A and the variable probability state, and as a result, it is possible to This invention aims to provide a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can control the gaming state to a time-saving state B.

Furthermore, in this characteristic part 099SG, as shown in FIGS. 12-16, 12-18, 12-20, and 12-22, the average fluctuation time in time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state is multiplied by 1100. The values are calculated and compared. By being controlled multiple times in the time saving state A and the variable probability state, the fluctuation display in the time saving state A and the variable probability state is executed 1100 times, which is the same as the maximum number of fluctuation display times in the time saving state B. Comparing the 1100 fluctuation times in state A, the 1100 fluctuation times in time saving state B, and the 1100 fluctuation times in the definite variable state shows that time saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency. This is to show that it is possible to suitably control the time saving state B so as not to cause dissatisfaction.

This means that when the variable display in the time saving state A or the variable probability state is executed 1100 times, which is the same number as the maximum number of times of displaying fluctuations in the time saving state B, by being controlled to the time saving state A or the variable probability state multiple times, By designing the time-saving state B to have the highest fluctuation efficiency, it is shown that the time-saving state B has the highest fluctuation efficiency even when compared with the time-saving state A and the variable probability state. Therefore, the fluctuations in the time saving state B are prevented from causing dissatisfaction, and as a result, the time saving state B is suitably controlled.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-30 (A), the period value ψ obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of a change of 1 in the time saving state B, by 110 is the change of 1 in the time saving state A. is smaller than the period value χ obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of Since it is set smaller than the obtained period value ω, the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is higher than the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state A and the variable probability state, thereby shortening the period until the jackpot gaming state is controlled and saving time. The player's dissatisfaction in state B can be reduced, and as a result, a suitable time-saving state B can be provided. In particular, with this feature section 099SG, as mentioned above, in time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in time-saving state A or variable probability state, it is possible to shorten the period until the jackpot gaming state is controlled and reduce player dissatisfaction. At the same time, in the time-saving state A and variable probability state that are controlled via the jackpot game (time-saving state A and variable probability state in which a variable display with a longer special symbol fluctuation time is likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), the jackpot game is executed during the variable display. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect over an appropriate period of time to suggest that the device is controlled by the state.

In addition, as shown in Figure 12-30 (B), the period value ψ' obtained by multiplying the period value β, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state B, by 1100 is It is smaller than the period value χ' obtained by multiplying the period value α, which is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation, by 1100, and the period value ψ′ is the period value γ, which is the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the variable state, and is obtained by multiplying the period value γ by 1100. Since it is set smaller than the period value ω' obtained by multiplication, the period until it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state due to the fluctuation efficiency of time saving state B being higher than the fluctuation efficiency of time saving state A and variable probability state. By shortening the time saving state B, it is possible to reduce the dissatisfaction of the players in the time saving state B, and as a result, it is possible to provide a suitable time saving state B. In particular, with this feature section 099SG, as mentioned above, in time-saving state B, by increasing the fluctuation efficiency more than in time-saving state A or variable probability state, it is possible to shorten the period until the jackpot gaming state is controlled and reduce player dissatisfaction. At the same time, in the time-saving state A and variable probability state that are controlled via the jackpot game (time-saving state A and variable probability state in which a variable display with a longer special symbol fluctuation time is likely to be executed than in the time-saving state B), the jackpot game is executed during the variable display. It is possible to perform a predetermined effect over an appropriate period of time to suggest that the device is controlled by the state.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-21, when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state B, the average variation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ξ obtained by multiplying the number of display times is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is supposed to be executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 0 in time saving state A and 110 times in time saving state B. The period value ξ is set to be smaller than the period value ν obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of . Since the period value π obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time saving state B is set smaller than the period value π, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is different from the time saving state A or the definite variable state. Since the progress can be made faster than the previous one, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-22, when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in time-saving state B, the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed is 1100 times in time-saving state B. The period value ξ' obtained by multiplying the number of display times is 1100 in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the variable display that is supposed to be executed when the second special figure pending memory number is 0 in the time saving state A. The period value ξ' is set smaller than the period value ν' obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times, and the period value ξ' is set to be smaller than the period value ξ' that is executed when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 in the variable probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value π' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the abnormal fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is Since the progress can be made faster than in A or variable probability state, the game interest in time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-19, when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B, the average variation time of the variation display that should be executed is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value λ obtained by multiplying the number of times of display is the average variation time of the variable display that is supposed to be executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in time saving state A and 110 times in time saving state B. The period value λ is set to be smaller than the period value κ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of . Since it is set smaller than the period value μ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state B is different from that in the time-saving state A or the probability-variable state. Since the progress can be made faster than the above, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-20, when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B, the average variation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed is 1100 times in the time saving state B. The period value λ' obtained by multiplying the number of displays is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is supposed to be executed when the number of second special symbols pending in time saving state A is 1, and 1100 in time saving state B. The period value λ' is set smaller than the period value κ' obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times, and the period value λ' is set to be smaller than the period value κ' that is executed when the number of second special symbols pending is 1 in the variable probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value μ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the abnormal fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is Since the progress can be made faster than in A or variable probability state, the game interest in time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-17, when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 in the time saving state B, the average variation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value θ obtained by multiplying the number of displays is the average variation time of the variable display that is supposed to be executed when the number of second special symbols pending in time saving state A is 2, and 110 times in time saving state B. The period value θ is set to be smaller than the period value η obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of Since the period value ι obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time-saving state B is set smaller than the period value ι, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state B is different from the time-saving state A or the probability-variable state. Since the progress can be made faster than the above, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-18, when the second special figure pending memory number is 2 in the time saving state B, the average variation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed is 1100 times in the time saving state B. The period value θ' obtained by multiplying the number of display times is 1100 in the time saving state B to the average fluctuation time of the variable display that is supposed to be executed when the second special figure pending storage number is 2 in the time saving state A. The period value θ' is set to be smaller than the period value η' obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times, and the period value θ' is set to be smaller than the period value θ' that is executed when the number of second special symbols pending is 2 in the variable probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value ι' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the abnormal fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is Since the progress can be made faster than in A or variable probability state, the game interest in time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-15, when the number of second special symbols pending in the time saving state B is 3, the average variation time of the variation display that should be executed is 110 times in the time saving state B. The period value ε obtained by multiplying the number of display times is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that is supposed to be executed when the number of second special symbols pending in time saving state A is 3, and 110 times in time saving state B. The period value ε is set to be smaller than the period value δ obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times of . Since it is set smaller than the period value ζ obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 110 times in the time-saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time-saving state B is different from the time-saving state A or the probability-variable state. Since the progress can be made faster than the above, the game interest in the time-saving state B can be improved.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 12-16, when the number of second special symbols pending in the time saving state B is 3, the average variation time of the variation display that should be executed is 1100 times in the time saving state B. The period value ε' obtained by multiplying the number of display times is the average fluctuation time of the fluctuation display that should be executed when the number of second special symbols pending in time saving state A is 3, and 1100 in time saving state B. The period value ε' is set to be smaller than the period value δ' obtained by multiplying the number of fluctuation display times, and the period value ε' is set to be smaller than the period value ε' that is executed when the number of second special symbols pending is 3 in the variable probability state. Since it is set smaller than the period value ζ' obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of the irregular fluctuation display by the number of fluctuation displays of 1100 times in the time saving state B, the fluctuation display in the time saving state B is Since the progress can be made faster than in A or variable probability state, the game interest in time saving state B can be improved.

In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this feature section 099SG can perform variable display of normal symbols in addition to variable display of special symbols, and when the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes a hit (normal symbol hit), A game ball can be won in the second starting winning hole which has changed from the closed state to the open state. Furthermore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is possible to perform a variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the first starting prize opening, and also to execute a variable display of the first special symbol based on the fact that a game ball has won a prize in the second starting winning hole. The first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section are capable of executing a variable display of the second special symbol and can store information on the variable display of a special symbol that has not yet been executed as a reservation memory. 099SG151B. The maximum number of reservations stored in the first special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151A and the second special symbol reservation storage section 099SG151B is both set to 4, and the upper limit of the maximum number of reservations is determined according to the gaming state. It never changes.

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 12-2 (B) and 12-2 (D), the probability that a normal symbol will occur in the fluctuating display of regular symbols is different when the gaming state is in time-saving state A and in time-saving state B. In addition, the opening time of the second starting prize opening in the event of a winning pattern is set to 3 seconds, which is the same for both cases where the gaming state is time saving state A and time saving state B. , and when the game state is Time Saving State A or Time Saving State B, the game ball launched by the firing device toward the second route in the right gaming area enters the gate 41 or the second starting prize opening (enters ) is possible. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this feature part 099SG, many of the gameplay features can be shared between the time-saving state A and the time-saving state B, so the time-saving state A and the time-saving state It is possible to prevent players from becoming confused due to a large difference in gameplay between state B and state B.

In addition, in this feature section 099SG, when the gaming state is any of the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, the variable display period in which the variable display result is off is displayed in a variable manner from the start timing of the variable display of the special symbol. The average fluctuation time is calculated as the period until the end timing, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the number of fluctuation displays when the gaming state is in the variable probability state, time saving state B, or variable probability state is "110" or "1100". ”, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the variable display period in which the variable display result is off is calculated by the timing when the game ball is launched, or , the average fluctuation time is calculated as the period from the timing when the launched game ball enters the starting winning slot to the end timing of the fluctuation display based on the starting winning, and the calculated average fluctuation time and the gaming state are in a certain variable state, Each period value may be calculated by multiplying by "110" or "1100" which is the number of fluctuation display times in either the time saving state B or the variable probability state. By doing so, it becomes possible to appropriately obtain the period value in each gaming state by measurement.

In addition, the upper limit number of pending data (holding memory) that can be stored in the first special figure holding storage unit 099SG151A and the second special figure holding storage unit 099SG151B is 4 regardless of the gaming state, as shown in Figure 12-13. The period values for time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and definite variable state are obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each number of suspended memories by the proportion of the 110 fluctuation displays executed for each number of suspended memories. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

In particular, if the gaming state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α, then the period value α is A×a+B×b+C×c+D× Calculated based on the value of d. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a failure when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state A is 0, and a is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 in time-saving state A. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A, b is the proportion of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state A, and C is the proportion of the second special figure holding memory number being 2 in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case of 2 pieces is off, and c is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in the time saving state A to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A. , D is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state A is three, and d is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is three in time-saving state A. This is the ratio of fluctuating displays to the 110 fluctuating displays of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Further, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β, the period value β is E×e+F×f+G×g+H× Calculated based on the value of h. Here, E is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is a failure when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state B is 0, and e is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is 0 in time-saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at the time to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state B, f is the proportion of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 110 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B, and G is the proportion of the second special figure holding memory number being 2 in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result in the case of 2 pieces is off, and g is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in the time saving state B to the 110 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B. , H is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols pending in time-saving state B is three, and h is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols pending is three in time-saving state B. This is the ratio of the variable display to the 110 variable displays in the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Furthermore, if the gaming state is a variable probability state and the period value is γ when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state, the period value γ is equal to I×i+J×j+K×k+L×l. Calculated by value. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state, and i is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 110 fluctuation displays in the probability fluctuation state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the probability fluctuation state, and j is the ratio in the probability fluctuation state. The ratio of the variable display when the second special figure pending memory is 1 to the 110 variable displays in the variable probability state, K is the variable display result when the number of 2nd special figure pending memory is 2 in the variable probability state is the average fluctuation time when the change occurs, k is the ratio of the fluctuation display when there are 2 second special symbols held in the variable probability state to the 110 fluctuation displays in the variable probability state, and L is the percentage of the variation display when the second special symbol is held in memory in the variable probability state. The average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of reserved figures stored is 3, l is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of stored special figures is 3 in the probability variable state, and the fluctuation display when the second special figure pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state. This is the percentage of the display. By calculating the period value γ as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ of the probability variable state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

In addition, the upper limit number of pending data (holding memory) that can be stored in the first special drawing holding storage section 099SG151A and the second special drawing holding storage section 099SG151B is four regardless of the gaming state, as shown in Figure 12-14. The period values for time-saving state A, time-saving state B, and variable probability state are obtained by multiplying the average fluctuation time of each number of suspended memories by the proportion of the 1100 fluctuation displays executed for each number of suspended memories. Since it is calculated based on the total value of the values, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value corresponding to the number of pending memories.

In particular, if the gaming state is the time saving state A and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state A is α', the period value α' is A×a'+B× It is calculated by the value of b'+C×c'+D×d'. Here, A is the average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state A, and a' is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state A. B is the ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time saving state A, B is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the time saving state A, b' is the ratio of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state A to the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state A, and C is the number of second special figure pending memories in the time saving state A. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when there are 2 pieces, and c' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in time saving state A. 1100 times of fluctuation display in time saving state A , D is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A, and d' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state A. This is the proportion of the fluctuating displays when the time saving state A occupies the 1100 fluctuating displays of the time saving state A. By calculating the period value α' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value α' of the time saving state A corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Further, if the gaming state is time saving state B and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the time saving state B is β', the period value β' is E×e'+F× It is calculated by the value of f'+G×g'+H×h'. Here, E is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B, and e' is the average fluctuation time when the number of second special symbols held in memory is 0 in time saving state B. The ratio of the fluctuation display at a certain time to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the time saving state B, F is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending storage number is 1 in the time saving state B, f' is the ratio of the fluctuating display when there is one second special figure pending memory in the time saving state B to the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B, and G is the number of second special figure pending memories in the time saving state B. The average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when there are 2 pieces, and g' is the fluctuation display when the second special figure holding memory is 2 pieces in time saving state B. 1100 times of fluctuation display in time saving state B , H is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B, and h' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special figure pending memories is 3 in time saving state B. This is the proportion of the fluctuating displays when the time saving state B occupies the 1100 fluctuating displays in the time saving state B. By calculating the period value β' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value β' of the time saving state B corresponding to the number of pending memories.

Further, if the gaming state is a variable probability state and the period value when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the variable probability state is γ', the period value γ' is I×i'+J×j' It is calculated by the value of +K×k'+L×l'. Here, I is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state, and i' is the average fluctuation time when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 0 in a variable probability state. The ratio of the fluctuation display to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the probability fluctuation state, J is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the second special figure pending memory number is 1 in the probability fluctuation state, and j' is the probability fluctuation The percentage of the fluctuation display when the number of second special symbols reserved in the state is one is the proportion of the 1100 fluctuation displays in the variable probability state, and K is the fluctuation when the number of second special symbols reserved is two in the variable probability state. The average fluctuation time when the display result is off, k' is the ratio of the fluctuation display when the second special symbol holding memory is 2 in the variable probability state to the 1100 fluctuation displays in the variable probability state, and L is the ratio in the variable probability state. The average fluctuation time at which the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 3, l' is the average fluctuation time when the fluctuation display result is off when the number of 2nd special symbols pending memory is 3 in the probability variable state. This is the proportion of 1100 fluctuation displays. By calculating the period value γ' as described above, it is possible to obtain an accurate period value γ' of the probability variable state corresponding to the number of pending memories.

As mentioned above, in the time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state in this feature part 099SG, when the second special symbol pending memory number is 0 and the variation is performed 110 times or 1100 times, the second When performing 110 or 1100 fluctuations with the number of reserved special symbols stored as 1, when performing fluctuations 110 or 1100 times with the number of second reserved special symbols stored as 2, the second When performing 110 or 1100 fluctuations with the number of special symbols held in memory being 3, time-saving state B has the highest special symbol fluctuation efficiency (the average fluctuation display time required per fluctuation is short) ) has been set. In addition, when the player plays the game without worrying about the number of second special symbols held in memory in time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state (Fig. 12-26 (B), Fig. 12-27 (B)) , when the fluctuation display is performed 110 times or 1100 times for each number of retained memories at the rate shown in Figure 12-28 (B)), the time saving state B has the highest special symbol fluctuation efficiency (the average required per fluctuation) The variable display time is set short).

In addition, in this feature part 099SG, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in definite variable state are each multiplied by 110 or 1100. Although the example shows that the fluctuation efficiency of the time saving state B is the highest by comparing the values obtained in the above example, the present invention is not limited to this. , the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the time-saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in the variable probability state may be multiplied by values other than 110 and 1099, such as 109 and 1099. The reason for multiplying the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state A, the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in time saving state B, and the average fluctuation time of 1 fluctuation in definite variable state by 109 and 1099 is that This is because the initial fluctuation of A, time saving state B, and variable probability state almost always starts when the number of pending memories is 0. In addition, when the final 5 fluctuations of the 3 states of time saving state A, time saving state B, and variable probability state, or the 2 states of time saving state A and variable probability state are set as fluctuations with a longer special symbol fluctuation time at a higher rate than other fluctuations. may be a value multiplied by 104, 1094, etc., excluding a total of 6 fluctuations, the first fluctuation and the last 5 fluctuations of each state.

(Explanation regarding characteristic part 018SG)
Next, an embodiment of the characteristic portion 018SG will be described based on FIGS. 13-1 to 13-23. FIG. 13-1 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a variation pattern in the characteristic portion 018SG. 13-2, (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a low base state, and (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of a fluctuation pattern determination table in a high base state. In this characteristic section 018SG, illustrations and detailed explanations of the same configurations as those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic sections 069SG and 099SG will be omitted, and differences will be mainly explained. Furthermore, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 018SG described below can be applied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 having the feature section 069SG or the feature section 099SG.

FIG. 13-1 shows a variation pattern in this characteristic part 018SG. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is "miss", the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is "non-reach" and "reach", and the variable A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to cases where the display result is a "big hit" or a "small win." In addition, the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as "non-reach variation pattern"), A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is "miss" and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is "reach" is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as "reach variation pattern"). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the off-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is "off". A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is referred to as a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach effect is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and similarly to the super reach variation pattern, normal reach variation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, etc. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided, and in this case, the jackpot expectation level (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach variation pattern of normal reach α, normal reach β, . . . may be different. Further, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach variation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach variation pattern may be of only one type, similar to the normal reach variation putter.

As shown in FIG. 13-1, the special figure variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the normal reach effect is executed in this embodiment is set shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. Furthermore, among the Super Reach variation patterns, the variable display period for the Super Reach β variation pattern is longer (80 seconds) than the variable display period (45 seconds) for the Super Reach α variation pattern. . On the other hand, the variable display period of the super reach γ deviation pattern is shorter than the variable display period (45 seconds) of the super reach α deviation pattern because it is a deviation pattern for high bases as described later. period (40 seconds).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as will be described later, the types of these fluctuation patterns are determined first, such as non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, etc. After that, instead of determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from among the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, the fluctuation pattern is determined using only the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number for determining the type of variation pattern may be provided, and from these random numbers for determining the type of variation pattern. The type of variation pattern may be determined first, and then the variation pattern to be executed may be determined from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type.

FIG. 13-2(A) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a normal state (low base state). If the variable display result is "Jackpot" in the normal state (low base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table A, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table A. PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot variation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot variation pattern). In the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A, 97 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, 600 determination values are assigned to PB1-2, and 300 determination values are assigned to PB1-3. That is, when the gaming state is a low base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination ratio increases in the order of normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memory of variable special symbols is 2 or less, select the variation pattern judgment table A for deviations, and use the variation pattern judgment table A for deviations. The fluctuation patterns are PA1-1 (non-reach deviation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach deviation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α deviation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β deviation pattern). pattern). Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table A for failure, 600 determination values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of pending memory of variable special symbols is 3, select the variation pattern judgment table B for deviations, and use the variation pattern judgment table B for deviations. The variation patterns are PA1-2 (shortened variation pattern with non-reach deviation), PA2-1 (variation pattern with normal reach deviation), PA2-2 (variation pattern with super reach α deviation), and PA2-3 (variation pattern with super reach β deviation). pattern). Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table B for failure, 700 determination values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 90 determination values are assigned to PA2-2. Seven determination values are assigned to PA2-3.

FIG. 13-2(B) is an explanatory diagram showing a method of determining a fluctuation pattern when the gaming state is a time saving state (high base state). If the variable display result is "Jackpot" in the time saving state (high base state), select the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, and change the variation pattern to PB1-1 (normal reach) using the jackpot variation pattern determination table B. (Jackpot fluctuation pattern) and PB1-4 (Super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern). In the jackpot variation pattern determination table B, 197 determination values are assigned to PB1-1, and 800 determination values are assigned to PB1-4. That is, when the gaming state is a high base state and the variable display result is "jackpot", the determination ratio increases in the order of normal reach and super reach γ.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is "miss", select the variation pattern determination table D for miss, and change the variation pattern PA1-4 (non-reach variation pattern) using the variation pattern determination table D for miss. It is determined from PA2-1 (variation pattern of deviation from normal reach) and PA2-4 (variation pattern of deviation from super reach γ). Specifically, in the variation pattern determination table D for failure, 800 determination values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 determination values are assigned to PA2-1, and 97 determination values are assigned to PA2-4. Assigned.

(About various performances)
Next, various effects performed in the super reach effect will be explained based on FIGS. 13-3 to 13-5. FIG. 13-3 is a diagram showing execution periods of various performances in the jackpot fluctuation patterns of super reach α, β, and γ. FIG. 13-4 is a diagram showing execution periods of various effects in the deviation variation pattern of super reach α, β, and γ. In FIGS. 13-5, (A) is a diagram for explaining the contents of various effects, and (B) is a diagram for explaining character types.

Although not particularly shown, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the normal reach variation pattern, and then starts the normal reach performance (hereinafter referred to as a variable display performance) based on the variable display mode being set to the normal reach display mode. , abbreviated as "N reach performance"). Thereafter, the variable display of decorative symbols ends without developing into a super reach effect (hereinafter abbreviated as "SP reach effect").

On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on the super reach variation pattern, the period (ta0 to ta1) from timing ta0 when variable display is started until a predetermined period elapses. Then, decorative symbols are displayed variably in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, and 5C (see FIG. 13-9 (N1)). The light emission patterns of the game effect lamps 9 and the movable LED 208 during this period (ta0 to ta1) are light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of normal background effects in the low base state, and light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of music in the high base state. By combining the light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of normal background effects and the light emission patterns corresponding to multiple types of songs, and the light emission patterns corresponding to various SP reach effects, it is possible to create a variety of lights. The lighting pattern can enhance the performance effect.

At timing ta1 when a predetermined period has elapsed from timing ta0 when variable display was started, the variable display mode is changed to a normal reach display mode, and "N reach effect" as a variable display effect is executed over a predetermined period (ta1 to ta2). Thereafter, at timing ta2, the variable display mode is changed to the super reach display mode, and the "SP reach effect" is executed as a variable display effect for a predetermined period (ta2 to ta5).

In this way, the "N reach effect" is a common effect executed in both the normal reach variation pattern and the super reach variation pattern, and in the case of the normal reach variation pattern, it ends without developing into the "SP reach effect" and the super reach variation pattern ends. In the case of reach variation pattern, it develops into "SP reach effect". Therefore, even in the case of a normal reach variation pattern, the player can expect that the execution of the "N reach effect" will lead to development into the later-described "SP reach effects A to E".

As shown in Figures 13-3 and 13-4, "SP reach effects A to E" indicate whether the variable display result is a "jackpot" or not, that is, a "jackpot" or a "miss." This is a performance to be announced, and during the SP reach performance period, a "decision performance" to be described later is executed for a predetermined period (ta3 to ta4). Then, as shown in Figure 13-3, if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the end of the "SP reach effects A to E", the "post effects" described later will be executed for a predetermined period (ta5 to ta7). After that, the variable display ends. In this way, the variable display based on the super reach variation pattern of SP reach α, β, and γ includes the variable display part (ta0 to ta5) that executes the variable display of decorative symbols, and the jackpot game state after the end of the variable display part. It consists of a post performance part (ta5 to ta7) that notifies the expected number of pitches that can be obtained in the event.

Further, as shown in FIG. 13-4, if the variable display result is a failure, the variable display ends at the same time as the "SP reach effects A to E" end. In addition, after the notification of the loss ends (ta5 to ta5A), the normal background screen returns to the state where the confirmed decorative symbols of the predetermined reach combinations that are not jackpot combinations are temporarily stopped (shaking state), and the symbol confirmation period continues. A temporary stop will be displayed until the

Next, various performances executed in the super reach variation pattern will be explained. As shown in FIG. 13-5 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach α fluctuation pattern, “SP reach performance A” is executed as the SP reach performance, and when the fluctuation pattern is the super reach β fluctuation pattern, If "SP reach effect B" or "SP reach effect C" is executed as the SP reach effect and the variation pattern is the super reach α variation pattern, "SP reach effect D" or "SP reach effect E" is executed as the SP reach effect. is executed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 13-5(B), in "SP reach effects B to E" other than "SP reach effect A", ally character A-1 and ally character A different from ally character A-1 -2, enemy character X-1, and enemy character X-2 different from enemy character X-1 can appear. Note that the number of types of friendly characters and enemy characters is not limited to the above, and friendly characters and enemy characters other than those mentioned above may also appear. Furthermore, even for the same character, the level of expectation may vary depending on the display mode.

"SP reach effect A" is an effect that is executed when the SP reach α variation pattern is determined when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), and a moving image of a bowling challenge is displayed. A "jackpot" is announced when all the pins fall, and a "miss" is announced when all the pins do not fall. Note that in the video of the bowling challenge, the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 and the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are not displayed.

"SP reach effect B" is executable when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the game state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-1 and enemy character This is a production in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-1 faces off in the city is displayed, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and ally character A-1 When the character fails to defeat enemy character X-1 and is defeated, a "defeat" is announced.

"SP reach effect C" is executable when the SP reach β variation pattern is determined when the gaming state is the normal state (low base state), and the ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 This is a production in which a moving image of "Battle A" in which ally character A-2 faces off in the city is displayed, and when ally character A-2 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, a "jackpot" is announced, and ally character A-2 When the character is defeated without being able to defeat the enemy character X-2, a "defeat" is announced.

"SP reach performance D" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the gaming state is one of time saving state A, variable probability state, and time saving state B (high base state), This is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-1 face off in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-1 and wins, " A "jackpot" is reported, and a "miss" is reported when the friendly character A-1 fails to defeat the enemy character X-1 and is defeated.

"SP reach effect E" is executable when the SP reach γ variation pattern is determined when the gaming state is one of time saving state A, variable probability state, and time saving state B (high base state), This is a production that displays a moving image of "Battle B" in which character A-1 and enemy character X-2 face off in the wilderness, and when ally character A-1 defeats enemy character X-2 and wins, " A "jackpot" is reported, and a "miss" is reported when the friendly character A-1 fails to defeat the enemy character X-2 and is defeated.

Furthermore, the expectation of a jackpot is higher with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β than with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach α, so the expectation of jackpot is higher with SP Reach Performance B and SP Reach Performance C than with SP Reach Performance A ( Jackpot expectation level: SP reach performance A < SP reach performance B < SP reach performance C).

The "decisive performance" is a predetermined period of time (for example, timing ta3 when the final confrontation of bowling or battle starts just before the end of the SP reach performance) when a predetermined period of time has passed since the start of SP reach performances A to E. , ta3 to ta5). Specifically, during the valid operation period in which the operation of the push button 31B is effectively detected, there is a "right/fail button effect" that encourages the player to operate the push button 31B, and the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period. This includes a "movable body effect" that is executed at the timing when the push button 31B is pressed, or when the valid operation period ends without any operation of the push button 31B being detected.

The "movable body effect" is executed only when the variable display result is a jackpot, and is executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation validity period This is a performance in which the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position at the timing when the animation ends. If the variable display result is incorrect, the operation is not executed at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period, or at the timing when the operation valid period ends without detecting the operation of the push button 31B.

In addition, in accordance with the execution of the movable body effect (the fall of the movable body 32), an effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5, and the movable body LED 208 and the game effect A light emission effect in which the lamp 9 or the like is lit in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow color lighting), and a vibration in which the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (for example, about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B. A presentation and a sound presentation that outputs a predetermined sound effect are performed.

In addition, in SP reach production A, friendly characters and enemy characters are not displayed in the bowling showdown, so characters are not displayed in the movable body production, while in SP reach production B to E, the friendly characters and enemy characters are not displayed in the battle showdown. By displaying , the enemy character that was displayed in the battle showdown is also displayed in the movable object performance.

In this way, in the "decision effect", if the variable display result is a jackpot, after the win/fail button effect is performed, the movable object effect is executed to notify the jackpot, and the variable display result is a loss. In some cases, after the success/failure button performance is performed, a failure notification is performed without executing the movable object performance.

"Post-production A" is executed after it is announced that the variable display result is a jackpot in the normal gaming state (low base state), and that the SP reach effects A to C will be controlled to the jackpot gaming state. Ru. Specifically, in SP reach effects A to C, after the confirmed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed, The re-variable display is executed in the re-lottery variation part (ta5 to ta6) in which the re-variable display of the confirmed decorative symbols temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R is executed, and the re-variable display is executed in the re-lottery variation part. It is composed of a re-lottery result part (ta6 to ta7) in which the display result is notified by stopping and displaying the determined decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Incidentally, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post performance A is set to be "10 seconds".

In addition, in this embodiment, in SP reach effects A to C, a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even numbers (for example, 666, etc.) is temporarily stopped and displayed, and variable display is started again in the re-lottery variation part. After that, in the re-lottery result part, a determined decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even-numbered symbols or a determined decorative pattern consisting of a combination of odd-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed. If a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination of even-numbered symbols is stopped and displayed in the re-lottery result part, it will be announced that it is a "jackpot A" that will be controlled by time-saving state A after the end of the jackpot game state, and the odd-numbered symbol will be When a fixed decorative pattern consisting of a combination is stopped and displayed (symbol promotion), it is announced that it is a "jackpot B" which is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot game state.

Further, in the post-effect performance A of the SP ready-to-reach performance A, since the character does not appear in the SP ready-to-reach performance A, the character does not appear in the post-performance performance A as well. In addition, in the post-performance A of the SP ready-to-reach productions B and C, the character appears in the SP ready-to-reach production B and C, but the character does not appear in the post-production A. By doing this, even when SP ready-to-reach performance A in which no character appears, post-effect performance A is performed in a manner in which no character appears, so that the performance effect can be enhanced.

"Post-effect B" is controlled to a jackpot gaming state in SP reach effects D and E when the variable display result becomes a jackpot in the game state A, probability variable state, and time saving state B (high base state). It is executed after the notification is made. Specifically, in SP reach performances D and E, after the confirmed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R, and the jackpot confirmed notification is performed, The expected pitch addition part (ta5 to ta6) where the expected number of pitches will be added and displayed as the friendly characters that appeared in SP reach productions D and E attack the enemy characters, and the part where the friendly characters attack the enemy characters. After the final blow is given, the expected number of pitches to be delivered is stopped and displayed, and the planned number of pitches to be delivered is notified, and then the confirmed decorative symbols that become the jackpot combination are stopped and displayed, and the variable display ends ( ta6 to ta7). Note that the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-effect B is longer than the execution period of the post-effect A, which is 15 seconds.

Furthermore, as shown in FIGS. 13-3 and 13-4, the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach α is 45 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach β is 45 seconds. is 80 seconds, and the variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A) in SP reach γ is 40 seconds. In other words, the variable display part periods are shorter in the order of SP reach β, SP reach α, and SP reach γ (variable display part period ta0 to ta5 (ta5A); SP reach β>SP reach α>SP reach γ) .

In addition, the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display to reaching N reach is different in SP reach α, β, and γ, and from the start of variable display to N reach in SP reach γ. The period (ta0 to ta1) is shorter than the period (ta0 to ta1) from the start of variable display in SP reaches α and β until reaching N reach (ta0 to ta1; SP reach γ<SP reach α, β).

In addition, the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in SP reach α, β, and γ is different, and the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in SP reach γ is different from the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the N reach effect in SP reach α, β. It is shorter than the execution period (ta1 to ta2) of the reach effect (ta1 to ta2; SP reach γ<SP reach α, β).

In addition, the execution periods (ta2 to ta5) of SP reach effects A to E in SP reach α, β, and γ are different, and SP reach γ (SP reach effects D and E) and SP reach α (SP reach effect A) are different. , SP reach β (SP reach effects B, C) are longer in the order {ta2 to ta5; SP reach γ (SP reach effects D, E) < SP reach α (SP reach effects A) < SP reach β (SP Reach performance B, C)}.

In addition, the variable display part period (40 seconds) of SP reach γ is shorter than the variable display part period (45 seconds) of SP reach α and the variable display part period (80 seconds) of SP reach β (variable display period ; SP Reach β > SP Reach α > SP Reach γ), SP Reach γ (SP Reach Performance D, E) After the deciding performance is completed, the predetermined jackpot combination is displayed in each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. During the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of post-effect B until the finalized decorative pattern is stopped and displayed, the final effect is performed in SP reach α (SP reach effect A) and SP reach β (SP reach effect B, C). It is longer than the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of the post-performance A from the end until the fixed decorative symbols that are a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (ta5 to ta7). ta7; SP reach γ (15 seconds) > SP reach α, β (10 seconds)).

In addition, the execution period (ta3 to ta5) of the "decisive performance" in SP reach performances A to E is common to SP reach performances A to E (ta3 to ta5; SP reach performance A = SP reach performance B = SP reach performance C = SP reach performance D = SP reach performance E). Therefore, control data for the movable body 32, movable body LED 208, etc. in the SP reach performances A to E can be shared, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced. Furthermore, the execution period of the "win/fail button performance" in the "decision performance" and the execution period of the "movable object performance" are also common to the SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, during the execution period of “post effects A and B” in SP reach α, β, and γ, SP reach effect A is From the timing ta5 when the confirmed decorative symbols that result in a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the jackpot confirmation notification of ~E, the determined decorative symbols that result in a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (the variable display ends) ) By setting the timing up to ta7 (ta5 to ta7), we have exemplified a form in which it is easier to recognize the timing at which the post-effects are executed, and it is possible to increase attention to the post-effects A and B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the "post effects A, B" may be performed during the symbol confirmation period or the jackpot fanfare period that starts after the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed. may be executable.

In addition, the variable display period of SP reach γ for high base is shorter than the variable display period of SP reach β for low base (ta0 to ta7: SP reach γ < SP reach β), and in SP reach γ The period (ta4 to ta7) from timing ta4 when the "production" ends to timing ta7 when the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed is the timing ta4 when the "movable body production" ends in SP reach β. It is longer than the period (ta4 to ta7) from ta4 to timing ta7 at which the fixed decorative symbols that form a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed (ta4 to ta7; SP reach γ>SP reach β). By doing this, in SP reach γ that is executed during a short variable display period, by lengthening the period after the end of the "movable body effect", the impression of the variable display is enhanced even if the variable display period is short. be able to.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect A" corresponding to each of SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (ta5-ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to each of SP reach effects D and E ( ta5 to ta7) are all common. By doing so, it is possible to easily reuse the control data for the post effects A and B, especially the character motion control data for the post effect B, so that manufacturing costs can be reduced.

In addition, the execution period (ta5 to ta7) of "post-effect A" corresponding to each of SP reach effects A to C is the same, and the execution period (ta5-ta7) of "post-effect B" corresponding to each of SP reach effects D and E ( While ta5 to ta7) are all common, the execution period (10 seconds) of "post-effect A" and the execution period (15 seconds) of "post-effect B" are different, so that SP reach effects A to C each are different. By making the performance period of post-performance A that corresponds to , it is possible to prevent the post effects A and B from becoming monotonous, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the post effects.

(Operation mode of SP reach effects A to E and post-effects A and B)
Next, the operating modes of SP reach performances A to E and post-effects A and B when the variable display result is a jackpot will be explained based on FIG. 13-6. In Figure 13-6, (A) is a diagram showing the display mode of the character in SP reach effects A to E, (B) is a diagram showing the LED lighting pattern in SP reach effects A to E, and (C) is a figure showing the SP reach effect. 7 is a diagram showing output patterns of BGM and sound effects in productions A to E. FIG.

As shown in Figure 13-6 (A), to explain the display mode of characters in SP reach effects A to E, during the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown and battle showdown in the SP reach effect, SP reach effect A In this case, no characters are displayed, in SP reach effect B, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in SP reach effect C, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed. In SP reach effect D, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in SP reach effect E, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 are displayed. In this way, the SP ready-to-win performance A is a performance in which no characters are displayed, whereas the SP ready-to-reach performances BE are performances in which characters are displayed.

In addition, during the execution period of the "win/fail button performance" of the deciding performance in the SP reach performance, characters are not displayed in any of the SP reach performances A to E, while in the execution period of the "movable body performance", in the SP reach performance A. , the character is not displayed, and in SP reach effect B, enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed, and in SP reach effect C, enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is not displayed. In the SP reach effect D, the enemy character X-1 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed, and in the SP reach effect E, the enemy character X-2 that was displayed in the battle showdown is displayed.

In addition, during the execution period (ta4 to ta5) of jackpot confirmation notification in SP reach effect, no character is displayed in SP reach effect A, and in SP reach effect B, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed. In SP reach effect C, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are displayed, and in SP reach effect D, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and SP reach effect is displayed. In E, friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In addition, in the re-lottery variation part (ta5-ta6) and the re-lottery result part (ta6-ta7) in the post-effect A that corresponds to the SP reach effects A to C, the character is not displayed in the SP reach effect A, and the SP In reach performance B, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are not displayed, and in SP reach performance C, ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 are not displayed.

In addition, in the planned ball addition part (ta5 to ta6) and the scheduled ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in post-effect B that correspond to SP reach effects D and E, in SP reach effect D, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 are displayed, and in SP reach effect E, ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 are displayed.

In this way, in SP reach production A, the character is not displayed in the bowling confrontation, so the character is not displayed in the movable body production or post production A, while in SP reach production B to E, the character is not displayed in the bowling confrontation, but in SP reach production B to E, the character is faced with an ally character in the battle confrontation. The enemy character is also displayed in the movable body effects and the post effects A and B.

In other words, in SP reach effect A, an image related to the bowling showdown (an image in which the characters are not displayed) is displayed in the movable object effect before the jackpot confirmation notification is made, and in SP reach effects B to E, a jackpot effect is displayed. In the movable object performance before the final notification is made, an image related to the battle confrontation (image of the enemy character who was facing off) is displayed, so SP reach effects A to E and the SP reach effect A are displayed. The relationship with the movable object performance executed during the performance period of ~E can be increased.

In addition, in SP reach effect A, in post effect A, an image related to SP reach effect A (image in which the character is hidden) is displayed, and in SP reach effects D and E, in post effect B, an image related to SP reach effect A is displayed. Since images related to productions D and E (images of friendly characters and enemy characters who were facing each other) are displayed, SP reach productions A, D, and E and the end of SP reach production A, D, and E are displayed. It is possible to increase the relevance between post effects A and B that will be executed later.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-6(B), the light emission patterns of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the SP reach effects A to E will be explained. Note that the numerical value in parentheses of each pattern (for example, B100, etc.) indicates the extended command explained in the feature section 069SG. Furthermore, the various light emitting patterns described below differ from other light emitting patterns in at least one of several elements such as emitted light color, brightness, lighting timing, lighting time, lights out timing, lights out time, and blinking cycle. Each light emitting pattern can be changed in various ways.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown or battle showdown in the SP reach effect, in the SP reach effect A, the light is lit in the light emission pattern LP1-1 based on the extended command B100, and in the SP reach effect B and C, the extended command It is lit in a light emission pattern LP1-2 based on B101, and in SP reach effects D and E, it is lit in a light emission pattern LP1-3 based on extended command B102.

Also, during the execution period of the "win/fail button effect" in the SP reach effect, one of the light emission patterns LP2-1 to LP2-4, which is common to the SP reach effects A to E, is lit based on extended commands B200 to B203. . Regarding the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4, one is selected based on the variable display results, and the expectation level increases in the order of light emission patterns LP2-2, LP2-3, and LP2-4. ing.

Furthermore, during the execution period of the "movable object effect" and the "jackpot notification" in the SP ready-to-reach effect, the lights are lit in the common light emission pattern LP3-1 in the SP ready-to-reach effects A to E based on the extended command B000. In addition, during the execution period of "missing notification" in the SP ready-to-reach presentation, SP ready-to-reach presentations A to E are lit in a common light emission pattern LP3-1 based on the extended command B300.

In addition, in the re-lottery variation part in post-effect A and the scheduled ball addition part (ta5 to ta6) in post-effect B, SP reach effects A to C are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-1 based on extended command BA00. In SP reach effects D and E, the lights are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-4 based on the extended command BB00.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in post-effect A and the scheduled ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in post-effect B, SP reach effects A to C are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-2 based on extended command BA01. , or it is lit with the common light emission pattern LP4-3 based on the extended command BA02, and in SP reach effects D and E, it is lit with the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB01, or it is lit with the common light emission pattern LP4-5 based on the extended command BB02. Based on this, the lights are lit in a common light emission pattern LP4-6.

The above-mentioned light emission patterns LP1-1 to LP2-1 to LP2-1 to 4, LP3-1 to 2, and LP4-1 to 6 are patterns that emit light in different light emission modes based on the light emission control data described later. The outline of each light emitting pattern will be explained below. Note that the words in parentheses corresponding to each light emission pattern indicate extended commands.

As shown in Figure 13-7 (A), in "Bowling/Battle", the light emitting pattern LP1-1 (B100) is a frame LED (frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 -9R12) and the LED on the board (movable LED 208) (see Figure 13-10).The light emission pattern LP1-2 (B101) is a pattern in which the reach title is introduced and the light emission is based on the color of the city background. The frame LED and the LED on the game board light up depending on the color, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up according to the actions (attack movements, etc.) of allies A-1/A-2 and enemy X-1/X-2. It is a pattern that emits light (see Figures 13-11 (A2) and (A3)), and the light-emitting pattern LP1-3 (B102) is a light-emitting color based on the color of the title introduction and wilderness background, and the frame LED and the game board surface. The upper LED emits light, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board also emit light according to the actions (attack movements, etc.) of allies A-1 and enemies X-1/X-2 (Figure 13-12). (See A4) and (A5)).

In the "win/fail button effect", the light emitting pattern LP2-1 (B200) is such that after the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light in accordance with "Keep pressing the button to accumulate power!", the frame LED lights up in the default white color. This is a pattern in which the LEDs on the game board surface emit light (see Figure 13-13), and the light-emitting pattern LP2-2 (B201) is for power-up (first stage) when the button is operated, and the frame LED and game board are colored blue. This is a pattern in which the LEDs on the board emit light (see Figure 13-13), and the light emitting pattern LP2-3 (B202) is for powering up (second stage) when the button is pressed, and is "green" to emit light from the frame LED and on the game board. The LED emits light (see Figure 13-13), and the light emitting pattern LP2-4 (B203) is for power up (third stage) when the button is pressed, and the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in "red". pattern (see Figure 13-13). The light emitting patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4 are light emitting patterns that gradually change from blue to green to red (MAX) depending on the player's long press operation (the amount of accumulation on the gauge display).

In "missing notification", the light emitting pattern LP3-1 (B300) is such that when a "missing" is notified in the result notification, the frame LED and the LED on the game board light up in low brightness white, and the display screen is the normal background. This is a pattern that continues even after returning to , until the next fluctuation starts (see Figures 13-16).

In "Movable object performance & jackpot notification", the light emitting pattern LP3-2 (B000) is used as the background during the movable object performance in the movable object performance (first period) when "Jackpot" is announced in the result notification. With matching colors, during the movable object performance (second period), the frame LED and the LED on the game board will emit light in accordance with the background image and effect display during the movable object performance, and the frame LED and the game board will be illuminated in rainbow colors during the jackpot notification. This is the pattern in which the LEDs on the board emit light (see Figures 13-14 and 13-15). Note that the extension command (B000) differs from other extension commands in that it uses operation control data (setting the number of steps, speed, and time related to motor drive), frame LEDs, and LEDs on the game board to operate the movable body 32. Both gradation control data and gradation control data for causing the light to emit light are set.

In addition, by making the extended command B000 a common extended command for movable body motion control and LED lighting control, there is no need to separate the extended command for movable body motion control and the extended command for LED lighting control. Control program capacity can be reduced. If the extended commands used for moving object production are separated into an extended command for controlling moving object movement and an extended command for controlling LED lighting, there is a risk that one of the extended commands will be missed due to a problem, but it will be made common. This makes it possible to suitably perform moving body effects.

In addition, by controlling the movement of the movable body and controlling the LED lighting with one extended command instead of separating the extended commands for "movable object performance" and "jackpot notification", there is no need to separate extended commands depending on the performance. Therefore, the program capacity for performance control can be reduced. If the extended commands were separate for "movable object performance" and "jackpot notification", there is a risk that one of the extended commands would be missed due to a problem, but by making them common, it would be preferable to use "movable object performance" and "jackpot notification". "Information" can be carried out.

In "re-lottery variation/scheduled ball addition", the light emitting pattern LP4-1 (BA00) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board emit light in accordance with the background moving image (round and round) (Figure 13-17 (See (F1)), the light emitting pattern LP4-4 (BB00) is a light emitting color based on the color of the space background, and the frame LED and the KED on the game board emit light, and also the action of ally A-1 (attack movement, etc.). ) is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light (see Figure 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball notification", the light-emitting pattern LP4-2 (BA01) causes the frame LED and the LED on the game board to emit light when an even-numbered symbol combination (for example, 666, etc.) is stopped and displayed. (See Figure 13-17 (F2)), and the light emitting pattern LP4-3 (BA02) has a brightness higher than that of the light emitting pattern LP4-2 when a combination of odd symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed. This is a pattern in which the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light at a higher pitch and a faster gradation cycle (see Figure 13-17 (F3)), and the light emission pattern LP4-5 (BB01) is for the scheduled ball notification "750". , the frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light in accordance with the display of "750", and until "750" is displayed, the same gradation control data as "1500" is used (Figure 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), the light emission pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is for the scheduled ball notification "1500", and when "750" is displayed in accordance with the display of "1500", the light emission pattern LP4-6 (BB02) is The frame LED and the LED on the game board surface emit light with higher brightness and faster gradation cycle, and the same gradation control data as ``750'' is used until ``1500'' is displayed (Figure 13-19). (See G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, during the execution of SP reach performances A to E, it is possible to perform jackpot confirmation notification as a later period performance after the movable body performance, and in the jackpot confirmation notification, it is possible to perform jackpot confirmation notification depending on the type of SP reach performance A to E. First, the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, and the movable body LED 208 have the same light emission pattern (for example, light emission pattern LP3-2), so that regardless of the type of SP reach effect A to E, a common light emission pattern is used. Since the jackpot confirmation notification is executed, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

Incidentally, the light emission pattern may be different depending on the type of SP reach effects A to E. For example, the lighting pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach effect A is set to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow light emission) shown in Figure 13-21, and the light emission pattern LP3-1 corresponding to the jackpot confirmation notification of SP reach effects B and C is changed to The corresponding light emission pattern LP3-2 is the rainbow-colored blinking pattern (flash rainbow light emission) shown in FIG. The rainbow-colored blinking pattern shown in FIG. 22 (flash rainbow light emission) may change to the rainbow-colored lighting pattern (smooth rainbow light emission) shown in FIGS. 13-21.

Furthermore, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball addition part of the post effect B is the same for SP reach effect D and SP reach effect E (light emission pattern LP4-4). As a result, the light emitting pattern can also be shared, so that manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

In addition, the light emission pattern (light emission pattern LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 in the scheduled ball notification part of the post-reach effect B corresponding to SP reach effect D and SP reach effect E are common, while the light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-2, LP4-3) of the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 of post effect A corresponding to SP reach effect A, and SP reach effect D. The light emitting patterns (light emitting patterns LP4-5, LP4-6) of the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 in the post effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E are different, which further reduces manufacturing costs. By executing the post performance A with a different light emission pattern, it is possible to improve the performance effect of the post performance.

In the present embodiment, the operation can be performed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed, or at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation validity period ends. Although the embodiment has been exemplified in which the light emission pattern during the execution period of the movable body effect is the common light emission pattern LP3-2 even if the "movable body effect" is executed at the timing when it has ended, the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light in different light emission patterns depending on the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed. You can also do this. By doing so, it becomes possible to change the light emission mode by changing the timing of the player's operation, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-6 (B), regarding the LED light emission pattern in the SP reach effect, the light emission pattern LP1-2 is commonly used in the SP reach effect B and C. In SP Reach C, use the light emitting pattern LP1-2-1 (B200: city background color + image color of enemy character By using color + image color of enemy character While suppressing development costs, dedicated brightness data may be used for the parts related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2 to create a difference in appearance at a minimum cost.

Light-emitting pattern LP1-3 is commonly used in SP reach effects D and E, but for example, in SP reach effect D, light-emitting pattern LP1-3-1 (B300: Wilderness background color + image color of enemy character X-1) , emitting light according to the action), and in SP Reach E, by using the emitting pattern LP1-3-2 (B300: Wilderness background color + image color of enemy character X-2, emitting light according to the action), The brightness data of a part of the LED light emission pattern (city background color part) of SP Reach Effects D and E is commonly used to reduce development costs, while the parts related to enemy characters X-1 and X-2 have their own brightness. Data may also be used to create differences in presentation with minimal cost.

Also, one of the SP reach effects B and C in the low base state and the SP reach effects D and E in the high base state (for example, SP reach effects D and E) is set to a common light emission pattern, and the other (for example, SP reach effect The reach effects B and C) may have different light emission patterns. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the manufacturing cost on the one hand, while suitably showing the difference in performance on the other hand.

(gradation control data)
Here, the control data for realizing the light emission effect will be briefly explained. FIG. 13-21 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a lighting pattern of smooth rainbow light emission. FIG. 13-22 is a diagram for explaining a data table for lighting the frame LED in a flash rainbow lighting pattern.

As shown in Figure 13-21, various brightness data corresponding to seven colors (rainbow colors) are sparsely specified at 40 msec intervals as "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED. . The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the data table for smooth rainbow light emission, thereby lighting up the frame lamp smoothly in rainbow colors.

In addition, as shown in Figure 13-22, as the "RGB" data output to each LED included in the frame LED, the brightness data corresponding to turning off for 20 msec corresponds to seven colors (rainbow colors) at 30 msec intervals. It is specified between various brightness data. The performance control CPU 120 performs lamp control based on the flash rainbow light emission data table, thereby causing the frame lamp to intensely light up in rainbow colors.

The ROM 121 of the performance control board 12 stores a light emission control table used by the performance control CPU 120 to control the light emission of each LED. The light emission control table includes, for example, light emission patterns (light emission patterns LP1-1 to 2, LP2-1, LP3-1 to 3, LP4-1 to 4, etc.), driver IDs, output terminal numbers, and electrical components. and light emission control generation data are defined in association with each other.

For example, the driver ID associated with the light emitting pattern stores an ID as identification information for identifying the light emitter driver, the output terminal number stores the number of the light emitter driver output terminal, and the electric component , electric components (for example, frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12, movable LED 208, etc.) corresponding to the light emitter driver and the output terminal number are stored, and the light emission control generation data includes the light emitter driver Data for controlling a serial-to-parallel conversion circuit applied to a computer, which is used to generate light emission control data based on a control data format, is stored.

Each light emission control generation data includes, for example, a data name, a format type, an address, a data transmission cycle, a unit light emission time, a light emission control cycle, and format data. For example, the data name stores the data name of the format generation data corresponding to the light emission pattern of the light emission control table, and the format type stores the basic format (EX=0) and extended format (EX=1). Identification information (``basic'' or ``extended'') indicating which format is to be applied is stored, and an address to be set in the serial-parallel conversion circuit applied to the light emitter driver is stored in the address field, and data transmission The cycle stores the cycle of transmitting light emission control data from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver of the lamp board 14, and the unit light emission time stores the unit time for causing the LED 9 corresponding to the light emitter driver to emit light. be remembered. In this embodiment, the data transmission cycle will be described as 10 ms (milliseconds).

In the light emission control period, a time that is a control unit for one period of light emission (hereinafter, this period is referred to as a "light emission control period") is stored. This light emission control cycle differs depending on the type of light emission. Specifically, if the light emission type is "continuous" or "flashing", a time such as "100ms" can be set, and if the light emission type is "switching" (special light color due to a change in multiple colors). In the case of rainbow-colored light emission, etc., a time such as "1800 ms" can be set.

The formatting data stores time-series Q data to be included in the light emission control data by applying the format of the format type. Specifically, in the formatting data, a light emission order and Q data corresponding to RGB values corresponding to the light emission order are defined in association with each other.

In this embodiment, the explanation will be given assuming that the light emission of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 is controlled by Q data (color hexadecimal numbers, RGB color values) expressed in hexadecimal numbers. In color hexadecimal numbers, "16 x 16 = 256 gradations" is expressed by expressing each of RGB with 2 digits in total of 6 digits in hexadecimal numbers (0 to F), but in this specification, 2 digits each of RGB The illustrations and explanations will be made assuming that the numerical values are the same value, and that each of RGB is abbreviated to one digit each, to a total of three digits. Further, for the sake of simplicity, the notation "0x" representing a hexadecimal number is omitted in the illustrations and descriptions.

In addition, the Q data includes Q data for group 1, Q data for group 2, and Q data for group 2 as Q data to be output to the serial-parallel conversion circuit that constitutes the light emitter driver corresponding to the address. Q data targeting 3 is included. The Q data corresponding to each group stores RGB values to be output from the four output terminals Q included in the group.

I will explain in detail. For example, if the data transmission cycle is "10ms", it is determined that data is transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the light emitter driver every 10ms. Furthermore, if the unit light emitting time is "100 ms", it is determined that the target LED is caused to emit light in the unit light emitting time of 100 ms. Furthermore, if the light emission control cycle is "100ms", the light emission type of the light emission pattern is "continuous", and in order to perform continuous light emission of a specific color, the same time as the unit light emission time is determined as the light emission control cycle. There is.

For example, in the formatting data, the light emission order is determined from "1" to "N", and for each light emission order "1" to "N", the Q data (RGB value) of each group is determined. If "0, 0, F" is defined as "0, 0, F", the R value and G value of the Q data are set to "0" and the B value is set to "F" for all light emission orders. Continuous blue light emission is achieved.

Next, control data for controlling the gradation of the LED and realizing light emission by mixed colors will be explained. The Q data (RGB values) in the gradation control data described here can be applied as is to the Q data of the formatting data included in the above-mentioned light emission control generation data.

Figure 13-22 shows gradation control data that is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow-colored blinking (corresponding to flash rainbow emission, light emission pattern LP3-2, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated. Note that the gradation control data for the frame LEDs 9R1 to 9R12 is omitted from illustration because it corresponds to the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. In this gradation control data, the left column shows the switching unit light emitting time Δtn, and the right column shows each group (group 1 (9L1), group 2 (9L2), group 3 (9L3), group 4 ( Q data (RGB values) corresponding to 9L4), . . . ) is expressed in hexadecimal.

In addition, in the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 0'', the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 are turned off.

In addition, in the light emission order 1 of the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-22, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 30 ms, the Q data (RGB values) of groups 1 and 2 are "0, 4, Q data (RGB values) of group 4 is "0, C, F", Q data (RGB values) of group 5 is "0, F, D". ”, Group 6 Q data (RGB value) is “0, F, 9”, Group 7 Q data (RGB value) is “0, F, 5”, Group 8 Q data (RGB value) is “0” , F, 1'', the Q data (RGB value) of group 9 is ``2, F, 0'', the Q data (RGB value) of group 10 is ``6, F, 0'', the Q data (RGB value) of group 11 is ) is "A, F, 0" and the Q data (RGB value) of group 12 is "F, F, 0", so that frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 each have different emitting colors (different from the emitting color of emitting order 3). ).

In this way, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to sequentially switch the luminescent color of the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 in a plurality of colors with a short switching unit light emission time Δts, and controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to turn off in between, it is possible to It can be visually recognized as if it were flashing in rainbow colors. Note that the intervening mode is not limited to turning off the light, but may also be, for example, a white color that does not constitute a rainbow color. When emitting white light, "1, RGB values with low brightness such as "1, 1" may be set.

Figure 13-21 shows gradation control data that is control data for performing gradation control to achieve rainbow-colored lighting (corresponding to smooth rainbow emission, light emission pattern LP3-1, etc.) in frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. An example is illustrated.

The gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 differs from the gradation control data shown in FIG. 13-21 in that there is no interposed control for turning off the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12. Therefore, it can be visually perceived by humans as if it were lit in rainbow colors. In the light emission order 1 of the gradation control data, the switching unit light emission time Δtn is 40 ms, and light emission of the same color as the light emission order 2 of the gradation control data is realized. In addition, with the gradation control data, by controlling the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 to sequentially switch between multiple colors in a short switching unit light emitting time Δts, the lights are illuminated in rainbow colors to the human eye. It can be visually recognized as if it were there.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-6(C), the output patterns of BGM and sound effects in SP reach performances A to E will be explained. In addition, the various sound patterns described below are different from other sound patterns in at least one of multiple elements such as volume, sound quality, rhythm, tempo, and music, and each sound pattern can be modified in various ways. It is possible.

During the execution period (ta2 to ta3) of the bowling showdown and battle showdown in the SP reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach performance A, and in the sound pattern BP1-1 in the SP reach performance B. BGM and sound effects are output in 2, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-3 in SP reach effect C, and BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-4 in SP reach effect D. In SP reach effect E, BGM and sound effects are output in sound patterns BP1-5.

Further, during the execution period of the "win/fail button performance" in the SP ready-to-win performance, common sound patterns BP2-1 to BP2-4 are output in the SP ready-to-reach performances A to E. Regarding the sound patterns BP2-2 to BP2-4, one is selected based on the variable display result, and the expectation level increases in the order of sound patterns BP2-2, BP2-3, and BP2-4. ing.

In addition, during the execution period of the "movable body performance" and "jackpot notification" in the SP reach performance, BGM and sound effects are output in the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 in the SP reach performance A to E. In addition, during the execution period of the "missing notification" in the SP reach performance, the SP reach performances A to E are lit with common sound patterns BP3-1 to BP3-3.

In addition, in the re-lottery variation part in post-production A and the scheduled ball addition part (ta5 to ta6) in post-production B, SP reach productions A to C are output with sound pattern BP4-1, and SP reach production D, In E, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-4.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part in post performance A and the scheduled ball notification part (ta6 to ta7) in post performance B, in SP reach performances A to C, sound pattern BP4-2 or sound pattern BP4-3 BGM and sound effects are output, and in SP reach effects D and E, BGM and sound effects are output in sound pattern BP4-5 or sound pattern BP4-6.

Note that the sound patterns BP1-1 to 4, BP2-1 to 4, BP0-1 to 3, BP3-1 to 3, and BP4-1 to 4 each output sound in a different manner based on the sound control data. The outline of each sound pattern will be explained below.

As shown in Figure 13-7 (B), in "Bowling/Battle", sound pattern BP1-1 is the voice when introducing the reach title for SP reach effect A, the voice of "Knock down the pin!", and the voice of SP reach This is the pattern in which BGM of production A is output (see Figure 13-10), and sound pattern BP1-2 is the voice when introducing the reach title for SP reach production B, the voice of "Fight!", and the voice of "Settle next". This is the pattern in which the voice of ally A-1 saying "It's!", the BGM of SP reach effect B, and the battle sound effect are output (see Figure 13-11 (A2)), and the sound pattern BP1-3 is the sound pattern of SP reach effect C. This is the pattern in which the voice when the reach title is introduced, the voice of "Fight!", the voice of ally A-2 saying "It's decided next time!", the BGM of SP reach effect C, and the battle sound effects are output (Fig. 13-11 (A3)), sound pattern BP1-4 is the voice when the reach title is introduced for SP reach effect D, the voice of "Fight!", and the voice of ally A-1 of "It's settled next!" , is the pattern in which the BGM and battle sound effects of SP reach effect D are output (see Figure 13-12 (A4)), and sound pattern BP1-5 is the voice when introducing the reach title for SP reach effect E, `` Fight!'' voice, ally A-1's voice saying ``It's settled next time!'', SP Reach Effect E BGM, and battle sound effects are output (see Figure 13-12 (A5)).

In the "true/fail button performance", sound pattern BP2-1 is a pattern in which a voice saying "keep pressing the button to accumulate power" and a sound effect with power level 0 are output (see Figure 13-13), Sound pattern BP2-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 1 is output, sound pattern BP2-3 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 2 is output, and sound pattern BP2-4 is a pattern in which a sound effect of power level 2 is output. This is a pattern in which a voice at level 3 (MAX) and a sound effect at power level 3 (MAX) are output.

In the "missing notification", sound pattern BP3-1 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output (see Figure 13-16 (H1)), and sound pattern BP3-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output (refer to Figure 13-16 (H1)), and sound pattern BP3-2 is a pattern in which a sound effect of failure is output ) voice, battle defeat BGM is output (see Figure 13-16 (H2) (H4) (H5)), and sound pattern BP3-3 is the defeat (regrettable) voice of ally A-2, battle defeat BGM is output. This is the pattern in which BGM of defeat is output (see Figure 13-16 (H3)).

In "Movable body performance & jackpot notification", sound pattern BP0-1 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the movable body performance, the sound effect of success, and the BGM of success are output (see Figure 13-15 (E1)), Sound pattern BP0-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the moving body production, the victory voice of ally A-1, and the BGM of battle victory are output (see Figure 13-15 (E2) (E4) (E5)), The sound pattern BP0-3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the moving body performance, the victory voice of ally A-2, and the BGM of the battle victory are output (see FIG. 13-15 (E3)).

In "re-lottery variation/scheduled ball addition", sound pattern BP4-1 is a pattern in which the BGM of re-lottery variation is output (see Figure 13-17 (F1)), and sound pattern BP4-4 is a pattern in which the BGM of re-lottery variation is output. This is a pattern in which the BGM for adding up pitches, the sound effect (attack) for adding up expected pitches, the voice for teammate A-1's adding up expected pitches, and the voice "Push!" are output (see FIG. 13-18).

In the "re-lottery result/scheduled ball notification", sound pattern BP4-2 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the even numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result are output (Figure 13-17 (F2), sound pattern BP4 -3 is a pattern in which the sound effect of the odd numbered symbols and the BGM of the re-lottery result is output (see Figure 13-17 (F3)), and the sound pattern BP4-5 is the BGM of the scheduled ball notification, 750. This is a pattern in which sound effects are output (see Figure 13-19 (G1-3) to (G3)), and sound pattern BP4-6 is the BGM of scheduled pitch notification, 1500 sound effects, and MAX voice output. (See Figures 13-19 (G1-4) to (G4)).

In addition, the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable body performance is the same for any type of SP reach performance A to E (sound pattern BP0-1 to BP0-3), thereby further reducing manufacturing costs. I can do it.

In the present embodiment, the operation can be performed at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed, or at any timing when the operation of the push button 31B is not detected and the operation validity period ends. Although the example has been exemplified in which the sound pattern during the execution period of the movable object performance is the common sound pattern BP2-1 to BP2-4 even when the "movable object performance" is executed at the timing when it ends, the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the sound effects may be output in different sound patterns depending on the timing at which the operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period during which the "pass/fail button effect" is executed. By doing so, the sound effects can be changed depending on the timing of the player's operations, thereby improving the interest in the game.

(Flow of SP reach performance A to E)
Next, the flow of SP reach effects A to E will be explained based on FIG. 13-8. FIG. 13-8 is a tree diagram showing the flow of SP reach effects A to E.

As shown in Figure 13-8, in SP reach α, β, and γ, when the SP reach effect is developed from the N reach effect, in the case of SP reach effect A, bowling as shown in (A1) In the case of SP reach effect B, the start image of battle A between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in (A2), and in the case of SP reach effect C. In the case of SP reach effect D, the starting image of the battle A between ally character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A3), and in the case of SP reach effect D, ally character A- 1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect E, the start image of battle B between ally character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in (A5). The image is displayed. In this way, the performance mode of the first half in SP ready-to-reach performances A to E is different for each of SP ready-to-reach performances A to E.

Next, a win/fail button performance is started at a predetermined timing in the final stage of the SP reach performance. Specifically, as shown in (B1), after the first operation promotion effect that promotes the long-press operation of the push button 31B is started, a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the first operation promotion effect. At this timing, as shown in (B2), a second operation promotion effect is started to promote the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B. In this way, the performance mode of the win/fail button performance is common to the SP reach performances A to E.

Next, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the timing when a release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operational validity period of the win/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the valid operation period has elapsed without being executed, an image showing the last throw in bowling or the last blow in battle is displayed, as shown in (C).

Next, in the case of SP reach performance A, as shown in (D1), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position, and an image indicating that the ball has hit the pin is displayed, and SP reach performance B In this case, as shown in (D2), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the effect position, and an image indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect C, , as shown in (D3), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the production position, and an image indicating that enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed, and in the case of SP reach production D, (D4 ), the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the production position, and an image indicating that enemy character X-1 has been attacked is displayed, and in the case of SP reach production E, as shown in (D5). As shown, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the presentation position, and an image showing that the enemy character X-2 has been attacked is displayed. In this way, the performance mode of the movable body performance is different between the SP ready-to-reach performances A, the SP ready-to-reach performances B and D, and the SP ready-to-reach performances C and E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect A, a result image indicating that the pin has fallen is displayed, as shown in (E1), and in the case of SP reach effect B, as shown in (E2), a result image is displayed in battle A. A result image indicating victory is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect C, a result image indicating victory in battle A is displayed, as shown in (E3), and in the case of SP reach effect D, ( As shown in E4), a result image showing that Battle B has been won is displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect E, a result image that shows that Battle A has been won is displayed as shown in (E5). Ru. It should be noted that the performance mode of the result notification is different for each of the SP reach performances A to E.

Next, in the case of SP reach effects A to C, post effect A is started, and in the re-lottery variation part shown in (F1), an image in which the decorative symbols that were temporarily stopped and displayed in (E1 to E3) are displayed again in a variable manner is displayed. After being displayed, in the re-lottery result parts shown in (F2) and (F3), the determined decorative symbols that become a predetermined jackpot combination are stopped and displayed.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect D, post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled ball addition part shown in (G1), ally character A-1 displayed in (A4) attacks enemy character X-1. An image in which the expected pitches are added is displayed, and in the case of SP reach performance E, post-effect B is started, and in the scheduled pitch addition part shown in (G2), the teammate displayed in (A5) An image in which the character A-1 attacks the enemy character X-2 and the expected pitches are added is displayed. Next, in the case of SP reach effects D and E, the expected number of pitches to be pitched is displayed in the scheduled pitch notification parts shown in (G3) and (G4).

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a failure, the timing at which the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation validity period of the win/fail button effect, or the release operation of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected. At the timing when the effective period of operation has passed without being executed, the images shown in (C) (D1 to D5) are not displayed, and in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in (H1), the image shown in (C) (D1 to D5) is not displayed, indicating that the strike has failed. In the case of SP reach effect B, a result image indicating that battle A has been defeated is displayed, as shown in (H2), and in the case of SP reach effect C, as shown in (H3). As shown in FIG. In the case of E, as shown in (H5), a result image indicating that Battle A has been defeated is displayed. It should be noted that the presentation mode of the result notification differs between SP ready-to-win presentations A, SP ready-to-win presentations B and D, and SP ready-to-reach presentations C and E.

Next, in the case of SP ready-to-reach performances A to E, as shown in (I1), the determined decorative symbols of predetermined ready-to-reach combinations (also referred to as "missing the reach") that are not jackpot combinations are stopped and displayed.

(Example of SP reach performance A to E)
Next, examples of performance operations of SP ready-to-reach performances A to E executed by the performance control CPU 120 will be described based on FIGS. 13-9 to 13-20. FIG. 13-9 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation from the start of the variable display of SP reach α, β, and γ until it develops into the SP reach performance. FIG. 13-10 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of SP reach performance A. FIG. 13-11 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of SP reach effects B and C. FIG. 13-12 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of SP reach effects D and E. FIG. 13-13 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the win/fail button performance. FIGS. 13-14 are diagrams showing an example of the performance operation of the movable body performance. FIG. 13-15 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of jackpot notification of SP reach effects A to E. FIG. 13-16 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the loss notification of SP reach effects A to E. FIGS. 13-17 are diagrams illustrating an example of the effect operation of the post effect A. FIG. 13-18 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the post-performance B. FIG. 13-19 is a diagram showing an example of the performance operation of the post-performance B.

In the following explanation, performance operations that are commonly executed among SP reach effects A to E will be explained together, and different performance operations will be explained individually. Further, it is assumed that some of the numbers assigned to each frame (for example, A to I) correspond to the numbers assigned to the frames shown in FIG. 13-8.

As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N1), each decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R is determined based on the SP reach α, β, or γ being determined as a fluctuation pattern with the occurrence of a starting prize. The variable display of decorative patterns starts at .

In addition, in the following, the active display area 018SG013 corresponding to the active display area 069SG013 of the feature part 069SG displays the active display 018SG003 corresponding to the active display 069SG003, and the first pending display area corresponding to the first pending display area 069SG011. A hold display 018SG001 corresponding to a hold display 069SG001 is displayed in 018SG011, and a hold display 018SG002 corresponding to a hold display 069SG002 is displayed in a second hold display area 018SG012 corresponding to a second hold display area 069SG012. do.

After the variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N2), when the variable display mode becomes the ready-to-reach mode, the normal ready-to-reach effect as the variable display effect of the decorative symbol is started. As shown in FIG. 13-9 (N3), what are the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5C and the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R at the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the ready-to-reach mode has been reached? After the decorative symbols of different numbers are temporarily stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. 13-9 (N4), the variable display of the decorative symbol display area 5C is resumed, which develops into SP reach effect.

As shown in Figure 13-10 (A1), when the SP reach effect develops, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the top right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect A reach title image 018SG01A indicating that A is to be started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01A includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP reach effect (for example, SP reach effect A), an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expected level of jackpot, and a content display indicating bowling. 018SG102.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-1), an image 018SG103 is displayed showing that the pins are lined up on the bowling lane and a challenge is started, and as shown in FIG. 13-10 (A1-2). As shown in Figure 13-10 (A1-3), after the image 018SG104 in which the ball hits a pin and is knocked over is displayed, an image with one pin remaining in the bowling lane and a message saying "One pin remaining" is displayed. An image 018SG105 is displayed that has the characters "!" and indicates that the next throw will be the last throw. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP1-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-1. BGM is output.

As shown in Figure 13-11 (A2), when the SP reach effect B develops, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the top right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect A reach title image 018SG01B indicating that B is to be started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01B includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP reach effect (for example, SP reach effect B), an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expected level of jackpot, and an ally character A-1. It has a content display 018SG102 indicating. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices and sounds are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-2. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-1), a background image 018SG201 representing the city, a character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing the enemy character X-1 are provided. Then, an image 018SG202 indicating that a confrontation has started is displayed, and an image 018SG203 showing a battle between friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A2-3), an image 018SG204 is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1, and indicates that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in Figure 13-11 (A3), when the SP reach effect C develops, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the top right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect A reach title image 018SG01C indicating that C is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01C includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP reach effect (for example, SP reach effect C), an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expected level of jackpot, and an ally character A-2. It has a content display 018SG102 indicating. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP1-2, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-3. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-1), a background image 018SG201 representing the city, a character image 018SGA2 representing the ally character A-2, and a character image 018SGX2 representing the enemy character X-2 are provided. Then, an image 018SG212 indicating that a confrontation has started is displayed, and an image 018SG213 showing a battle between friendly character A-2 and enemy character X-2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 13-11 (A3-3), an image 018SG214 is displayed, which has a character image 018SGA2 and a character image 018SGX2, and indicates that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in Figure 13-12 (A4), when the SP reach effect develops, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the top right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect A reach title image 018SG01D indicating that D is started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01D includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP reach effect (for example, SP reach effect D), an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the degree of jackpot expectation, and an ally character A-1. It has a content display 018SG102 indicating. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-4. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-1), a background image 018SG221 representing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing an ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX1 representing an enemy character X-1 are provided. Then, an image 018SG222 indicating that a confrontation has started is displayed, and an image 018SG223 showing a battle between friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-2). After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A4-3), an image 018SG224 is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX1, and indicates that the next blow will be the final blow.

As shown in Figure 13-12 (A5), when the SP reach effect develops, the decorative pattern displayed in the center of the display screen is displayed in a reduced size in the display area 5SR at the top right of the display screen, and the SP reach effect A reach title image 018SG01E indicating that E is to be started is displayed. The reach title image 018SG01E includes a title display 018SG100 indicating the type of SP reach effect (for example, SP reach effect E), an expectation level display 018SG101 (for example, the number of stars, etc.) indicating the expected level of jackpot, and an ally character A-1. It has a content display 018SG102 indicating. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP1-3, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP1-5. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-1), a background image 018SG221 representing a wilderness, a character image 018SGA1 representing an ally character A-1, and a character image 018SGX2 representing an enemy character X-2 are provided. Then, an image 018SG232 indicating that a confrontation has started is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-2), an image 018SG233 showing a battle between friendly character A-1 and enemy character X-2 is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 13-12 (A5-3), an image 018SG234 is displayed, which includes a character image 018SGA1 and a character image 018SGX2, and indicates that the next blow will be the final blow.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1), when the win/fail button effect is started, a button image 018SG241 imitating the push button 31B and a message such as "Keep pressing the button to accumulate power!" Operation promotion display 018SG242 is displayed, and an operation promotion effect that promotes a long-press operation of the push button 31B is started. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP2-1, and as a sound effect, voices are emitted from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP2-1. BGM is output.

Next, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-1), the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Start charging!", the gauge display 018SG243 representing the power level and the effect image 018SG244 are displayed, and the long press operation When detected, the display mode of the gauge display 018SG243 and the effect image 018SG244 changes. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission patterns LP2-2 to LP2-4, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L, Voice and BGM are output from 8R.

As shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), when a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 becomes MAX, and the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Power MAX!". Ru. Note that even if a long press operation is detected for a predetermined period of time, the gauge display 018SG243 may not be set to MAX according to the variable display result. Furthermore, the manner in which the power level changes may vary depending on the variable display result.

Then, when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the start of the win/fail button performance, the operation promotion display 018SG242 is switched to "Release!" as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1-3), and the player is prompted to push the button 31B is prompted to release the long press operation, and the gauge display 018SG243 is switched to a gauge indicating the remaining operation validity period. Furthermore, the performance operations shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3) are common to SP reach performances A to E.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13-13 (B1) to FIG. 13-13 (B1-2), in the win/fail button presentation, an example is shown in which an operation promotion display for accumulating power is executed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the operation promotion display may not be executed.

Then, when the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the operation valid period in the win/fail button presentation, or when the operation valid period has passed without detecting the release of the long press operation of the push button 31B, the variable If the display result is a jackpot, the movable object effect shown in FIGS. 13-14 is started.

During the first period from the start of the movable body performance until a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 to 3 seconds, etc.) has elapsed, the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position, as shown in FIG. 13-14(C). At the same time, an attack image 018SG250 showing the final throw or final blow is displayed. The attack image 018SG250 includes an object image 018SG250A that imitates the spherical operation part of the push button 31B, and an effect image 018SG250B that shows the object moving toward the back of the screen. In addition, as the movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the production position, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 are colored in a color matching the background based on the light emission pattern LP3-2 as a light emission effect. The light is turned on, sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound patterns BP0-1 to BP0-3 as a sound effect, and the push button 31B is vibrated by the vibration motor 61 as a vibration effect.

As mentioned above, in the first period of the movable body performance, a common aspect of the SP reach performance A to E is performed, but in the second period after the first period ends, as follows, Different types of performances are performed in SP reach performances A to E.

As shown in FIG. 13-14 (D1), in the case of SP reach effect A, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and an object image 018SG250A and an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact are displayed. , and an impact image 018SG251 of an object hitting something is displayed.

Note that in this embodiment, the impact image 018SG251 does not display the object (for example, a pin) that the object (ball) collided with, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the impact image 018SG251 An image showing bowling pins may be displayed in 018SG251.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2) and (D4), in the case of SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the performance position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX1 indicating the enemy character X1, and an impact image 018SG252 indicating that the attack has hit the enemy character X-1 is displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D3) and (D5), in the case of SP reach effect C and SP reach effect E, in the second period, the movable body 32 vibrates up and down at the effect position, and the object image 018SG250A, an effect image 018SG250B indicating an impact, and a character image 018SGX2 indicating the enemy character X2, and an impact image 018SG253 indicating that the attack has hit the enemy character X-2 is displayed.

Furthermore, in the second period of the movable body effects shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), common display effects, light emission effects, sound effects, and vibration effects are performed. Specifically, according to the vibration of the movable body 32, the effect image 018SG250B is displayed and hidden alternately (hidden when the movable body 32 moves upward, displayed when moved downward, etc.), and produces a light emission effect. Based on the light emitting pattern LP3-2, the movable body LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 basically match the background of the movable body and the effect image 018SG250B, and the orange and red colors from the movable body LED 208 to the frame LED 9L1 ~9L12, 9R1 ~ 9R12 in order of light emission pattern that flows outward, and when effect image 018SG250B is displayed, it emits light in a light emission pattern that flashes intensely in white, and as a sound effect, sound pattern BP0-1 3, predetermined sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the vibration motor 61 vibrates the push button 31B as a vibration effect. Note that in FIGS. 13-14 (D1) to (D5), display using a light guide plate display device, etc. may be performed.

In addition, in FIG. 13-14 (D2 to D5), the effect image 018SG250B displayed according to the vibration of the movable body 32 is a display color that is common or similar to the display color of the character images 018SGX1 and 018SGX2 that are displayed at the same time. Displayed in color (for example, similar colors). By doing so, the relationship between the character images 018SGX1, 018SGX2 representing the enemy characters and the effect image 018SG250B can be enhanced, so that the production effect of the movable body production can be enhanced.

Then, after the movable object effect is finished, a notification that a jackpot has been reached is announced as shown in FIG. 13-15. Specifically, in the case of SP reach effect A, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E1), an image 018SG261 showing a fallen bowling pin, a text display 018SG262 showing "Success!", and an effect image 018SG263 are displayed. A result image 018SG260A indicating that the bowling challenge was successful is displayed, and the movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position. Also, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L lights up based on the sound pattern BP0-1. , a victory voice and sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect B, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E2), the character image 018SGA1 indicating the ally character A-1, the character image 018SGX1Z indicating the enemy character X-1, and the message "Victory!" A result image 018SG260B is displayed indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L lights up based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , a victory voice and sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. Note that the character image 018SGX1Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden by a fade-out display. By displaying the character image 018SGX1Z in this manner, it is possible to suitably notify the end of the series of effects.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E3), the character image 018SGA2 indicating the ally character A-2, the character image 018SGX2 indicating the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" A result image 018SG260C is displayed indicating that the ally character A-2 has won the battle against the enemy character X-2, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. Also, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L lights up based on the sound pattern BP0-3. , a victory voice and sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends. Note that the character image 018SGX2Z is a special image in which the defeated enemy character X-2 is faded out and hidden. By displaying the character image 018SGX2Z in this manner, it is possible to suitably notify the end of the series of effects.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E4), the character image 018SGA1 indicating the ally character A-1, the character image 018SGX1 indicating the enemy character X-1, and "Victory!" A result image 018SG260D is displayed indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-1, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L lights up based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , a victory voice and sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E5), the character image 018SGA1 indicating the ally character A-1, the character image 018SGX2 indicating the enemy character X-2, and "Victory!" A result image 018SG260E is displayed indicating that the ally character A-1 has won the battle against the enemy character X-2, and the movable body 32 is in the production position. Move from to the origin position. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up with smooth rainbow light based on the light emission pattern LP3-2, and as a sound effect, the speaker 8L lights up based on the sound pattern BP0-2. , a victory voice and sound effect are output from 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E were displayed, the result images 018SG260A to 018SG260E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. 13-15 (E6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, A confirmed decorative pattern (for example, 666, etc.) that is a predetermined jackpot combination in 5R is temporarily stopped and displayed, and the word "Jackpot" is displayed to notify that the jackpot has been confirmed. executed.

On the other hand, when release of the long-press operation of the push button 31B is detected during the valid operation period in the success/fail button effects shown in FIGS. 13-13 (B1) to 13-13 (B1-3), or If the operation validity period has passed without detecting the cancellation of the long-press operation, and the variable display result is a failure, the movable object effect will not be executed, and as shown in Figure 13-16, the failure will be confirmed. A failure confirmation notification is executed.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H1), in the case of SP reach performance A, the movable body 32 remains at the origin position and does not move, and an image showing the bowling pins that remain without falling down is displayed. 018SG271 and a character display 018SG272 indicating "failure...", and a result image 018SG270A indicating that the bowling challenge has failed is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, the speaker lights up based on the sound pattern BP3-1. A sound effect of failure is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration production ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect B and SP reach effect D, as shown in FIGS. 13-16 (H2) (H4), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position and does not move, and the ally character , a character image 018SGX1 showing the enemy character A result image 018SG270B indicating that the match has been defeated is displayed. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, the speaker lights up based on the sound pattern BP3-2. A sound effect of failure is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration production ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect C, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H3), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position and does not move, and the character image 018SGA2 indicating the ally character A-2 and the enemy character A result that includes a character image 018SGX2 indicating character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 indicating "Defeat..." and indicating that ally character A-2 has been defeated in a battle showdown with enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270C is displayed. In addition, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, the speaker lights up based on the sound pattern BP3-3. A sound effect of failure is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration production ends.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H5), the movable body 32 remains at the origin position and does not move, and the character image 018SGA1 indicating the ally character A-1 and the enemy character A result that includes a character image 018SGX2 indicating character X-2 and a character display 018SG262 indicating "defeat..." and indicating that ally character A-1 has been defeated in a battle confrontation with enemy character X-2. Image 018SG270E is displayed. Furthermore, as a light effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up in white with low brightness based on the light emission pattern LP3-1, and as a sound effect, the speaker lights up based on the sound pattern BP3-2. A sound effect of failure is output from 8L and 8R, and the vibration production ends.

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E were displayed, the result images 018SG270A to 018SG270E are hidden, and as shown in FIG. 13-16 (H6), the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, In 5R, a confirmed decorative pattern (for example, 676, etc.) of a predetermined reach combination that is not a jackpot combination (also referred to as a "reach miss") is displayed in a stopped state, thereby executing a miss confirmation notification indicating that the miss has been confirmed. .

Next, when jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach effects A to C, post-effect effect A shown in FIG. 13-17 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmed decorative symbols (for example, 666, etc.) that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the screen shown in FIG. 13-17 In the re-lottery variation part shown in (F1), the re-variable display of decorative symbols is started in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12, 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP4-1, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-1. is output.

In the re-lottery result part shown in Figure 13-17 (F2), if the jackpot type is jackpot A (non-probable variable), a predetermined A combination of even numbers (for example, 666, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a jackpot combination, and the variable display ends. Furthermore, as a light emitting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emitting pattern LP4-2, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-2. is output.

In addition, in the re-lottery result part shown in Figure 13-17 (F3), if the jackpot type is jackpot B (probability variable), a predetermined jackpot will be announced when a predetermined time has elapsed after the start of the re-variable display. A combination of odd-numbered symbols (for example, 333, etc.) is stopped and displayed as a fixed decorative symbol to be a combination, and the variable display ends. Furthermore, as a light emitting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emitting pattern LP4-3, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-3. is output.

Next, when jackpot confirmation notification is executed in SP reach effects D and E, post-effect effect B shown in FIG. 13-18 is executed.

Specifically, in the jackpot confirmation notification, after the confirmed decorative symbols (for example, 666, etc.) that are a predetermined jackpot combination are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the screen shown in FIG. 13-18 In the expected ball addition part shown in (G1-1), the background image 018SG280 representing the universe, the character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1, and the expected ball number given in the jackpot game state displaying the expected number of balls. The expected pitch counter display 018SG281 representing the number of pitches is displayed, and the post performance B is started. Furthermore, as a light emitting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emitting pattern LP4-4, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-4. is output.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1), a character image 018SGA1 representing the ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX1 representing the enemy character X-1 are displayed, and the character image 018SGX1 representing the ally character An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled pitch count counter display 018SG281.

In addition, in the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G2), a character image 018SGA1 indicating the ally character A-1 and a character image 018SGX2 indicating the enemy character X-2 are displayed, and the ally character An image of character A-1 attacking enemy character It is added to the counter value displayed on the scheduled pitch count counter display 018SG281.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-18 (G1-2), when the counter value displayed on the expected pitch count counter display 018SG281 reaches a predetermined value (for example, "300"), the push button 31B is pressed. The pressed button image 018SG283, an operation promotion display 018SG284 such as "Press!!", and a gauge display 018SG285 indicating the remaining operation validity period are displayed, and an operation promotion effect that promotes a single press operation of the push button 31B is executed. Ru.

Next, in the case of SP reach effect D, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-3), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected or the pressing operation is detected before the predetermined operation validity period elapses At the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed without being detected, character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX1 are displayed, ally character A-1 attacks enemy character X-1, and the counter value of expected pitch counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. In addition, as a light emission effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emission pattern LP4-5, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-5. and sound effects are output.

On the other hand, in the case of SP reach effect E, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-4), the timing at which the pressing operation of the push button 31B is detected or the pressing operation is detected before the predetermined operation validity period has elapsed At the timing when the operation validity period has elapsed without being detected, character image 018SGA1 and character image 018SGX2 are displayed, ally character A-1 attacks enemy character X-2, and the counter value of expected pitch counter display 018SG281 is displayed. is displayed variably. Furthermore, as a light emitting effect, the movable LED 208 and frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 light up based on the light emitting pattern LP4-6, and as a sound effect, BGM is played from the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound pattern BP4-6. , sound effects, and voices are output.

Then, as shown in FIG. 13-19 (G1-5), a character image 018SGA1 and a special image 018SGXZ in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears and becomes a star after being blown away are displayed, and The expected number of pitched balls counter display 018SG281 is enlarged and displayed in the center of the display screen, and a predetermined counter value (for example, "750" which is the expected number of pitched balls that can be obtained in the case of "6R jackpot") is stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 13-19 (G3), in the case of jackpot B (6R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the expected pitch count counter display 018SG281 is not updated and is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

Also, as shown in Figure 13-19 (G4), in the case of jackpot C (10R jackpot), the counter value displayed on the expected pitch counter display 018SG281 is a predetermined counter value (for example, "1500" etc.) After being updated and displayed, the game is controlled to a jackpot gaming state.

(SP reach performance type determination table)
Next, in the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the production control process shown in FIG. In the determination process, the SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table used when determining the SP ready-to-win performance type will be explained. FIGS. 13-20 are diagrams in which (A) shows the SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table A, (B) shows the SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table B, and (C) shows the SP ready-to-win performance type fixed table C.

In the SP reach effect type determination process, for example, a random number (0 to 99) for determining the SP reach effect type is extracted, and one of the SP reach effect type determination tables A to C shown in FIG. 13-20 is used to determine the SP reach effect type. Decide the performance type.

In the SP reach performance type determination table, as shown in Figures 13-20 (A) to (C), "Jackpot C (10R)", "Jackpot B (6R)", "Jackpot A (6R)", " 13-20 (A) to (C), different determination values are assigned to each of the SP reach effect types.

When the variation pattern is SP reach α, the SP reach effect type determination table A shown in FIG. 13-20(A) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Jackpot B (6R)", 100 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PA-1". In the case of "Jackpot A (6R)", 100 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PA-1". In the case of "miss", 100 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PA-2".

When the variation pattern is SP reach β, SP reach effect type determination table B shown in FIG. 13-20(B) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Jackpot B (6R)", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". . In the case of "Jackpot A (6R)", 70 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PB-1" and 30 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PC-1". In the case of "miss", 70 determination values are assigned to "pattern PB-2" and 30 determination values are assigned to "pattern PC-2".

In other words, when the SP reach beta jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a low base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot B (6R)" which is more advantageous for the player than "jackpot A (6R)", the SP reach effect C is determined at a higher rate than SP reach effect B.

Further, when the variation pattern is SP reach γ, SP reach effect type determination table C shown in FIG. 13-20(C) is used. Specifically, in the case of "Jackpot C (10R)", 40 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PD-1" and 60 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PE-1". . In the case of "Jackpot B (6R)", 60 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PD-1" and 40 determination values are assigned to "Pattern PE-1". In the case of "miss", 60 determination values are assigned to "pattern PD-2" and 40 determination values are assigned to "pattern PE-2".

In other words, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in a high base state, when the jackpot type is "jackpot C (10R)" which is more advantageous for the player than "jackpot B (6R)", the SP reach effect E is determined at a higher rate than SP reach effect D.

(action/effect)
As explained above, the performance control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and uses the enemy character X-1 to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. It is possible to execute SP reach effect B) and a second specific effect (for example, SP reach effect A) that notifies whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled without displaying the enemy character. When a jackpot is announced in , it is possible to perform a "movable body performance" as a special performance during the execution period of the SP reach performance, and the movement of the movable body 32 during the execution period of the movable body performance in SP reach performance B. The character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with the effect image 018SG250B related to the character image 018SGX1, and during the execution period of the movable body effect in the SP reach effect A, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed while the effect image 018SG250B having the same aspect as the SP reach effect B is displayed. However, the light emission pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance is the same light emission pattern LP3- when the movable body performance is performed in SP reach performance B and when the movable body performance is performed in SP reach performance A. It is 2.

By doing this, the operation mode of the movable body 32 and the light emitting mode of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body production are the same between SP reach performance B in which the enemy character is displayed and SP reach performance A in which the enemy character is not displayed. This makes it possible to reduce the manufacturing cost by increasing the performance, and to improve the performance effect by increasing the relationship between the SP reach performance and the movable body performance depending on whether or not the enemy character is displayed during the execution period of the movable body performance.

More specifically, in SP reach performance B and SP reach performance A, which have different performance modes, regarding the movable body performance performed during the SP reach performance, the execution timing and the operation mode of the movable body 32 are the same, but the effect As for image 018SG250B, by setting the display mode to correspond to each SP ready-to-reach effect, it is possible to suppress the flow of SP ready-to-reach effects from being divided by the movable body effects.

In addition, in this embodiment, an example is given in which SP reach effect B is applied as the first specific effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can also be applied to any of SP reach effects C to E. It is possible.

In addition, the execution period of the movable body performance includes a first period and a second period after the first period, and the performance mode in the first period is common for SP reach performances B to E and SP reach performance A. On the other hand (the attack image 018SG250 in Figure 13-14 (C) is the same), the performance mode in the second period is different between SP reach effects B to E and SP reach effect A (see Figure 13-14 (D1)). The image shown is different from the image shown in FIGS. 13-14 (D2 to D5). By doing this, by making the production mode the same until the first period, we can further reduce manufacturing costs, and until the first period, SP reach effects B to E and SP reach effect A can be used. Since it becomes unclear which one is the one, the entertainment of the SP reach performance can be improved.

In addition, as SP reach effect, it is possible to execute SP reach effect E that displays enemy X-2 different from enemy character and when SP reach effect E is executed. In other words, when the variable display result is a jackpot in the low base state, the determination ratio of the SP reach β variation pattern that can execute SP reach effect B is 300/997, and when the variable display result is a jackpot in the high base state The determination ratio of SP reach γ variation patterns that can execute SP reach effect E is 800/997. In the SP reach effect C, the effect image 018SG250B common to the SP reach effect B according to the movement of the movable body 32 is displayed during the execution period of the movable body effect executed when a jackpot is announced, and the enemy Character image 018SGX2 showing character This is a common light emission pattern LP3-2.

By doing this, the operating mode of the movable body 32 and the light emitting pattern of the movable body LED 208 in the movable body performance can be made common and the manufacturing cost can be reduced, while the SP reach performance has different ratios of being controlled to the jackpot state. Since it is possible to increase the number of SP reach effects and draw attention to which SP reach effect will be executed, the game enjoyment can be improved.

In addition, the enemy character X1 displayed in the movable body performance executed in SP reach performance B is displayed in a manner similar to the effect image, so that the relationship between the enemy character and the effect image can be enhanced. , it is possible to enhance the performance effect of the moving body performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the enemy character and uses the enemy character to notify whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled. (For example, SP reach effect D), the movable body effect can be executed during the execution period of SP reach effect B and D (ta3 to ta4 of ta2 to ta5), and the movable body effect can be executed. During the period, in both SP reach effect B and SP reach effect D, the character image 018SGX1 is displayed together with a common effect image related to the movement of the movable body 32 (for example, effect image 018SG250B), and in the case of SP reach effect B. , instead of the post-effect B using the enemy character In this case, post-effect B (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19) using the enemy character X-1 displayed in the SP reach effect is executed.

By doing this, SP reach performance B and SP reach performance D can share the operation mode of the enemy character and the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and reduce manufacturing costs, while also providing a common enemy character X. By displaying -1 with a different effect, it is possible to enhance the relationship between SP reach effects B and D and the movable body effect and between SP reach effects B and D and post effects A and B, thereby improving the effect of the effect.

In more detail, even in the post-production after the jackpot confirmation is announced in the SP reach production, the characters displayed in the SP reach production will be used to notify the result of the re-fluctuation of the decorative symbols and the number of balls scheduled to be rolled out. Therefore, regardless of the type of SP reach effect, notifications such as re-variation results and scheduled number of pitches will be made in common, while display contents will correspond to the type of SP reach effect. It becomes possible to show the post performance as a series of performances.

Furthermore, the performance control CPU 120 can execute a special performance that changes the enemy character Yes, in SP reach effect B, character image 018SGX1Z is displayed in which the defeated enemy character X-1 is hidden due to a fade-out display in the jackpot notification before post effect A (see Figure 13-15 (E2)). In SP reach performance D, in post-performance B, a special image 018SGXZ is displayed in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears into a star after being sent flying (see FIG. 13-19 (G1-5)). By doing this, the timing at which the special performance is performed changes depending on the type of SP reach performance, so the performance effect can be improved.

In this embodiment, as special effects, there are effects such as an effect in which the defeated enemy character X-1 disappears through a fade-out display, and an effect in which the attacked enemy character X-2 disappears after being sent flying and becomes a star. Although the present invention is not limited to this example, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. It may also be an effect displaying an effect image, etc.). In addition, there are various effects that can be used as long as the character does not become invisible but changes in appearance, such as increasing the transmittance, decreasing brightness, or deforming the image. Can be changed.

In addition, if SP reach performance B is executed when the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state, the "jackpot effect" is more advantageous for the player than "jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state). B(6R)" (second advantageous state) is 30%, and if SP reach effect D is executed when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, "jackpot The percentage of the game being controlled to be "Jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is 40%. By doing this, it is possible to draw attention to which of the SP reach effects B and D will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 displays the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1, and determines whether or not the enemy character X-1 and the ally character A-1 will be controlled to a jackpot game state. A first specific effect to be notified (for example, SP reach effect D), an enemy character X-2 different from the enemy character X-1, and an ally character A-1 are displayed, and the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A- are displayed. It is possible to execute a second specific performance (for example, SP reach performance E) that informs whether or not the jackpot game state is controlled using 1, and when the movable body performance is executed in SP reach performance D. , by displaying and operating the enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 displayed in the SP reach effect D, the award is given in the jackpot game state in which it is announced that it will be controlled in the SP reach effect D. It is possible to execute a post-production B that notifies the expected number of pitches to be played, and when a movable body production is executed in the SP reach production E, the enemy character X-2 and the ally character A displayed in the SP reach production E can be executed. By displaying and operating -1, it is possible to execute the post performance B that notifies the expected number of balls to be given in the jackpot game state that is notified that it will be controlled in the SP reach performance E, and at least the teammate The behavior of the character A-1 is common to the post-effect B that corresponds to the SP ready-to-reach effect D and the post-effect B that corresponds to the SP ready-to-reach effect E (see FIGS. 13-18 and 13-19).

By doing this, by using a common ally character in the SP reach performance and the post-production, it is possible to reduce manufacturing costs, and it becomes easier to understand the relationship between the SP reach production and the post-production, so the production effect can also be increased.

In addition, the background image 018SG280 representing the universe is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), so the background image also Since it can be made common, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

In addition, the ally character A-1 is common to the post-effect B of the SP reach effect D and the post-effect B of the SP reach effect E (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), so the special characters are also common. Therefore, manufacturing costs can be further reduced.

In addition, in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect D, an image of enemy character X-1 and ally character A-1 fighting is displayed at the same time, and in the post-effect B corresponding to the SP reach effect E, the enemy character By displaying the images of X-2 and ally character A-1 fighting at the same time (see Figures 13-18 to 13-19), each character is displayed at the same time, giving a better impression of post-production B. It is possible to improve the production effect.

In addition, as a post performance, the performance control CPU 120 performs a first post performance (for example, post performance B) of a performance mode related to the SP reach performance D when a movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance D; When the movable body performance is executed in the reach performance E, the second post-effect (for example, post-effect B) of the performance mode related to the SP reach performance E, and when the movable body performance is executed in the SP reach performance A, The third post-effect (for example, post-effect A) of the performance mode related to SP reach effect A can be executed and the ratio of being controlled to the second advantageous state is SP reach effect D, SP reach effect E, and SP reach effect. It depends on which of the performances A is executed.

In other words, when the SP reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the high base state, "Jackpot C (10R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot B (6R)" (first advantageous state), is determined. The percentage controlled by SP reach effect (state) is 40% when SP reach effect D is executed and 60% when SP reach effect E is executed, and the SP reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern is determined in the low base state. When the player receives a bonus, the percentage of control to "Jackpot B (6R)" (second advantageous state), which is more advantageous to the player than "Jackpot A (6R)" (first advantageous state), is determined by SP reach effect A. 100% if

By doing this, not only will a jackpot be notified by the SP reach effect, but also the rate at which the second advantageous state will be controlled will differ depending on which SP reach effect is executed, so the player The degree of attention can be suitably increased, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in the embodiment, the ally character and the enemy character that were displayed in the SP reach effect D are displayed as the first post effect of the effect mode related to the first specific effect, so that the first post effect is displayed. The production is related to the first specific production, and as a second post production of the production mode related to the second specific production, the friendly characters and enemy characters that were displayed in SP reach production E are displayed, The second post performance is related to the second specific performance, and the ally character and enemy character are not displayed in SP reach performance A and post performance A, thereby illustrating a form in which the third post performance is related to the third specific performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, by displaying the character displayed in the SP reach performance as the third post-production of the production mode related to the third specific production, The three post effects may be related to the third specific effect.

In other words, a post-production related to a specific production is a production that has at least some of the display modes in common with the display mode in the specific production, and the common production mode is that the character is displayed or the character is not displayed. The character types displayed in the specific performance and the subsequent performance may be different as long as they are the same. Furthermore, there may be four or more types of specific effects and post effects.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the first specific performance and the second specific performance can be executed in a low base state, and the third specific performance can be executed in a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance may all be performances that can be executed in a low base state, or performances that can all be performed in a high base state, but are not limited to this. In other words, the first specific performance, the second specific performance, and the third specific performance may be any performance that can be determined regardless of the game state.

Also, as a third specific performance, it is possible to perform SP reach performance F (for example, a battle performance with enemy character X-3 different from enemy characters X-1 and X-2) performed in a high base state. In this case, the ratio controlled to jackpot C (10R) may be SP reach effect F (50%)>SP reach effect E (35%)>SP reach effect D (15%). Note that the post performance C (third post performance) performed when a jackpot is announced in the SP reach performance F may have a longer performance period than the post performance A and B.

In addition, in the SP reach effect F, for example, the light emission pattern of the movable body effect shown in FIG. 13-6 (B) is the light emission pattern LP3-2 that is common to the SP reach effects A to E, and The sound pattern of the movable body performance shown in (C) is preferably the same sound pattern BP0-1 to BP0-3 as the SP reach performances A to E.

Further, in the embodiment, the second advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is, for example, an advantageous state in which the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, the expected number of balls to be released is A form that applies an advantageous state in which the control state after the jackpot game state is more advantageous than the first advantageous state (for example, jackpot B or jackpot C that is controlled to a variable probability state after the end of the jackpot). Although exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second advantageous state refers to a control period for the number of balls thrown, the number of game rounds, the probability variable state, the time saving state, and the small winning state, compared to the first advantageous state. It may also include a state where the falling rate of probability fluctuation is advantageous. Further, the jackpot game state or the performance mode after the end of the jackpot game state may be an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, when applying the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature section 018SG to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the feature sections 069G and 099G, for example, SP reach effect A in the feature section 018SG is changed to SP reach effect A and B of the feature sections 069G and 099G. Apply SP reach effects B and C in feature parts 018SG to SP reach C in feature parts 069G and 099G, and apply SP reach effects D and E in feature parts 018SG to SP reach D in feature parts 069G and 099G. Is possible.

(Explanation regarding transformation and application of characteristic part 018SG)
In the feature section 018SG, a form in which a jackpot gaming state is applied as an advantageous state advantageous to the player is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a small winning gaming state, a time saving state (high base state) , a variable probability state, etc. may also be applied.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, although the movable body 32 is applied as an example of the movable body, the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the movable body 32 provided on the game board are used. Alternatively, a movable body provided in the gaming machine frame 3 may be applied.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, as specific performances that notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in an advantageous state, a form is illustrated in which SP reach performances A to E that notify whether or not the game is controlled to be in a jackpot gaming state are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and normal reach effects, post effects, etc. may be applied.

Furthermore, in the feature section 018SG, the enemy characters X-1 and X-2 that confront the friendly characters A-1 and A-2 are used as specific characters and special characters, but the present invention applies to this. The present invention is not limited to this, and may be applicable to enemy characters other than those mentioned above, other characters that do not confront ally characters, or the like. Alternatively, it may be a character made of a live-action image of a person.

Further, in the feature section 018SG, a mode is illustrated in which ally characters A-1 and A-2 confronting enemy characters X-1 and X-2 are applied as special characters, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, it may be possible to apply friendly characters other than those mentioned above or other characters that do not confront enemy characters. Alternatively, it may be a character made of a live-action image of a person.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, as a specific effect in which characters are displayed, a form in which SP reach effects A to E in which a special character (ally character) faces off against a specific character or a special character (enemy character) is applied is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the special character, specific character, and special character may be a plurality of friendly characters or enemy characters that fight together without confronting each other, or a plurality of characters that do not confront each other. good.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, a mode is illustrated in which a movable body effect is applied as a special effect in which the movable body is operated and the light emitting body is emitted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other than the movable body 32 An effect that moves the movable body may be applied. Further, the operation mode of the movable body 32 can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the execution timing of the movable body performance is before the notification of jackpot confirmation in the latter stages of SP reach performances A to E, but it can be changed to various times such as the middle stage of SP reach performances A to E. It is. Furthermore, although the movable object performance can be started in response to the player's operation of the push button 31B, it may be started at a predetermined timing regardless of the operation.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, in the movable body performance, the movable body LED 208 and the frame LEDs 9L1 to 9L12 and 9R1 to 9R12 emit light, a sound effect is output, and the push button 31B vibrates in accordance with the operation of the movable body 32. Although the form is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be possible to perform a light guide plate light emission effect using a light guide plate device according to the operation of the movable body 32. In this case, it is preferable that the light emitting pattern of the light guide plate device be the same for the SP reach effects A to E, similar to the light emitting pattern of the LED.

Further, in the characteristic section 018SG, an example is shown in which the effect image 018SG250B representing "impact" is applied as an effect image related to the operation of the movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, , may be an effect image in a mode (for example, a mode representing an impact) related to the operation mode (for example, vibration) of the movable body 32, or an effect image in a mode that emphasizes the vibrating movable body 32, etc. It may be.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, as a post performance performed after the movable body performance as a special performance, a post performance that executes a re-variable display of the fixed decorative pattern temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. An example of a form in which production A is applied and post-production B that notifies the expected number of pitches to be given in a jackpot game state that is notified using friendly characters and enemy characters that appeared in the SP reach production. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to the above-mentioned post-performance as long as it is a performance that is executed after the special performance, for example, a performance during a jackpot that is performed in a jackpot game state. It may also be possible to apply a small win performance that is executed in a small win game state.

Specifically, in the embodiment described above, before the variable display ends, post performance B is executed to notify the expected number of balls to be given in the announced jackpot game state, but in the jackpot game state During the fanfare period from the start of the game to the start of the round game, or during the round interval between game rounds, it is possible to perform a post-production that announces the expected number of balls to be awarded in the announced jackpot game state. You can also use it as

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, in the post performance B, the magnitude of the gaming value given in the jackpot gaming state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach effects D and E is specified as the gaming value information that can specify the size of the gaming value. Although an example is shown in which the expected number of pitches to be given is notified in a specifiable manner, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of game rounds or the like may be notified.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, in the post-production B, a form was exemplified in which the expected number of balls to be played is notified in the jackpot game state that is notified to be controlled by the SP reach productions D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this, for example, if the jackpot is hit a predetermined number of times (for example, twice) or more in a row, the first The total number of balls played from the jackpot game state to the present time may be reported. Furthermore, when adding up in the scheduled pitch addition part in post-production B, or when notifying the planned number of pitches in the scheduled pitch notification part, the total number of pitches to be pitched is a predetermined number (for example, 2500 balls, 5000 pitches, etc.). It may be possible to notify that the total number of pitches has exceeded a predetermined number when the total number of pitches has exceeded a predetermined number.

In addition, in the feature section 018SG, while the types of opposing ally characters and enemy characters are different in SP reach performances A to E, the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body production and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are common. Although a certain form has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this, but includes background images in SP reach effects A to E, types and execution ratios of various preview effects such as chance up, battle confrontation period, and character movement modes. , display mode, etc. may be different depending on the variable display result, and even in this case, it is preferable that the operation mode of the movable body 32 in the movable body performance and the display mode of the effect image 018SG250B are the same.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, the execution period of the scheduled ball addition part and the scheduled ball notification part in the post performance B is the same for SP reach effects D and E, but the present invention is not limited to this. The execution period of the scheduled pitch addition part and the scheduled pitch notification part may be varied depending on the type of jackpot, that is, the size of the scheduled pitch count, but is not limited to this.

In addition, in the characteristic part 018SG, SP reach effects A to C can be executed in a low base state, and SP reach effects D and E can be executed in a high base state, but the present invention is limited to this. Instead, the above-described various specific performances (SP reach performances) may all be performances that can be executed in a low base state, or can be performances that can all be executed in a high base state. In other words, it may be possible to execute it in any type of gaming state.

Although the characteristic parts 069SG, 099SG, and 018SG in the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and changes may be made without departing from the gist of the present invention. Even if there is an addition, it is included in the present invention.

Further, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is illustrated as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a predetermined number of game balls is The loaned balls that are recirculated inside the machine and are lent out in response to a player's lending request and the number of prize balls given in response to winnings are added up, while the number of game balls used in the game is counted. The present invention can also be applied to a so-called enclosed game machine in which the value is subtracted and stored. In these enclosed gaming machines, scores and points are awarded to the player instead of game balls, so these awarded scores and points correspond to the gaming value.

Furthermore, in the above embodiment, a spherical game ball (pachinko ball) is used as an example of the game medium, but the game medium is not limited to a spherical game medium, and for example, non-spherical game balls such as medals, It may be a medium.

Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, a pachinko game machine is applied as an example of a game machine, but a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using, for example, a game value. At the same time, one game ends when a variable display result is derived to a variable display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols, each of which can be identified. It is also applicable to slot machines that allow winnings to occur.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine, a slot machine, etc. in which game media are enclosed and points are awarded based on the occurrence of winnings. Furthermore, the gaming machine that allows games may be any machine that allows at least playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, but may be general gaming machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 100 Game control microcomputer 120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that performs a variable display based on the establishment of a starting condition and can be controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
a state control means capable of controlling a non-special state and a special state in which the starting condition is more likely to be satisfied than the non-special state;
determining means capable of determining control to the advantageous state;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance including a suggestive performance that suggests that the control is in the advantageous state;
Equipped with
Including a specific variable display pattern in which a specific reach effect is executed after the variable display mode becomes a reach mode,
The special state includes a first special state that is controlled when the advantageous state controlled from the non-special state ends, and a second special state that is controlled when variable display is performed a predetermined number of times . including ;
The performance execution means, based on the determination result of the determination means, a first suggestion performance and a second suggestion performance that has a higher rate of being controlled to the advantageous state than when the first suggestion performance is executed. The plurality of types of suggestion effects including the above can be executed before the variable display mode becomes the reach mode,
The execution rate of the suggestive effect per one variable display in the second special state is lower than the execution rate of the suggestive effect per one variable display in the first special state,
The effect executing means is configured to perform a specific effect to notify that the variable display will be controlled to the advantageous state when it has been determined by the determining means to be controlled to the advantageous state, and a specific effect that is executed after the specific effect. It is possible to carry out a post performance that notifies gaming value information that can specify the magnitude of gaming value given in an advantageous state,
The presentation mode of the post-previous presentation is common between the case where the post-previous presentation is performed in the first special state and the case where the post-previous presentation is performed in the second special state.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images